Home

"user manual"

1. GOT F900 b RS 422 cable a Q Series PLC Q computer link A B gt a gt B lt x To RS 422 To power supply and switches A C a gt m gt Handy GOT x 6 RS 422 E lt To RS 422 00005 0 S d To power supply and eer switches E m gt Use the RS 422 B 5 lt lt port on the rear ES face To RS 422 power supply and operation switches Total extension distance 11 5m 37 9 or less Connection of two or more GOT units a Q Series PLC b RS 422 cable Remarks A F9GT HCAB LILIM Two piece terminal block CH2 B Prepared by the user Prepared by the user QJ71C24 D F9GT HCNB E F9GT HCAB1 LILIM Applicable Q Series PLC products in the column a are computer link interface A B C D E Make sure that the total cable extension distance A B or E is 11 a MITSUBISHI units equipped with built in RS 422 37 9 or less GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11
2. No Model name Application Connection diagram Application RS 422 To F9GT HCAB3 150 connection The connector on the 1 13 n E leader side of the Handy o Loc a cM Dedicated connector GOT is dedicated and y 7 connection cannot be prepared by e 9 the user 14 25 25 pin D Sub male RS 422 connection isadercide of the Hand b F9GT HCAB1 3M Dedicated connector OT is dedicated and y Loose wires F9GT HCAB1 10M RS 232C on Handy GOT side tb db no connector fan cannot be prepared by the user F9GT HCAB LILIM RS 422 Drain Ta connection m FG Hom D grounding BK 2 gt RXD RDA W 3 RXD RDB Y 6 gt TXD SDA BR 7 TXD SDB Microcomputer O 10 gt gt SG GND aide Signal name on microcomputer side TocableFoGT PL 2 gt DC24VG General purpose or F9GT PK 13 gt DC24VG equipment Faft SW Prepared by the user eg p common Wire the power Handy GOT side SB t gt SW1 supply the BK W 16 SW2 operation R W 17 gt SW3 switches and GR W 18 gt SWA js emergency el gt ES 22 gt ES1 BL W 24 gt DC24V GY W 25 lt DC24V J 1 0 F9GT HCAB LILIM A d qma FG class D grounding wire 1 p FG de C gt SD TXD
3. 1 Power terminals Supply the power to the GOT F900 and perform the grounding excluding the F9220GOT K 2 Battery Stores the sampling data the alarm history and the current time The screen data is stored in the built in flash memory and kept stored even if the life of the battery is expired HERREN F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT Battery model name FX2NC 32BL PM 20BL Extension interface Connects an optional extension equipment This interface is used to connect the screen data transfer adapter F9GT 40UMB and write the screen data stored in the EPROM at high speed F940GOT This interface is used to connect the screen data transfer adapter F9GT 40FMB and transfer the screen data stored in the FLASH memory at high speed F940GOT F940WGOT CN OP selector switch Not used Set it to OP usually 3 4 MITSUBISHI 4 4 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of F920GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 4 2 3 Function of Ports E Connect a PLC unit and peripheral equipment to the following ports of the GOT F920GOT K F930GOT F940GOT F940WGOT D 4 3 E lal 5 1 PLC port RS 422 9 pin D Sub female J Connect here a PLC
4. GOT F900 b RS 232C cable a SYSMAC C Series Host link A B m gt gt Handy GOT 7 RS 232C y T 5 To power supply TE UT and operation C switches A ZB lt Use the RS 232C ES S port on the rear L To RS 232C face power supply and operation switches Total extension distance 6m 19 8 or less a SYSMAC C Series b RS 232C cable Remarks C200H LK201 V1 25 pin D Sub A F GT HCAB 3M CQM1 equipped with built in RS 232C port B Prepared by the user CS1G H CPU V1 ith built i C F9GT HCAB1 3M CPU unit equipped with built in RS 232C port 9 pin D Sub C CS1W SCB41 CS1W SCB21 CS1W SCU21 Applicable SYSMAC C Series products in the column a are host link units equipped with built in RS 232C interface Make sure that the total cable extension distance A B or C is 6 m or less Serial communication unit Serial communication unit Serial communication unit a MITSUBISHI 15 6 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 15 3 15 3 1 15 3 2 Setting in CQM1 C200H Host Link Unit While referring to the setting examples in the SYSMAC C Series host link unit set the transmission specifications Communication
5. b Option ri GESEENESEENSS ASE Fatocor c RS 422 cable lt gt twisted pair cable kc FR A5NR P a MITSUBISHI 13 2 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 o b When two or more inverters are connected 599 UP to 10 inverters can be connected through RS 422 p GOT F900 Station number O Station number 1 Station number 9 o o S82 FE 8x8 EMEN I e The FR ASNR T canbe used PU port PU port PU port in the A500 5 Distributor Sees Ld 0 ee o Terminal Prepared by the user resistor ous Cable 10BASE T twisted pair cable for the FR A5NR For connection between the GOT F900 and the distributor refer to a on the previous page 5 For connection between the distributors prepare connectors and cables while referring to section 13 8 later Do not use the commercial straight connection type Ethernet 10 cable eos Category or 5 If this cable is used inverters will have a s
6. GOT F900 b RS 232C cable a FLEX PC N Series link unit X A B gt Handy GOT iH RS 232C 6 0000 To power supply ums udi and operation C switches A 6 gt gt lt i B To RS 232C power supply and operation switches Total extension distance 6m 19 8 or less a FLEX PC N Series b RS 232C cable Remarks NB RS1 AC A F9GT HCAB OOM NB RS1 DC Prepared by the user 25 pin D Sub NJ RS2 C F9GT HCAB1 OOM NS RS1 Applicable FLEX PC Series products in the column a are link units equipped with built in RS 232C interface Make sure that the total cable extension distance A B or C is 6m 19 8 or less MITSUBISHI 16 4 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Manufactured by Fuji Electric 16 o 16 3 Setting in Link Unit ES cog When connecting the link unit the switches in the link unit should be set as described below Sus 16 3 1 Communication Setting Specifications This section explains the setting in the link unit c D 1 Setting the mode setting switch link connection EE Set the mode so that the COM port of the link unit connected to the GOT F900 is the asynchronous TA system and no protocol In the NJ CPU B16 t
7. a QnA Series PLC Q computer link A B A B a m i To power supply and operation C eden E Handy GOT RS 232C i _ Es T lt o To RS 232C power supply and operation switches Total extension distance 6m 19 8 or less Use the RS 232C Connection of two or more GOT units port on the rear face a Q Series PLC b RS 232C cable pin D A F9GT HCAB 3M LENIN B Prepared by the user QJ71C24 R2 1 3 CH1 2 Inthe C F9GT HCAB1 3M shown in the column b RS 232C cable the end on the PLC side Is loose wires Make sure that the total cable extension distance A B or C is 6 m or less a MITSUBISHI GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 11 3 Setting in Q Serial Communication Unit In Q computer link connection the switches in the serial communication unit should be set as described below When setting the switches for communication with the GOT F900 use the GX Developer 11 3 1 Communication Setting Specifications This section explains the communication specifications 1 Setting the communication protocol Set the communication protocol so that the COM port of the serial commun
8. o 2 Cable for the F943 Handy GOT and the FP Series PLC manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works 599 When using the Handy RH model refer to the cable diagrams below for the RS 422 RS 232C 20 g connector but not the wiring for the power supply the operation switches and the emergency stop 8 8 switch because it is different For details refer to Chapter 5 C 3 Female type Male type connector figure shows the engagement face Application Connection diagram Application 5 of OQ 5 0 RS 422 To F9GT HCAB3 150 EO connection The connector on the 1 13 H S leader side of the Handy o Loc a cM Dedicated connector GOT is dedicated and y 7 connection cannot be prepared by 9 H the user 14 25 5 25 pin D Sub male CEN 50 5 RS 422 The connector on the eg E connection leader side of the Handy On 2 b F9GT HCAB1 3M Dedicated connector is dedicated and Loose wires OLS FOGT HCAB1 10M RS 232C on Handy GOT side cannot be prepared by no connector connection the user o RS 232C St connection Drain Class grounaing D wire h r 8 a 1 12 4 Sog R 4 2 652 2 3 To cable W 3 id 9 O 10 5b 5 pin MINI DIN male T FOGT HCABion 4 TP
9. NO Model name Application Connection diagram Application RS 422 To F9GT HCAB3 150 connection The connector on the 1 13 leader side of the Handy o apre E meos Dougie coner Gori dedicated and y connection cannot be prepared by 9 the user 14 25 25 pin D Sub male RS 422 The connector on the connection leader side of the Handy b F9GT HCAB1 3M Dedicated connector is dedicated and Loose wires F9GT HCAB1 10M Handy GOT side os prepared by no connector connection y cic HCAB LILIM RS 422 ain Wu MEN D grounding connection 2 gt RXD RDA 00405 Tempa gt v Egi f block F9GT HCAB or x lt PLC side BR 7 gt TXD SDB F9GT HCAB1 on 0 1 3 SG GND i Signal name on link Handy GOT side PL 12 gt DC24VG C FLEX PC N Series E m gt DC24VG Prepared by the user a n common Wire the power gt Swi supply the BK W 16 gt SW2 operation R W 17 lt lt gt SW3 switches and GR W 18 gt SWA AU BR W 21 gt ES Swick YW 22 gt ES1 BL W 24 gt DC24V GY W 25 gt DC24V J FoGT HCAB1 HIDM F9GT HCAB LILIM HS 232C Drain dis D grounding connection 1 M E PLC side To cable E 2 a 1 13 O F9GT HCAB or BR 7 5 1 b FOGT HCAB1 on CRG E 14 25 Handy GOT side 3 20 2
10. o 14 5 Communication Command 599 o This section explains commands used in communication Sus 14 5 1 Outline of Communication Procedure 1 Command transmission outline o Communication between the GOT F900 units and the microcomputer is executed in the procedure 9 which the microcomputer sends a command and a GOT F900 unit returns a response to it While a FE GOT F900 unit is sending a response to the microcomputer any GOT F900 unit cannot receive 8 new command from the microcomputer Microcomputer 5 Command Command Response Command S to 1st GO to 2nd GO to 3rd GO Response 50 1st GOT Response TE Command Command Response OK to 2nd GOT A to 3rd GOT 2nd GOT oe Command to 3rd GOT Response is 3rd GOT 98 TE If an error occurs the GOT F900 returns the NAK code as the response The contents of the error 922e can be seen when the special memory is read 2 Outline of interrupt 5 As an exception of the communication procedure described above when a certain event occurs in chee itself or receiving an interrupt code from another GOT unit the GOT unit immediately sends the 3 interrupt code to the microcomputer S gt 5 However while sending a response to the microcomputer the GOT unit waits until sending is finished then sends the interrupt code after that An interrupt code may be sent while
11. Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC amp Q UE 24V DC Class D Glass D _ E 24V DC el 24 DU Class D _ a Class D _ power grounding supply grounding Amd grounding supply grounding supply eo ur Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 4 15 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of F920GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 a Example when the power is supplied from the PLC Connect the power terminal of the F9830GOT F930GOT K F940GOT to the 24V DC service power supply of the PLC or extension unit 2A Class D grounding 2av ov 15 5 x1 x2 x 24V E930GOT REC F930GOT K F940GOT b Example when the power is supplied from the external power supply Connect the power terminal of the F930GOT F930GOT K F940 W GOT to the 24V
12. Station Number Setting set the station number to 00 in every GOT F900 unit In the case of microcomputer connection however set a value other than 00 In connection of two or more GOT units from the microcomputer the value set to the station number can be specified by the communication commands for identification If the station number is set to 00 the function to connect two or more GOT units is disabled and communication is executed using the conventional communication commands Connection Gonnecied PLC Staionnumber Remarks LLL 9 0 E Series 8 ee 1 In the case of microcomputer connection set the station number in the range from 01 to 31 while making sure that a same value is not assigned to two or more GOT F900 units If the station number is set to 00 the microcomputer and the GOT F900 are connected on the 1 1 basis and the function to connect two or more GOT units is disabled a MITSUBISHI 7 11 Introduction Outline Specifications installation and Wiring of F940GOT installation and Wiring of Handy GOT c O Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIE
13. 2 Internal wiring of switches ror f f oco Each switch on the previous page is wired inside the Handy GOT as shown below E The connectors CN1 to CN5 except CN3 are connected to the PLC via an external cable F9GT RHCAB LIM Di isplay circuit CN3 supply Power LCD panel pm a Sa E DC24G supply gt ae circuit 255 Touch switch circuit Odi RS 422 or RS 232C CN2 for externally P connected 5 equipment CPU communication circuit E T CN2 lt lt un SW1 x Serial 250 switches CPU memory communication G MM NN if unit SEG D SW4 Grip switch 5 SW COM j 5 Indicator LEDs c Grip switch DSW1 E for operation soa E switches 20 9 X DSW2 la ou o PH L1 SW1 ozo CN5 Emergency 1 1 7 stop switch ES1 2 z 5 L2 SW2 7 7 e ES1 1 S 135 549 ES1 2 Za oga Din CN6 2071 L4 SW4 EO S Keylock KSsw 2 L5 SEA switch 7 GRIP SW KSW C KSW 1 S EE s lt 500 e TE C eo mm SEH MITSUBISHI 5 25 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 5 8 Wiring for 24V DC Power Supply and Class Grounding The power is supplied from the external power supply to the Handy GOT The current consumption is 300mA at 24V DC Example when the power is supplied from the
14. the personal computer 1234 RS 232C 5 5 T UE 295 E ABC 255 888 F943 Handy GOT Personal computer Screen creation Connection when screen data transfer is executed while a personal computer is connected to the PLC port RS connected to the PLC port RS 232C of the F943 Handy GOT This function is 5 available only in the Handy GOT whose OS version is 6 00 or later 550 DE 55 Sequence Program E d Oro 3 GOT o Personal computer sequence programming software Refer to 6 2 2 r X0 X Y10 ox BEN X3 a mnm ERR K5 022 eo a P E Sut E Ur uu i M200 Y2 o De RS 232C i COH PLC 900 Personal computer Sequence program Connection when sequence program transfer and monitoring are executed through the two port 549 interface built in the GOT F900 between the PLC and the personal computer Such operations can gu be performed while manipulating and displaying screens in the GOT F900 Eu SE 599 600 du Is OSH MITSUBISHI 6 1 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Peripheral Equipment 6 4 GOT FX
15. Mode selector switches TE Transmission HUE When the transmission specifications setting EB speed is set to 19 200 switches bps for CH1 CH2 Important Point set the mode selector switch for the unused channel to any value other than 0 interlocking operation b When the A1SJQC24 N is connected A1sJ71QC24 RUN ERR C R W NEU SD W SI i SPLAY STS ERR O o 56 a Z xt x56 ON NO io yz 0 490 CH1 CH2 Mode selector switche for CH2 Transmission specifications setting ranami an switches speed is set to for CH2 19 200 bps When the a MITSUBISHI Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 Station number setting switches 10 10 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 E 2 RS 232C connection a When the AJ71QC24 R2 is connected E 3 2 Mode selector switches o for CH1 Transmission When t
16. o 11 2 8 Configuration for Q Computer Link Connection RS 232C 599 GOT F900 and the serial communication unit be connected the 1 1 basis XE As many GOT F900 units as the number of serial communication units connected to the Q Series PLC 9 9 can be connected 1 In the case of F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT 5 o Ons GOT F900 a Q Series PLC 92 computer link coz b RS 232C cable F930GOT o 6 1 E FE SEE Connection of two or more GOT units F940GOT EE i 5 o U gt c 652 a Q Series PLC b RS 232C cable Make sure the total cable 9 pin D Sub Prepared by the user extension distance is 15m CH1 on 49 3 or less Make sure the total cable Prepared by the user extension distance is 15m 49 3 or less AJ71QC24 Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC 9 pin D Sub CH1 or CH2 AJ71QC24 R2 Applicable Q Series PLC products in the column a are computer link units equipped with built in RS 232C interface Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 11 7 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 2 F943 Handy GOT GOT F900 b RS 232C cable
17. 2 l n a Microcomputer b RS 422 cable Remarks CPU direct connection Prepared by the user EE Uses Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 14 3 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 2 F940 Handy GOT GOT F900 b RS 422 cable a Microcomputer A B CPU direct A i connection gt po To power supply and operation A C switches Handy GOT lt gt gt 5 232 ES ie gt E 2 Nee PE d o EE To power supply and operation switches Use the RS 422 4 port on the rear ES face lt gt To RS 422 power supply and operation switches Total extension distance 11 5m 37 9 or less Connection of two or more GOT units n 1 m EE gt gt ER ZEN a Microcomput
18. gt lt gt To FX FX1 FX2Cc A i QnA Series PLC Connect the cable to the port inside the operation switches rear cover For the details refer to 5 6 2 For the details refer to 5 6 2 a d gt lt gt 4 To computer link unit microcomputer board or _ another company s PLC To power supply and operation switches p For the details refer to 5 4 3 When connecting via RS 232C ports make sure that the distance between the Handy GOT and PLC is 11 5m 37 9 or less F9GT RHCAB 3M 3m 9 10 a External cable one side 37 pin D Sub F9GT RHCAB 6M 6m 19 8 F9GT RHCAB 10M 10m 32 10 Relay cable for PLC connection 44 Relay cable for PLC connection E PLC side 25 pin D Sub F9GT RHCAB3 150 1 5m 4 11 d Relay cable for PLC connection Prepared by user a MITSUBISHI 5 12 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 2 F943 Handy GOT E 7 For the details refer to 5 6 2 3
19. U yi 5 See eg d To power supply and operation switches Use the RS 422 gt port on the rear EE face COEM 6 lt ES RS 422 power supply and operation switches Total extension distance 11 5m 37 9 or less Connection of two or more GOT units a A Series PLC b RS 422 cable Remarks A F9GT HCAB OOM B F GT HCAB3 150 C FX 40DU CAB 25 pin D Sub D F GT HCNB E F GT HCAB1 O00M ACPU direct connection Make sure that the total cable extension distance A B or E is 11 5m 37 9 or less a MITSUBISHI 9 4 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 9 2 2 Configuration for A Computer Link Connection RS 422 The GOT F900 and the computer link unit can be connected on the 1 1 basis As many GOT F900 units as the number of computer link units connected to the A Series PLC can be connected Because the programming port of the PLC is not occupied peripheral programming equipment dedicated equipment for PLC can be connected for monitoring and transfer of sequence programs 1 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT GOT F900 a A
20. lt gt Connected _ To power supply and operation switches to external A name label is provided at end of each cable untied wire To PLC pin D t 25 pin D Sub Me 25 pin D Sub male connector female I lt gt connector panel face Accessories For FG Class D grounding mounting type Jack socket Nut 2 each 3 F9GT HCAB5 150 relay cable for Q Series PLC 1 5m 4 11 Connected To power supply and operation switches to external A name label is provided at end of each cable untied wire To PLC ZONE 6 pin MINI DIN connector pin Uu 1 female lt gt ences Accecories For FG Class D grounding i Jack socket mounting type ET a MITSUBISHI 5 18 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 Handy GOT RH model E 3 1 F9GT RHCAB2 150 relay cable for FX Series FXo FXos FX1s FXoN FX1N FX2N FX2NC PLC 1 5m 4 11 p To power supply and operation switches name label is provided at end of each Connected untied wire To PLC cable 8 pin MINI DIN connector E 0 5m 1 8 For FG Class D grounding 37 pin D Sub female connector Accessories panel face Jack socket 3 mounting type each 9 Nut o o 2 F9GT RHCAB3 150 relay cable for FX FX1 FX2 FX2c A QnA Series PLC 1 5m 4 11
21. Kcd E E Bed E E EX Ell Ei ES Rl ES EN 1 ES ad Ea Ed EX Er us pe z Multi speed setting Speed 15 Multi speed setting speed 15 Multi speed setting speed 15 P 0 me memeesp Rea constant 66 Sipconpensatontne constant Sub functions 247 Constant output region slip compensation selection 49 Motor primary resistance Constant output region slip compensation selection Automatic torque boost selection Motor capacity Motor primary resistance Stop selection function 250 Stop selection 251 Output phase failure protection selection 251 Output phase failure protection selection 250 Stop selection Gc 5 9 253 Override gain ER E pe a MITSUBISHI 13 22 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 o 599 soa LEGEN ON 20 g c Power failure stop selection 8s 8 Subtracted frequency at deceleration start o o 2 263 Subtraction starting frequency 2 9 264 Power failure deceleration time 1 265 Power failure deceleration time 2 S E o m 266 Power failure deceleration time switch of 5 over frequency c Pr OX O 270 Stop on contact load torque high speed frequency control selection Function selection
22. O A RS 422 RS 435 14_ Transmission specifications setting switches Connection of Peripheral Equipment When the cover is open Connection of Two or More GOT Units FX Series PLC m o O MELSEC F Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC a MITSUBISHI 9 13 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 9 3 4 Used Connectors and Connector Covers 1 Connectors on the GOT side For the shape of the connector of the cable on the GOT side excluding the Handy GOT refer to chapter 4 For the shape of the connector of the cable dedicated to the Handy GOT refer to chapter 5 2 Connector on the computer link unit side The computer link unit described in this manual is equipped with the RS 232C port having the following number of pins The RS 422 port is provided in a terminal block form Computer link unit model name 23526 Model name cece connector shape with AJ71UC24 25 pin female 17L 10250 27 D9AC manufactured by DDK Screw tightening type A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71C24 R2 9 pin female A1SCPUG24 R2 9 pin anale 17L 1 0090 27 D9AC m anufactured by DDK Screw tightening type A2CCPUC24 9 pin female A connector to be used for the po
23. Q gt EST Each Y W 22 gt ES1 BL W 24 gt DC24V4 GY W 25 gt DC24V J F9GT HCAB1 OOM RS 232C ble HCAB OOM nnecti Drain FG class D grounding connection wie et CD DCD R 4 RD RXD A QnA link oe BK 2 SD TXD Computer link eae er Oh SEND iit side FOGT HCAB1 GR 5 PLC side If proper monitoring is not on Handy GOT RS RTS 1 5 executed due to external noise side BR 7 CS CTS 9 v when connecting A1SJ71QC24 Signal name of Q computor link 6 9 R2 connect all signals in pair PL 12 DOANG y Gree g with SG except SG and FG PK 13 gt DC24VG ie OUR tia FGR 14 common s E NE e SD RD BK W 16 lt gt SW2 operation R W 17 gt SW3 switches and EAE xd GR W 18 gt SWA DE emergency EES switch 1 1 p die BLIW 24 lt gt DC24V4 GY W 25 gt DC24V J A FoGT HCABI HIEM s MITSUBISHI 10 22 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 10 7 Troubleshooting 2 3 For reference this section summarizes frequently asked questions about connection of the GOT F900 E to the QnA Series PLC The slightly different messages may be displayed on the F920GOT K 1 GOT F900 Contents of troubt m ontents of trouble eck points and countermeasures BM 2420 esc RRO2ON M The power of the QnA Series PLC is turned off COMMUNICATION Cause a
24. 23 10 23 3 1 Error Messages During Screen Operation 23 12 a MITSUBISHI xiv GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Introduction 1 1 Introduction Introduction We appreciate it very much that you have purchased Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal Please read thoroughly this manual to understand sufficiently and use correctly the functions and the performance of the graphic operations terminal Please make sure that this manual is delivered to the end user 1 1 Rank and Use Method of This Manual The following manuals are offered for the GOT F900 Series Each manual is classified in accordance with the purpose Read a manual suitable to your purpose then understand handling the operations and the function of the GOT and the screen creation software GT Designer SWLID5C GOTR PACKE or FX PCS DU WIN E 5 N i GOT Screen creation software o INSTALLATION MANUAL in o included with main unit gt included with unit q OPERATION 7 C ye LD P BES send separatel Included with uni S 9 M F AEN Y 5 ON a Connected equipment N 255 GOT F900 SERIES HARDWARE abla BES MANUAL 5 PLC by Mitsubishi CONNECTION PLC by another company this manual Microcomputer b
25. ON1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Connection of FP Series PLC data length 0 7 bits 1 8 bits COM2 communication speed 00 Modem 9600 bps 10 19200 bps 01 9600 bps 11 4800 bps 5 6 data length 0 7 bits 1 8 bits Sg COM1 communication speed EO 00 Undefined 9600 bps set at shipment from factory 10 19200 bps 01 9600 bps 11 4800 bps Reserved for system Leave it to ON as set at shipment from factory R gos TE Szi Onn Aa MITSUBISHI 18 7 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FP Series PLC Manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works 18 18 4 18 4 1 18 4 2 18 4 3 Cautions on Use of FP Series When using the GOT F900 connected to the FP Series PLC observe the following caution on use Device specification Bit devices cannot be specified as word devices Word devices cannot be specified as bit devices Pulse relays P and index registers IX IY 1 are not available Only devices described in section 3 3 can be specified Devices which can be monitored e Data register DTO to DT16383 is available in the GOT F900 opecial data registers DT9000 to DT9255 within this range can be monitored In some FP Series models however DT9000 to DT90255 cannot be monitored For the details refer to the specifications described in the manual of the FP Series CPU e As to file registers only the bank 0 can be monitored e
26. 6 10 a MITSUBISHI vii GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Contents 5 5 Gable BD Fe 6 2 6 12 6 5 1 Cable for Personal COmpllter no ut eee ee 6 12 66 HROUDICSIIOOIIAG E 6 13 7 Connection of Two or GOT 7 1 PA SY SICMG OMGIIOM 7 1 7 2 Connection Configuration for Two or More GOT 7 2 7 2 4 Configuration When First GOT Unit is Connected through RS 422 7 2 7 2 2 When First GOT Unit is Connected through 232 7 4 7 2 3 When Connection is Changed from RS 422 to 232 7 5 7 3 in GONMMGQUIATION 7 6 Col Connection Meme ETE 7 6 7 3 2 Communication Port Number 7 7 7 3 3 Connection Concept in Each Model 7 7 7 4 Connection of Four or More Display 7 8 7 5 Cautions on Connecting Two or More GOT 7 9 7 5 1 Power ON SQQueNCE cccccsececcccessececceeeeeceeaaeeceeeceueeeeseaecesseaeeeeessaeeeeesegeeees
27. The F920GOT K can be used only in the FXCPU direct connection 1 Applicable PLC Transferred data type Applicable PLC F920GOT K FXCPU direct connection RS 422 connection only Sequence program Otbertban FXCPU direct connection ACPU direct connection transfer F920GOT K QnACPU direct connection QCPU direct connection Q computer link connection QnA computer link connection 2 Data transfer cable Personal computer a RS 232C cable Port shape FX 232CAB 1 PC AT compatible machine DOS V D Sub 9 pin female The screen data and sequence program can be transferred using a same cable 6 4 a MITSUBISHI GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Peripheral Equipment 6 6 2 3 Cable Connection Procedure E This section explains the procedure to connect the GOT and a personal computer with a cable 1 Connecting the cable to the personal computer Connect one side of the data transfer cable to the RS 232C interface port of the personal computer Select a proper data transfer cable in accordance with the port shape of the personal computer 2 Connecting the cable to the o The port used varies depending on the GOT model as follows E 1 F9220GOT K Connect the other side of the data transfer cable to the RS 232C port located in the right position seen from the rear face of t
28. 15 3 15 2 2 Configuration for SYSMAC C Host Link Connection RS 2320 15 5 15 3 Setting in CQM1 C200H Host Link 15 7 15 3 1 Communication Setting Specifications 15 7 15 3 2 Seting Examples in Host Link Units ER Co dun ca eva eiae Do be 15 7 15 4 Setting in CS1 Serial Communication Unit eee eee 15 10 15 4 1 Communication Setting 15 10 15 4 2 Setting Examples e cR ETE vue Lu ind 15 11 15 5 Caution on Use of SYSMAGC C Series 15 13 15 5 1 Modes in the SYSMAC C Series 15 13 15 5 2 Forced ON OFF on the device monitor screen of the GOT F900 15 13 15 9 9 1650 HC SK aO eek EE 15 13 15 6 Setting of Connected Equipment for 15 14 15 2 GADDIS DIE lil D Paid o ea eens Sees 15 18 1o98 POU DIESHOOUNG EDT 15 21 16 Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Manufactured by Fuji Electric
29. 17 4 17 3 Setting in Machine Controller 17 6 17 3 1 Communication Setting 17 6 17 4 Setting of Connected Equipment for 17 7 175 eio Bem TT 17 10 17 6 TKOUDIESNC OUNG e 17 13 18 Connection of FP Series PLC Manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works 18 1 OY ciae sel NEN Tom Tm RM 18 2 165124 Glassificatonot Product NAMES te lote bte ph ea Med oerte 18 2 19 2 System GOMMOUIATION Loco rdiet a 18 3 18 2 1 Configuration for CPU Direct Connection 5 232 18 3 18 RR E EU mI 18 5 18 3 1 Communication Setting Specifications 18 5 18 3 2 Setting Examples in Control Unit and CPU 18 6 18 3 3 Setting Examples in Computer Communication 18 7 18 4 Cautions o Use of FP SENES eit Drei 18 8 18 4 1 DEVICE SDECINGALION 18 8 18 4 2 Devices which can be monitored eessesssssesssseeeeeeen eene 18 8 18 4 3 Cautions on connection of the
30. Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24 M31M30M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24 o 0 0 0 0 Original data o 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Bit pattern 40H 4 0 Before execution After execution Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 14 21 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 14 6 4 Fill Command The contents of fill command are explained below as an example of the format 2 15 bytes maximum gt ye Tbyte 4bytes 4bytes Start address End address EE ETX NAK 02H 15H Error has Sumchekrage check range occured Execution is normally terminated ACK 06H Use example When 77H is written to virtual devices D100 H through D120 L of the GOT F900 Address Address Transmitted from the microcomputer to the 4 0 0 8 0 0 F 1 7 7 GOT 34H 30H 30H 43H 38H 30H 30H 46H 37H 37H Execution is normally terminated Transmitted from the GOT 06H to the microcomputer Before execution After execution Specification of start address and end address Specify the address so that Start address lt End
31. 3 Setting the station number setting switch oet to 00H in both the GOT F900 and the serial communication unit switch 5 MITSUBISHI 11 9 Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC Connection of FX Series Positioning Connection of FREQROL Inverter Connection of Microcom puter Connection of SYSMACC Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 11 3 2 Setting by GPPW Set the switches in the QJ71C24 R2 using I O assignment of the GX Developer For details of the setting refer to the GX Developer OPERATING MANUAL 1 2 I O assignment Set the type of the unit attached on the base unit and the switches in the QJ71C24 R2 Open procedure GX Developer PLC Parameter I O assignment Display contents a Type Set Intelli b Model name Set the model name of the attached unit QJ71C24 or QU71C24 R2 Points Set 32 d Start XY Set the head 1 0 signal number hexadecimal of the target unit Switch setting for the I O unit intelligent function unit Set the transmission specifications the communication protocol etc between the GOT and connected equipment Open procedure GX Developer PLC Parameter I O assignment
32. Data from bar code reader 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Y 4 r Number of data Data registers of 20 20 20 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 7 Wiorddeviss PLC D105 D104 D103 D102 D101 D10047 4 Space mui d Data from bar code reader ASCII code rd Number of devices lt lt gt b When the number of data read from the bar code reader is larger than the specified number of devices Data read from the bar code reader 1234567 Write destination device D100 Number of devices 2 Data from bar CR 7 6 5 4 8 2 T gt code reader Y Y Number of data Data registers Do not change 32 31 7 Word device of PLC D105 D104 D103 D102 D101 01004 Data from bar code reader ASCII code gt Cut off data Number of devices ra e p If the read data exceeds the specified number of devices the excessive portion is not stored but cut off D100 stores all the numbers of data including the excessive portion Check D100 to see whether the data is correctly written The specified head word device stores all the numbers of data without regard to the specified number of devices MITSUBISHI 22 5 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Bar Code Reader 22 22 3 4 Sequence Program Example This section explains a program when the screen data Is created using the GT Designer Bar code
33. Zero current detection period 153 Zero current detection period Zero current detection period a MITSUBISHI 13 20 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 o A Em s S82 soa c EO g 154 Voltage reduction selection during stall O20 i prevention operation c tae 2 156 Stall prevention operation selection 156 Stall prevention operation selection p p uum o J cO s 160 User group read selection 160 User group read selection On e 5 lt x 162 Automatic restart after instantaneous G2 power failure selection m ort aca eor 165 Restart stall prevention operation level p gt 171 Actual operation hour meter clear 171 Actual operation hour meter clear p 5 175 User group 2 registration 175 User group 2 registration DRE 2 175 User group 2reg 175 Usergroup 2 eg ES t Q 180 RL terminal function selection 180 RL terminal function selection 60 RL terminal function selection s 181 RM terminal function selection 181 RM terminal function selection RM terminal function selection 182 RH terminal function selection 182 RH terminal function selection RH terminal function selection o 183 RT terminal function selection 183 MRS terminal function selection SRT terminal function selection o E 185 JOG terminal functi
34. gt DC24V FoGT HCAB LILIM a MITSUBISHI Computer link unit side PLC side 6 9 9 pin D Sub male Wire the power supply the operation switches and the emergency stop switch 11 24 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 o 11 8 Troubleshooting 599 20 9 For reference this section summarizes frequently asked questions about connection of the GOT F900 Sus to the Q Series PLC 1 GOT F900 ontents of trouble eck points and countermeasures Sunk Foaow F940 F930 F920 25 The power of the Q Series PLC is turned off 8x8 COMMUNICATION Cause 1 ERROROCCURS is Communication is disabled because the power of the displayed when a Q Series PLC is turned off screen changeover Countermeasures ZO or numeric data input Turn on the power T is performed on the Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT product product product product amp GOT F900 screen by F900 and the Series PLC j j j a touch key 1 Causes 1 No touch key is The wrong cable is used or the connection is bad S available onthe Countermeasures E 9 F920GOT K Check the cable Sog o a Changeover to a nonexistent screen by a touch key or the Q Series PLC was tried DISPLAY SCREEN IS NOT AVAILABLE Cause is displayed on the The changeover destination screen has not been GOT F900 screen created yet e Countermeas
35. O Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 19 4 3 Examples of Setting Screen of RSLogix500 Software 1 MicroLogix 100 2485 Configuration Primary Protacal Baud Node Address Full Duplex t Half Duplex Slave we 2485 Configuration DH485 Primary Protocal C Baud 15200 Node Address fi Control Line Error Detection Suppression Duplicate Packet Detect Poll Timeout RTs Off Delay RTS Send Delay Message Retries Pre Tranemit Delay Cancel 2 MicroLogix 100 Channel Configuration General Channel 0 Dr iver Address s E decimal Baud 9600 E Parity HOME Protocol Control Control Line No Handshaking ORG Suppression IY Duplicate Packet Detect Error Detection Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley 19 In the online mode Full Duplex f Half Duplex Slave No Handshak ing GRO v an x20 mis BEBE D x5ms D x Sms Help Poll Timeout amp 20 mz 3000 Message Retries 3 Pre Transmit Delay amp 1 mz 0 a MITSUBISHI p 19 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley 19 o 19 5 Device Specification Method 599 This section explai
36. a MITSUBISHI 7 14 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 3 DU WIN Creation a Open DU WIN b On the menu select File New Terminal PLC System Series Cancel DU System Language T Character Set West Europe c Set the following Terminal F940GOT LWD F940GOT SWD F930GOT BWD PLC System MELSEC FX MELSEC A MELSEC QnA Q General Select Terminal in accordance with the LCD display color F940GOT black and white Eo black and white F940GOT color he Handy GOT color F930GOT K blue F930GOT BWD Eg30G0T blue RS 422 d Set CPU direct connection RS 422 of the GOT F900 connection On the menu select View Project System Settings Setup Data Setup Data Time ink Canesl Connection Port R5422 E PLG Station No 0 GOT Station No put detected da chanee to BUT mode Opening Screen Time s tor Handy GOT Setting Use GripSwitch Pressed writing Write Touch Switch Off Concurrently With Grip Switch Switch OFF operation LED operation e Set the following Port RS 422 Type CPU DST Station No Station No 00 01 to 31 for microcomputer connection GOT Station No D MITSUBISHI Connection of Two or More GOT Units 7 The Project settings dialog box appears The Setup Data dialog box appears 7 15 I
37. 2 Screen display and outline of control The display and the contents of control in the GOT F900 are determined by the screen data created by the screen creation software installed in the personal computer The screen data specifies the layout of objects displayed on the screen or actions to be executed when touch keys are pressed Some functions access the data such as the function to display word devices in the numeric value or bar graph format and the function to change the bit data status by switches access the data in the internal data area The access target in such cases is the internal data area The location of the data to be accessed is specified by the screen data GOT F900 Internal data memory Microcomputer Screen display DO H DO L 0000 0001 B D1 H D2 L 0002 0003 odo D3 H D3 L 0004 0005 D4 H DA L 0006 0007 specified by the EN dX microcomputer e d Y D5 H D5 L 0008 0009 3 Write command and read command When the data stored in the microcomputer is to be displayed on the screen the microcomputer should transfer it to the internal data area of the GOT F900 using the write command The transfer destination is specified by the screen data The result of data change by the key operation can be transferred from the internal data area of the GOT to the microcomputer if the microcomputer gives the
38. Ls Handy GOT Handy GOT RH model F9GT HCAB2 150 F9GT RHCAB2 150 Cable model name F9GT HCAB3 150 F9GT RHCAB3 150 F9GT HCAB5 150 F9GT RHCAB5 150 Insert jack sockets into the holes shown above and tighten them with nuts M3 0 12 Connected to M2 6 0 10 Jack PES external cable 4 8 0 19 On which cable is mounted panel face em 0 12 J Jack socket Nut 0 12 Cable side Panel Cut Dimension for F9GT HCNB The F9GT HCNB can be mounted on the panel face directly or mounted using an L shape metal fixture For the details of the panel cut dimension refer to the F9GT HCNB CONVERSION BOX HARDWARE MANUAL JY992D88901 which is included with the F9GT HCNB a MITSUBISHI 5 20 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 m m m 5 6 Pin Layout and Signal Allocation of Connector for Serial Communication and E Operation Switches 3 5 6 1 F9GT HCABLI LIM F9GT HCAB1 LIM External Cable F9GT HCAB LIM F9GT HCAB1 LIM 25 pin D Sub male connector Untied wires 20 core type c 1 13 5 OOGOOOCOOOOOODOO EM o Distinguished by color 14 25 J 5 Eviarnal cable Communication power supply operation switch signal name m F9GT HCAB EIM F9GT HCAB1 LIM 940 Handy GOT F943 Handy GOT AD D Sub number Untied wire color NL AN RS 232C S59 E zeo
39. T Let GO EMI Valid User screen 1 1 While the grip switch is being pressed touch keys are enabled and offer the screen changeover function and the switch function Susien Invalid 1001 Without regard to the ON OFF status of the grip switch touch keys are always enabled and offer the screen changeover function and the switch function 1 The head number of the user screen number varies depending on the screen creation software When GRIP SWITCH is set to DON T USE touch keys are always enabled without regard to the ON OFF status of the grip switch 2 Write of the grip switch ON OFF status It can be selected whether the grip switch ON OFF switch is communicated with the PLC When GRIP SWITCH is set to DON T USE PUSH BUTTON WRITE can be set to DOES NOT WRITE or WRITE When GRIP SWITCH is set to USE PUSH BUTTON WRITE can be set to only WRITE For the details of communication with the connected equipment refer to the previous section 3 Switch OFF operation a Basic operation While the grip switch is set valid in the Handy GOT it controls the operations of touch keys numerical inputs and ASCII inputs hereafter referred to as touch keys as representative While the grip switch is being pressed ON status the touch key operation is enabled as follows While the grip switch is released OFF status the touch key operation is disabled and any oper ation from the
40. 36H 35H Execution is normally terminated Transmitted from the GOT to the host Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC D100 0064H 4 Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC D102 OOOOH 4 Before execution After execution Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 14 19 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 14 6 3 Bit oriented Write Command The contents of bit oriented write command are explained below as an example of the format 2 520bytes lt 7 x 1 to 70 bytes gt 1 byte 1 2bytes 2bytes i 2bytes 4bytes 2bytes 4bytes 1byte STX Write address Bit Write address Bit NAK 3 02H 33H Error has 15H occured Write data Write data gt Sum check range Execution is normally terminated ACK 06H Specification of write data Up to 70 points of write data can be specified per command One portion of write data is shown below 1byte qs 4bytes 2bytes Write address Bit pattern 1 Write specification The address data specified by the write address and the value specified by the bit pattern determine how the change should be Function Writ
41. eS pem AAAAAA OOS TL 9 pin D Sub female a MITSUBISHI 7 20 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Two or More GOT Units 7 7 8 Troubleshooting gt For reference this section summarizes frequently asked questions about connection of two or more E GOT units 1 GOT F900 Classification Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures Nothing is displayed on the screen of some GOT units E Causes Communication is disabled because the power of the connected equipment is turned off 6 Countermeasures o Turn on the power 8 Some of the connected GOT units do not display Causes The power has been turned on before or at the same instant as connected equipment was turned on COMMUNICATION ERROR c HT G 0 229 OCCURS is displayed when a screen Countermeasures aie GOT F900 changeover or numeric data input is Turn on the connected equipment first performed on the GOT F900 screen Set the opening screen display period longer The first GOT unit closest from connected equipment Boe displays an user screen but the second and later SEO further GOT units do not 9 255 Sor e Causes The second and later GOT units has not been ready to communicate before display of the opening screen of 5 the first GOT finished The power of the second and later GOT is turned off 95 E co culo Countermeasures San Set the opening screen display peri
42. PK 13 gt DC24VG the power supply refer to chapter 5 can common Wire the power SB 15 gt SW supply the BK W 16 gt SW2 operation R W 7 gt SW3 switches and GR W 18 gt SWA ia di ae switch E gt BL W 24 gt DC24V GY W 25 gt DC24V J A FoGT HCAB1 HIEIM F9GT HCAB LILIM Drain grounding wi BK 2 gt RXD RDA To cable W 3 RXD RDB Terminal COMPUTE FOGT HCAB or gt TXD SDA link unit side BR 7 TXD SDB PLC side FOGT HCAB1 opa J P SG GND on Handy GOT Signal name of side PL 12 SOT E DC2AVG gt d A computer link PK 13 gt DC24VG Prepared by the user FGR 14 M common Wire the power SB 15 SW supply the BK W 16 lt SW2 operation R W 17 gt SW3 switches and GR W 19 gt SWA zd switch BL W 24 gt DC24V4 GY W 25 gt DC24V J E F9GT HCAB1 LILIM 10 21 Aa MITSUBISHI Introduction Outline Specifications installation and Wiring of F940GOT installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More GOT Units Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC c o O MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION C 2 Female type Male type Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 The connector
43. amp amp amp amp JJ JJ wm n5 n5 n5 n5 O O GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 3 1 4 Others OSvesion X version Connection Manufac Connected equipment name RS PIENE NN oftwo or Connection turer and series name RS 422 940W 340 330 320 more GOT type name system system system system units RS 232C General purpose printer ESC P RS 232C 1 00 1 00 general with built in RS 232C interface 1 00 lor later or later purpose or later printer Gone Bar code reader for RS 232C RS 232C 2 00 2 00 Bar code 212 4 connection or later or later reader Y connect Cannot connect MITSUBISHI 3 5 Introduction Outline c E Q o installation and Wiring of F940GOT installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More GOT Units Connection of Connection of MELSEC A MELSEC F FX Series PLC Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 3 2 Version of Screen Creation Software and Correspondence to GOT F900 Two types of screen creation software are offered the SWLID5C GOTR PACKE for those who are familiar with the GOT A900 Series and the FX PCS DU WIN E for those who are familiar with the data access unit FX DU Types of screen creation software Screen creation software creation software Screen cr
44. When the main menu screen change operation is disabled Ed a While pressing and holding the upper left corner of the screen The LANGUAGE screen appears turn on the power Keep holding the upper left corner for about 25 seconds more 3 Then press END at the upper right corner The SET UP MODE screen appears E b Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears Se C Set the following 5 PLC TYPE SLC500 Ons AB Micrologix CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 232C DST STATION STATION 00 to 31 o STATION 5 n When the main menu screen change operation is enabled EE 5 o a Operation Display screen name a Press the upper left corner of the screen The position to be The SELECT MODE screen appears pressed can be changed in the GOT and the screen creation software E p y l Press OTHER MODE on the menu The OTHER MODE screen appears 852 c Press SET UP MODE on the menu The SET UP MODE screen appears 505 d Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears e Set the following PLC TYPE AB SLC500 5 Micrologix 520 CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 232C DST STATION STATION 00 to 31 cx Q GOT STATION When the screen data is transferred to the GOT F900 the old data including the PLC type connection type and station number are overwritten Le The PLC type selection item display varies depending on the OS version 5
45. gt Connected A name label is provided at end of each to external cable E power supply and operation switches cO G 0 untied wire To PLC 25 pin D Sub Lo J For FG Class D grounding S 37 pin D Sub m See female connector Accessories gt Jack socket aos mounting type Nut 2 each 3 F9GT RHCAB5 150 relay cable for Q Series PLC c c 1 5m 4 11 255 c To power supply and operation switches A name label is provided at end of each Connected untied wire to external To PLC cable 6 pin MINI DIN connector cg S o 0 5m 1 8 For FG Class D grounding 255 37 pin D Sub s S59 female connector Accessories panel face Jack socket mounting type Nut 2 each in SLO F XE z F 0 SE o Soo LR eo Sus oOzo MITSUBISHI 5 19 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 5 5 3 5 5 4 Panel Cut Dimension for Relay Cable When mounting the relay cable connector on the panel of a control box or cabinet prepare panel of control box or cabinet as follows 47 04 1 85 42 5 1 67 or more gt 2 3 2 0 1 0 13 0 004 K pago imamna Panel thickness 0 8 to 1 3mm 0 03 to 0 05
46. ibat iic 22 5 22 3 4 Sequence Program Example 22 6 22 4 Caution on Use of Bar Code 22 7 22 4 1 Caution on bar code reader setting 22 7 22 5 Setting of Connected Equipment for 22 8 22 6 Gable Dagrau T Nm Tt 22 10 22 1 TOBDIGSIDOOUFIG E e eet 22 10 23 UU S rese 23 1 23 1 Connection of Programming Tools via 2 23 2 23 1 1 How to Monitor Using 23 2 23 1 2 Restrictions in Number of Devices Monitored When Using FX 2PIF 23 4 23 1 3 Switch Setting in 2 2 secet ein iit ioa epis 23 6 23 14 autons on Jse oF EX 2P IF sedie sedem tibus uen ERU eae ORE dese uo ey eee 23 7 23 1 0 Gable Diagrami mM 23 8 23 2 GOT F900 Connector Signal Correspondence Table Excluding tne IF O20 GO ESI adosados etia dan tat eee eat chest 23 9 23 2 1 RS 422 Correspondence Table 23 9 23 2 2 RS 232C Correspondence Table eese nnne 23 9 23 3 Error Messages in GOT F900
47. Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows Sa a Open DU WIN b On the menu select File Open The Open dialog box Select and open read the file of the screen data to be changed appears d When changing Terminal GOT F900 select View Project e System Settings Project settings on the menu 9 For the contents of setting refer to c in Creation above 595 5 sog Doa Qoo MITSUBISHI 15 17 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 15 7 Cable Diagram Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 This section explains cable connection diagrams to connect the GOT F900 and the SYSMAC C Series PLC manufactured by Omron 1 Cable for the GOT and the SYSMAC C Series PLC C 3 Female type Male type Model name Application Connection diagram The connector figure shows the engagement face Application RS 422 connection GOT F900 FG class D SYSMAC C Series C200H LK202 V 1 Prepared by the user groundin 1 6 9 9 pin D Sub male Host link unit side FG class D C200H side 1 1 D 9rounding p 1 6 5 9 3 9 pin D Sub male RS 422 connection GOT F900 CS1W SCB41 Prepared by the user Communication unit FG class D CS1 side grounding 1 gt 8 E 1 5 gt 2 gt 6 gt 1 9
48. SIMATIC S7 400 Series a SISMAC S7 400 b RS 232C cable Remarks A F9GT HCAB LILIM B Prepared by the user 9 pin D Sub F9OGT HCAB 1 LILIM port of HMI adapter Make sure that the total cable extension distance A B or C is 6m 19 8 or less 20 2 2 Introduction of Options Manufactured by Siemens AG 6ES7 972 0CA00 0XA0 HMI Adapter 6ES7 972 0CA11 0XAO0 PC PPI cable 6ES7 901 3BF20 0XA0 MITSUBISHI This RS 232C cable connects the GOT F900 excluding the Handy GOT and the HMI adapter This interface is required to connect the GOT F900 to the SIMATIC S7 300 400 Series CPU This RS 232C RS 485 conversion cable is required to connect the GOT F900 to the PPI port of the SIMATIC S7 200 Series CPU 20 5 Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC Connection of FX Series Positioning Connection of FREQROL Inverter Connection of Microcom puter Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Mm O SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 20 3 Setting in SIMATIC 57 200 When connecting the SIMATIC 57 200 Series PLC the communication specifications of the RS 232C port should be set
49. CGOYNBGAGSONS RS 422 connection A computer link FG class D FG class D A gt grounding grounding GOT F900 a 5 RXD RDA e RXD RDB Terminal ink urt side L TXD SDA block 1 O PLC sid X TXD SDB fre SG GND 6 9 9 pin D Sub male Signal name of computer link RS 232C connection A computer link F2 232CAB 1 The connection diagram is partially different FG class D gg grounding gt 2 SD TXD Computer link unit side PLC side e of computer link RS 232C connection Prepared by the user a MITSUBISHI FG class D Ug grounding unit side li 8 Signal name of A computer link 9 21 installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More GOT Units FX Series PLC eium o O gu e Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 2 Cable for the Handy GOT and the A Series PLC When using the Handy GOT RH model refer to the cable diagrams below for the RS 422 RS 232C connector but not the wiring for the power supply the operation switches and the emergency stop switch because it is different For details refer to
50. 2 RD RXD Microcomputer BR 7 4 side GR 5 4 T W 3 O 10 SG GND Signal name on To cable F9GT microcomputer side HCAB or F9GT PL 12 gt DC24VG d Prepared by the user 1 on PK 13 lt DC24VG Handy GOT side de common Wire the power gt SW supply the BK W 16 SW2 operation R W 17 lt lt gt SW3 switches and GR W 18 SWA oo BaN ES switch YAN 22 gt ES1 BL W 24 gt DC24V4 GY W 25 gt DC24V J HCAB1 O0M 1 Control lines RTS CTS DTR and DSR are not used 14 29 a MITSUBISHI Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC Connection of FX Series Positioning c c O FREQROL Inverter Connection of Microcom puter Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 14 9 Troubleshooting For reference this section summarizes frequently asked questions about connection of the GOT F900 to the microcomputer 1 GOT F900 Contents of troubl Check points and t OS version ontents of trouble eck points and countermeasures The power of the microcomputer is turned off e Cause Communication is disabled because the
51. DATASEND Sends of statement CLOSE 1 OPEN COM1AF AS 1 SENDDATA 100140479183CFO0 Send statement PRINT 1 STX SENDDATA CR RECO Receive of first character RVCNT 1 GOSUB JYUSHIN IF ERFLG 99 THEN GOTO ERRORFIN1 BUF RCV HED LEFT BUF 1 IF HED ACK THEN GOTO FIN ERRORFIN1 PRINT Error code is sent back GOTO FIN ERRORFIN1 PRINT No response FIN CLOSE 1 END JYUSHIN Waiting for receive FORI 1 TO TO RCV IF LOC 1 gt RVCNT THEN GOTO BUFIN NEXT IF RCV THEN ERFLG 99 RETURN BUFIN Reads of receive data RCV INPUT RVCNT 1 RETURN a MITSUBISHI 14 32 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 o 15 Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron aye This chapter explains the procedure to connect the GOT F900 Series display unit to the SYSMAC Series PLC o Connection Procedure Sof Q This section introduces the procedure to connect the GOT F900 to the SYSMAC C Series PLC FE Ska 1 Preparation Wemmme Desorption Reference System Coridition You can learn the connection availability as well as the version of the 154 y GOT F900 OS and the screen creation software l ze Classification of Host ae 5 Link Serial You can learn the classification of the CQM1 C200H and CS1 Series Ste P units Communication Units You can select the configuration between the GOT and the SYSMAC C System Configura
52. The screen creation software version corresponds to the model of the GOT F900 Series Refer to section 3 2 1 The RS 232C port for the Handy type GOT is provided inside the rear cover As a result environmental protection is lost when using this port and such a connection is not practical The Handy GOT can be connected as the final unit in a string of two or a MITSUBISHI 11 2 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 o 11 2 System Configuration 599 epp cv The Series PLC be connected to the GOT through a serial communication unit connection RS Sus 422 or 5 232 or directly via RS 232C This section explains the cables and options required in such a system 11 2 1 Configuration for Direct Connection RS 232C gol Quast Connect the GOT F900 to the programming port of the Q Series PLC FE 1 F920GOT K F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT OXE GOT F900 a Q Series PLC QCPU direct connection 5 b RS 232C cable Sa oTo F930GOT cog SEE p Not enabled with F920GOT K E z F940GOT Connection of two or more GOT units FE 25299 m Oza deis F920GOT K a Q Series PLC b RS 232C cable Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC QCPU direct connection Make sure the total cable extension
53. WASTANUIO eT TEE Tet 5 8 Doel AOAN 5 8 5 3 2 HANGING Om 5 8 5 9 9 Flat ouriace MOUNINO 5 9 5 3 4 Installation of Strap for Drop Prevention RH model only 5 9 5 4 Selection and Installation of External 5 10 5 4 1 Handy GOT Excluding RH model coge tas Dee uet dicatas suu ed haee aee tuu 5 10 5 4 2 Wiring between Handy GOT RH model operation switches and connected equipment5 12 5 4 3 Installation of External Cable sessi 5 14 5 5 Processing Panel Face of Control Box or 5 16 5 5 1 Selection ot relay cable Lee QU UR 5 16 5 5 2 Appearance shape of Relay 5 18 5 5 3 Panel Cut Dimension for Relay 5 20 5 5 4 Panel Cut Dimension for 5 20 5 6 Pin Layout and Signal Allocation of Connector for Serial Communication and ODS FANON SWING CS cU cR 5 21 5 6 1 F9GT HCABLI LIM F9GT HCAB 1 LIM External Cable 5 21 5 6 2 F9GT RHCAB LIM External Cable siisii a aaa nnne 5 22 5 6 3 F9GT HGONDB GonVerslofi BOX iu toe biete
54. gt SW3 the emergency gt SWA stop EST switch gt ES1 DC24V RS 232C connection CAB OOM FG class D grounding CD DCD Computer link To cable F9GT HCAB or unit side PLC side F9GT HCAB 1 on Handy GOT 1 5 Signal name of S S E M side computer link DC24V 6 9 9 pin D Sub male gt DC24VG SW common Wire the power gt SW1 supply the SW2 operation switches and gt SW3 the emergency gt SW4 stop gt ES1 switch gt ES1 GY W 25 gt DC24V gt DC24V 3 F9GT HCAB1 O00M 9 23 Introduction Outline Specifications installation installation and Wiring of and Wiring of Handy GOT F940GOT Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More GOT Units FX Series PLC eium o O gu e Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 9 7 Troubleshooting For reference this section summarizes frequently asked questions about connection of the GOT F900 to the A Series PLC The slightly different messages may be displayed on the F920GOT K 1 GOT F900 OS version Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures eee contents Cec points an
55. with two RS 232C channels Sst CPU un Either one unit a personal computer and cos Serial communication unit one unit F940WGOT 555 SAX RS 232C EP Personal Printer Bar code reader MELSEC Q Series GOT F900 computer Sst 052 Either one personal computer o5 one unit in FO40WGOT SEO QS SY RS 232C oi O in MELSEC QnA Q GOT F900 Personal Printer Bar code reader Series computer 9 l 1 GOT F900 can be connected to the multi CPU system only when the connection consists of QCPU Sus A motion controller or CPU of a personal computer cannot be used concurrently 2 Excluding the F9220GOT K c o cog cg SEH oc 599 gut cog c SEH MITSUBISHI 2 5 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Outline 2 3 A computer link connection GOT F900 is connected to the A QnA Series PLC by attaching the A CPU computer link unit Either one unit A computer link unit RS 422 1 or 5 232 5 232 Computer link unit for GOT F900 Printer Bar code MELSEC A Series reader 1 Excluding the F920GOT K 4 Connection of two or more GOT units In the A QnA Series PLC up to four GOT F900 units can be connected to programming ports RS 422 of the CPU In the QnA Q Series PLC to each of the CPU programming port RS 232C and the attached serial communication unit up to four GOT F900 units can be connecte
56. xe Shift JIS level 2 kanji se Shift JIS level 1 kanji se English EL NERA v o e PME m m LL PME LUB Japanese E E ES s lt 2 Englis Chinese F940WGOT TWD C Simplified F94LIGOT SWD Japanese F94LIGOT LWD F940GOT SWD E F940GOT English 2 Englis Portuguese sisi installation and Wiring of F940GOT ES LS S lt v Japanese F940GOT LWD E F940GOT SWD C Chinese English English IRES lt S ist st st sf sis BRIS E F940GOT LWD C Simplified F930GOT BBD K Japanese F930GOT K F930GOT BBD K E English Chinese F930GOT BBD K C Simplified F93LIGOT BWD Japanese F930GOT BWD E English F930GOT Chinese F930GOT BWD T English 2 Englis Englis Japanese English English A A Sp 4 41 amp ena wpisrsps repe sium v b A 2 Chinese F920GOT BBD5 K C Simplified Englis F94LIGOT SBD H Japanese English F94LIGOT LBD H Handy GOT F94LIGOT SBD H E English F94LIGOT LBD H E F94LIGOT SBD RH Japanese v viv Vv Handy GOT F94LIGOT LBD RH RH model F94LIGOT SBD RH E English v IE 1 O in the GOT model name indicates 0 or 3 The in built interface varies as shown below lt F930GOT BWD C Simplified
57. 1 1 1 1 Y 6 9 pin D Sub male S 6 9 pin D Sub male RS 232C connection FG class D FG class D D i GOT F900 grounding lt grounding Host link unit side 1 D C200H side C200H LK201 V 1 Prepared by the user 5 1 1 13 k J 1 2 3 7 8 S 6 9 pin D Sub female 4 d 4 4 E 14 25 25 pin D Sub male RS 232C connection GOT F900 FG class D grounding 4 7 grounding FG dassD side COM port 1 CPU Prepared by the user dw pp PET 1 e ko O 6 9 pin D Sub female 6 9 9 pin D Sub male RS 232C CS1W SCB41 connection GOT F900 FG class D CS1W SCB21 CS1W SCU21 CS1G H CPU V1 Prepared by the user a MITSUBISHI 5 1 grounding 4 Communication board class D Communication unit n grounding CS1 side gt 2 1 5 6 9 pin D Sub female 9 pin D Sub male 15 18 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 o 2 Cable for the Handy GOT and the SYSMAC C Series PLC 599
58. 271 High speed setting maximum current speed multiplying factor 287 Droop filter constant control o D I frequency Connection of FREQROL Inverter Brake sequence functions Connection of Microcom puter Droop control Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Gc 6 2 12 o 342 E PROM write selection 342 E PROM write selection 342 E PROM wrrite selection 23 n 1 n o FM AM terminal calibration FM AM terminal calibration 900 FM AM terminal calibration 2 0 o 505 25 g we Frequency setting voltage bias frequenc 9 F 902 q y 9 9 q 902 Frequency setting voltage bias 902 Frequency setting voltage bias Frequency setting voltage bias 902 S C4 903 Frequency setting voltage gain 903 Frequency setting voltage gain Frequency setting voltage gain oc 5 co 904 Frequency setting current bias 904 Frequency setting current bias i Frequency setting current bias frequency 9 he x z S XE 5 905 Frequency setting current gain 905 Frequency setting current gain Frequency setting current bias 6s g Built in frequency setting Buzzer control Parameter set by manufacturer Do not set Built in frequency setting potentiometer bias Built in frequency setting potentiometer gain 991 LCD contrast 991 LCD contrast i PU contrast adjustment 922 923 Connection of FP Series PLC om 6 9
59. 5 422 14 3 14 2 2 Configuration for CPU Direct Connection 5 232 14 5 14 3 Outline of Communication and 14 6 TASo 1 Outline OF COMMUNICATION ee 14 6 14 3 2 Communication Setting Specifications 14 7 s Nuus 14 7 tA RT T ee eee 14 7 14 4 2 Specia Memory Data LIS o vut trt ad 14 10 144S Enor code m 14 12 14 5 Communication Command 14 13 14 5 1 Outline of Communication Procedure 14 13 14 5 2 Command List and Compatible Version of 9 14 14 14 5 3 Data Transfer Format 14 15 14 5 4 haracter Gode EISE diio tt eet a iate Deu 14 15 14 5 5 Station Number Setting c0 ccccccsceeceeceseeeesccesccecscceesenscsseeeesccecseescceseeessoeseres 14 16 14 5 6 Sum Check Code i nh hu pon sse qe Ua Uu E LC 14 16 14 5 7 Interr bt Code BISU oie Doo eie inen fete ei OU tete petras one dure
60. GOT type F940WGOT 480 x 234 F940GOT 320 x 240 EN F930GOT 240 x 80 ot 9 PLC type FREQROL Su gt Selection of GOT type GOT type Model name F940WGOT 480x234 WIDE F940WGOT 5 F940GOT S 94 320 240 Handy GOT S 8 cog F930GOT K Ses F93 GOT 240x80 F930GOT Click OK d Set CPU direct connection RS 422 of the GOT F900 The Project Auxiliary M Make Serial Port Setup Language and Menu Key valid Settings dialog box gQa o appears XE Basic Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Handy GOT settings On Key window Cursor display setting Cancel Action when switching screens Don t display cursor and key window Y When touch input is detected open key window at the same time S zo zog 62 0 Click the Setup tab Project Auxiliary Settings oc Basic Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Handy GOT settings 8 22 Opening Screen Time b Heec E Backlight Off Time 10 G3g Connection 4 Buzzer Port R5422 1 ON Type CPU M OFF 50 Station No HH S 33 e Set the following Sa Port RS 422 Type CPU DST Station No Station No 00 GOT Station No Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows The Select Project gst a Open GT Designer dialog box appears b Click the Open button Open read the screen data to be changed d On the men
61. Switch setting The contents of setting vary depending on the CH interface number of the serial communication unit connected to the GOT Set the following in accordance with the connected CH CH connected to GOT Contents of setting Switch setting for LO and intelligent functional module x Input format HEX M L Sit Type Modelname Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 3 08 ORDINE L1 100 0 QJ71C24 R2 0 Se ae EN Eme am Switch setting for LO and intelligent functional module x Input format HEX v L Sit Type Modelname Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 FEES seal a ea a Te ee ae 1 Joto inteli QJ71C24 2 __ oss _ 0006 ID NEED EN PEE RUNS a a MITSUBISHI 11 10 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 o 11 3 3 Used Connectors and Connector Covers 599 DU 1 Connector on the GOT side TE oz For the shape of the connector of the GOT excluding the Handy GOT refer to chapter 4 For the shape of the connector of the cable dedicated to the Handy GOT refer to chapter 5 2 Connector on the serial communication unit side M 5 The serial communication unit is equipped with the connector having the following model name Use gez a suitable counterpart connector TA Manufacturer DDK Ltd Japan ube 17L 10090 27
62. c c O Two or More GOT Units Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC a MITSUBISHI 8 15 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 8 2 Cable for the Handy GOT and the FX Series PLC When using the Handy GOT RH model refer to the cable diagrams below for the RS 422 RS 232C connector but not the wiring for the power supply the operation switches and the emergency stop switch because it is different For details refer to Chapter 5 G3 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face No Model name Application Connection diagram Application RS 422 To F9GT HCAB2 150 connection The connector on the E Mn H 7 leader side of the Handy a SOIT RS 232C GOT is dedicated and j connection 9 Manoy 5106 be prepared by the user 14 25 25 pin D Sub male RS 422 The connector on the connection leader side of the Handy b meu CRE oat Pa sis connector GOT is dedicated and m E z RS 232C on 5106 cannot be prepared by connection the user F9GT HCAB OOM FXo FXos FX1s RS 422 E connection Drain Class D M rod Wie D 7 m
63. installation and Wiring of F940GOT e Cause Such changes are disabled while the FX Series PLC PLC IS RUNNING equipped with the EEPROM memory cassette is is displayed on the running Data saved in the built in EEPROM can be GOT F900 screen changed product product product product Such changes are also disabled when the PLC is equipped with EPROM memory cassette Countermeasures Run the FX Series PLC using the built in memory Specify the set value of the timer T and the counter C indirectly through the data register D installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Connection of Peripheral Equipment Mm c o c c O Two or More GOT Units Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC a MITSUBISHI 8 21 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 8 2 Software Ci Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures A PLC bar code reader or printer is connected Causes The RS 232C connector to which the personal computer is connected is set to be used for another piece of equipment In the personal computer connected Countermeasures to the GOT F900 sequence For monitoring or transferring sequence programs set a bar Software programs cannot be monitored or code reader to invalid and a printer to DON T USE such as GX transferred If the PLC is connected select the GOT F900
64. installation and Wiring of Handy GOT S 3 2 2 Screen Creation Software Version Corresponding to GOT F900 Series Japanese version E SpE GOT F900 Series SWOD5C GOTR PACK FX PCS DU WIN 5 SE Version Version cas Fa40WGOT SWF 505 F940GOT SW1 A 2 00 Fa43G0T SWTA F930GOT K SW5 26C 5 26C Bis F930GOT SW1 H 2 20 E 55 co SWTH 528 F920GOT K SW5 26C 5 26C 7 F940 Handy GOT SW1 D 2 10 ex F940 Handy GOT RH model SW5 F 5 05F 2 50 rS LL l F943 Handy GOT SW1 D 2 10 Su F943 Handy GOT RH model SW5 F 5 05F 525 900 SWro of SWLID5C GOTR PACK indicates a number S40 Us co o cn z 599 eo 8 mm z MITSUBISHI 37 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 English version SWLID5C GOTR PACKE FX PCS DU WIN E Version 29 SW5 26C 6 260 270 F940 Handy GOT RH model 2 50 F943 Handy GOT RH model SW5 F 5 05F of SWEID5C GOTRE PACK indicates a number 3 2 3 Screen Creation Software Corresponding to Each Connected Equipment Products in perenne SWLID5C GOTR PACK FX PCS DU WIN Version Version uem direct connection direct connection SW1 A 2 00 A Acomputerlink link Mitsubishi Connected equipment Connected equipment abbreviation dE direct connection SW2 A 2 30 QnA QnA computer link link direct connection SWA F 2 40 Q Qcompu
65. is tried to be displayed the message BAD OBJECT EXISTS is displayed MITSUBISHI 23 11 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Appendix 23 23 3 1 Error Messages During Screen Operation OS version of GOT F900 Japanese message English message F940WGOT F940GOT F930GOT K ETH CAN NOT WRITE TO PLC Earlier than Earlier than Earlier than C MEMORY 1 10 6 10 4 10 PCA CAN NOT WRITE 1 10 or later 6 10 or later 4 10 or later J ERBRAOCT ME From first From first From first OEC PROTECTED product product product From first From first From first PCASRUNA CF PLC IS RUNNING product product product a MITSUBISHI 23 12 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Appendix 23 Connection of Printer Countermeasures The protect switch of the memory cassette is ON Set the protect switch to OFF the program of the FX Series PLC passwords are used and write is disabled By selecting SELECT MODE OTHER MODE ENTRY CODE in the GOT release the passwords The protect switch of the memory cassette is ON Set the protect switch to OFF From first In the program of the FX Series PLC passwords are registered and write is disabled product By selecting SELECT MODE OTHER MODE ENTRY CODE in the GOT release the passwords While the inverter was not in the computer link operation mode or while the inverter was running parameter Pr to communication was at
66. more GOT units can be set in the GOT F900 Series and the screen creation software GT Designer and DU WIN Connection Type RS 422 RS 232C setting 1 Using the screen creation software specify the connected PLC type such as the FX Series to all GOT F900 units 2 In each GOT F900 unit the communication port should be set to RS 422 or RS 232C For example suppose that four GOT F900 units are connected to the RS 422 port of the FX Series PLC In every GOT F900 unit set the PLC type to the FX Series In the 1st and 3rd GOT F900 units set the communication port to RS 422 In the 2nd and 4th GOT F900 units set the communication port to RS 232C FX A QnA Q Series RS 422 setting RS 232C setting RS 422 setting RS 232C setting PLC n m EN E FS E PA el La bel A d s z RS422 4 RS2320 4 RS422 4 RS232C RS 232C setting RS 422 setting RS 232C setting RS 422 setting RS 232C A RS 422 A RS 232C A RS 422 RS 232C setting RS 232C setting RS 232C setting RS 232C setting Q compute 7 0 1 2 3 4 RS 232C A RS 232C A RS 232C A RS 232C
67. or less ERS F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT a QnA Series PLC b RS 422 cable Remarks 8s o FX 40DU CAB s2 QnACPU direct connection in FX 40DU CAB O0M 25 pin D Sub ae indicates the cable length 889 FX 50DU CABL Only one of the cables listed in column b is required for connection n the F930GOT and the F930GOT K the FX 50DU CABL right angle type L type cable can not be EM used Sg DU y cog Sut Zzo E 40 co g Sus Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 10 3 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 2 F940 Handy GOT GOT F900 b RS 422 cable a QnA Series PLC QnACPU direct A B connection Bed gt 0 yt Handy GOT RS 422 To power supply e ODODS and operation Se A C switches 4 5 EB Use the RS 422 F port on the rear D face To power supply and operation switches E gt n t nim To 5 422 power supply and operation switches Total extension distance 11 5 37 9 or less Conne
68. 1 F9GT HCAB LIM F9GT HCAB1 LIM 9 pin D Sub male 25 pin D Sub male Loose wires 20 core 1 5 1 13 OOOOO OUOOOUOODOOOOUOD E EMEN TE Distinguished by color 6 9 14 25 F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT Handy GOT Pin number of D Sub RS 232C signal F9GT HCAB LIM F9GT HCAB1 LIM RS 232C signal port on rear face name name EE ANNA AN FG Geld MITSUBISHI 23 9 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 23 3 Appendix 23 Error Messages in GOT F900 Series The table below shows Japanese and English messages displayed when the GOT F900 is connected to the PLC bar code reader or printer Refer to the countermeasures on the next page The error messages have been changed for greater clarity in later versions of the OS Japanese message English message OSversionofGOT F900 F940WGOT F940GOT F930GOT K l METI KEELEL 8049 jen oU ECA ROGAN ds U ECA NO HH NO T A1435U EGA SBIBI T2 5 50 AVAILABLE RO HEI LS AtH y y DISPLAY SCREEN IS NOT OS version of GOT F900 COMMUNICATION ERROR OCCURS From first product From first product From first product DISPLAY SCREEN IS NOT AVAILABLE Earlier than 4 00 Earlier than 6 00 From first amp 00 or later 4 00 or later product DISPLAY SCREEN IS NOT AVAILABLE NO DISPLAY SCREEN IS NOT Earlier than 4 00 Earlier than 6 00 From first product 6 00 or
69. 4 lt b PLC TYPE selection item display AB SLC500 CSS SIUS AB MicroLogix _ EEUU 1 00 or later F940GOT Handy 2 00 or later 6 00 or later Version O F930GOT 2 00 or later 6 00 or later on F930GOT K 4 60 or later 4 60 or later 58 co 1 The selection item display is changed to AB SLC500 and AB MicroLogix Sa Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 19 13 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley 19 2 GT Designer Creation a Open GT Designer The Select Project dialog box appears b Click the New button The GOT PLC Type dialog box appears GOT type Fo4 GOT20 X 240 M OK type 516500 Cancel Set the following GOT type F940WGOT 480 x 234 lt WIDE gt F94 GOT 320 x 240 F93 GOT 240 x 80 PLC type AB SLC500 AB MicroLogix1000 1200 1500 Selection of GOT type GOT type Model name F940WGOT 480x234 eWIDE F940WGOT F940GOT F940GOT 320x240 Handy GOT F930GOT K F930GOT 240x80 F930GOT Click OK d Set CPU direct connection RS 232C of the GOT F900 The Project Auxiliary This setting is enabled in the SW4D5C GOTR PACKE version Settings dialog box or later appears Make Serial Port Setup Language and Menu Key valid Project Auxiliary Settings x Basic Serial Port Setup Language Handy G
70. 5 11 Handling of grip switch excluding RH model E 5 Because the grip switch executes communication with connected equipment wiring is not required E 5 11 1 Function of Grip Switch The grip switch is provided on the side of the Handy GOT While the grip switch N O contact type is being pressed manipulation of the touch keys on the screen is effective The ON OFF status of the grip switch can be monitored by the PLC E In the OS version 6 00 or later you can select handling of the grip switch and the LED control method 8 Grip switch jum to o cr cO 526 mee 25 5 11 2 Setting in main unit and screen creation software Make the grip switch valid or invalid in SET UP MODE of the Handy GOT or the screen creation _ software The priority is given to writing in the screen creation software The default value is USE 2 valid 255 I TT In the OS version 6 00 or later if the grip switch is set valid the touch key OFF operation be X changed by the grip switch as described in 3 Switch OFF operation in the next section For the details refer to the next page For the detailed setting procedure refer to section 5 14 1 Setting in the main unit When the OS version is 6 00 or later c Set the grip switch valid USE or invalid DON T USE in HANDY GOT SET
71. Cancel m Connection Port R5232 v GPU Y Buzzer PLG Station No On GOT Station No n the case of earlier than version 2 52 Opening Screen Time 2 Backlight Off Time min 10 Cancel Connection 4 Port R5422 v pu X Buzzer On Station No C of Use GripSwitch e Set the following Port RS 232C Type CPU S7 200 DST Station No 1 to 31 GOT Station No 0 to 31 S7 300 DST Station No Station No 02 to 31 00 and 01 are treated as 02 GOT Station No Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows a Open DU WIN b On the menu select File Open c Select and open read the file of the screen data to be changed d When changing Terminal GOT F900 select View Project System Settings Project settings on the menu For the contents of setting refer to c in Creation above For selection of RS 232C RS 422 refer to e in Creation above The Open dialog box appears The Project settings dialog box appears a MITSUBISHI 20 16 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 o j 590 20 8 Cable Diagram Soa cN 8 This section explains cable diagrams to connect the GOT F900 and the SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Sus Series
72. Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data n 1 Data n JET Sum check 03H Sum check range Use Example When virtual devices D100 to D102 of the GOT 900 are read Address Number of points Transmitted from the 6 microcomputer to the GOT 30H 30H 43H 38H 30H 36H 03H Execution is normally terminated D100 D101 D102 Transmitted from the GOT 3 D 2 1 3 60 4 0 8 A B to the microcomputer 33H 44H 32H 33H 36H 30H 34H 30H 38H 41H 42H a MITSUBISHI 14 18 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 o 14 6 2 Batch Write Command WR 599 o N The contents of the batch write command are explained below as an example of the format 2 edt 520 bytes maximum 1 byte byte 1 byte 4 bytes 2 bytes 2 x 1 to 255 bytes gt 2 byte 5 o Address Number Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data n 1 Data ETX Sum E of points check 1 to 64 ES OX O OLA l Sum check range Execution is normally Error has terminated occurred 5 NAK 25 culo 06H 15H gre Use Example When 64H and 65H are written respectively to virtual devices D100 and D101 of the GOT F900 WR Address Connection of Microcom puter Transmitted from 1 0 0 C 8 the host to the GOT 31H 30H 43H 34H 30H 30H 36H 34H
73. Opening Screen Time s 4 Backlight Off Time min 10 Cancel lt 2 Connection EIB 2 2 ee Port RS422 2 o gt r Buzzer co me EL es 538 Station No O oH Use GripSwitch on 5 uO I o ga co gg c ul SEH c 540 oOo o cog c z Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 10 17 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 Operation Display screen name e Set the following Port RS 422 RS 232C Type CPU LINK DST Station No Station No 0 to 15 GOT Station No D Combinations of Port and Type are as follows Connection destination Port Type Station number QnA CPU direct connection CPU A computer link unit RS 422 LINK 0 to 15 QnA computer link unit CPU A computer link unit LINK 0 to 15 RS 232C QnA computer link unit CPU a Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows a Open the DU WIN b On the menu select File Open The Open dialog box c Select and open read the file of the screen data to be changed appears d When changing Terminal GOT F900 select View Project The Project settings System Settings Project settings the menu dialog box appears For the contents of setting refer to c in Creation above The PLC selection item display varies depending on the software version as follows PLC System select
74. Prepared by user FX 232CAB 1 cross cable Prepared by user cross cable FX 232CAB 1 QnA computer link connection Prepared by user FX 232CAB 1 Elena ee cross cable Q computer link connection Prepared by user FX 232CAB 1 epee URET cross cable Microcomputer connection Prepared by user FX 232CAB 1 Prepared by user cross cable Among RS 422 cables in the FX 50DU CABL and the FX 50DU CABOL cannot be used the F930GOT 9 a MITSUBISHI GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Two or More GOT Units 7 2 Handy GOT E Connection of the Handy GOT is as shown below It is different from the cables shown in the 3 previous page Connected signal Connectable Handy GOT c RS 422 F940 Handy GOT Prepare another cable connecting the 25 pin D Sub connector of the F9GT HCAB LILIM d RS 232C F943 Handy GOT Or connect the untied side of the F9GT HCAB1 O1OM 5 I 5 gt installation and Wiring of F940GOT installation and Wiring of Handy GOT c c O Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 7 3 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Two or More GOT Units 7 7 2 2 When First GOT Unit is Connected through RS 232C This section explains the configuration when th
75. d D To power supply and operation switches E gt Use the RS 422 ES port on the rear E 6 face RS 422 power supply and operation switches Total extension distance 11 5m 37 9 or less a A Series PLC b RS 422 cable Remarks AJ71UC24 A1SJ71C24 R4 A F9GT HCAB LILIM B Prepared by the user Make sure the total cable Prepared by the user extension distance is 11 5m D FOGT HCAB 37 9 or less E F9GT HCAB1 LILIM A B A1SJ71UC24 R4 Terminal block C D E Applicable A Series PLC products in the column a are computer link units equipped with built in RS 422 interface Make sure that the total cable extension distance A B or E is 11 5m 37 9 or less a MITSUBISHI 9 6 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 9 2 3 Configuration for A Computer Link Connection RS 232C The GOT F900 and the computer link unit can be connected on the 1 1 basis As many GOT F900 units as the number of computer link units connected to the A Series PLC can be connected Because the programming connector of the PLC is not occupied peripheral programming equipment dedicated equipment for PLC can be connected for monitoring and transfer of sequence programs 1 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT GOT F900 a A Series PLC A computer link F93
76. m c c c O Two or More GOT Units Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 8 3 To set by the software FX WIN Open FX WIN The setting menu may not be provided in some versions The setting can be executed in the offline mode by setting parameters and the online mode direct writing to D8120 of the FX Series PLC as shown below Confirm the setting in each mode 1 Offline setting by parameters Read the sequence program to the personal computer On the menu select Option Serial setting parameter Check the display on the dialog box to confirm whether or not there is a setting If the confirmation dialog box shown on the left is displayed there is no setting If the setting screen shown on the right is displayed click Clear to cancel the current data There is no setting There is a setting SWOPC FXGPAWIN E 4 Communication parameters not set Select Yes to set the default values bs Do you want to set e When programming software transfer the program to the communication boards select No and clear the special register 08120 in the to 0 2 Serial setting parameter x Protocol Data bits Parity Cancel Stop bits Help Transfer speed bps Terminator There is no set
77. o m m m c 18 Connection of FP Series PLC Manufactured by Matsushita Electric 322 Works eas oUo 0 This chapter explains connection of the GOT F900 Series display unit the FP Series PLC manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works Soe 825 Connection Procedure TA This section introduces the procedure to connect the GOT F900 to the FP Series PLC one 1 Preparation o Bystssccondiffen You can learn the connection availability as well as the version of the 18 1 ot 9 y GOT F900 OS and the screen creation software Sc gt You can select the configuration between the GOT and the FP Series System Configuration 18 2 PLC and proper cables 2 Setting S o0 52 FP Selection You can learn the communication specifications and the contents of setting 18 3 8s zi oe The communication specifications between 9 the FP Series PLC and the GOT unit Specifications Setting The contents and position of setting in each 59 Examples FP Series PLC 2 0 868 Cautions on Use of FP You can learn the restrictions in connecting the GOT to the FP Series 18 4 Series PLC l o Setting Set the PLC type using the GOT the screen creation software SZO Equipment for GOT Sog 3 T Others SLA Description Cable Diagram Cable diagrams for FP Series PLC GOT connection 5 Troubleshooting Description of errors and how to fix them 58 ES Eo gt Connection of FP Series PLC Connect
78. 1 No touch key is The wrong cable is used or the connection is bad available onthe Countermeasures F920GOT K Check the cable Changeover to a nonexistent screen by a touch key or the FX Series PLC was tried oo en Earlier Earlier IS NOT AVAILABLE Cause E 3 oun than than is displayed on the The changeover destination screen has not been 6 00 4 00 GOT F900 screen created yet Countermeasures Create the screen DISPLAY SCREEN A nonexistent screen was tried to be displayed IS NOT AVAILABLE From in Cause 6 00 4 00 The screen No has not been created yet later later displayed on the GOT F900 screen roduct Countermeasures Create the screen a MITSUBISHI 8 18 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 8 gt Eee A device that does not exist in the FX Series PLC was referenced Example While an FXos Series PLC is connected a device exists only in the FX2N Series PLC is specified for numeric input e Cause 8 On the changeover destination screen excluding the head screen a nonexistent device in the connected FX Series PLC is specified Countermeasures Check the devices used on the head screen 5 When a PLC is not connected the GOT defaults to the 9 FX2 mode a DISPLAY SCREEN IS NOT AVAILABLE is displayed on the GOT F900 screen Earlier Earlier Cause than than Check for the FX2 or FX2N Series w
79. DC24VG shows the wiring of the RS FGR 14 pe s d 422 signals For wiring of SB 5 Wire the power the operation switches and supply the the power supply refer to BK W 16 gt SW2 operation chapter 5 R W 17 lt 4 gt SW3 switches and GR W 18 gt SW4 EI SITIS Bru e gt ES Y W 22 gt ES BL W 24 gt DC24V GY W 25 gt DC24V J FoGT HCAB1 OOM RS 422 E 1 gt 1 connection Distributor 2 Donotconnect 2 Distributor Prepared by the user 3 a gt 3 4 gt 4 Between distributor 5 gt 5 distributor 6 gt 6 45 plug male 7 i PJ 45 plug male 8 Do not connect 8 a MITSUBISHI 13 30 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 500 oS 285 C 2 Female type Male type connector figure shows the engagement face EE Application Connection diagram Application SG RS 422 Distributor g Do not connect 2 connection gt BDA INV direct connection gt SDB Terminal block of Sat Between distributor and gt SDA FR ASNR Tf FR A5NR of A500 Series us SEL PJ 45 plug male o 2 3 Connectors and connector covers to be used 252 a Connector on the GOT side 8E For the connectors used in the GOT F900 and the Handy GOT refer to the description on corresponding
80. DST STATION 1 to 31 GOT STATION 0 to 31 57 300 DST STATION STATION 02 to 31 00 and 01 are treated as 02 GOT STATION D When the screen data is transferred to the GOT F900 the old data including the PLC type connection type and station number are overwritten a MITSUBISHI 20 12 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 2 GT Designer 599 o p Creation a Open GT Designer The Select Project SEH dialog box appears b Click the New button The GOT PLC Type 52 SOC 252 GOT type FosaoTG20 X240 OK ME PLC type Cancel Set the following GOT type F940WGOT 480 x 234 WIDE 4 F94 GOT 320 x 240 HE 5 F93 GOT 240 x 80 Eu S PLC type SIEMENS S7 200 ons SIEMENS 57 300 Selection of GOT type 5 F940WGOT 480x234 lt WIDE gt F940WGOT 22 cog F940GOT 652 F94 GOT 320x240 Handy GOT F930GOT K F93 GOT 240x80 dd E oo Click OK 598 ez d Set CPU direct connection RS 232C of the GOT F900 The Project Auxiliary S2 This setting is enabled in the SW5D5C GOTR PACKE version Settings dialog box or later appears Make Serial Port Setup Language and Menu Key valid 529 Basic Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Handy GOT settings Sao ok ENS m Key window Cursor display setting Cancel 8 u D Acti
81. F930GOT 5 Connection of two or more GOT units ere m ke a ko F940GOT installation and Wiring of F940GOT F920GOT K ACPU direct connection bueu Make sure the total cable extension 25 pin D Sub distance is 3m 9 10 or less installation and Wiring of Handy GOT OGe F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT EE a A Series PLC b RS 422 cable Remarks EE Oo LL FX 40DU CAB ACPU direct connection in FX 40DU CAB LILIM 25 pin D Sub indicates the cable length FX 50DU CABL Only one of the cables listed in column b is required for connection 55 In the F930GOT and the F930GOT K the FX 50DU CABL right angle type L type cable can not be 96 Oro used 5 9 TE c Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 9 3 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 2 F940 Handy GOT a A Series PLC GOT F900 b RS 422 cable ACPU direct A B connection Es g po E power supply and operation Handy GOT A gt _ i RS 422
82. For FX CPU FX0 FX0S FX1S FXON FX1N FX2N FX2NC Other than RH model F9GT HCAB2 150 1 5m 4 11 RH model F9GT RHCAB2 150 1 5m 4 11 For A QnA FX CPU FX FX1 FX2 FX2C Other than RH model F9GT HCABS3 150 1 5m 4 11 RH model F9GT RHCAB3 150 1 5m 4 11 Any relay cable other than the above should be prepared by the user b Installing the F9GT HCAB conversion box on the panel RH model cannot be connected F940 Handy GOT Panel face Power supply and opperation switches N For the panel cut dimension refer to 5 5 4 a MITSUBISHI a External cable with 25 pin D Sub pin connector F9GT HCAB 3M 3m 9 10 F9GT HCAB 10M 10m 32 10 F9GT HCNB conversion box Communication cable for connection to PLC 25 pin D Sub or 8 pin MINI DIN connector is offered to connect to FX CPU For A QnA FX CPU FX FX1 FX2 FX2C FX 40DU CAB 3m 9 10 For FX CPU FXo FXos FX1S FXoN FX1N FX2N FX2NC FX 50DU CABO 3m 9 10 FX 50DU CABO 1M 1m 3 3 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 2 Using F943 Handy GOT E a Installing a connection on the panel of control box or cabinet E a External cable with 25 D Sub male connector Rid Spero pone Other than RH model F9GT HCAB 3M 3m 9 10 HH model F9GT RHCAB 3M 3m 9 10 b Relay cable for connection to Series PLC o Other than RH model F9GT HCAB5 150 1 5
83. MELSEC Q Series PLC G3 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face E ar o No Model name Application Connection diagram Application s 2 65 422 F9GT HCAB2 150 888 connection The connector on the dali Sx _ _ leader side of the Handy a tae a RS 232C Dedicated connector GOT is dedicated and connection cannot be prepared by o the user 14 25 25 pin D Sub male RS 422 The connector on the 25 F9GT HCAB1 3M connection leader side of the Handy Loose wires 555 Dedicated connector GOT is dedicated and b F9GT HCAB1 10M HS 232C cannot be prepared by no connector Sc gt connection the user RS 422 F9GT HCAB OOM FX2N 10GM connection Drain P FG less D grounding FX2N A wire 1 ay To cable F9GT HCAB E on Handy GOT us ME 6 13 Y 6 gt 7 O 7 cos BR 7 lt 4 2040 FE BL 8 6 8 25 14 GR 9 5 F9GT HCAB2 150 25 pin D Sub female 3 8 MINI DIN male 1 SHELL pga roce c RS 422 signals For wiring PK 13 id zog of the operation switches FGR 14 gt common Wire the power 9 S 0 and the power supply
84. Total extension distance 11 5m 37 9 or less a Machine controller b RS 422 cable Remarks 852 c o 5 Onn B Prepared by the user 2171 Prepared by the user MEMOBUS unit connector 5 D F9GT HCNB T s gt E F9GT HCAB1 OOM FEE gt Applicable machine controller product in the column is MEMOBUS unit equipped with built in RS 422 Sus interface Machine Con Connection of troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 17 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Machine Controller CP9200SH PLC Manufactured by Yaskawa Electric 17 17 2 2 Configuration for CPU Direct Connection RS 232C Connect the MP900 CP9200SH machine controller to the MEMOBUS port built in the CPU unit or the COM port of the MEMOBUS unit and the RS 232C communication port of the GOT The GOT F900 and the machine controller can be connected on the 1 1 basis As many GOT F900 units as the number of MEMOBUS units attached to the machine controller can be connected 1 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT Y GOT F900 MEMOBUS unit a Machine controller a D RS 232C cable ui F930GOT CP 2171F CP9200SH MP920 a Machine controller P AP a a F940GOT Y MP920 MP930 a Machi
85. emergency stop 21 gt ES switch 22 gt ES1 24 DC24V 25 DC24V J RS 422 4v FOGT HCAB OOM connactiol pi 1 E e Rv D grounding BK 2 4 gt RXD RDA To cable W 3 Terminal nd Y 6 gt ink unit side F9GT HCAB ge TXD SpB 29 side F9GT HCAB1 Of 10 j SG GND Signal name of on handy GOT link side PL 12 DC24VG d ink PK 13 DC24VG repare e user P y gt common Wire the power SB 15 lt gt SW1 supply the BK W 16 SW2 operation R W 17 lt gt SW3 switches and GR W 18 gt SWA Br el PES switch Y W 22 lt 4 gt ES1 BL W 24 gt DC24V GY W 25 gt DC24V J A FeGT HCAB1 HEM ae MITSUBISHI 9 22 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION C 3 Female type Male type Model name Application Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 The connector figure shows the engagement face Connection diagram Application MITSUBISHI A computer link Prepared by the user Prepared by the user RS 232C connection F9GT HCAB LILIM FG class D grounding To cable Computer link unit side PLC side F9GT HCAB or F9GT HCAB 1 on Handy GOT 13 computer link 14 25 side gt DC24VG 5 pin D Sub male DC24VG gt i common Wire the power SW supply the SW2 operation switches and
86. o E o F940GOT Equipment GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of F920GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 Switch setting g Click the Keys button The Keys Scr Common window appears W keys Scr Common Project Mew Object Type Add ipe 1 switch External Key 2 Edit External Kev 3 Functions External Key 4 External Kev Delete External Kev 6 External Kev 7 External Kev 8 External Key 9 External Kev 10 External Kev 11 External Kev 12 External Kev 13 External Kev 14 External Kev 15 External Kev 1 External Kev 17 Fyternal Kev 128 h Allocate a switch operation to an External Key n in the Keys list pressing the Add button Refer to Setting of function key below Caution on setting of Output Indicator 1 The contents of Output Indicator you have set are not displayed on the screen 2 The check box is valid only in the F930GOT K and Handy GOT Never set the check box in any other series 3 Set Output Indicator only on the common screen Even if it is set on a user screen it does not function 4 Make sure that the bit device assigned on the Output Indicator dialog box is not included in the bit device range in set View Project System Settings Interface Devices Setting of function key Switch operations can be set to the devices External Key 0 to 7 corresponding to FO to F7 The setting method and operations are the same a
87. soa 9 2 o Soo uk ogo 2 mm 2 MITSUBISHI 5 3 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 When Handy GOT is attached and removed using F9GT HCNB Handy GOT External cable ene n Cable to PLC Wiring outside panel Wiring inside panel gt F9GT HCAB FX 40DU CAB F940 Handy GOT only Installed on panel face FX 50DU CABO s Supplied from external power supply or service power supply of PLC 24V DC When Handy GOT is directly wired Handy GOT External cable Wiring outside panel Wiring inside panel T F9GT HCAB1 Prepared by user To untied d pe we cable Supplied from external power supply or service power supply of PLC 24V DC a MITSUBISHI 5 4 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 E 5 1 2 Handy GOT RH model 5 o Handy GOT External cable Cable to PLC Wiring outside panel Wiring inside panel 4 2 5 re uta 2 5 o PLC rr For power supply and operation switches jum to o cr cO ole YL For power supply and operation switches Handy GOT installation and Wiring of Connection of Peripheral Equipm
88. the FX or A Series PLC FX DU RS422 To make the change in switch setting valid the power must be turned off and then turned on again a MITSUBISHI 23 6 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Appendix 23 23 1 4 Cautions on Use of FX 2PIF When using the FX 2PIF connected to the GOT F900 for monitoring observe the following cautions on use 1 Access to PLC CPU through FX 2PIF a The access from the dedicated equipment GPP function or GOT is enabled only when the PLC is connected with the FX 2PIF Because of the restriction in communication time access to another MELSECNET PLC station is not possible A communication error time out error will occur Example IF a GOT tries to access a different PLC station an error occurs in the communication between the dedicated equipment GPP function and the PLC b When using FX 2PIF the response speed from the PLC CPU to the GOT or dedicated equipment GPP function is approximately four or five times slower than when it is not used The same situation exists when either the GOT or dedicated equipment GPP function is connected to the FX 2PIF 2 Operation of dedicated equipment GPP function through FX 2PIF a The circuit monitor by the GPP function is available to monitor 103 points 1 1 Includes the monitor points of RUN STOP status of the PLC and scan time counted by the special data register An error will not occur even though the number of devices being monitored exceeds 103
89. 0 in the DU WIN e Countermeasures Check the devices used on the head screen There is not data because the unit is new or the memory clear has been executed Cause There is no screen data e Countermeasures Write the screen data using the screen creation software ee Earlier Earlier Earlier PLC MEMORY is This error is not displayed than than than displayed on the GOT 1 10 6 10 4 10 F900 screen on SOT E l 1 10 or 6 10 or 4 10 or is displayed on the This error is not displayed iater laler PAM GOT F900 screen CAN NOT USE THE FUNCTION WHILE PROTECTED is This error is not displayed displayed on the GOT product product F900 screen PLC IS RUNNING is displayed on the This error is not displayed GOT F900 screen product product a MITSUBISHI 20 20 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 2 Software IE Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures A SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC bar code reader or printer is connected Causes The RS 232C connector to which the personal computer is connected is set to be used for another piece of equipment Countermeasures In the GOT F900 select by hand SELECT MODE OTHER Communication with the screen MODE DATA TRANSFER creation software and screen data Or set a bar code printer to invalid and a printer to DON T cannot be transferred USE Somethi
90. 16 1 FO sy Stel COMI GM P e TES 16 1 16 2 System GonDntgulatlOli 2 16 2 16 2 1 Configuration for Link Unit Connection RS 422 16 2 16 2 2 Configuration for Link Unit Connection 5 232 16 4 1E S Veng IRE E EU UTE 16 5 16 3 1 Communication Setting nene 16 5 6 3 2 SUING EXAIMDICS 16 6 16 4 Caution on Use of FLEX PC N Series 16 7 16 4 1 Devices which can be monitored cccccceeeceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeseeeseeeeeesseeeeessaaeeeeeess 16 7 16 5 Setting of Connected Equipment for 16 7 16 6 Cable m 16 11 16 7 ITOUDIeShDOoOllig ote tea be Ru RUE or 16 14 17 Connection of Machine Controller CP9200SH PLC Manufactured by Yaskawa Electric 17 1 OY SUSI GOMGINIO i ot cer 17 1 17 2 System COMMG UF ANOMN eee oie eee 17 2 17 2 1 Configuration for CPU Direct Connection 5 422 17 2 17 2 2 Configuration for CPU Direct Connection 5 232
91. 4 4 25 5 pin D Sub male Signal name of computer link RS 232C connection A QnA computer link Prepared by user If proper monitoring is not executed due to external noise when connecting A1SJ71QC24 R2 connect all signals in pair with SG except SG and FC RD SD DTR DSR SG FG class D gt grounding 1 CD DCD Computer link unit side PLC side GOT F900 5 1 6 9 pin D Sub female 9 IO OE UN 1 Ei 1 iod A Ui E Y di E SD RD DSR DTR SG i 8 6 9 Signal name of 9 pin D Sub male computer link When the computer link unit for the QnA Series is equipped with the 25 pin D Sub port the connection diagram is as follows The AJ71QC24 R4 is available C 3 Female type Male type Model name Application Connection diagram The connector figure shows the engagement face Application RS 422 connection QnA computer link Prepared by the user Aa MITSUBISHI GOT F900 FG class D Computer link unit side 7 1 5 a 9 O 9grounding 4 PLC side 13 2 9 y 6 9 pin D Sub male 25 25 pin D Sub male 10 20 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 2 Cable for the Handy GOT and the QnA Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 When using the Handy GOT RH model refer
92. 6 pin MINI DIN distance is 3m 9 10 or less F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT a Q Series PLC b RS 232C cable Remarks Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC QCPU direct connection Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 11 3 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 2 F943 Handy GOT Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 GOT F900 b RS 232C cable Q Series PLC QCPU direct A B connection m 4 gt 00 a i OL y _ Handy GOT RS 232C T To power supply 5 SURE ecce C switches P e f mE lt iiini iid To RS 232C Use the RS 232C M the rear Total extension distance 6m 19 8 or less Connection of two or more GOT units a Q Series PLC b RS 232C cable Remarks A F9GT HCAB LILIM QCPU 6 pin MINI DIN B F9GT HCAB5 150 C F9GT HCAB1 LILIM Make sure that the total cable extension distance A B or C is 6m 19 8 or less a MITSUBISHI GOT F900 SERIES CONNECT
93. 9 T LO 5 8 LL Eu o S4 No414 iBIEBIEEEIGE 525 i9200bps 5 PLOVATALS ARETE Setting the COM port Mme Pon Open the dialog box by selecting 5 ARTERE REL SEURS 2 BANGER OK Option PLC System register setting 2 amp voit 7 SRE meni 99 No412 ERR REE dian XE Pom Click the COM port setting tab to sa Modia fz3 amp 24 w P Nodl4 1 di isplay the window shown on the left FAE SN Afe No415 22 kNo OP Abate ST L 416 ty Ati 2 Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Mo4l BS phe LS 0 10240 Mo418 FE ey E fi 024 0 1024 The sample screens above in Japanese Ezo Spa 18 3 3 Setting Examples in Computer Communication Unit ME While referring to the setting examples shown below set the transmission specifications using the DIP switches in the computer communication unit FP2 CCU St In the FP2 CCU use the DIP switches for setting 89 The settings of the communication speed and the data length of both the and the 2 canbe 225 changed using the DIP switches provided on the rear face 550 0 indicates OFF 1 indicates ON
94. CONNECTION Connection of Bar Code Reader 22 3 DU WIN m o O Operation Display screen name Setting method a Open DU WIN b Read the file of the screen data for which bar code reader connection is to be set Printer Control device c Set the control devices The Interface Devices On the menu select View Project System Settings Interface dialog box appears Devices Set Word Device and Bit Device inside the device range of the connected equipment After setting click the OK button Interface Devices x Word Device 00 Bit Device Appendix For the word device range specifications refer to section 3 3 Bar code setting d Set the head device and the number of devices default value 2 The Bar Code Settings to which the data read by the bar code reader is transferred GOT dialog box appears F900 connected equipment On the menu select View Projects System Settings Bar Code Settings Check Device points and set Device and Device points After setting click the OK button Device D120 OK Device points 2 Delete For the word device range specifications refer to chapter 3 3 MITSUBISHI 22 9 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Bar Code Reader 22 22 6 Cable Diagram This section explains a cable diagram to connect the G
95. Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 15 3 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 2 F940 Handy GOT GOT F900 b RS 422 cable a SYSMAC C Series Host link A C t gt gt ES 6 lt Handy GOT RS 422 B To RS 422 B 0000 To power supply and operation switches D gt Use the RS 422 To lt port on the rear face un To RS 422 power supply and operation switches Total extension distance 11 5m 37 9 or less a SYSMAC C Series b RS 422 cable Remarks A F9GT HCAB LILIM B F9GT HCNB C200H LK202 V 1 9 pin D Sub Host link unit C Prepared by the user D D F9GT HCAB 1 LILIM CS1W SCB41 9 pin D Sub Serial communication unit Applicable SYSMAC C Series products in the column a are host link units equipped with built in RS 422 interface a MITSUBISHI 15 4 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 o 15 2 2 Configuration for SYSMAC C Host Link Connection RS 232C
96. Connection of two or more GOT units F940GOT installation and Wiring of F940GOT m mE a QnA Series PLC b RS 232C cable Remarks AJ71QC24 25 pin D Sub F2 232CAB 1 AJ71QC24 R2 installation and Wiring of Handy GOT A1SJ71QC24 Make sure the total cable extension distance is 15m 5 A1SJ71QC24 R2 9 pin D Sub Prepared by the user 49 3 or less Sst A1SJ71UC24 R2 Make sure the total cable 925 extension distance is 15m Sag AJ71UC24 25 pin D Sub F2 232CAB 1 49 3 or less Oo u Applicable QnA Series PLC products in the column a are computer link units equipped with built in RS 232C interface 5 C iss Eo SEG 5x TE qm SER eo Sut Of Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 10 7 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 2 F943 Handy GOT GOT F900 b RS 232C cable a QnA Series PLC QnA couputer link A A U U To power supply and operation switches C P 4 gt Handy RS 232C J c To RS 232C power supply 0 and operation switches Total extension dista
97. Connector communication unit o Covers Setting Multi PLC You can learn the connection of GOT F900 setting in screen creation 11 4 System software and PLC number L Caution on Use of You can learn the restrictions in connecting the GOT to the Q Series 115 5 MELSEC Q Series PLC PLC Set the PLC type using the GOT or the screen creation software FE Equipment for GOT yP 9 ee 3 Others n oJ Description g Cable Diagram Cable diagrams for Q Series PLC GOT connection E S Troubleshooting Description of errors and how to fix them 62 o 5 9 oon dE ges Eo ONA a MITSUBISHI 11 1 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 11 1 System Condition When connecting the Q Series PLC check the COM port designation the OS version of the GOT F900 and the applicable version of the screen creation software Compatibility when connecting Q Series PLC GOT F900 OS version creation software co Two or more of GOT F900 GOT units GT Designer DU WIN F940 Handy GOT EX SWA F 2 40 The following versions or later are compatible with QOOJCPU QO0CPU Q01CPU and Q multi PLC system F930GOT F940W F94 Version of screen Compatible with F920GOT EosoGoT Fggogor handy _ creation software GOT GT Designer DU WIN K QOOJCPU QOOCPU 1 00 4 30 4 60 6 30 1 30 6 30 Q multiple PLC SW5 P system V 5 13P
98. D Sub MEMOBUS unit 25 pin D Sub A F9GT HCAB 3M MP920 B Prepared by the user 9 pin D Sub C F9GT HCAB1 LILIM CPU unit MP930 505 ox Applicable machine controller products in the column a are CPU or MEMOBUS units equipped with built in FE RS 232C interface 82 1 In the CP 217IF the COMI is the 9 pin D Sub port and the COM2 is the 25 pin D Sub port The COMG is an RS 422 port 520 zga gt lt o Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 17 5 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Machine Controller CP9200SH PLC Manufactured by Yaskawa Electric 17 17 3 Setting in Machine Controller When connecting the MP900 CP9200SH machine controller the communication setting of the MEMOBUS port should be changed using peripheral equipment 17 3 1 Communication Setting Specifications 1 Setting the transmission specifications oet the transmission specifications in the MP900 CP9200SH machine controller as shown in the table below For the setting method refer to the manual of the machine controller Set value Slave address 1 to 16 ___ O O Data format Provided even The specifications such as the transmission speed are fixed on the GOT F900 side and cannot be changed 2 Setting the slave address station number setting switch The slave add
99. ERROROCCURS is Communication is disabled because the power of the 5 displayed when QnA Series PLC is turned off 8 screen changeover Countermeasures 3 or numeric data input Turn on the power y is performed on the Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT GOT F900 screen by F900 and the QnA Series PLC a touch key 1 product product product product Causes 1 No touch key is The wrong cable is used or the connection is bad available on the Countermeasures F920GOT K Check the cable installation and Wiring of F940GOT Changeover to a nonexistent screen by a touch key or the QnA Series PLC was tried DISPLAY SCREEN IS NOT AVAILABLE Cause is displayed on the The changeover destination screen has not been GOT F900 screen created yet Countermeasures Create the screen Earlier Earlier than than 6 00 4 00 installation and Wiring of Handy GOT DISPLAY SCREEN A nonexistent screen was tried to be displayed IS NOT AVAILABLE From ae e Cause 6 00 or 4 00 or NO is first The screen has not been created yet later later displayed on the SUIS product GOT F900 screen Create the screen Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More GOT Units Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC c o O MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC a MITSUBISHI 10 23 GOT F900
100. Earlier IS NOT AVAILABLE 5 die Cause than than c is displayed on the 500 The changeover destination screen has been created yet 6 00 4 00 GOT F900 screen 946 Countermeasures EZO Create the screen 850 DISPLAY SCREEN A nonexistent screen was tried to be displayed S NOT AVAILABLE cause amp 00or 400or 5 n The screen No has not been created yet later later 520 displayed the GOT Countermeasures 00 F900 screen C Create the screen su x LL o A device that does not exist in the SYSMAC C Series PLC was referenced Example While an C200H is connected a device exists only in the CS1 is specified for numeric input 5 58 Cause 52 On the changeover destination screen excluding the head EEO screen a nonexistent device in the connected SYSMAC C SER MEE n Series PLC is specified Earlier Earlier a Countermeasures than than is displayed on the Check the devices used on the head screen 6 00 400 GOT F900 screen cm There is an error on the screen to be displayed go e Cause Se One of the screen objects is placed outside the available screen area Countermeasures Check the placement of screen objects 2 T FED COE Onn SHO Onn MITSUBISHI 15 21 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 Contents of troubl Check points and t OS version ontents of trouble eck points an
101. GOT type 94 GO 70320 240 type MELSEC FX Cancel E c Set the following GOT type F940WGOT 480 x 234 e F94 GOT 320 x 240 F93 GOT 240 x 80 F920GOT 128 x 64 o PLC type MELSEC FX Selection of GOT type GOT type Model name F940WGOT 480x234 WIDE F940WGOT F940GOT F94 GOT 320x240 Handy GOT F930GOT K F93 GOT 240x80 E OUT F920GOT 128x64 F920GOT K d Set CPU direct connection RS 422 RS 232C of the GOT F900 The Project Auxiliary This setting is enabled in the SWAD5C GOTR PACKE version Settings dialog box or later appears installation and Wiring of F940GOT installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Make Serial Port Setup Language and Menu Key valid Project Auxiliary Settings x 5 Basic Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Handy GOT settings og t OK Oog Key window Cursor display setting Cancel 25 n ooo Action when switching screens Don t display cursor and key window Y OA U When touch input is detected open key window at the same time ise Serial Setup Language Menu Key Click the Setup tab 955 cok Project Auxiliary Settings os Oro Basic Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Handy GOT settings Opening Screen Time jum x i ime liMi Backlight Off Time 10 Min ZEG Con
102. In the C F9GT HCAB1 3M shown in the column c RS 232C cable the end on the PLC side is loose wires T Make sure that the total cable extension distance A B or C is 6 m or less 25 c 526 Oro Before attempting to connect the GOT units per b Option above 8 3 Cautions on Use of MELSEC F FX Series should be read and understood Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 8 5 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 8 8 3 8 3 1 8 3 2 8 3 3 Cautions on Use of MELSEC F FX Series When using the GOT F900 connected to the FX Series PLC observe the following cautions on use Device specification The device range specifications vary depending on the model of the FXCPU Input relays X X000 to X377 can be read only It is not allowed to specify a bit device as a word device or specify a word device as a bit device For the details refer to section 3 3 Devices which can be monitored Specify the device No of input relays X and output relays Y in octal 1 2 3 7 10 11 17 20 Specify the device No of other devices in decimal Only devices described in 3 3 Device Names Which can be Monitored can be specified When GOT F900 is connected to optional port By connecting the appropriate module to the FX Series PLC see table below the GOT F900 can be connected to the option
103. PL 12 gt DC24VG ER Handy GOT side pKa gt DC24VG amp FP Series FGR 14 b Roh cO j o c Prepared by the user SB 15 gt SW1 ee a OHH BK W 16 SW2 operation R W 17 gt SW3 switches and GR W 18 gt SWA Js emergency gt 51 520 Y W 22 gt ES1 BL W 24 gt DC24V 8 GY W 25 lt gt DC24V J 828 FoGT HCABI HIEIM RS 232C FOGT HCAB OOM connection Drain t FG class D grounding S Wie 1 seen n 50 GR 9 A M HN R 4 2 up TE BK 2 4 3 1 5 8 8 To cable W 3 4 O F9GT HCABor 10 E d S F9GT HCABI 8 f E 6 9 gt D Handy GOT side BR 7 8 Spin D Sub male ca BL 8 9 59 Prepared by the user 4 __ E EE T PL 12 gt DC24VG PK 13 lt gt DC24VG FGR 14 gt common SB 15 gt SW Seon ae BK W 16 gt SW2 operation o R W 17 lt SW3 switches and 5 GR W 18 gt SW4 the emergency Boa ene gt ES1 Sc YN 22 gt ES1 SJ BL W 24 DC24V GY W 25 gt DC24V J FoGT HCABI1 EIEIM 5 529 E s MITSUBISHI 18 13 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FP Series PLC Manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works 18 C 2 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face Model name Application Connection diagram Application RS 232C DOO connect
104. Pr 79 Pr 79 Pr 79 Operation mode 340 mees 1 Computer link selection 2 1 ni2 Pr342 342 EP NM Write to RAM and EEPROM selection Pr 146 Frequency setting command selection a S500 Series Parameters n1 to n7 and n10 to n12 are set in the built in parameter unit When parameters are monitored from the GOT F900 they correspond to parameters Pr 331 to Pr 337 and Pr340 to Pr 342 respectively 2 2 2 2 2 O Volume disabled a MITSUBISHI 13 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 o 13 3 3 Inverter Connector Specifications 599 1 Pin layout in the PU port EE z Pinnumber Signalname Remarks When seen from the front of the inverter GND SG epu 55 8 M CH TXD SDB os T 5 TXD SDA Modular jack RXD RDB 8 EN S088 s e IR Es The contents inside indicate symbols described in the inverter manual Su gt The pins number 2 and 8 P5S are connected to the power supply for an operation panel or a parameter unit Do not use them in RS 422 communication I 2 Terminal block layout in the FR A5NR computer link option SE a Attach this option to the A500 Series 4 ra CN ud
105. RS 232C GT Designer DU WIN GOT units SWTA SWF SWD The screen creation software version corresponds to the model of the GOT F900 Series Refer to section 3 2 1 The RS 232C port for the Handy type GOT is provided inside the rear cover As a result environmental protection is lost when using this port and such a connection is not practical The Handy GOT can be connected as the final unit in a string of two or more GOTs 2 Connection of two or more GOT units is possible from the version shown in the table below For details about screen creation software version setting method in GOT and cable between GOTs refer to Chapter 7 Type F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT Handy F940GOT 2 2 Y 2 v2 S182 1 2 a MITSUBISHI 14 2 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 o 14 2 System Configuration 599 The microcomputer be directly connected to the GOT via RS 422 RS 232C This section explains Sus the cables required in such a system 14 2 4 Configuration for CPU Direct Connection RS 422 H Connect the GOT F900 to the RS 422 communication port of the microcomputer Sof 1 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT FE 8 amp GOT F900 a Microcomputer CPU direct connection b RS 422 cable F930GOT BES FE 5 88 F940GOT Connection of two or more GOT units EE 888
106. Sag Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC a MITSUBISHI 20 7 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SIMATIC 57 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 20 3 2 20 4 20 4 1 20 4 2 GOT F900 Transmission Specifications 1 Transmission specifications The GOT F900 is set to the following communication specifications Transmission speed 19200 bps Data bit 8 bits format Parity bit Provided even Stop bit 1 bit The specifications such as the transmission speed are fixed on the GOT F900 side and cannot be changed 2 Setting of the station number In the settings in the GOT F900 the destination station number DST STA corresponds to the PLC address in the SIMATIC 57 200 Series PLC And the GOT station number GOT STA corresponds to the GOT F900 station number Make sure to set a different value in the range from 0 to 31 to the DST STA and GOT STA respectively Setting in SIMATIC S7 300 400 When connecting the SIMATIC S7 300 400 Series PLC the communication specifications and the usage of the RS 232C port should be set using the peripheral equipment for the SIMATIC S7 300 400 series STEP Communication Setting Specifications oet the MPI address of the SIMATIC S7 300 400 Series PLC using the programming software for the SIMATIC S7 300 400 Series STEP7 MPI address Personal computer for programming 0 fixed in MPI network HMI adapter 1 fixed SIMATIC 57 300
107. Setup Language and Menu Key valid TUE Basic Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Handy GOT settings OK Key window GCursor display setting Cancel 5 2 Action when switching screens Don t display cursor and key window 9 amp When touch input is detected open key window at the same time T 2 OJO Click the Setup tab E 2 Basic Serial Port Setup Language Handy GOT settings o Opening Screen Time 5 iec Cancel Backlight Off Time 0 Hmn System Information Connection Buzzer Port R5422 1 ON E Type mk o C OFF 2g Station No BH 2 E 3t In the case of SW4D5C GOTR PACKE earlier than version A perform the setting in the GOT F900 Set the connection in CONNECTION in the GOT F900 5 For the setting method refer to 1 GOT F900 Series on the 5 previous page Boo Set the following eae Port RS 422 829 RS 232C Type LINK DST Station No Station No 00 to 31 GOT Station No _ 609 SOR o2 ONA a MITSUBISHI 15 15 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 Operation Display screen name Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows The Select Project a Open GT Designer dialog box appears b Click the Open button c Open read the screen data to be changed d On the menu select Common GOT PLC Type The GO
108. Switches and GR W 18 gt SW4 emergency BR W 21 gt ES stop YW 22 cs switch BL W 24 a gt DC24V GY W 25 DC24V J F9GT HCAB1 O0M a MITSUBISHI 8 16 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Model name Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 8 C 3 Female type Male type Application Connection diagram The connector figure shows the engagement face Application RS 232C connection Drain Prepared by the user F9GT HCAB LILIM gt FG Class D FXoN 232ADP grounding To cable F9GT HCAB Pu 1 tf to I i TT to ow t 5 P 3 I F9GT HCAB1 on Handy GOT side 25 25 pin D Sub male gt DC24VG DC24VG W common Wire the power gt SW1 supply the SW2 operation SW3 switches and gt SWA the emergency gt ES1 ES1 DC24V GY W 25 gt DC24V 4 J FoGT HCABI HIDM MITSUBISHI HS 232C Prepared by the user wire R To cable F9GT HCAB connection Drain 1 F9GT HCAB OOM FX1N 232 BD FX2N 232ADP 1 1 T D rmai FOGT HCAB1 on GR Handy GOT side B SODDR gt DC24VG U A DC24VG W common Wire the power E T
109. connector cable and distributor are introduced in Cable Diagram in this chapter Sog o 5500 F9GT HCAB LILIM It is called RS 485 communication port OOD B Prepared by the user a cable 10BASE T A500 PU port D F9GT HCNB 529 E Prepared by the user B50 cable 10BASE T os Ou o F9GT HCAB1 OOM A500 FR A5NR A F9GT HCAB LILIM Option for computer link connection is required C Prepared by the user 5 twisted pair cable 3 Prepared by the user E92 twisted pair cable Oss F9GT HCAB1 OOM The A500 Series can be connected using the PU port or the option for computer link connection 59 Though the port of the S500 Series is the RS 485 communication port it is called PU port in this S5 manual E S c Attaching a terminal resistor t Communication may be affected by reflection depending on the transmission speed and the transmission distance If communication is hindered by this reflection provide a terminal resistor When the PU port or the RS 485 port is used for connection 5 Attach a terminal resistor between the pin number 3 RDA and the pin number 6 RDB Boo Because the terminal resistor cannot be attached use the distributor Attach the terminal EG resistor only to the inverter located farthest from the GOT F900 terminal resistor 100 Q SIUE When the FR A5NR is used for connection Attach a terminal resistor chip included with the FR A5NR between the terminals RDB and
110. ee ee F94LIGOT SBD H E F94LIGOT SBD RH E E F94LIGOT LBD H E F94LIGOT LBD RH E Bum 1 The buzzer sounds as its power input from the outside of the GOT When a touch key on the screen is pressed the built in buzzer sounds The in built buzzer of F9220GOT K sounds only when the key pad is 3 External interface specifications L1 of the GOT model name indicates 0 or 3 FeacoT F930GOT K F930GOT BWD E Product model name F940WGOT SWD E F940GOT LWD E F930GOT BBD K E 9 pin D Sub male port 2 channels c E Q o 9 pin D Sub male port 9 pin D Sub male port RS 232C A AQUNC 4 40UNC 4 40UNC Serial Inch screw thread Inch screw thread 5 interface of 9 pin D Sub female port 9 pin D Sub female port 9 pin D Sub female port 0 M2 6 M2 6 M2 6 529 Metric screw thread Metric screw thread Metric screw thread For operation DU External 1 0 pu stop switch installation and Wiring of Handy GOT F9ALIGOT SBD H E F94LIGOT SBD RH E Product model name F920GOT BBD5 K E F94LIGOT LBD H E F94LIGOT LBD RH E 9 pin D Sub male 9 pin D Sub male 9 9 pin D Sub male port connector connector SpE RS 232C 4 40UNC Screen data transfer Screen data transfer 92 Serial Inch screw thread Dedicated to personal Dedicated to personal 55 interface computer port computer port 9 pin D Sub female port Dedicated port D
111. installation and Wiring of Handy GOT o 1 32 bit cannot be chosen when setting the screen creation software Sue Oo File number and element specification range 8265 ER the file number and an element in decimal numbers However specify the bit position of a bit in a hexadecimal number Available element co i 1 05D B 3 255 T NE 8 timing bit T 3 255 a 255 Bit Timer completion bit T 3 255 0 255 device Counter up counter C 3 255 0 255 ei Counter down counter C 3 255 0 255 soa Din Counter completion bit C 3 255 0 255 HE Timer set value T 3 255 0 255 Timer current value T 3 255 0 255 Counter set value C 3 255 0 255 evice 620 Counter current value Counter current value 3 255 0 255 zoa 9 o DP N 3 255 0 255 Sus 1 File numbers 3 to 255 are available in the user setting 2 For each element the bit position can be specified in the range from 0 to 15 54 Soo gut TE SEH Aa MITSUBISHI 3 21 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 7 S7 200 300 Series manufactured by Siemens 57 200 Series Setting range Device Device name number GT Designer FX PCS DU WIN representation Variable Memory V V00 V51197 V0 0 V5119 7 Input 1 1007177 10 0 17 7 Output 000 077 Q0 0 Q7 7 Bit o M00 M317 M0 0 M31 7 Word High Speed Counter HC 32bit 5 1 Bit devices T and C cannot be written 2 Word devices HC an
112. male FX1S FX1N CNV BD FXoN 232ADP FX1N FX1N CNV BD FXoN 232ADP FX2N FX2N CNV BD FXoN 232ADP 25 pin D Sub female F2 232CAB 1 Prepared by user FX2NC FXoN 232ADP cross cable FX1NC FXoN 232ADP 25 pin D Sub female QCPU CPU direct connection 6 pin MINI DIN I QnA computer link connection Prepared by user Q computer link connection Prepared by user Microcomputer connection Prepared by user Prepared by user Prepared by user 2 Handy GOT Connection of the Handy GOT is as shown below It is different from the cables shown in the table above c RS 422 F940 Handy GOT Prepare another cable connecting the 25 pin D Sub connector FX 232CAB 1 FX 232CAB 1 of the F9GT HCAB LILIM d RS 232C F943 Handy GOT Or connect the untied side of the F9IGT HCAB1 OOM a MITSUBISHI 7 4 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Two or More GOT Units 7 7 2 3 When Connection is Changed from RS 422 to RS 232C E This section explains the method to change connection from RS 422 to RS 232C using the FX 232AW C RS 422 RS 232C converter when the connected equipment FX A QnA Series PLC is the RS 422 type The configuration of the 1st unit is as shown in the table below For the details however refer to chapter explaining each connected equipment also 1 When the FX 232AW C is used o PLC
113. o When using the Handy GOT RH model refer to the cable diagrams below for the RS 422 RS 232C 20 g connector but not the wiring for the power supply the operation switches and the emergency stop 88 switch because it is different For details refer to Chapter 5 C 3 Female type Male type connector figure shows the engagement face Application Connection diagram Application 5 of OQ 5 0 RS 422 F9GT HCAB3 150 523 connection The connector on the 1 13 a F9GT HCAB 3M RS 23 c Dedicated connector E bar J y F9GT HCAB 10M connection 9n Handy GOT side cannot be prepared by M the user 14 25 25 pin D Sub male cm 25 Ot BLU The connector on the gt b F9GT HCAB1 3M Dedicated connector bis F9GT HCAB1 10M RS 232C on Handy GOT side ab no connector fon cannot be prepared by connec the user 090 Hostlink unit side pi d act FG class D grounding C200H side SYSMAC Series To cable 2 1 5 28 9 3 S C200H LK202 V1 F9GT HCAB1 on 6 osa Prepared by the user Handy GOT side 7 6 9 9 pin D Sub male PL 12 gt DC24VG 5 PK 13 gt DC24VG 500 O common Wire the power 9a SB 15 SW supply the Ene BK W 16 SW2 operation Oodd R W 17 gt SW3 switches and GR W 18 gt SWA us emergency 21 gt ES
114. open key window at the same time Click the Setup tab Basic Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Handy GOT settings OK Opening Screen Time p Sec Backlight Off Time Min r Connection Buzzer Port R5422 ON Type CPU M C OFF Station e Set the following Port RS 232C Type CPU DST Station No Station No 00 to 31 00 is treated as 01 GOT Station No Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows The Select Project a Open GT Designer dialog box appears b Click the Open button c Open read the screen data to be changed d On the menu select Common GOT PLC Type The GOT PLC Type dialog box appears a MITSUBISHI 18 10 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FP Series PLC Manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works 18 3 DU WIN 599 son Operation Display screen name Creation a Open the DU WIN The Project settings SEH dialog box appears b On the menu select File New H e o 9 o 25 Terminal Fa40GOT SWD Ess PLC System Cancel 8 a DU System Language English Character Set Japanese Set the following Sa l Terminal F940WGOT TWD V H ogg F940GOT LWD Sc gt F940GOT SWD F930GOT BWD PLC System Matsushita FP 2 Select Terminal accordance with the LC display color 6 Terminal Model name 3 9
115. setting Description Setting of Connected You can learn the method to make the functions and LEDs of the function 4 9 Equipment for GOT keys available using the screen creation software a MITSUBISHI 4 2 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of F920GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 4 1 Outline of Connection 2 2 This section explains the outline of the cables connecting the GOT F900 to the PLC E Panel installation GOT F900 Connection cable Wiring inside panel m FX 50DU CAB0 OM o e o 5 E a FX 40DU CAB OM d Ep installation and Wiring of F940GOT QC30R2 installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Prepared by user dus F940GOT os F940WGOT D amp de 32E Power supplied from external power supply 1 or service power supply of PLC a 24V DC T SEG FX 50DU CABO 1M FX 50DU CABO Sud F920 zoa GOT K MES OW O00 oar SET Prepared by user S fe de 549 gui E 858 1 Because the F940WGOT consumes much current it cannot be connected to the service power supply of the PLC Prepare an external power supply 2 The cable to connect the F920GOT K to the FX1 FX FX2 FX2c A and Qn
116. switches A r gt e gt ES 5 go x Use the RS 422 port on the rear D 8 h a face suey and operation switches FX 2PIF b RS 422 cable d RS 422 cable a Dedicated equipment e PLC FX PLC direct connection A Series CPU direct EE 8 pin MINI DIN or connection GPP function 25 pin D Sub connector Cables for the dedicated equipment a Dedicated equipment b RS 422 cable FX 10P FX 20P FX 20P CAB A6PHP A6GPP A7PHP 7 AC 30R4 Cables to the GOT F900 c RS 422 cable e PLC d RS 422 cable AJF9GT HCAB LILIM FX PLC direct connection 25 pin D Sub FX 422CAB B F9GT HCAB3 150 A Series CPU direct connection 25 pin D Sub FX 422CAB 150 C FX 40DU CAB D F9GT HCNB FX PLC direct connection 8 pin MINI DIN FX 422CABO OO indicates cable length MITSUBISHI 23 3 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Appendix 23 23 1 2 Restrictions in Number of Devices Monitored When Using FX 2PIF The table below shows the applicable PLC according to the versions of FX 2PIF When using with an A Series PLC there are restrictions in the quantity of data being monitored 1 System Condition Applicable PLC Versions of FX 2PIF Applicable dedicated equipment FXos FXoN FX1 F
117. the PPI side of the PC PPI cable 6 57 901 3BF20 0XA0 to the SIMATIC Sof 57 200 Series CPU then connect the connector on the PC side to the RS 232C communication port of 258 the GOT 88 Connect the HMI adapter 6ES7 972 0CA11 0XA0 to the SIMATIC 57 300 400 Series CPU then connect the RS 232C port of the HMI adapter to the RS 232C port of the GOT with a dedicated cable GES7 972 0CA10 0XA0 5 1 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT ed 26 GOT F900 b PC PPI cable a SIMATIC S7 Series SE CPU direct connection a p Pc i e 9 SIMATIC 87 200 Series FE o a a SIMATIC S7 Series CPU direct connection F940GOT b RS 232C Dedicated A F943GOT cable cable Zon a gt og 2 0 co z 82 SIMATIC 57 300 Series SIMATIC S7 400 Series SIMATIC 57 200 Series Ezo 6ES7 901 3BF20 0XA0 cable 50 manufactured by Siemens AG 9 pin D Sub b connector of 5 cable Be coo SIMATIC 57 300 Series 0 Prepared by the user Sa 9 pin D Sub 6ES7 972 0CA00 0XA0 cable D port of HMI manufactured by Siemens AG is also z available y COE Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC a MITSUBISHI 20 3 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 SIMATIC S7 400 Series Prepared by the user 9 pin D Sub Cable 6ES7 972 0CA00 0XAO0 port of HMI Manufactured by Siemens AG is also adap
118. type connection type and station number are overwritten a MITSUBISHI 7 12 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Two or More GOT Units 7 2 GT Designer E Creation a Open GT Designer The Select Project dialog box appears the NEW button The GOT PLC Type Sem dialog box appears GOT type 240 PLC type MELSEC FX i Cancel a Set the following GOT type F940WGOT 480 x 234 e F940GOT 320 x 240 F930GOT 240 80 PLC type MELSEC FX MELSEC A MELSEC QnA MELSEC Q Multi Computer Selection of GOT type GOT type Model name F940WGOT 480x234 lt WIDE gt F940WGOT F940GOT F940GOT 320x240 Handy GOT F930GOT F930GOT 240x80 ECCE Click OK d Set CPU direct connection RS 422 RS 232C of the GOT F900 The Project Auxiliary This setting is enabled in the SWAD5C GOTR PACKE version A Settings dialog box installation and Wiring of F940GOT installation and Wiring of Handy GOT or later 5 Make Serial Port Setup Language and Menu Key valid Sut o0 255 Basic Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Handy GOT settings o OA LL o m Key window Cursor display setting Cancel Action when switching screens Don t display cursor and key window v When touch input is detected open key window at the same time co CLL cna ge 52 Use serial Fort setup Language M
119. z TE n 332 Communication speed Communication speed om gt Stop bit length M Stop bit length 334 Parity check yes no ne Parity check yes no 334 Communication retry count 2 Communication retry count 9 9 ESS O Communication check time interval hd Communication check time interval s Waiting time setting a Waiting time setting Operation command right hs Operation command right n9 Speed command right nio Link start mode selection i CReE LF yes no selection 341 y ectio Computer link function Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Link start mode selection CReE LF yes no selection n12 E PROM write selection E PROM write selection 2 ale PU display language Sg 145 PIS oxo o n14 PU buzzer sound control 990 m PU main display screen data selection so no cco E og 9o os s 9 oon y O10 OVNA N 529 Eo Tt oz o OVNA a MITSUBISHI 13 25 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 13 7 Setting of Connected Equipment for GOT The FREQROL Series inverter connection parameters can be set using the GOT F900 Series or the screen creation software GT Designer and DU WIN 1 GOT F900 Series When the main menu screen change operation is disabled a While pressing and holding the upper left corner of the screen The LANGUAGE screen appears
120. 1 13 FX 422CABO i 14 25 25 pin D Sub male TO 2 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA 8 pin MINI DIN male TOT TO O1 RS 422 connection FX 232AW C 1 13 FX 422CAB 7 O O 14 25 25 pin D Sub male FX FX1 FX2 FX2c A QnA 1 O 14 25 pin D Sub male h RD OA h h b ah M M ON ON ON aan TO fo fO fo a MITSUBISHI 23 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Appendix 23 23 2 GOT F900 Connector Signal Correspondence Table Excluding the F920GOT K 23 2 1 RS 422 Correspondence Table Connection of Printer F9GT HCAB LIM F9GT HCAB1 LIM 9 pin D Sub female 25 pin D Sub male Loose wires 20 core 7 5 1 1 13 S OOOOOO0O0000000 M 59 MD AI Distinguished by color 999 9 6 14 25 oso F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT Handy GOT i F9GT HCAB LIM F9GT HCAB1 OM Pin number of D Sub RS 422 signal name FOGT HCAB LIM RS 422 signal name Black TXD SDA Se TXD SDA WC AN Appendix RTS RSA ue rans 816 7 r RXD DE Brown RXD 7 DB RTS RSB CTS CSB 23 2 2 RS 232C Correspondence Table Ner Green RTS RSB ors cs FS Geld Nr
121. 1 QnA Series PLC K gt D m PM K To computer link unit microcomputer board or lt another company s PLC To power supply and For the details refer to 5 4 2 operation switches L For the details refer to 5 4 3 In connection through RS 422 the connection distance between the Handy GOT and the PLC should be 11 5 m 37 9 maximum a MITSUBISHI 5 10 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 E o F9GT HCAB 3M 3m 9 10 External cable one side 25 D Sub F9GT HCAB 10M 10m 32 10 External cable F9GT HCAB1 3M 3m 9 10 one side Untied 20 core wires F9GT HCAB1 10M 10m 32 10 Relay cable for PLC connection PLC side 8 pin MINI DIN F9GT HCAB2 150 1 5m 4 11 2 Relay cable for PLC connection E PLC side 25 pin D Sub F9GT HCAB3 150 1 5m 4 11 Connector conversion box F9GT HCNB o Tu FX 50DU CABO 3m 9 10 f PLC connection cable PLC side 8 pin MINI DIN FX 50DU CABO 1M 1m 3 3 8 g PLC connection cable PLC side 25 pin D Sub FX 40DU CAB 3m 9 10 3 o 2 F943 Handy GOT For the details refer to 5 4 2 a C K gt lt gt jum to o cr cO Series PLC For power supply and operation switches b TE K To computer link unit SEE microcomputer boar
122. 14 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 8 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940NGOT E C 2 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face E Model name Application Connection diagram Application FXCPU direct RS 422 FXo FXos FX1s connection _ connection GOT F900 E gt 2 SEE FX2N FX 50DU CABO 1 lt gt 7 3 FX 50DU CABO EN 6 FX 50DU CABO 1M 4 gt 3 1 5 FX 50DU CAB0 10M 6 E FX 50DU CAB0 20M 9 pin D Sub male gt gt 5 0 FX 50DU CABO 30M 5 FX 50DU CABOL 8 pin MINI DIN male 5 RS 422 FXCPU direct 8 2 2 1 13 O O 14 25 25 pin D Sub male connection FX 40DU CAB FX 40DU CAB 10M FX 40DU CAB 20M FX 40DU CAB 30M FX 50DU CABL nN OR WP NO OSA Za AAAAAAAAA HU e LN ON ODN OO OS NO installation and Wiring of F940GOT 5 232 FXoN 232ADP connection FXCPU direct 13 connection F2 232CAB 1 o 6 14 25 25 pin D Sub male installation and Wiring of Handy GOT RS 232C FX1N 232 BD connection FX2N 232 BD FXCPU direct connection FX 232CAB 1 Connection of Peripheral Equipment 6 6 9 pin D Sub female 9 pin D Sub female Mm c o
123. 2 S COMO F930GOT F940GOT F940WGOT CPU communication circuit E gt RS 422 RS 422 for externally connected for externally connected Serial equipment equipment e anu ROI canon COMI F930GOT F940GOT F940WGOT a REN RS 232C RS 232C p for externally connected for externally pepe 7 F940GOT only equipment or personal computer connected M equipment COM2 F940WGOT only POWERLED RS 232C for personal computer MITSUBISHI 4 13 installation and Wiring of installation Connection of Peripheral Connection of Two or More GOT Units Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC and Wiring of Introduction Outline c 2 Q o Handy GOT F940GOT Equipment Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of F920GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 4 7 Wiring for 24V DC and 5V DC Power Supply and Class D Grounding To the F930GOT F940 W GOT the power is supplied from the PLC or from the external power supply 1 Current consumption in the GOT F900 The table below shows the current consumption in each case Current consumption Rewks rewioreWbE FewGOraDK meo F940GOT SWD E 410mA 24V DC F940WGOT TWD E 650mA 24V DC At power ON 750 mA 24V DC maximum is applied a Z 2 2 In the case of F920GOT K 5V
124. 232C of the GOT F900 The Project Auxiliary This setting is enabled in the SW4D5C GOTR PACKE version Settings dialog box or later Make Serial Port Setup Language and Menu Key valid Project Auxiliary Settings x Basic Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Handy GOT settings OK Key window GCursor display setting Cancel Action when switching screens Don t display cursor and key window When touch input is detected open key window at the same time Click the Setup tab Basic Serial Port Setup Language Handy GOT settings OK Opening Screen Time E Esec Backlight Off Time Eo r Connection Buzzer Port R5422 ON OFF Station No a MITSUBISHI 17 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Machine Controller CP9200SH PLC Manufactured by Yaskawa Electric 17 In the case of SW4D5C GOTR PACKE earlier than version XE perform the setting in the GOT F900 SEH Set the connection in CONNECTION in the GOT F900 For the setting method refer to 1 GOT F900 Series on the previous page S e Set the following FN Port RS 422 25 RS 232C EO Type CPU DST Station No Station No 01 to 16 00 is treated as 01 GOT Station No D Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows The Select Project
125. 3 leader side of the Handy FOGTHGAB1oM RS 2920 Defend GOT is dedicated and 7 j j connection y cannot be prepared by the user 14 25 25 pin D Sub male RS 422 The connector on the F9GT HCAB1 3M connection Dedicated connector ar ue Rs Untied cable b IF9GT HCAB1 10M RS 232C onHandy GOT side cannol bergrepared By no connector connection the user RS 422 F9GT HCAB LILIM connection Drain bom class D grounding PU port cable FOGT HCAB 19 5 4 MES on Handy GOT side 5 13 6 HE om 5 O 10 gt 1 W 3 gt 6 1 8 P d bv th BRUDER eee PJ 45 plug male repared by the user 25 pin D Sub female PL 12 gt DC24VG The diagram on the right PK 13 i Duro C shows the wiring of the RS 14 gt common wire the power 422 signals For wiring of SB 15 gt SW1 supply the the operation switches and BK W 16 gt SW operation Supply detente R W 17 gt SW3 switches and i GR W 18 gt SWA ye emergency RAN EINA gt ES1 Seien Y W 22 lt ES1 BL W 24 DC24V GY W 25 gt DC24V J FoGT HCAB1 HIDM RS 422 Drain v 2GT HCAB LILIM connection wire 1 jA ERES D grounding To cable FOGT HCAB BK 2 gt RDA on Handy GOT side 6 gt SDA 13 10 lt gt SG 5 qi Terminal block of Prepared by the user Ec VENE Na oi 25 pin D Sub female im dicis As The diagram on the right PK 13
126. 400 Series PLC 02 to 31 The MPI address of the HMI adapter is fixed to 01 and the highest MPI address is 31 Accordingly make sure to set the MPI address of the SIMATIC 57 300 Series PLC in the range from 2 to 31 GOT F900 Transmission Specifications 1 Transmission specifications The GOT F900 is set to the following communication specifications Set value Transmission speed 38400 bps Data bit 8 bits Data format The specifications such as the transmission speed are fixed on the GOT F900 side and cannot be changed 2 Setting of the MPI address station number setting switch The GOT F900 station number corresponds to the MPI address in the SIMATIC 7 300 400 Series PLC Accordingly align the destination station number or DST STA of the GOT F900 with the MPI address If the destination station number of the GOT F900 is set to 00 or 01 it is treated as 02 a MITSUBISHI 20 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 o 20 5 Device Specification Method 599 p This section explains the format used to specify devices of the SIMATIC 57 200 300 400 Series Sus For the device range which can be set in the GOT F900 refer to section 3 3 20 5 1 Device Format in SIMATIC 57 200 GT Designer version SW5 P 5 13P or later DU WIN version 2 60 or later 5 of 2 ES Bit device Bit device 0 coz except tim
127. 5 F940WGOT TWD V H F940WGOT color S32 F940GOT black and white ce Handy GOT black and white F940GOT color A Pee Handy GOT color os A F930GOT K blue ens poco oS F930GOT blue 858 d Set CPU direct connection RS 232C of the GOT F900 The Setup Data dialog On the menu select View Project System Settings Setup box appears Data 520 zog Setup Data X D u Opening Screen Time s Backlight Off Time Gancal Connection EE Port E Type Je oc PLO Station No 5 GOT Station No When touch input detected do nnt 212 e Set the following og Port RS 232C zm Type CPU FE DST Station No Station No 0 to 31 GOT Station No Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows a Open DU WIN b On the menu select File Open The Open dialog box O Select and open read the file of the screen data to be changed appears Sg o d When changing Terminal GOT F900 select View Project The Project settings System Settings Project settings on the menu dialog box appears ONN For the contents of setting refer to c in Creation above For selection of RS 232C RS 422 refer to e in Creation above 015 gon cag oz ONA a MITSUBISHI 18 11 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 18 6 Cable Diagram Connection of FP Series PLC Manufactured
128. 5 ET co z o gt b RS 232C cable Cable AFC8503S manufactured by 5 pin MINI DIN Prepared by the user tool port Matsushita Electric Works is 5 available tbe built ort may not be built some o5 FPO 3 wiretype Prepared by the user d Exo models OJO RS 232C COM port Ou o Applicable FP Series products in the column a are control units CPU units and computer communication units equipped with built in RS 232C interface oo 52 E59 852 Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 18 3 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FP Series PLC Manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works 18 2 F943 Handy GOT GOT F900 b RS 232C cable a FP Series CPU direct connection A A B OS a Handy GOT EDS 85 2320 s 1 i dd x 2 To power supply and opera
129. 7 252 9 pin D Sub female Li 9 RS 232C 1 MicroLogix N connection GOT F900 Sa port 5 5 1 4 4 E MicroLogix Series 5 Em Prepared by the user 6 925 9 pin D Sub female 8 9 8 pin MINI DIN female 1 1761 CBL PMO 2 cable Series C or later manufactured by Allen Bradley is available Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller FP Series PLC y c O Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 19 17 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley 19 2 Cable for the F943 Handy GOT and the PLC manufactured by Allen Bradley When using the Handy GOT RH model refer to the cable diagrams below for the RS 422 RS 232C connector but not the wiring for the power supply the operation switches and the emergency stop switch because it is different For details refer to Chapter 5 G3 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face No Model name Application Connection diagram Application jJ RS 422 o connection The connector on the 1 13 leader side of the
130. Base frequency voltage Base frequency voltage 20 Acceleration deceleration reference 20 Acceleration deceleration reference 20 Acceleration deceleration reference frequency frequency frequency compensation factor at double speed compensation factor at double speed compensation factor at double speed Multi speed setting speed 6 Multi speed setting speed 6 Multi speed setting speed 6 Multi speed setting speed 7 Multi speed setting speed 7 Multi speed setting speed 7 Stall prevention operation reduction rennet rn a seing votage LLL Freeney ar 2imningat Femency sro cure gai reaueney TF Sri grin dco section 3 Output frequency detection for reverse 43 Output frequency detection for reverse 43 Output frequency detection for reverse rotation rotation rotation A a MITSUBISHI 13 18 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 o 599 eee eee Second acceleration deceleration time Second acceleration deceleration time Second acceleration deceleration time 8s m Second deceleration time Second deceleration time Second deceleration time 5 Second torque boost Second torque boost Second torque boost O 5 Second V F base frequency Second V F base frequency Second V F base frequency 5 Second stall prevention operation current Second stall prevention operation current i O
131. CP9200SH PLC Manufactured by Yaskawa Electric 17 2 Software IE Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures Communication with the screen creation software and screen data cannot be transferred MITSUBISHI A machine controller bar code reader or printer is connected Causes The RS 232C connector to which the personal computer is connected is set to be used for another piece of equipment Countermeasures In the GOT F900 select by hand SELECT MODE OTHER MODE DATA TRANSFER Or set o bar code reader to invalid and a printer to DON T USE Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 and the personal computer e Causes The connected cable is not proper Or cable connection is not correct e Countermeasures Check the cable 17 15 Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC Connection of FX Series Positioning Connection of FREQROL Inverter Connection of Microcom puter Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Mm c O FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Machine Controller CP9200SH PLC Manufactured by Yaskawa Electric 17 MEMO a MITSUBISHI 17 16 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FP Series PLC Manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works 18
132. Cable for the GOT and the FX Series positioning unit C 3 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face Model name Application Connection diagram Application FX2N 10GM RS 422 FX2N 20GM 3 FX Series connection GOT F900 ICONES ICE I 4 1 OO 2 508 5 positioning unit 8 pin MINI DIN male connection 1 5 FX 50DU CABO P FX 50DU CABO 1M _ 6 9 FX 50DU CABOL 9 pin D Sub male 4o Jo oi EN AAAAAAA ARISGONN OOO ao RS 422 connection FX 10GM E 20GM 1 FX 20GM 0 J 11 20 20 pin D Sub male GOT F900 Series 1 positioning unit connection 5 ON gt 2 FX 30DU GM CAB 9 6 9 pin D Sub male SONO CUR eas AAAAAAAAA oC o ee S LQ DQ s HN VVVVVVY To e a MITSUBISHI 12 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FX Series Positioning Unit FX 2N 10 20GM 12 2 Cable for the Handy GOT and the FX Series positioning unit When using the Handy GOT RH model refer to the cable diagrams below for the RS 422 RS 232C connector but not the wiring for the power supply the operation switches and the emergency stop switch because it is different For details refer to Chapter 5 c o O
133. Cautions on Use of Printer When using the GOT F900 connected to the printer observe the following cautions on use Caution on printer setting When PRINTER is set to USE in SERIAL PORT RS 232C in the GOT F900 the RS 232C port of the GOT F900 is occupied for the printer In this status even if a personal computer is connected and screen data transfer or sequence program two port interface function transfer monitoring is executed the GOT F900 does not automatically change to the transfer screen And a communication error occurs in the application software installed in the personal computer Printer Communication error Personal computer 1 Avoidance Method When PRINTER is set to USE communication error can be avoided by executing an either operation Read and display the SELECT MODE screen then select OTHER MODE DATA TRANSFER Sequence program transfer monitoring Set PRINTER to DON T USE turn off the power then turn it on again 2 Priority of the RS 232C Port Functions From the functions having the highest priority the system checks whether the setting is provided If a certain function is set functions having lower priority are disabled For example when the PLC connection destination is set to RS 232C or when the bar code reader is set valid functions having lower priority such as screen data transfer and sequence program transfer moni
134. Connection Type oet the connection type in accordance with the connected equipment as shown in the table below Have in mind that computer link for Q serial communication unit and Q multiple PLC system requires CPU direct connection Connected equipment GOT F900 DU WIN classification in manual CONNECTION QCPU direct connection RS 232C port of QCPU card CPU direct connection RS 232C Programmingpot 0 port Q computer link QJ71C24 RS 422 RS 232C QJ71C24 R2 RS 232C 1 GOT F900 Series When the main menu screen change operation is disabled a While pressing and holding the upper left corner of the screen The LANGUAGE screen appears turn on the power Keep holding the upper left corner for about 25 seconds more Then press END at the upper right corner The SET UP MODE screen appears b Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears c Set the following PLC TYPE When monitoring only the connected CPU QnA Q SERIES When monitoring other CPU via Q multiple PLC system Q MULTI SERIES CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 422 CPU PORT RS 232C DST STATION STATION 00 GOT STATION When the main menu screen change operation is enabled Operation Display screen name a Press the upper left corner of the screen The position to be The SELECT MODE screen appears pressed can be changed in the GOT and the screen creation software Press OTHER MODE on the menu The OTHER MODE screen appears Pre
135. D9AC o Sa FE cuo SEE I S 555 o a 2 0 co z 82 5 20 cx D oec 59 ES col 838 59 9o 592 St o 5 9 oon Sag 529 500 ODD MITSUBISHI 11 11 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 11 4 Setting in Q Multi PLC System Function version B or later QCPU of function version B or later except QO0JCPU QOOCPU or Q01CPU is compatible with the multiple PLC system with 4 GOT units maximum If the OS version of the GOT F900 and the screen creation software is compatible with Q multiple PLC system the screen creation software can specify the monitoring of other GOT through the connected GOT and the CPU 11 4 4 Direct connection to QCPU The required setting and PLC numbers for connecting the GOT F900 to the programming port of QCPU RS 232C are shown below 1 GOT F900 connection Each QCPU can be connected to the GOT F900 Connection of two or more GOT units can be performed and 2 port interface function Program transfer and monitor using GX Developer is available Multiple PLC system M M M M HL LOI T TULI Ee IM GX D
136. DC is supplied from the PLC The F920GOT K can be connected to the FX1N 422 BD or FX2N 422 BD extension board mounted on the FX1S FX1N FX2N Series PLC Before connecting learn the restrictions described in Chapter 8 In the case of F930GOT and F940GOT When supplying the power from the service power supply of the FX Series PLC or extension unit take into consideration the total current supplied to proximity switches and extension blocks If the total current exceeds the capacity of the service power supply supply the power from the external power supply In the case of F9F40WGOT The current consumption is as shown in the table above Supply the power from the external power supply Momentary power failure excluding the F9220GOT K Even if momentary power failure of less than 5ms occurs in the power supply the GOT F900 continues the operation If long time power failure or voltage drop occurs the GOT F900 stops the operation When the power supply is recovered the GOT F900 automatically displays the title screen and then an user Screen 3 Electric wires to be used excluding the F920GOT K Use electric wires of 0 75mm or more in the wiring of the power supply so that voltage drop does occur Use solderless terminals for M3 and tighten them securely with the tightening torque of 0 5 to 0 8 Nem so that troubles are not caused a MITSUBISHI 4 14 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of F920GOT
137. DON T USE invalid When the main menu screen change operation is enabled Operation Display screen name a Press the upper left corner of the screen The position to be The SELECT MODE screen appears pressed can be changed in the GOT and the screen creation software b Press OTHER MODE on the menu The OTHER MODE screen appears Press SET UP MODE on the menu The SET UP MODE screen appears d Press GRIP SWITCH The GRIP SWITCH screen appears When the OS version is 6 00 or later Press HANDY GOT SETTING e Set the following USE valid or DON T USE invalid When the OS version is 6 00 or later The grip switch operation can be set Press an item to be changed HANDY GOT SETTING When using the grip GRIP SWITCH USE switch press the screen to display USE PUSH BUTTON WRITE DOES NOT WRITE SWITCH OFF ACTION TOUCH SWITCH OFF These items are added in the OS version 6 00 LED ACTION CONCURRENTLY WITH GRIP SWITCH When using RH model HANDY GOT SETTING GRIP SWITCH USE PUSH BUTTON WRITE DOES NOT WRITE gt These settings are invalid SWITCH OFF ACTION TOUCH SWITCH OFF LED ACTION CONCURRENTLY WITH GRIP SWITCH When the OS version is earlier than 6 00 Only the grip switch operation can be set When the screen data is transferred from the scr
138. F920GOT BBD5 K Japanese F920GOT BBD5 K E English Japanese English v v v Japanese F940GOT F930GOT RS 422 1 RS 232C 1 RS 232C 2 Handy GOT Handy GOT RH model RS 422 1 RS 232C 1 2 A change on a system screen can be made in the screen creation software or GOT main unit 3 The font which can be displayed on a user screen Depending on the OS the font may not be displayed even if it is built in the GOT F900 4 Only the Hangul is available a MITSUBISHI 1 7 Introduction Outline Specifications installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More GOT Units Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Introduction 1 1 2 4 Abbreviation List QCPU Q mode Generic name of QOOJCPU QO0CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU QO02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU units QCPU A mode Generic name of QO2CPU A Q02HCPU A and QO6HCPU A units QCPU Generic name of QCPU Q mode and QCPU A mode units Generic name of Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU and QnACPU argetype o A RCPU units Generic name of Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU and QnACPU smalltype o54SHCPU S1 units QnACPU Generic name of QnACPU large type and QnACPU small type units ACPU small type Generic name of A2US H CPU AnS H CPU and A1SJ H CPU units FX1N Series Ge
139. GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 2 F940 Handy GOT RS 422 a When one inverter is connected GOT F900 c RS 422 cable a Inverter INV 1 direct connection A B gt Bed gt gt EA 5 E x 25pin D Sub power supply and eee A switches E A 2 x Handy GOT E 4 89 422 1 ji 25 D Sub To power supply operation d _ A switches E gt E opc so Use the RS 422 D Sub D L port on the rear To power supply face and operation lt P switches F m gt G _ E 4 t_ E b Option To RS 422 power supply 9 and operation EE FSESIES SS GSJGS ES SG switches 7 Total extension distance 11 5m 37 9
140. GOT F900 Series Integrated screen development software for GOT900 Series SWLID5C GOTR PACKE GT Simulator English version Screen creation software for GOT900 ares SWOID5C GOTR PACKE English PACKE GT version SWLIDS5C GTWORKS E 1 JE lt 5 D installation and Wiring of F940GOT Designer Software dedicated to version upgrade SWLIDSC GOTR PACKEV from conventional version to latest SWLID5C GOTR PACKE English version Abbreviation of screen creation software FX PCS DU WIN E for GOT F900 ERN Series installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Others FX WIN Abbreviation of programming software FX PCS WIN E for FX Series PLC Data conversion Abbreviation of data conversion software GOT Converter for GOT900 n software Series c OTE Debugging software Abbreviation of debugging software GOT Debugger 9 E Object Parts and setting data on the screen 555 Windows95 Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows95 Windows98 Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows98 Windows NT4 0 Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4 0 E 3c Windows 2000 Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional 975 S Generic name of Windows95 Windows98 Windows NT4 0 and 2m Windows OFO Windows2000 Personal computer Personal computer compatible with Windows to which GT Designer or FX PC PCS DU WIN E is installed o S Te ZOL o E This manual describes the following product in th
141. GT Designer dialog box appears 29 b Click the Open button c Open read the screen data to be changed ous d On the menu select Common GOT PLC Type The GOT PLC Type dialog box appears d I Qg o0 653 2 0 co z Sad SZO ex o Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 17 9 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 17 5 Cable Diagram Connection of Machine Controller CP9200SH PLC Manufactured by Yaskawa Electric 17 This section explains cable diagrams to connect the GOT F900 and the MP900 CP9200SH machine controller 1 Cable for the GOT and the machine controller C 3 Female type Male type Model name The connector figure shows the engagement face Application Connection diagram Application RS 422 connection GOT F900 CP 2171F FG class D FG class D MEMOBUS unit SS grounding 7 grounding t gt RXD RDA RXD RDB Machine controller CP 2171F Prepared by the user gt TXD SDA 50 Signal name of OVS 6 C 69 6 MEMOBUS port 9 pin D Sub male AOC 8 pin male RS 232C connection Machine controller CP 2171F Prepared by the user RS 232C connection MP920 MP930 CP
142. HO1 to SP127 by communication is set in numeric display Sum Station Instruction codes Data ENQ check H5 HFF H01 2 Writes the second parameter changeover H02 to SP108 changeover to the rotation direction then transfers it Program CHR operation PG ENQ Station H5 Instruction codes H6C Data H02 Sum check CR 3 Pr201 is read ENQ Station H5 Instruction codes Data H01 Sum check CR The link parameter extension setting and the second parameter changeover are instruction codes in communication 5 Related parameters Set the following parameters to desired values Pr 200 Time unit in program Select minute and second or hour and minute Pr 231 Time setting Set the time used as the reference of program operation 13 16 a MITSUBISHI GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 SOO Device name in GOT F900 Function of inverter T c Am This communication function of the inverter can be executed using the instruction code number 8s When an instruction code is written to the special parameter SP device in the GOT F900 communication with the inverter is executed Device in Instruction code Corresponding EE GOT Read devicein 32 SP108 Second parameter changeover switch
143. Handy x a F9GT HCAB 3M RS 232C Dedicated connector GOT is dedicated and y F9GT HCAB 10M on Handy GOT side cannot be prepared by the user 14 25 25 pin D Sub male RS 422 The connector on the connection leader side of the Handy Loose wires b F9GT HCAB1 3M Dedicated connector GOT is dedicated and no connector FOGT HCAB1 10M RS 232C on Handy GOT side cannot be prepared by connection the user F9GT HCAB LILIM RS 232C Drain ma connection wire 1 Apap ASS P T i SLC500 side 3 COM port To cable w 4 ER 2 F9GT HCAB or B SG GND 5 F9GT HCAB1 GR 5 4 6 DR Handy GOT side 6 44 3 7 RS RTS onin n BR 7 5 9 01 D Sub male 9 NC 1 2 2 i SHELL c inep PK 13 gt DC24VG FGR 14 gt common SB 15 gt SW1 pee BK W 16 gt SW2 operation R W 17 gt SW3 switches and GR W 18 gt SWA ve emergency PES Y W 22 lt gt ES1 BL W 24 DC24V GY W 25 DC24V J FoGT HCAB1 HIDM F9GT HCAB LILIM RS 232C Drain M as FG class D grounding connection wire 1 1 24V MicroLogix R 4 4 RD RXD COM port BK 2 7 SD TXD 3 W 3 5 CD DCD 6 To cable 2 SG GND 4 F9GT HCAB GR 5 8 SG GND F9GT HCAB1 on Y 6 3 RS 2 Handy GOT side BR 7 8 SHELL 8 pin MINI DIN d MicroLogix Series Stent female Prepared by the use
144. Handy GOT RS 422 RS 232C 5 converter joo 8 b RS 422 2 c RS 2320 A 4 amp 65 o gt 9 S SUNG DN S Sy D gt FX 232AW C installation and Wiring of F940GOT a FX A QnA Series PLC b RS 422 cable c RS 232C cable FX FX1 FX2 FX2c CPU direct connection 25 pin D Sub FX 422CAB F2 232CAB 1 A QnA CPU direct connection installation and Wiring of Handy GOT CPU direct connection 15 FX1N 422 BD 8 pin MINI DIN FX 422CABO F2 232CAB 1 FX1N 4 FX1N 422 BD FX2N FX2N 422 BD o c c O Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 7 5 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Two or More GOT Units 7 7 3 Rules in Configuration The GOT F900 is equipped with two or more built in serial communication connectors Through alternate connection up to four GOT F900 units can be connected This section explains the rules in configuration through alternate connection 7 3 1 Connection Method By using the two channel serial communication function built in the GOT two or more GOT units can be connected alternately daisy chain connection 1 Connection condition Two or more GOT units can be connected to the following equipment
145. Inch screw thread n COCO 9 6 6 9 CTS CSA ER DT Signal wire for communication with PLC SG GND SG GND For the wiring refer to the section corresponding to DR DSR the connected PLC 7 RXD RDB RS RTS 078058 a MITSUBISHI 4 12 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of F920GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 4 6 Outline of Internal Wiring The figure below shows the internal wiring of the GOT F900 F920GOT K F930GOT K Display circuit 2 LCD panel Power C r supply O 2 F930GOT K only circuit Touch switch circuit OQ F930GOT K only CPU communication circuit RS 422 DC power is supplied Sans a i for externally connected from PLC when using t TIN a CPU memory communication A equipment gos _ RS 232C l m gt for externally connected equipment or I O interface personal computer Function keys with indicator LEDs 1 Ten key pad Cursor key L J 1 F930GOT K only F930GOT F940GOT F940WGOT Display circuit LCD panel Power Q EEO circuit Oll Touch switch circuit 4
146. PID integral time PID integral time 90 PID integral time Z tas ore searre oupa emassen ff over sequence output terminal selection 137 Start waiting time PID action selection PID action selection PID action selection 2 CR LF presence absence selection CR LF presence absence selection 29 Co Co PID control 3 13 Commercial power supply inverter switch over selection at alarm occurrence switch over 4 ao D zo otc 2 co o ES O Automatic inverter commercial power supply switch over frequency 140 Backlash acceleration stopping frequency ER EX s gt EN 139 141 Backlash acceleration stopping time 142 Backlash deceleration stopping frequency c x 9 en 143 Backlash deceleration stopping time 144 Speed setting switch over 145 Parameter unit language switch over 145 Parameter unit language switch over 48 Stall prevention operation level at OV input Frequency setting command selection Stall prevention operation level at 10V input Output current detection level 150 Output current detection level A co functions 8 9 0 Output current detection level Output current detection period Output current detection period Output current detection period Zero current detection time 152 Zero current detection time Zero current detection time c
147. PLC 8 9 8 4 Setting of Connected Equipment for 8 10 89 219 Fe 6 tute tuae ect rct Uu Mee eRe MIN IN 8 14 9 6 TROUDIGSNOOUNG sd hee ete a a A 8 18 9 Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 1 mE Iii dre soie erm 9 2 9 2 Systeln GohllgdlatlOl ao esa dut 9 2 9 2 1 Configuration for Direct Connection 422 9 3 9 2 2 Configuration for A Computer Link Connection 422 9 5 9 2 3 Configuration for A Computer Link Connection 232 9 7 9 3 Setting in A Computer Link 9 9 9 3 1 Communication Setting Specifications 9 9 9 3 2 Setting of CD Signal Control only in RS 232C connection 9 10 9 9 9 EXIT OSs ie Du 9 11 9 3 4 Used Connectors and Connector 9 14 9 3 5 Cable Specifications and 9 14 9 4 Caution on Use of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 15
148. PLC When the screen data is transferred to the GOT F900 the old data including the PLC type connection type and station number are overwritten Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 12 5 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FX Series Positioning Unit FX 2N 10 20GM 12 2 GT Designer Creation a Open GT Designer The Select Project dialog box appears b Click the New button The GOT PLC Type GOT type Fo4 GOTG20 X 240 v OK type Fx 2N 10GM 20GM Cancel Set the following GOT type F940WGOT 480 x 234 lt WIDE gt F94 GOT 320 x 240 F93 GOT 240 x 80 PLC type FX 2N 10GM 20GM Selection of GOT type GOT type Model name F940WGOT 480x234 WIDE F940WGOT F940GOT F94 GOT 320x240 Handy GOT F930GOT K F93 GOT 240x80 F930GOT Click OK d Set CPU direct connection RS 422 of the GOT F900 The Project Auxiliary Make Serial Port Setup Language and Menu Key valid Settings dialog box Basic Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Handy GOT settings OK Key window Cursor display setting Cancel Action when switching screens Don t display cursor and key window When touch input is detected open key window at the same time Clic
149. PLC TYPE screen appears e Set the following PLC TYPE QnA Q SERIES QnA CPU QnA computer link A SERIES A computer link CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 422 CPU PORT RS 232C LINK PORT RS 422 LINK PORT RS 232C DST STATION STATION 00 to 15 GOT STATION PLC TYPE CONNECTION STATION destination QnACPU direct CPU PORT nA eee QnA Q Series link unit LINK PORT A computer link A Series or A RS 422 QnA Series LINK PORT When the screen data is transferred to the GOT F900 the old data including the PLC type connection type and station number are overwritten The PLC type selection item display varies depending on the OS version as follows RS 232C PLC TYPE selection item display in GOT GOT F900 A QnA A SERIES 1 SERIES QnA Q SERIES F940WGOT ee 1 00 or later F940GOT Handy GOT 1 00 or later 3 00 or later 4 10 or later OS version F9380GOT 1 00 or later 2 00 or later 2 20 or later Not available Available Connection setting availability A computer link connection Available Select QnA Q is available SERIES 1 Note that the selection item on the menu is changed from A QnA SERIES to A SERIES and QnA Q SERIES a MITSUBISHI 10 14 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 2 GT Designer Creation a Open the GT Designer The Select Project dialog box appears b Click the New button The GOT PLC Type GOT type Fo4 GOTG2
150. PLC is connected a device exists only in the AnU Series PLC is specified for numeric input Cause 8 On the changeover destination screen excluding the head screen a nonexistent device in the connected A Series PLC is specified Countermeasures 6 Check the devices used on the head screen 5 When a PLC is not connected the GOT defaults to the 9 A mode y DISPLAY SCREEN IS NOT AVAILABLE is displayed on the GOT F900 screen Earlier Earlier e Cause than than Check for the A or AnU Series was executed the 6 00 4 00 connection mode was automatically changed over then the device range was checked This error occurs when the device range set on the changeover destination screen excluding the head screen is beyond the range for the A Series Countermeasures Connect the PLC installation and Wiring of F940GOT There is an error on the screen to be displayed installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Cause One of the screen objects is placed outside the available screen area Countermeasures Check the placement of screen objects Sc z06 The display screen contains an error 92E DISPLAY SCREEN Causes A device that does not exist in the connected PLC is IS NOT AVAILABLE From RA referenced on the screen No or one of the 6 00 4 00 is first screen objects is placed outside the available screen later later 90 displayed on the product
151. PLC manufactured by Siemens AG 1 Cable for the GOT and the PLC manufactured by Siemens AG C 2 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face 2 Lok Model name Application Connection diagram Application FE RS 232C SIMATIC S7 connection PC PPI port 5 1 SIMATIC 57 200 Series RS 232C e RS 485 6 P s O S 6ES7 901 3BF20 0XA0 cable 9 6 525 manufactured by Siemens AG 9 pin D Sub COT female male Sr gt RS 232C CD 1 DCC connection io s p SIMATIC S7 HMI Adapt SIMATIC S7 300 400 Series 4 UM Adapteri Prepared by the user e b SE 6 38 6ES7901 1BF00 0XAO0 cable 6 7 6 cog manufactured by Siemens AG b 8 9 pin D Sub o a is available also 9 Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Mm o O SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 20 17 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 2 Cable for the F943 Handy GOT and the PLC manufactured by Siemens AG When using the Handy GOT RH model refer to the cable diagrams below for the RS 422 RS 232C connector but not the wiring for the power supply the operation switches and the emergency stop switch because it is different For details refer to Chapter 5 C 3 Female type Mal
152. Preparation Wemmme Reference NN You can learn the connection availability as well as the version of the 13 1 y GOT F900 OS and the screen creation software l 8g 3 You can select the configuration between the GOT and the FREQROL System Configuration 13 2 ome inverter and proper cables 2 Setting Setting in FREQROL When INVCPU connection is selected the GOT F900 is automatically set 13 3 9 9 Inverter to fixed values No setting is required in the FRQROL inverter 525 Q Cautions on Use of FREQROL Series You can learn the restrictions in connecting the GOT to the FREQROL 13 4 Inverter Inverter Correspondence You can learn correspondence between GOT devices and parameters as zOn between GOT Devices e 13 5 94 well as communication cz and Parameters SOs You can compare parameters of the A500 the E500 and the S500 13 6 Parameter List Set the PLC type using the GOT or the screen creation software 13 7 5 Equipment for GOT 9 i i 520 ED 0 cx 2 Others Sus Cable Diagram Cable diagrams for FREQROL inverter GOT connection Troubleshooting Description of errors and how to fix them 25 5 ozs 59 9o o 2 i Ou 5 9 85 C10 595 529 SE e o ONA aA MITSUBISHI 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 13 1 13 2 13 2 1 System Condition
153. RDR of the last inverter EDO oo a MITSUBISHI 13 5 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 13 3 13 3 1 Setting in FREQROL Inverter When connecting the FREQROL Series inverter the parameter should be set as described below Communication Setting Specifications This section explains the contents to be set in the FREQROL Series inverter 1 2 Setting the transmission specifications set the transmission specifications of the inverter to realize the transmission specifications shown in the table below For the setting method refer to the manual of the inverter For the communication setting parameters refer to the next section Communication speed 19200 bps Control protocol Asynchronous system Communication method Half duplex method Character system ASCII 7 bits pd Parity check Provided odd format Check system Sumcheck check Provided Waiting UM MM setting Not provided specifications such as the transmission speed are fixed on the GOT F900 side and cannot be changed Setting the station number For the communication setting parameters refer to the next section Setting in the Inverter oet each station number in the range from 00 to 31 while making sure that one station number is used only once In the case of RS 422 connection 10 inverters can be connected at maximum The station number can be set without reg
154. S 2 4 Indicates special care must be taken when using this element of software 5 Indicates a special point which the user of the associate software element should be aware of 6 Indicates a point of interest or further explanation MITSUBISHI v GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION e Under no circumstances will Mitsubishi Electric be liable responsible for any consequential damage that may arise as a result of the installation or use of this equipment e All examples and diagrams shown in this manual are intended only as an aid to understanding the text not to guarantee operation Mitsubishi Electric will accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples Please contact a Mitsubishi distributor for more information concerning applications in life critical situations or high reliability Note to user This manual describes the connection procedure to connect the graphic operation terminal GOT F900 Series to a MELSEC FX A QnA Q Series PLC PLC by another company printer bar code reader etc Please read this manual before using the GOT F900 Series understand sufficiently the use of the product then use correctly the product For the contents related to the specifications and the operations such as the display function of the product refer to the USER S MANUAL of each product offered separately For the details about screen creation for GOT F900 refer to th
155. SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 OS version Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures aiu Coments points and countermeasures F940W F940 F930 F920 A device that does not exist in the QnA Series PLC was referenced Example While an QnA Series PLC is connected a device exists only in the Q Series PLC is specified for numeric input e Cause On the changeover destination screen excluding the head screen a nonexistent device in the connected QnA Series PLC is specified e Countermeasures Check the devices used on the head screen When a PLC is not connected the GOT defaults to the DISPLAY SCREEN QNA mode IS NOT AVAILABLE is displayed on the GOT F900 screen Earlier Earlier Cause than than Check for the A or QnA Series was executed the 6 00 4 00 connection mode was automatically changed over then the device range was checked This error occurs when the device range set on the changeover destination screen excluding the head screen is beyond the range for the A Series Countermeasures Connect the PLC There is an error on the screen to be displayed Cause One of the screen objects is placed outside the available screen area Countermeasures Check the placement of screen objects The display screen contains an error Causes DISPLAY SCREEN A device that does not exist in the connected PLC is IS NOT AVAILABLE From N
156. SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC was tried ee eoa Er IS NOT AVAILABLE zog is displayed on the Po nan man E E The changeover destination screen has not been created yet 6 00 4 00 cot GOT F900 screen gt Countermeasures O00 Create the screen DISPLAY SCREEN A nonexistent screen was tried to be displayed IS NOT AVAILABLE Gauss 6 00 520 Ww sw NO THHHE 18 The screen No has not been created yet displayed the GOT later clit Countermeasures gis F900 screen Create the screen A device that does not exist in the SLC500 MicroLogix Series was referenced Example While an SLC500 is connected a oc device exists only in the MicroLogix is specified for numeric 59 input ace col Cause 822 On the changeover destination screen excluding the head DISPLAY SCREEN screen a nonexistent device in the connected SLC500 IS NOT AVAILABLE MicroLogix Series PLC is specified Earlier Earlier 59 is displayed on the Countermeasures nen wen 9 GOT F900 screen Check the devices used on the head screen 6 00 4 00 E S There is an error on the screen to be displayed 98 Cause One of the screen objects is placed outside the available E screen area qom Countermeasures Soo Check the placement of screen objects l ODD 529 son oz o ONN a MITSUBISHI 19 19 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley 19 Contents of tro
157. SW1 40 SW 2 and 2 stop bits a o sw 0 SWA4 4 Selector SW for absence or presence ES of terminal resistor zga Set it to ON to set presence cx O 5 Selector SW for 1 1 1 N LG procedure Set it to OFF to set the 1 N procedure Switch setting on the rear face ES FE 838 59 9o 5 0 5 9 oon 23 g 529 TE ONA a MITSUBISHI 15 9 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 15 4 Setting in CS1 Serial Communication Unit When setting the GOT F900 to the CS1 Series serial communication unit the following data should be written to the data memory DM using a peripheral tool 15 4 1 Communication Setting Specifications This section explains the communication specifications set in the serial communication unit 1 Setting the transmission specifications oet the transmission specifications in the serial communication unit setting as shown in the table below For the switch setting method refer to the manual of each host link unit mem sae Rem 0 Data omal sopbi The specifications such as the transmission speed are fixed on the GOT F900 side and cannot be changed 2 Setting the unit number station number setting switch The unit number is regarded as the station number in the GOT F900 As shown in the table below the setting range varies depending on the OS version GOT F900 Setting
158. SW1 supply the gt SW2 operation SW3 switches and gt SWA eo RE EST switch gt ES1 GY W 25 gt DC24V DC24V J A FoGT HCABI HIDM 8 17 Introduction installation installation and Wiring of and Wiring of Handy GOT F940GOT Specifications Outline Connection of Peripheral Equipment Mm c o c c O Two or More GOT Units Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 8 8 6 Troubleshooting For reference this section summarizes frequently asked questions about connection of the GOT F900 to the FX Series PLC The slightly different messages may be displayed on the F920GOT K 1 GOT F900 OS version Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures eee contents Cec points and countermeasures 4 F940 F930 20 The power of the FX Series PLC is turned off COMMUNICATION Cause ERROR OCCURS is Communication is disabled because the power of the displayed when a FX Series PLC is turned off screen changeover Countermeasures or numeric data input Turn on the power is performed on the GOT F900 screen by a touch key 1 Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT product product product product F900 and the FX Series PLC Causes
159. Screen Creation Software and Correspondence to GOT F900 3 6 3 2 1 How to Conform Version of Screen Creation Software 3 6 3 2 2 Screen Creation Software Version Corresponding to GOT F900 Series 3 7 3 2 3 Screen Creation Software Corresponding to Each Connected Equipment 3 8 3 3 Device Names Which can be Monitored 3 10 Devices In detecte beet hot cn E eit an o eter td 3 10 93 2 PEC MIISUDISIIL i eei Hen cos a as maet dd ee mu 3 11 3 3 3 PLC Units Manufactured by Other Companies 3 16 3 4 Hardware Specifications ccccccccccsssceccssececceseeccsegeeeseeececseeecesseaeeesseneeesaeeessas 3 24 4 Installation and Wiring of F220GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 1 4 4 Q tline Of CONMECUON uoi duo deett de E Doc eoru Decii p terio ald chad 4 3 4 2 Name o Eder T abt d suu a 4 4 A220 Front P AMC ada 4 4 2 2 xcii NEST T IL 4 4 4 2 9 FUNCIONO POMS enata ee Oo Rr epa EROR roc re dae RED 4 5 Processing OF Palel fa Du dtiesEare Vetus dota enda Dus uud 4 7 4 3 1 Panel Cut Dimension seeesssessssssssssseeeseeena nenn
160. Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 3 DU WIN Operation Display screen name Setting a It is supposed that the DU WIN has started and the screen data to The Screen List window be set has been read appears b Select Common Screen on the Screen List window by clicking it to be highlighted fig Screen List Project2 Header Objects Keys Exit If the window is closed select View Project Screen List on the menu LED setting c Click the Objects button The Objects Scr Operation switch Common window appears Select Object Indicator Output Indicator on the menu Output Indicator is displayed in the New Object Type Object Type field on the Objects Scr Common Project2 Output Indicator Objects Scr Common window a MITSUBISHI 5 42 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 E gt e Click the Insert button The Output Indicator a i Bit Device m 00 DU Output Cancel r Operating when On Ott TT Input a bit device to be assigned and click OK 8 Refer to Caution on setting of Output Indicator below Close all windows except the Screen List window Switch setting f Select View Project System Settings Setup Data The Setup Data dialog Grip switch g The setting varies depending on the version of the screen box appear
161. Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Manufactured by Fuji Electric 16 16 7 Troubleshooting For reference this section summarizes frequently asked questions about connection of the GOT F900 to the FLEX PC N Series PLC 1 GOT F900 Contents of troubl Check points and t OS version ontents of trouble eck points and countermeasures sd F940 F930 The power of the FLEX PC N Series PLC is turned off Cause Communication is disabled because the power of the FLEX COMMUNICATION PC N Series PLC is turned off ERROR OCCURS is Countermeasures displayed when a Turn on the power screen changeover or numeric data input is Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 and performed on the the FLEX PC N Series PLC GOT F900 screen product product product e Causes The wrong cable is used or the connection is bad e Countermeasures Check the cable Changeover to a nonexistent screen by a touch key or the DISPLAY SCREEN FLEX PC N Series PLC was tried IS NOT AVAILABLE Earlier Earlier is displayed on the 59088 than than 900 screen The changeover destination screen has not been created yet 6 00 4 00 Countermeasures Create the screen A nonexistent screen was tried to be displayed DISPLAY SCREEN IS NOT AVAILABLE NO is displayed on the GOT F900 screen Cause 6 00 or 4 00 o
162. Series b RS 422 cable Remarks E 5 5 5 NB RS1 AC A FOGT HCAB EIEIM oza NB RS1 DC Terminal B F9GT HCNB NJ RS4 block C Prepared by the user 5 NS RS1 D F9GT HCAB1 OOM Som me ez Applicable FLEX PC N Series products in the column a are link units equipped with built in RS 422 52 interface Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 16 3 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Manufactured by Fuji Electric 16 16 2 2 Configuration for Link Unit Connection RS 232C The GOT F900 and the link unit can be connected on the 1 1 basis GOT F900 units as many as the number of link units attached to the FLEX PC N Series PLC can be connected 1 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT GOT F900 a FLEX PC N Series link unit HE b RS 232C cable 4 bam F940GOT a FLEX PC N Series b RS 232C cable Remarks NB RS1 AC NB RS1 DC NJ RS2 NS RS1 NJ CPU B16 15 pin D Sub Prepared by the user D Applicable FLEX PC N Series products in the column a are link units equipped with built in RS 232C interface 25 pin D Sub Prepared by the user 2 F943 Handy GOT
163. Sr Mer consan a 0 EE o O Ol e kj c 8 93 Motor constant L2 5 e e EZ 96 Auto tuning setting status 96 Auto tuning setting status o o ooo S so N 509 coa Oo o Lo ozo Onw a MITSUBISHI 13 19 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 100 V F1 101 V F1 102 V F2 103 V F2 104 V F3 105 V F3 106 V F4 107 V F4 fourth frequency voltage Ea EX E E Es 108 V F5 fifth frequency Ea E Ea 289 is ee first frequency first frequency voltage second frequency second frequency voltage third frequency third frequency voltage characteristics fourth frequency LL Omm gt XD 2 gt lt E _ a LO 109 V F5 fifth frequency voltage 110 111 Third deceleration time Third acceleration deceleration time 112 Third torque boost 113 Third V F base frequency Third functions 114 Third stall prevention operation current 115 Third stall prevention operation frequency 116 Third output frequency detection 123 Waiting time setting Waiting time setting 117 Station number 117 Station number 118 Communication speed 118 Communication speed pa NENNEN 124 128 129 PID proportional band PID proportional band 89 PID proportional band 130
164. TE Define data blocks for the SIMATIC 57 300 Series PLC CPU using the STEP7 in advance and download them to the CPU 2 relay x The English IEC expression is used in the GOT F900 588 When the German SIMATIC expression is selected in the STEP7 devices E A Z Tr equivalent to 1 Q and C respectively SEL 3 Device check range Because the GOT F900 does not discriminate the CPU type between the 57 300 Series CPU and the 57 400 Series CPU the device range is in accordance with devices which can be monitored 5 For the device range which be set the GOT F900 refer to section 2 3 BE 4 Peripheral equipment for the SIMATIC S7 300 400 Series SEE The STEP7 is the name of the programming software for the SIMATIC S7 300 400 Series 20 6 Caution on Use of SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC E S When using the GOT F900 connected to the SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC observe the 22 following cautions on use ges 20 6 1 Restriction in devices depending on the model some devices are not available in the 416 1 and the 416 2DP 600 20 6 2 Restriction in device specification 895 c 0 Word specification of bit devices and bit specification of word devices not enabled the GOT 358 F900 o EZO cis oec 59 oo 225 59 So 52 eo St o 5 9 oon en 595 Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 20 11 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SIMAT
165. The CPU of the FX A QnA Q Series PLC The QnA Q Series serial communication unit personal computer or microcomputer board 2 Example of connection using F940GOT units F940GOT F940GOT F940GOT F940GOT RS 422 RS 422 RS 422 RS 422 RS 232C MY RS 232C RS 232C RS 232C 3 Example of connection including a Handy GOT unit Connected equipment RS 422 F943 Handy F940GOT F940GOT F940GOT RS 422 RS 422 RS 422 Connected equipment RS 422 In RS 422 connection one F940 Handy GOT unit can be connected 4 Example of unallowable connection F940GOT RS 422 RS 232C Connected Connected equipment RS 422 Only one equipment can be connected to one GOT unit equipment RS 232C F940GOT F940GOT F940GOT F940GOT RS 422 RS 422 RS 422 RS 422 Connected equipment RS 422 The 1 N link connection with RS 422 485 is not allowed a MITSUBISHI 7 6 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Two or More GOT Units 7 7 3 2 Communication Port Number Table E gt The GOT F900 Series is equipped with built in serial interfaces as shown below F940WGOT RS 232C RS 232C Three channels are built in F940GOT F930GOT K RS 422 RS 232C Not provided Two channels are built in F930GOT ERT 5 F940 Handy GOT RS 422 Not provided Not provided One channel is built in one RS 232C channel for personal comp
166. The PLC easy link function enables to connect up to eight FX1S FXoN FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2NC series PLC units To each PLC unit GOT F900 units can be connected Applicable PLC Total PLC extension distance FX1N 485 BD 50m 164 FX1S FX1N Series FX1N CNV BD FXoN 485ADP 500m 1640 FX2N 485 BD 50m 164 FX2N Series FX2N CNV BD FXoN 485ADP 500m 1640 FX1NC FX2NC FXoN 485ADP 500m 1640 When the FX1N FX2N 485BD is included in the system the total extension distance is 50m 164 Configuration example FX2N 485 BD FX2N Series D Le Lala A Adala v v SS HHHH Le oem E3JEJEJEJEJ BBEBBHH a MITSUBISHI 7 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Two or More GOT Units 7 7 5 7 5 1 Cautions on Connecting Two or More GOT Units This section explains the cautions on use of two or more connected GOT units Power ON Sequence When connecting two or more GOT units confirm the model of the connected equipment FX A QnA Q Series PLC microcomputer by executing communication in turn fro
167. Troubleshooting For reference this section summarizes frequently asked questions about connection of the GOT F900 to the FX Series positioning unit 1 GOT F900 Contents of troubl Check points and t OS version ontents of trouble eck points and countermeasures The power of the FX Series positioning unit is turned off Cause Communication is disabled because the power of the FX Series positioning unit is turned off Countermeasures Turn on the power COMMUNICATION ERROR OCCURS is displayed when a screen changeover or numeric data input is Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 and performed on the the FX Series positioning unit GOT F900 screen product product product e Causes The wrong cable is used or the connection is bad e Countermeasures Check the cable Changeover to a nonexistent screen by a touch key or the FX DISPLAY SCREEN Series positioning unit was tried IS NOT AVAILABLE Earlier Earlier is displayed on the than than GOT F900 screen The changeover destination screen has not been created yet 6 00 4 00 Countermeasures Create the screen DISPLAY SCREEN A nonexistent screen was tried to be displayed IS NOT AVAILABLE NO is displayed on the GOT F900 screen Cause 6 00 or 4 00 or The screen No has not been created yet later later e Countermeasures Create the screen A device that does not exist in the FX Series positi
168. USE Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 and the personal computer e Causes The connected cable is not proper Or cable connection is not correct e Countermeasures Check the cable 14 31 Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC Connection of FX Series Positioning o c c O FREQROL Inverter Connection of Microcom puter Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 14 10 BASIC Program Example This program writes 31000 to D10 and 15600 to D11 respectively 31000 is 7918H and 15600 is in hexadecimal These two values are written to the GOT by the batch write command 01H 10 20 900 930 610 620 630 640 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1100 1110 1120 1130 1140 1150 1160 1170 1180 1190 1700 1710 2000 2010 2020 2100 2110 2120 2130 2140 2150 2160 2200 2210 2220 eee A Before execution After execution Sample program T0 3000 Counter waiting for receive to be adjusted in accordance with speed of computer ERFLG 0 STX CHR 2 CR CHR3 13 ACK CHR 6 NAK CHR amp H15
169. a b Rs T Series PLC ES For power supply and operation switches NEN To computer link unit 1 microcomputer board Connect the cable to or another company s S the port inside the i PLC For power supply and operation switches 5 For the details refer to 5 6 2 2 t For the details refer to 5 4 3 When connecting via RS 232C ports make sure that the distance between the Handy GOT and PLC is 6m 19 8 or less Remarks a External cable one side 25 pin D Sub F9GT RHCAB 3M 3m 9 10 Be Cable for any other equipment F9GT RHCAB5 150 1 5m 4 11 other than Series PLC jum to o cr cO G 0 Relay cable for PLC connection PLC side 6 pin MINI DIN b should be prepared by user cob Relay cable for PLC connection Prepared by user ME S S S S E gt Reference 225 The length of some external cables is different from the value above 3m 9 10 When using such cables cut them properly so that the maximum allowable connection distance is satisfied F9GT RHCAB LILIM E 3 3m 9 10 6 6m 19 8 10 10m 32 10 S59 CN1 8 pin ES CN1 For power supply EE CN2 20 pin E9 4 CN2 For communication oom N4 5 pi CN4 For grip switch BLA r oa CN5 4 pin E9 4 CN5 For emerg
170. about connection of the GOT F900 Sus to the MP900 CP9200SH machine controller 1 GOT F900 WN Check and couh OSversion ontents of trouble eck points and countermeasures coz F940W F940 F930 8 8 The power of the machine controller is turned off Cause 5 Communication is disabled because the power of the EN COMMUNICATION machine controller is turned off 525 ERROR OCCURS is Countermeasures displayed when Turn on the power SKE screen changeover or _ numeric data input is Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 and product product product performed on the the machine controller GOT F900 screen Causes zb The wrong cable is used or the connection is bad e o 5 Countermeasures ss 5 Q Check the cable Changeover to a nonexistent screen by a touch key or the DISPLAY SCREEN machine controller was tried Er IS NOT AVAILABLE Sog is displayed on the Po nan man E E The changeover destination screen has not been created yet 6 00 4 00 cot GOT F900 screen gt Countermeasures ONN Create the screen DISPLAY SCREEN A nonexistent screen was tried to be displayed SZO ABEE 6 000r 4 000r og NO is 82 on The screen No has not been created yet later later Cx displayed on the GOT Countermeasures gis F900 screen Create the screen A device that does not exist in the machine controlle
171. and open read the file of the screen data to be changed appears d When changing Terminal GOT F900 select View Project The Project settings System Settings Project settings on the menu dialog box appears For the contents of setting refer to c in Creation above For setting of RS 422 of the FREQROL Series inverter refer to e in Creation above a MITSUBISHI 13 28 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 13 8 Cable Diagram 599 y a EN This section explains cable diagrams to connect the GOT F900 and the FREQROL Series inverter Sus SIRE GOT F900 Handy GOT F9GT F9GT Distri r Distri r nam D Sub HCAB HCAB1 Twisted pair cable SDE siBule 5 RDA 2 6 Yellow 5 5 5 5 Soe RDB 7 7 Brown fl al 4 358 SDA 1 2 Black 3 3 7 H Terminal Bx 8 SDB 6 3 White 6 6 ES 6 6 resistor Oia SG 5 10 Orange 1 e 1 1 9 1 514131611 514131611 Connect terminal resistor to the inverter located farthest from the G
172. as the version of the ot 9 y GOT F900 OS and the screen creation software Sm gt System You can select the configuration between the GOT and the machine 9 controller MP900 CP9200SH and proper cables o 2 Setting Setting in Machine You can learn the communication specifications and the contents of setting 17 3 o a Controller Communication Setting Specifications Setting of Connected Equioment for GOT Set the PLC type using the GOT or the screen creation software 3 Others The communication specifications set in the machine controller Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Cable Diagram Cable diagrams for Machine controller GOT connection Troubleshooting Description of errors and how to fix them 17 1 System Condition Mm c O FLEX PC N Series PLC When connecting the machine controller MP900 CP9200SH check the COM port designation the OS 25 version of the GOT F900 and applicable versions of the screen creation software Compatibility when connecting Machine Controller CP9200SH 535 port Connection type Korn uer GOT F900 OS version creation software Series Two or more of GOT F900 50 BL ME 5990007 7 89 w F930GOT K v v 4 60 SW5 26C v v Poe Lov wer oer ae The screen creation software version corresponds to connection of the machine controller
173. bit device B003064E 6c Device symbol B File number 003 59 Element device number 064 Bit position E Sf oS OSs 2 Word device The specification method is equivalent to that for bit devices except d Bit position M a Specify the device symbol in one or two alphabets 5 b Specify the file number corresponding to each device in a 1 to 3 digit decimal number For the F available specification range refer to the next section Sa The file numbers 10 to 255 should be set in advance using the package software manufactured by Allen Bradley c Specify the element device number in a 1 to 3 digit decimal number 5 For the available specification range refer the next section 28 O o ONN Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC a MITSUBISHI 19 9 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley 19 d Device classification only in Timer and Counter GT Designer version SW5 F 5 05F or later Specify the device classification in three alphabets while using a decimal point as the delimiter Example To specify timer T set value T57 129 PRE Device symbol T File number 57 Element device number 129 Device classification PRE GT Designer earlier than version SW5 F 5 05F DU WIN The device classification does not have to be specified Example To specify timer TP set value TP057129 Device symbol TP File number 57 El
174. by Matsushita Electric Works 18 This section explains cable diagrams to connect the GOT F900 and the FP Series PLC manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works 1 Cable for the GOT and the FP Series PLC manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works Model name C 2 Female type Male type Application Connection diagram The connector figure shows the engagement face Application RS 232C connection GOT F900 FP Series Prepared by the user Cable AFC8503S manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works is available FG class D Grounding 5 E Tool port 5 124 1 6 9 pin D Sub female CGONOGSOVS 3 5 pin MINI DIN male RS 232C connection GOT F900 Prepared by the user ee grounding P 1 FG class D 1 1 COM port AA 5 1 e e 9 6 9 pin D Sub female CGONOGSONS 6 9 pin D Sub male RS 232C connection Prepared by the user a MITSUBISHI GOT F900 5 1 i e eo 9 6 9 pin D Sub female CGONDASONS grounding a S FG class D COM port eoo SRG sc RD SD 3 wire type 18 12 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FP Series PLC Manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works 18
175. can be connected only when the GOT is equipped with two RS 232C channels FXoN 232ADP Either one unit a personal computer and FX1N 232 BD FX2N 232 BD one unit in F940WGOT RS 232C Personal Printer Bar code reader computer MELSEC FX Series GOT F900 FX1S FX1N FX2N Either one unit a personal computer and one unit F940WGOT SS ox Ne VAS Printer Bar code reader Personal computer GOT F900 in FX1S FX1N FX2N F X2NC 1 Excluding the F920GOT K 3 Connection of two or more GOT units Up to four GOT F900 units can be connected to the programming port or the optional communication port of the FX Series PLC FXON 232ADP FX1N 422 BD FX1N 232 BD Either one unit FX2N 422 BD FX2N 232 BD MELSEC FX Series Printer Bar code FXo FXos FX1s FXon GOT F900 Only one Handy GOT unit can be reader FX1N FX2N F X2NC F X connected at the end Either one unit FX1 FX2 F X2C RS 422 or o Wore RS 232C Printer Bar code in FX1S FX1N FX2N GOT F900 Only one Handy GOT unit can be reader FX2NC connected at the end 1 Excluding the F920GOT K a MITSUBISHI 2 4 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Outline 2 Q QnA A Series PLC 1 CPU direct connection RS 422 GOT F900 is connected to the programming port of the A QnA Series PLC or the motion controller When a personal computer is conn
176. connect the PLC the bar code reader etc c Bar code reader amp Communication error 1 Avoidance Method When Bar code reader is set to USE communication error can be avoided by executing an either operation Read and display the SELECT MODE screen then select OTHER MODE DATA TRANSFER Sequence program transfer monitoring Set Bar code reader to DON T USE 2 Priority of the RS 232C Port Functions From the functions having the highest priority the system checks whether the setting is provided If a certain function is set functions having lower priority are disabled For example when the PLC connection destination is set to RS 232C or when the bar code reader is set valid functions having lower priority such as data transfer and sequence program transfer monitoring are disabled Connected equipment PLC general purpose equipment Screen data transfer Two port interface function 1 Screen data transfer mode 1 This function is available only in CPU direct connection in the FX A QnA Q Series This function is available also in serial communication connection in the QnA Q Series MITSUBISHI 22 7 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Bar Code Reader 22 22 5 Setting of Connected Equipment for GOT The setting of connection to the bar code reader can be executed using the screen creation software GT Designer and DU WIN 1 GOT F9
177. contents F930GOT 3 00 or later F930GOT K 4 60 or later F940GOT 5 00 or later Set the value as in the GOT F900 0 to 31 F940WGOT 1 00 or later F940 Handy GOT 5 00 or later F943 Handy GOT 5 00 or later Any version earlier than above Set the value as in the GOT F900 0 to 15 a MITSUBISHI 15 10 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 o 15 4 2 Setting Examples 599 DN This section explains the contents of the data memory DM set in each serial communication unit TE 0 1 In the case of CS1G H CPU V1 In the CS1G H CPU V1 write the data to the channels shown in the table below using a peripheral tool 5 CS1G H CPU V1 AEE 3 DIP switch SW5 Setting item Set value hexadecimal Remarks 5 c Arbitrary setting Provided ZO Communication E Data length 7 bits Ste EISE Stop bit length 2 bits Parity Even Transmission speed RS 232C Channel 161 0007H Baud rate 19200 bps o0 Transmission delay time eor RS 232C Channel 162 0000H Transmission delay time Oms 528 Unit number CST control Not provided RS 232C Channel 163 eee Host link unit number 00 to 1FH o 500 2 In the case of CS1W SCB21 and CS1W SCB41 25 In the C81W SCB21 and CS1W SCB41 write the data to the data memory DM shown in the table S gt g below using a peripheral tool J Pomare hexadecim
178. destination devices D50 to D54 2 arbitrary Because the ASCII code data is automatically is set to ON D50 to D54 written from the GOT F900 program for write is not required Input TO read completed 174 COS After data input M26 from the bar code reader is finished M16 turns ON to indicate that read is completed When M16 turns ON M26 is set to OFF by the GOT F900 to enable input of the next data E In this example M16 is ON for 1 second K10 If M16 remains ON the next bar code input data cannot be read a MITSUBISHI 22 6 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Bar Code Reader 22 22 4 Caution on Use of Bar Code Reader When using the bar code reader connected to the GOT F900 observe the following cautions on use m o O Printer 22 4 1 Caution on bar code reader setting When Bar code reader is set to USE in the GOT F900 the RS 232C port of the GOT F900 is occupied by the bar code reader Ba In this status even if a personal computer is connected and screen data transfer or sequence program 295 two port interface function transfer monitoring is tried the GOT F900 does not automatically change to 558 the transfer screen a communication error occurs the application software installed in the personal computer In the F940WGOT refer to the description below when two RS 232C ports are used to
179. device 0 CPU connected Control PLC if connected to the link 1 to 4 CPU with the specified number 4 FX Series GM positioning unit GM direct connection Setting range Device Device name number GT Designer DU WIN representation his tY GOT internal bit pene om GB132 1023 GB132 1023 Data register D DO D8191 DO D8191 Special data register SD D9000 D3999 D9000 D3999 Decimal Word File register R D4000 D6999 D4000 D6999 device 20 26 32 bits Z 32 bits Index register Z V VO V6 16 bits V 16 bits GOT internal data register GD GD100 1023 GD100 1023 1 Devices cannot be written 5 FREQROL Series inverter INV direct connection Setting range Device Device name number GT GT Designer DU WIN representation Bit Control status aM sco S7 0 device GOT internal bit GB GB132 1028 0 1023 Alarm code A 7 0 Parameter see 993 0 Decimal Program operation PG iaces O PG89 0 Special parameter SP c NN L1 SP127 L1 GOT internal data register GD GD100 1023 Word device O indicates the station number of the monitored inverter Specify the station number using either of the following methods otation No specification direct Specify the station number of the inverter when setting the device Available setting range 0 to 31 Station No specification indirect Specify the station number of the
180. e When connecting cables pay attention to the contents described in this section Especially attach the rear cover so that PCBs inside the Handy GOT are not interfered with connection cables Caution on Wiring e Make sure to shut down all phases of the power supply outside the Handy GOT before starting the installation or wiring work Otherwise electrical shock and damages of the Handy GOT may be caused Caution The Handy GOT has the DC power supply specifications Connect the DC power cable to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If the AC power supply is connected to power terminals or an operation emergency stop switch the Handy GOT may be burnt e Perform Class D grounding to the ground cable FG of the Handy GOT However never perform common grounding with the strong electrical system Caution on Design While executing monitoring in the GOT GOT F900 if a communication error including disconnection of a cable occurs communication between the GOT and the PLC CPU is interrupted and the GOT is disabled When establishing the system configuration using the GOT make sure that a switch which gives a significant operation to the system is executed from any equipment other than the GOT while postulating communication error in the GOT Otherwise accidents may be caused by incorrect output and malfunction Caution e Do not bind the control cable and the communication cable together with the main circuit and t
181. each part of the Handy GOT 5 2 3 Installation You can learn how to install the Handy GOT 5 1 Preparation You can select cables This section introduces the procedure to connect Selection and Installation cables to the Handy GOT of External Cable When preparing a cable you can learn signal names of connectors and untied wires You can learn the dimension of the processing on the panel face required to use the Handy GOT with attachment to and removal from the panel face This section introduces types of relay cables Processing Panel Face of Control Box or Cabinet Pin Layout and Signal Allocation of Connector You can check the signal allocation of connector or untied wires when for Serial Communication preparing a cable and Operation Switches 2 Wiring Outline of Internal Wiring ce block diagrams of portions requiring wiring and the ELM Hp 1 ET You can check the methods to wire the 24V DC power supply and 5 perform Class grounding Wiring and Handling of Operation Switches SW1 to SW4 Df 8 Wiring and Handling of Emergency Stop Switch You can learn how to use and wire the emergency stop switch 5 10 ES1 5 13 You can learn how to use and wire the operation switches Setting in the screen creation software is required Handling of grip switch excluding RH model You can learn how to use the grip switch eite You can learn how to use the grip switch RH mode
182. enee modes F940GOT SWD C F940GOT LWD C RS 232Cx1 p installation and Wiring of Handy GOT F943GOT F943GOT SWD F943GOT LWD RS 232C x2 Japanese models 5 FosoGoT k F930GOT BBD K ain Japanese models SpE With various F930GOT BBD K E World spec models 325 c s 5 key pads F930GOT BBD K C World spec models Seg F930GOT BWD Japanese models F930GOT F930GOT BWD E RS 422 x1 GOT F900 F930GOT BWD C RS 232C x1 World spec models T Series F930GOT BWD T gs 52 F933GOT F933GOT BWD RS 232C x2 Japanese models 25 7 F920GOT BBD5 K Japanese models F920GOT K 85 422 x1 With various F920GOT BBD K E RS 232C x1 World spec models key pads F920GOT BBD K C World spec models 5 F940GOT SBD H F940GOT LBD H F940 handy F940GOT SBD RH F940GOTLBD RH P 2o x GOT 1 F940GOT SBD H E F940GOT LBD H E World soec modes F940GOT SBD RH E F940GOT LBD RH E F943GOT SBD H F943GOT LBD H F943 handy F943GOT SBD RH F943GOT LBD RH j T x aU GOT F943GOT SBD H E F943GOT LBD H E World modes BENE F943GOT SBD RH E F943GOT LBD RH E eae 1 In addition to the interface shown the table an RS 232C interface is built in for connection of a personal computer Both the F940 Handy GOT and the F943 Handy GOT are generally called Handy GOT eee soa EN g ous Ozo a MITSUBISHI 1 5 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Introduction 1 1 2 2 Information Offered by Model Name GOT
183. eris deco dient oU Daddy 12 4 12 3 2 Devices which can be monitored esee 12 4 12 3 3 Caution on connection of a programming tool to the FX Series positioning unit 12 4 12 4 Setting of Connected Equipment for 12 5 129 Cable DIDO AIM seus watts etsi a Dads 12 8 12 5 TTOUDIGSTIQOLUPI cca ate e Stasi iat band 12 10 13 FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter ee 13 1 RON OVS EMCO 13 2 15 2 oystem COMMOULAON sorpi erede uide taeda eus 13 2 13 2 1 Configuration for CPU Direct Connection 5 422 13 2 a MITSUBISHI x GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Contents 19 9 Setting in PREQROL InVelter oe esu te i iain o Ens 13 6 13 3 1 Communication Setting enne 13 6 133 2 13 7 13 3 3 Inverter Connector Specifications ccccccccccccseeeeecceeeseeeseeeeeeeeeseaeeeeesaaeeeeessaeeeenens 13 9 13 3 4 Specification of Station Number in Creating Screen 13 10 13 4 Cautions on Use of FREQROL Series Inverter 13 11 jo Device specicalloN TR 13 11 13 4 2 Changeove
184. figure shows the engagement face No Model name Application Connection diagram Application RS 422 F9GT HCAB OOM Computer link connection Drain va FG class D grounding PLO sido To cable Side F9GT HCAB or 1 13 FOGT HCAB1 Handy GOT side 5 5 14 25 25 pin D Sub male QnA computer link PL 12 gt DC24VG Prepared by the user PK 13 gt DC24VG FGR 14 E seul sss Wire the power SB 15 lt SW1 supply the BK W 16 gt SW2 operation R W 17 gt SW3 switches and GR W 18 SW4 us emergency ene gt EST Swick Y W 22 lt gt ES1 BL W 24 gt DC24V 25 gt DC24V J F9GT HCAB1 OOM F9GT HCAB OOM RS 232C Drain grounding connection wire 1 FG Drain wire 2 SD TXD Computer link 3 RD RXD unit side 4 RS RTS PLC side 5 CS CTS 13 6 DR DSR o 7 GND 8 CD DCD 14 25 3 DTR RAE 3 Signal name of 25 pin D Sub male p A computer link F9GT HCAB or Compuler link 1 F9GT HCAB1 PL 12 gt DC24VG Handy GOT side PK 13 lt gt DC24VG FGR 14 gt common SB 15 gt SW1 SU E BK W 16 gt SW2 operation R W 17 gt SW3 switches and GR W 18 gt SWA
185. following switches have to be connected to the PLC or external input equipment through the operation switch connector Operation switches Emergency stop switch Switch and LEDs not requiring external wiring Because the following switch and LEDs are connected to the display unit CPU and ready for serial communication with the PLC through the communication port they do not have to be wired Grip switch and indicator LED for grip switch Indicator LEDs for operation switches L1 L2 L3 L4 POWER GRIP SW Ou 2 2 Internal wiring of switches Each switch on the previous page is wired inside the Handy GOT as shown below This chapter explains the wiring of external cable is explained here REED 5 Display circuit o ower gt or persona supply DC24V4 LCD panel computer DC24G supply gt circuit FG TW Touch switch circuit o RS 422 or RS 232C A Grip switch Q for externally connected Indicator LEDs 5 equipment CPU communication circuit for operation 8 a SWINGS Operation Serial 7 wiiches SW1 a CPU memory communication gt L1 SW1 3 SW2 unit Be LH e E SW3 2
186. internal bit register GB GB132 GB1023 GB132 GB1023 Timer 1 T4 0 PRE 14 255 PRE T4 0 PRE T4 255 PRE set value T10 0 PRE 1255 255 PRE T10 0 PRE T255 255 PRE Timer 1 4 0 4 255 74 0 4 255 current value T10 0 ACC 1255 255 ACC T10 0 ACC T255 255 ACC Counter T 1 C5 0 PRE C5 255 PRE C5 0 PRE C5 255 PRE buie set value C10 0 PRE C255 255 PRE C10 0 PRE C255 255 PRE Decimal Counter T 1 C5 0 ACC C5 255 ACC C5 0 ACC C5 255 ACC current value C10 0 ACC C255 255 ACC C10 0 ACC C255 255 ACC Integer N N7 0 N7 255 N7 0 N7 255 9 N10 0 N255 255 N10 0 N255 255 GOT internal data register GD GD100 GD1023 GD100 GD1023 1 32 bit cannot be chosen when setting the screen creation software File number and element specification range Specify the file number and an element in decimal numbers However specify the bit position of a bit B in a hexadecimal number Available element 4 Device name symbol File number specification range Bit B 104255 04255 Bit device ur D Timer completion bit TN 10 255 0 255 Counter effective up count bit U 10 255 0 255 Counter effective down count bit CD Counter 2 Timer time counting bit T 10 255 0 255 OG OO O 10 255 0 255 10 255 0 255 completion bit Z U Timer set value 10 255 0 255 ex bem gt A Timer present
187. later 4 00 or later AVAILABLE NO Earlier than 4 00 Earlier than 6 00 DATA IS NOT FOUND os 6 00 or later 4 00 or later product in the table above indicates the screen number in which the error has occurred 23 10 a MITSUBISHI GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Appendix 23 5 9 es 6a The messages and countermeasures for the F920GOT K may be slightly different Countermeasures F920GOT K 22 The power of the connected equipment is turned off EOS Confirm the power supply voltage Our The wiring between the connected equipment PLC is not correct Refer to the appropriate wiring section From first In connection of two or more GOT units the opening screen display period in the second and later GOT product units is not long enough Refer the description connection of two more GOT units The power of the GOT is turned on before the PLC sure that communication with the connected equipment is ready before display of the opening lt screen of the GOT is finished e Changeover to a nonexistent uncreated screen By selecting SELECT MODE TEST MODE USER SCREEN check whether the screen data to be displayed exists From first A nonexistent screen was to be displayed product Make sure that the screen No has been created There is an error on the changeover destination screen By selecting SELECT MODE TEST MOD
188. menu No411 3B 824 39H Click the Tool port setting tab to tr TM display the window shown on the left ED crs PM L C Bp wes Mo 414 IBEERE E 92006 gt HESS Setting the COM port MESH BeBe ESE maes Open the dialog box by selecting MRE pn mE o Option PLC System register setting No412 amp hlENHBR on the menu No413 fz3EX4 sh No414 Click the COM port setting tab to rom ew S200 gt amO display the window shown on the left AMT ert 415 32 am atus E Le No416 ty Ain o Hodi SIENTE o 0 15383 Mo418 BEI 70 Er RE fi 5 384 0 16384 The sample screens above are in Japanese a MITSUBISHI 18 6 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FP Series PLC Manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works 18 o 2 FP2SH Series CPU unit 599 On Setting example using the FPWIN GR software EN g g PLOYAT ALY AREATE SRB Setting the tool port MESE POO Open the dialog box by selecting cub rtu e E ne amu immanis gn Option PLC System register setting VOIR NSE COMA Mase r M osE rores TES men SUME SREHEG 5 LE noma Click the Tool port setting tab to 825 No411 ABEJA display the window shown on the left
189. name Application Connection diagram Application Personal computer GOT F900 HS 232C connector connection 1 FX 232CAB 1 6 6 9 pin D Sub female 9 pin D Sub female RS 232C Personal computer GOT F900 connection connector F2 232CAB 1 K J 14 25 25 pin D Sub male 5 e 9 6 9 pin D Sub female xDD 09 2 Cable the F943 Handy and a personal computer through the PLC connector C 2 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face Model name Application Connection diagram Application RS 232C F9GT HCAB OOM y connection Personal computer connector R 4 GRE To cable F9GT Prepared by user pn HCAB FSGT HCABI O 0 on Handy GOT side W 3 F9GT HCAB1 LILIM 6 9 pin D Sub female RS 232C ES ER RBSDIDIME S Personal computer connector R 4 1 13 gt BK 2 To cable F9GT P gt BR 7 repared by user 5 7 Zw HCAB F9GT HCAB1 O connection O 0 Handy GOT side gt GR 5 F9GT HCAB1 oOM 4 14 25 25 pin D Sub male a MITSUBISHI 6 12 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Peripheral Equipment 6 6 6 Troubleshooting E gt For reference this section summarizes frequently asked questions about connection of the GOT F900 E to a personal comput
190. positioning unit observe the following cautions on use Device specification The device range specifications vary depending on the model of the FX Series positioning unit as shown in the table below FX2N 20GM FX 20GM E 20GM X000 X007 Input relay X ZO 7003 X010 X067 when I Os are extended X000 X377 X375 X377 Output relay YO Y67 Y00 Y05 Y00 Y67 Auxiliary relay M MO MB11 MO M511 MO M511 Device name and Nos which FX2N 10GM can be monitored in GOT FX 10GM Index register V Z V0 V7 V0 V7 V0O V7 Z0 Z7 32 70 77 32 70 77 32 bits 0 27 32 bits 0 Z7 32 bits 1 Input relays X X000 to X377 can be read only 2 When a screen is created using the DU WIN only V and Z are available as index registers Devices which can be monitored Among bit devices specify the device number of input relays X and output relays Y in octal 1 2 3 10 11 17 20 Specify the device number of other bit devices in decimal When specifying word devices use the zero suppression function Only devices described in chapter 3 3 can be specified Caution on connection of a programming tool to the FX Series positioning unit When programming the positioning unit the GOT F900 should be disconnected from the programming port of the GMCPU Positioning programs cannot be transferred or monitored from a personal computer connected to the GOT F900 a MITSUBISHI 12 4 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connectio
191. power of the COMMUNICATION microcomputer is turned off ERROR OCCURS is Countermeasures displayed when a Turn on the power From From screen changeover or L first first numeric data input is Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 and product product performed on the the microcomputer GOT F900 screen e Causes The wrong cable is used or the connection is bad Countermeasures Check the cable Changeover to a nonexistent screen by a touch key or the DISPLAY SCREEN microcomputer was tried IS NOT AVAILABLE Earlier Earlier is displayed on the 2088 than than GOT F900 screen The changeover destination screen has not been created yet 6 00 4 00 Countermeasures Create the screen A nonexistent screen was tried to be displayed DISPLAY SCREEN IS NOT AVAILABLE NO is displayed on the GOT F900 screen Cause The screen No has not been created yet e Countermeasures Create the screen DISPLAY SCREEN _ There is an error on the screen to be displayed Earlier Earlier IS NOT AVAILABLE ao tie than than is displayed on the Cause 6 00 4 00 GOT F900 screen One of the screen objects is placed outside the available DISPLAY SCREEN screen area IS NOT AVAILABLE Countermeasures NO is Check the placement of screen objects displayed on the GOT F900 screen There is not data because the unit is new or the memory clear DATA IS NOT has been
192. reader Connected to RS 232C port RS 232C FX Series PLC g RS 422 1234567 i Y V GOT F900 The data be displayed on the screen using Ascii display or Ascii input _ indicates space 1 Occupied device a System Information Setting Read device D10 b5 and b6 are occupied Write device D20 D20 b6 is occupied b Bar Code Setting write destination device and number of devices Write destination device D50 Number of devices 5 D50 to D54 are occupied c Other setting M15 Bar code input invalid M16 Read of bar code input complete 2 Program example M8000 always ON MOV K2M10 D10 The ON OFF status of M10 to M17 is transferred to D10 b7 to b0 M15 Bar code input invalid M16 Bar code input read completed MOV D20 2 20 The ON OFF status of D20 b7 to bO is transferred to M27 to M20 M26 Bar code input Input for bar code input invalid Bar code input invalid ee Program this to make the bar code input invalid Program this upon necessity M26 Bar code input When the data is input from the bar code reader Program for M26 turns ON processing bar The ASCII code data is written from the GOT F900 data code data to the write
193. section 5 14 c Program example The operation switches SW1 SW2 SW3 and SW4 are assigned to X0 X1 X2 and X3 respec tively The grip switch is wired to X4 The device of Output Indicator is set to M100 in the screen creation software In a sequence program inputs XO to X4 are assigned to M100 to M104 using the OUT instruction X0 M100 When the SW1 is pressed the LED lights in green X3 M103 When the SW4 is pressed the LED lights in green X4 M104 The LED of the grip switch lights in green a MITSUBISHI 5 28 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 E 5 9 2 Preparation of Operation Switch Name Sheet gt This section explains how to prepare the operation switch name sheet 1 Preparing the name sheet a Use a name sheet and an OHP sheet transparent sheet offered as accessories b The mount sheet is of actual dimensions If you would like to make additional mount sheets refer to the following dimensions Key center Diameter 17 0 67 5 print center Effective range for characters lt Sheet insertion direction ado oo S gt 3 e 12 22 22 22 18 0 47 0 87 7770 87 0 87 0 71 y 96 3 78 Unit mm inches c When the work in b is completed copy the contents of the name sheet base on an OHP sheet in the actual dimensions 10096 using a copy machine When u
194. the FX Series PLC FX1S FX1N FX2N F X1NC FX2NC only the GOT F900 can be connected via RS 232C Because the programming port of the FX Series PLC is not occupied by the GOT F900 a personal computer or dedicated machine such as the AGGPP and the A7PHP can be connected for monitoring and transfer of sequence programs or another GOT F900 unit can be connected 1 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT GOT F900 a FX Series PLC FXCPU direct connection F930GOT c RS 232C cable FX1N 232 BD gt FX2N 232 BD Connection of two or more GOT units F940GOT n L L FXoN 232ADP a FX Series PLC b Option c RS 232C cable FXCPU direct connection FX1N 232 BD FX 232CAB 1 9 pin D Sub FX1S FX1N EXCP U direct connection EX1N CNV BD FXoN 232ADP F2 232CAB 1 25 pin D Sub FXCPU direct connection FX2N 232 BD FX 232CAB 1 9 pin D Sub FX2N FXCPU direct connection ONV BD FXoN 232ADP F2 232CAB 1 25 pin D Sub FXCPU direct connection Before attempting to connect the GOT units per b Option above 8 3 Cautions on Use of MELSEC F FX Series should be read and understood a MITSUBISHI 8 4 GOT F900 SE
195. the procedure to display the monitor screen To learn how to use the help function SWOD5C GOTR PACKE OPERATING MANUAL e FX PCS DU WIN E OPERATION MANUAL No JY992D68301 To install the software to the personal computer To start up the software To learn how to connect the personal computer to the GOT To learn the screen configuration of the software To learn how to use the help function a MITSUBISHI FX PCS DU WIN E OPERATION MANUAL Introduction 1 It is included with the SWLID5C GOTR PACKE It is included with the FX PCS DU WIN E GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Introduction 1 1 2 Abbreviations Generic Names and Terms Used in This Manual Abbreviations generic names and terms used in this manual are shown below 1 2 1 Types and Names of GOT F900 Series Introduction F940GOT F930GOT Handy GOT 2 8 920 F930GOT K leer mmm 5 20000 6 o installation and Wiring of F940GOT Generic n Model name Built in I F name F940WGOT TWD RS 422 x1 Japanese models F940WGOT F940WGOT TWD E F940WGOT TWD C 5 232 2 World spec models RS 422 x1 F940GOT SWD F940GOT LWD RS 232 4 Japanese models F940GOT F940GOT SWD E F940GOT LWD E RS 422 x1
196. through RS 422 Use this port also to connect two GOT units through RS 422 excluding the F920GOT K 2 Personal computer PLC port RS 232C 9 pin D Sub male I 2 Connect here a personal computer to transfer the screen data created by the screen creation software S56 Use this port also to connect a PLC or microcomputer board through RS 232C BB In the F9220GOT K only Q Series PLC can be connected Use this port also to connect two or more GOT units through RS 232C a bar code reader or a printer excluding the F9220GOT K The two port interface function is available A personal computer which has started up the PLC software can be connected here 3 PLC port RS 232C 9 pin D Sub male Connect here a PLC or micro computer board through RS 232C When using the F940WGOT use this port also to connect two or more GOT units through RS 232C a bar code reader or a printer installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More GOT Units Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 4 5 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of F920GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 Personal computer port RS 232C 9 pin D Sub male Connect here a personal computer to transfer the screen data created by the screen creation software This port is not a
197. to connect the 1st and later GOT F900 units 1 Cable for the GOT and the GOT in connection of two or more GOT units C 3 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face Model name Application Connection diagram Application RS 422 connection GOT F900 Connection of two or more 5 GOT units Prepared by the user 6 9 9 pin D Sub male GOT F900 1 O O 6 9 9 pin D Sub male GoOdezoN y Y RS 232C GOT F900 GOT F900 connection 1 232 1 6 6 9 pin D Sub female 9 pin D Sub female In the case of microcomputer connection C 2 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face Model name Application Connection diagram Application RS 422 GOT F900 GOT F900 Connection of two connection or more GOT units Prepared by the user 1 in the table above is also 6 9 6 9 ee 9 pin D Sub male 9 pin D Sub male RS 232C GOT F900 connection GOT F900 GSYSSEN AAAAALG 9 pin D Sub female 9 pin D Sub female MITSUBISHI 7 17 Introduction Outline Specifications installation and Wiring of F940GOT installation and Wiring of Handy GOT c O Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More GOT Units Connection of C
198. to the cable diagrams below for the RS 422 RS 232C connector but not the wiring for the power supply the operation switches and the emergency stop switch because it is different For details refer to Chapter 5 C 2 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face Application Connection diagram Application RS 422 To F9GT HCAB3 150 connection The connector on the 1 13 F9GT HCAB 3M leader side of the Handy FOGTHCAB 10M RS 232C Dandy Gorace GOT is dedicated and C connection cannot be prepared by 14 25 25 pin D Sub male The connector on the leader side of the Handy b F9GT HCAB1 3M Dedicated connector is dedicated and Loose wires F9GT HCAB1 10M RS 232C on Handy GOT side no connector eonnecion cannot be prepared by the user F9GT HCAB LILIM RS 422 FG class D d connection oen a a 2 lt H 2 3 lt gt 19 4 gt 4 cable FOGT HCAB QnA Series on Handy GOT side 5 fea 13 1 6 3 1 13 7 lt gt 16 K sy GIU ui 8 8 25 14 lt 14 25 The diagram on the right j n Showsthe wiring of the RS ener y _ 422 signals For wiring of PL 12 4 DC24VG operation
199. used address 100 D50 03H 35H 36H Sum check range Expression 30H 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 32H 03H 156H a MITSUBISHI 14 16 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 o 14 5 7 Interrupt Code List 599 DN The table below shows the correspondence between interrupt codes and event types TE Interrupt code Event type Read of bar code data is completed ME 50H M8000 has changed to ON 51H M8000 has changed to OFF 52H M8001 has changed to ON 5 93H M8001 has changed to OFF 5 d O SEE 7EH M8023 has changed to ON 7FH M8023 has changed to OFF 2 M8049 has changed to 3 M8049 has changed to OFF z H o a Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 14 17 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 14 6 Command Details 14 6 1 Batch Read Command RD The contents of the batch read command are explained below as an example of the format 2 12 bytes 1 byte 11 byte 4 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes SIX Address Number NAK 0 of points 02H S0H 00H FFH Error has 15H 4 gt occurred Sum check range Execution is normally terminated 514 bytes maximum 1 byte byte la 2 x 1 to 255 bytes 2 bytes
200. using the peripheral equipment for the SIMATIC 57 200 Series STEP7 Micro WIN 20 3 1 Communication Setting Specifications Set the baud rate highest address etc of the SIMATIC 57 200 Series PLC 1 Setting in the PLC Set the following items using the programming software for the SIMATIC 57 200 Series STEP7 Micro WIN32 Wem Seve PLC Address 1 to 31 Highest Address 31 Baud Rate 19200 bps Gap Update Factor Procedure a Open STEP7 Micro WIN32 software b From the menu on the tool bar select View Communications Set Remote Address to the destination PLC station number The default value is 2 Communications Links Communications S etup PC PPI Address 0 Double click the icon representing PLC you wish to communicate with 3 CPU224 A 55 ddress 2 Double click the interface icon to change to communication parameters Double click the modem icon to setup the modem parameters or dial to start modem communications Communication Parameters Remote Address 2 Local Address 0 Module PC PPI cable COM 1 Protocol PPI Transmission Rate 9 6 kbps Mode 11 bit c From the menu on the tool bar select View System Block Set PLC Address to a value in the range from 1 to 31 Highest Address to 31 Baud Rate to 19 2 kbps Retry Count to 3 and Gap Update Factor to 10 Click the OK button System Block Analog Input Filter
201. value 10 255 0 255 Word counter set value P 10 255 0 255 10 255 0 255 10 255 0 255 device O1 Counter present value gt Integer N 1 File numbers 10 to 255 are available in the user setting 2 For each element the bit position can be specified in the range from 0 F 15 a MITSUBISHI 3 20 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 b MicroLogix 1000 1200 1500 Series E i GT Designer Version 5 05F or later and DU WIN eee 2 50 or later 3 Device name number GT Designer DU WIN representation B3 0 0 B255255 15 B3 0 0 B255 255 15 e 8 it Timer ER D timing bit Decimal Timer T T3 0 DN T255 255 DN T3 0 DN T255 255 DN compl bit Bit C3 0 CU C255 255 CU C3 0 CU C255 255 CU device up bs Counter C C3 0 CD C255 255 CD C3 0 CD C255 255 CD down USD Counter C completion bit GOT internal bit register GB GB132 GB1023 GB1023 Timer T T3 0 PRE T255 255 PRE T3 0 PRE T255 255 PRE set us Decimal c E Q o C3 0 DN C255 255 DN 02562560 0 DN C255 255 DN installation and Wiring of F940GOT Timer T T3 0 ACC T255 255 ACC T3 0 ACC T255 255 ACC pate a Word Counter T C3 0 PRE C255 255 PRE C3 0 PRE C255 255 PRE device set eh enor ao C3 0 ACC C255 255 ACC cs 0 ac0 c288 285 400 0 ACC C255 255 ACC GOT internal data register G GD100 GD1023 GD100 GD1023
202. version B or later 11 12 11 4 1 Direct connection to QCPU sarres a nnn nnn 11 12 11 4 2 Connection to serial communication 11 13 11 5 Caution on Use of MELSEC Q Series 11 14 11 5 1 Restriction in device specification 11 14 11 5 2 Caution when the GOT is connected to the serial communication unit 11 14 11 5 3 Caution when connecting to Q multiple CPU 11 14 11 5 4 Caution when setting screen creation 11 15 11 6 Setting of Connected Equipment for 11 16 Psd Cable DRITTE 11 22 Tke wi 11 25 12 Connection of FX Series Positioning Unit FX 2N 10 20GM 12 1 12 135 StGITI COO CIN OM 5 ea ee ee CLEA 12 1 122 System GontgulallOli pate 12 2 12 2 1 Configuration for GMCPU direct connection 5 422 12 2 12 3 Cautions on use of FX Series positioning 12 4 123 1 Device SDeciliC alon d
203. 0 TXD SDB ERIOTR 5i S A RTS RSA RD RXD Signal wires for ATS RSB _ __DR OSA _ communication with 6 Yelow RXDH RDA RS RTS Corresponding section E 7 Bow morn 090078 rom chapter E gt e 8 Gm GI5 655 sy DC 24VG DC power supply of X SW COM common co n 888 Not used Both ends of the cog Yellow white ES1 contact of the switch Sut are present here C m REM Blue white Plus side of the 24V DC DC 24V ower SU ly of the STO eo Su The grip switch is not in the table because there is no need of wiring 54 Soo On en g O50 MITSUBISHI 5 21 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 5 6 2 F9GT RHCAB LIM External Cable F9GT RHCAB LIM Arrangement of color 37 pin D Sub male O O O O O O 1 19 X ET OO COO QUOD ODDO OO OOOO a 0 im b O E EH OQ oc 22 NN NM 20 External cable supply operation switch signal name z F9GT HCAB LIM F9GT F940 Handy GOT F943 Handy GOT escription eference D Sub pin number Wire color RS422 _ Sed Frame ground Yellow Blue SDA SD TXD Yellow Red TXD SDB ER DTR White Blue RTS RSA RD RXD E Cray Orange Blue NC 9 Owewme No 3 sags White Red Common for be HE
204. 0 X 240 Y OK type MELS Cancel Set the following GOT type F940WGOT 480 x 234 WIDE F94 GOT 320 x 240 F93 GOT 240 x 80 F920GOT 128 x 64 PLC type MELSEC QnA QnA CPU QnA computer link MELSEC A A computer link Selection of GOT type GOT type Model name F940WGOT 480x234 WIDE F940WGOT F94 GOT 320x240 tirer F93 GOT 240x80 F920GOT 128x64 F920GOT K Click OK d Set CPU direct connection RS 422 RS 232C link connection The Project Auxiliary RS 422 RS 232C of the GOT F900 Settings dialog box This setting is enabled in the SW4D5C GOTR PACKE version appears or later Make Serial Port Setup Language and Menu Key valid Project Auxiliary Settings x Basic Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Handy GOT settings OK Key window GCursor display setting Cancel Action when switching screens Don t display cursor and key window When touch input is detected open key window at the same time Click the Setup tab Basic Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Handy GOT settings OK Opening Screen Time p iec Backlight Off Time 10 Min r Connection Buzzer Port R5422 ON Type CPU M OFF Station MITSUBISHI 10 15 Introduction Outline Specifications installation and Wiring of F940GOT installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Connection of Peri
205. 00 0 to 15 In some computer link units the switches should be set in the range from OH to FH Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More GOT Units FX Series PLC eium o O gu e Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 9 9 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 9 3 2 Setting of CD Signal Control only in RS 232C connection When the GOT F900 and the computer link unit are connected via RS 232C set the buffer memory in the computer link unit using the sequence program so that CD signals are not checked Refer to the program example below in which the I O signals of the computer link unit are 80 to 9F H Examples of the CPU units equipped with built in computer link are explained below also In the case of A computer link the case of CPU equipped with built in computer link e A1SCPUC24 R2 7 Write to buffer memory Computer link unit connection point K1 CD terminal will not be checked 10B H CD terminal will be checked Write to buffer memory Computer link unit connection point K1 CD terminal will not be checked 10B H CD terminal will be checked Fixed values e A2CCPUC24 X1E7 Write to buffer memory Computer link unit connection point K1 CD terminal will not be checked 10B H CD terminal will b
206. 00 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 3 DU WIN 599 o Operation Display screen name TE LI Creation a Open DU WIN The Project settings S20 dialog box appears b On the menu select File New H SE 9t Terminal 9 E System Siemens s 300 52 DU System Language English Character Set Japanese Set the following 5 Terminal F940WGOT TWD V H S F940GOT LWD 29 F940GOT SWD c s F930GOT BWD Se PLC System Siemes S7 300 Siemens S7 200 Select Terminal in accordance with the LC display color E Model name 99 F940WGOT V F940WGOT color 5 5 Q F940GOT black and white FOUND Handy GOT black and white F940GOT color 5 Handy GOT color chee Og F930GOT K blue ez F930GOT blue S gt 5 52 Epp ocx o 58 oS gt 59 sa 50 i Ou 5 85 10 q Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 20 15 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 Operation Display screen name d Set CPU direct connection RS 232C of the GOT F900 The Setup Data dialog On the menu select View Project System Settings Setup box appears Data n the case of version 2 52 or later gt Setup Data x Opening Screen Time s n Backlight Off Time min 10
207. 00 Series Connection of the bar code reader cannot be set in the GOT F900 Series units 2 GT Designer Setting method a Open GT Designer System information b Read the file of the screen data for which bar code reader connection is to be set Set the write device and the read device The System Information On the menu select Common System Information dialog box appears Set Read device and Write device inside the word device range of the connected equipment After setting click the OK button System Information x r Read device System Signal 1 Device 00 OK Current Recipe No Cancel Write device On screen Base Screen Number Device D1 02 Delete D103 On screen Overlap Base Screen Number 2 On screen Overlap Base Screen Number 2 D104 After input Object ID For the word device range specifications refer to section 3 3 Bar code setting d Set the head device and the number of devices default value 2 The Bar Code Settings a MITSUBISHI to which the data read by the bar code reader is transferred GOT dialog box appears F900 connected equipment On the menu select Common Barcode Set Device and Device points After setting click the OK button Device 20 OK Device points 2 Delete For the word device range specifications refer to section 3 3 22 8 GOT F900 SERIES
208. 00 and the connected equipment FX A QnA Q Series PLC microcomputer Set the sequence to connected equipment 1st GOT unit 2nd GOT unit 3rd GOT unit gt 4th GOT unit b While the opening screen is being displayed communication is not executed Accordingly adjust the opening screen display time to delay the communication start timing Change the title screen display time on the SET UP MODE screen in the GOT or in the screen creation software 1st GOT unit default value gt 2nd GOT unit default value 5 sec gt 3rd GOT unit default value 10 sec gt 4th GOT unit default value 15 sec MITSUBISHI 7 9 Introduction Outline Specifications installation and Wiring of F940GOT installation and Wiring of Handy GOT c O Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More GOT Units Connection of Connection of MELSEC A MELSEC F FX Series PLC Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Two or More GOT Units 7 7 5 2 Transfer of sequence program and use of monitor This section explains the restriction on sequence program transfer and device monitoring through a personal computer connected to a GOT unit while two or more GOT units are connected Excluding microcomputer connection 1 When a personal computer is connected to the last GOT unit PLC GOT F900 GOT F900 GOT F900 D Lala 4 m m B H
209. 024 R2 A1SJ71UC24 R2 A2CCPUC24 A1SCPUC24 R2 AJ71UC24 25 pin D Sub Total extension distance 6m 19 8 or less A FOGT HCAB 3M B Prepared by the user 9 pin D Sub F9GT HCAB1 3M In the C F9GT HCAB1 3M shown the column b RS 232C cable the on the PLC side is loose wires Make sure that the total cable extension distance A B or C is 6m 19 8 or less a MITSUBISHI 9 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 m m m m 9 3 Setting in A Computer Link Connection gt In A computer link connection the switches in the computer link unit Shown in the following page E should be set as described below 9 3 1 Communication Setting Specifications 1 Setting the mode selector switch oet the mode so that the COM port of the computer link unit connected to the GOT F900 is set to the dedicated protocol format 1 RS 422 FOAI 1 RS 422 NO protocol 5 o 2 Setting the transmission specifications setting switches Set the transmission specifications setting switches of the computer link unit to realize the 48 transmission specifications shown in the table below sip Poe _ The specifications such as the transmission speed are fixed on the GOT F900 side and cannot be changed installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 3 Setting the station number setting switches Match the switches to the value set in the GOT F9
210. 049 EU 5 NNNM eee eee EZ ats Changed from OFF to ON M8047 Changed from ON to OFF Changed from OFF to ON 2 8048 QE Changed from ON to OFF E 9 1 caog 858 M8049 Changed from ON to OFF B3H When the data length is 7 bits interrupt codes M8024 to M8049 are not output Even if this data is overwritten by the microcomputer the GOT does not output interrupt codes 1 second cycle clock M8050 5 1 second 2 second cycle clock M8051 Interrupt code output forbid flag Available in versions in which connection of two or more M8052 GOT units is enabled While this bit is ON no interrupt code is output to the microcomputer M8053 to M8063 Unused Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 14 11 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 14 4 3 Error Code List The following errors are stored in D8002 Parity error Confirm the transmission specifications of the The parity bit is not matching microcomputer and the GOT F900 Framing error Confirm the transmission specifications of the Data bits or stop bits are not matching microcomputer and the GOT F900 Overrun error Confirm the transmission specifications of the Overrun has occurred in receive microcomputer and the GOT F900
211. 0GOT Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More GOT Units FX Series PLC eium o O gu e Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 9 27 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 2 Software Ci Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures A PLC bar code reader or printer is connected Causes The RS 232C connector to which the personal computer is connected is set to be used for another piece of equipment In the personal computer connected Countermeasures to the GOT F900 sequence For monitoring or transferring sequence programs set a bar Software programs cannot be monitored or code reader to invalid and a printer to DON T USE such as GX tarred If the PLC is connected select the GOT F900 equipped with Communication with the sequence two built in RS 232C channels software is disabled An error Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 message is displayed and the personal computer Developer and FX WIN e Causes The wrong cable is used or the connection is bad e Countermeasures Check the cable A computer link bar code reader or printer is connected Causes The RS 232C connector to which the personal computer is connected is set to be used for another piece of equipment Countermeasures In the GOT F900 select by hand SELECT MODE OT
212. 0GOT F940GOT b RS 232C cable lt a hae a A Series PLC b RS 232C cable Remarks A1SJ71C24 R2 A1SJ71UC24 R2 Make sure the total cable 9 pin D Sub Prepared by the user extension distance is 15m A1SCPUC24 R2 49 3 or less A2CCPUC24 AJ71UC24 25 pin D Sub F2 232CAB 1 re Applicable A Series PLC products in the column a are computer link units equipped with built in RS 232C interface MITSUBISHI 9 7 Introduction Outline Specifications installation and Wiring of F940GOT installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More GOT Units FX Series PLC Mm o O MELSEC F Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 2 F943 Handy GOT GOT F900 3 Handy GOT RS 232C s0000 ps Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 b RS 232C cable a A Series PLC A computer link B e B U yt _ To power supply and operation C switches SSSA m ot NI im cs et To RS 232C power supply and operation switches A1SJ71C
213. 0GOT F943GOT CP 2171F ko CP9200SH MP920 a Machine controller b RS 422 cable Remarks CP 217IF Prepared by the user MEMOBUS unit connector Applicable machine controller product in the column a is a MEMOBUS unit equipped with built in RS 422 interface a MITSUBISHI 17 2 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Machine Controller CP9200SH PLC Manufactured by Yaskawa Electric 17 o 2 F940 Handy GOT 599 600 o GOT F900 b RS 422 cable a Machine controller Sus 2 A B lt i 5 5 UU 225 O _ QA peace 9 udo nad EO and operation Handy GOT dheaa We RS 422 switches lt gt lt gt MEMOBUS unit 30000 R Y lt lt L o go 5 To RS 422 E D BH 217 Se To power supply and Use the RS 422 operation switches CP9200SH MP920 port on the rear E face a gt I lt 25 Eos To RS 422 52s power supply o a and operation switches
214. 0GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 m 4 9 Setting of Connected Equipment for GOT E gt The setting in the screen creation software is required to turn on and off the function keys and LED E display using the connected equipment This section describes the setting method 1 GOT F900 Series No setting is enabled on the GOT Set items in either one of the screen creation software mentioned below 2 GT Designer 3 Operation Display screen name Setting a It is supposed that the GT Designer has started up and the screen data to be set is read 3 b Open a user screen to be set Any screen is available as far as it has been already created LED setting c Select Draw Animation Display Lamp on the menu The Lamp dialog box 8 OK 2 see aro cco OLL LampKExternab d On the Basic tab click Lamp External to display the check mark v click the Device button input a bit device to be assigned then click OK Refer to Caution on setting of Lamp External described later installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Switch setting e On the menu select Common Operation Panel Edit Operation Panel Function ke dialog box appears y Edit Operation Panel g T F E o FFFF j FFFF FFFF FFFF Cancel inam ET 888 FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFF
215. 0SH Memo bus unit RS 422 CP 217IF MP920 CP9200SH RS 232C Refer ence Connection type name JJ gt more GOT units 14 2 1 Micro computer connection v T N e ho 1 SYSMAC C N 2 ho N FLEX PC 16 2 1 20 JJ 20 O DW 4 4 4 N ro Pol mo O FLEX PC N Series link unit NB Series NB RS1 AC NB RS1 Fuji DC Electric NJ Series NJ RS2 NJ RS4 NS Series NS RS1 CPU with built in RS 232C interface NJ CPU B16 FP Series CPU direct connection JJ wm n5 oo n5 O 17 2 1 Machine controller N N N NO CO Matsushita Electric Works FP 18 2 1 FPO FP2SH FP2 CCU SLC500 Series CPU direct connection 1 10 6 10 4 10 or later or later or later 2 00 or later or later RS 232C 1 00 6 00 4 00 or later or later or later 5 00 3 00 or later or later 1 20 6 20 4 20 or later or later or later Y connect Cannot connect SLC5 03 SLC5 04 Allen MicroLogix Series Bradly CPU direct connection SLC500 19 2 1 MicroLogix 1000 D Series and later Micro Logix 1000 analog Micro Logix 1200 Micro Logix 1500 SIMATIC S7 Series CPU direct connection SIEMENS AG SIMATIC 57 300 SISMATIC 57 400 SIMATIC 57 200 Aa MITSUBISHI SIMATIC RS 232C S7 20 2 1 NO OD
216. 1 Z Y W 22 lt gt ES1 z BLW 24 lt gt DC24V 25 gt DC24V J OF 02 A cx F9GT HCAB1 OOM Oo 9 Communication unit RS 422 Drain Y gt FG class D di CS1 side connection Ty gable 00 277909898 D grounding FoGT HCABor 2 5 Se F9GT HCAB1on 6 Nd 58 W 3 4 gt 6 Be Handy GOT side 1 6 9 oc C e 9 pin D Sub male PL 12 DC24VG oS PK 13 gt DC24VG CS1W SCB41 FGR 14 common d Prepared by the user SB 15 gt SW Mid da BK W 16 SW2 operation e9 R W 17 SW3 switches and dm GR W 18 gt SW4 ue emergency 2 BRIW 1 ES Sich i Y W 22 ES1 BL W 24 gt DC24V GY W 25 lt DC24V J E9GT HCAB1 O0M 7 5 9 85 Sog Fr s MITSUBISHI 15 19 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION C 2 Female type Male type Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 The connector figure shows the engagement face Application Connection diagram Application RS 232C 9GT HCAB OOM Host link unit side connection pa 7 766852 D grounding C200H side R 4 4 g
217. 19 19 1 3 Others Description Cable Diagram Cable diagrams for SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC and GOT connection Troubleshooting Description of errors and how to fix them System Condition When connecting the SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC check the COM port designation the OS version of the GOT F900 and applicable versions of the screen creation software Compatibility when connecting SLC500 Series PLC COM port Connection type version ereen GOT F900 OS version creation software Series of GOT F900 RS 232C TO oE more GT Designer DU WIN GOT units E mms we uwor _ L ser F940 Handy GOT e c It cannot be connected Select the F943 Handy GOT Paraso v 7 200 swe 290 Compatibility when connecting MicroLogix Series PLC F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT Handy GOT The screen creation software GT Designer Version SW5 F 5 05F or later which is applicable to the MicroLogix Series is required Screens cannot be created using a version earlier than SW5 F 5 05F Prepare an applicable version The screen creation software DU WIN version 2 50 or later which is applicable to the MicroLogix Series is required Screens cannot be created using a version earlier than 2 50 Prepare an applicable version a MITSUBISHI 19 2 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Brad
218. 2 21 2 1 Configuration for Printer 21 2 21 2 2 Applicable port ori GOT F900 oto t reete E 21 2 21 3 Printer Communication Setting esseeeessseseseeeeeeneen nennen 21 2 21 3 1 Transmission Specifications and Communication 21 2 21 4 Cautions on Use OD PHATE fei Uta aucun dos 21 4 21 4 1 Gaulon Seting ric cu scatet astu cla am 21 4 21 4 2 Concurrent use of microcomputer and 21 4 21 5 Setting of Connected Equipment for 21 5 2146 Cable DIAG Fal EE TUM 21 6 22 Connection of Bar Code Reader eese 22 1 22 1 oyster COMIN ON suis 22 2 22 2 CONDECION oblig allOEi ceeds tek ie anes e 22 2 22 2 1 Configuration for Bar Code Reader Connection 22 2 22 3 Bar Code Reader Communication Setting 22 3 22 3 1 Transmission Specifications and Communication 22 3 22 3 2 Bar Code Reader Control Devices 22 4 22 3 9 Bar Gode Dala SENO
219. 2 Cable for the Handy GOT and the Series PLC 599 When using the Handy GOT RH model refer to the cable diagrams below for the RS 422 RS 232C 20 g connector but not the wiring for the power supply the operation switches and the emergency stop 8 8 switch because it is different For details refer to Chapter 5 C 3 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face Application Connection diagram Application 5 2 SOC RS 422 To F9GT HCAB3 150 ES connection ue SS aS OI 13 oi i _ eader side of the Handy c ae PA oan RS 232C Dedicated connector GOT is dedicated and y 7 connection cannot be prepared by e 9 the user 14 25 5 25 pin D Sub male c O l 25 n The connector on the 205 leader side of the Hand gt b F9GT HCAB1 3M Dedicated connector GOT is dedicated and d Loose wires FOGT HCAB1 10M RS 232C cannot be prepared by no connector connection the user RS 232C F9GT HCAB OOM 3 connection pend D grounding Series 55 i o BK 2 4 gt 1 FF W 3 gt 5 BR 7 4 6 R 4 2 O 10 3 6 MINI DIN male FOGT HCAB SHELL P 13 1 PL 12 gt DC24VG 59a PK 13 gt DC24VG ez c F9GT HCAB5 150 Fd FGR 14 p o gt O common Wire the power 25 pin D Sub female BK W 16 SW2 operation R W 17 gt S
220. 2 i SAC Correspond to iix PGO to PG29 2 I Program SE operation PG 10 Pr 210 e o 5 TE 11 211 Correspond to PG30 to PG59 20 Pr 220 No 21 Pr 221 Correspond to Groups PG60 to PG89 30 Pr 230 T Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC 3 Correspondence table between device PG and set value of each parameter o Lx EZO Parameter number for Device in GOT F900 zog inverter Operation frequency Starttime Rotation direction ex 8 o Pr 201 to Pr 210 Group 1 PGO to PG9 PG10toPG19 PG20 to PG29 sin Pr 211 to Pr 220 Group 2 PG30 to PG39 PG40 to PG49 PG50 to PG59 Pr 221 to Pr 230 Group 3 PG60 to PG69 PG70 to PG79 PG80 to PG89 5i 59 oS CEE 59 sa 59 o i BS 8 EBs SHO eas o2 5 OVNA a MITSUBISHI 13 15 Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 Function of inverter GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Device name in GOT F900 4 Contents of communication in the GOT F900 reference When the PG device is monitored in the GOT F900 the instruction codes are issued and communication is executed The instruction codes are automatically issued in the following procedure and the user does not have to consider it Procedure for communication with inverter Station number 5 PGO is read Instruction codes 1 FF 2 6C 3 3D 1 Writes the link parameter extension setting
221. 20 4 Setting in SIMATIC 57 300 400 sees 20 8 20 4 1 Communication Setting Specifications 20 8 20 4 2 GOT F900 Transmission 20 8 20 5 Device Specification Method scenka nnne nnn 20 9 20 5 1 Device Format in SIMATIC 87 200 nennen nennen nnns 20 9 20 5 2 Device Format in SIMATIC S7 300 400 ssseeseeeeeeeeeenennn 20 10 20 5 3 Supplementary Items or eoa eue sae esos need 20 11 20 6 Caution on Use of SIMATIC 57 200 300 400 Series PLC 20 11 20 6 1 Restriction in devices depending on the 20 11 20 6 2 Restriction in device specification 20 11 20 7 Setting of Connected Equipment for 20 12 20 8 GaDle DIagE altis dne e 20 17 2059 amp tamdiu 20 19 MITSUBISHI xii GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Contents ZA COMME CU OM sd eed oed voee cose CE EE EU uses ease eee dri buta Sw 21 1 21 1 Systern iain eris 21 1 21 2 System GonfIg ratlor s t rto hoe oer Ro eer gu ROS 21
222. 2171F Prepared by the user a MITSUBISHI FG class D vog grounding i gt 2 SD TXD CP 217IF MEMOBUS unit CN2 9 25 25 pin D Sub male Signal name of MEMOBUS port FG class D vo grounding 2 SD TXD MEMOBUS unit CPU unit 9 male 17 10 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Machine Controller CP9200SH PLC Manufactured by Yaskawa Electric 17 o 2 Cable for the Handy GOT and the machine controller 599 o When using the Handy GOT RH model refer to the cable diagrams below for the RS 422 RS 232C 20 g connector but not the wiring for the power supply the operation switches and the emergency stop 8 8 switch because it is different For details refer to Chapter 5 C 3 Female type Male type connector figure shows the engagement face Model name Application Connection diagram Application 5 of OQ 5 0 RS 422 F9GT HCAB3 150 523 connection The connector on the 1 13 oma _ leader side of the Handy o Loc a cM Dedicated connector GOT is dedicated and y j 7 connection y cannot be prepared by 9 H the user 14 25 25 pin D Sub male cm 50 5 RS 422 T
223. 22 22 3 3 Bar Code Data Setting The bar code data read by the bar code reader is written from the GOT F900 to the connected equipment PLC oet word device to be written to the connected equipment using Bar Code Settings in the screen creation software m o O Printer Specify the head word device to be written to the connected equipment 385 Word device Excluding C200 to C255 32 bits high speed counter of FX Series PLC eism For the device range specifications refer to section 3 3 e ta fr TENERE Specify the number of word devices word device quantit One word one point stores 2 characters of the ASCII code data transmitted from the bar code reader The allowable setting range is from 2 to 32 points The head device stores the number of data ASCII code data read from the bar code reader 1 Rules of Data Storage 2 The data is stored the ASCII code format in word devices the ascending order of the word device number If the read data is larger than the specified number of devices the excessive data Is cut off If the read data is smaller than the specified number of devices space characters 20H are provided in vacant devices a When the number of data read from the bar code reader is equivalent to or less than the specified number of devices Data read from the bar code reader 1234567 Write destination device D100 Number of devices 6
224. 2PIF lt A6GPP A7PHP HPP Refer to Appendix X0 x2 Y10 0 X3 M100 MOV K5 ID22 oo 8422 422 TE x PLC GOT F900 FX 2PIF Dedicated machine Screen creation Connection when sequence program transfer and monitoring are executed while the GOT F900 and the dedicated programming tool for PLC are connected to the FX Series and A Series PLC through the FX 2PIF Excluding the F9220GOT K and Handy a MITSUBISHI 6 2 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Peripheral Equipment 6 6 2 Connection to Personal Computer E gt This section explains the configuration when the created screen data and sequence programs using E the built in two port interface function are transferred while a personal computer is connected to the RS 232C port of the GOT F900 6 2 1 Screen Data Transfer GOT F900 Personal computer Handy GOT a RS 232C cable GOT F900 e ODODS GT Designer DU WIN 3 o 1 Data transfer cable Personal computer a RS 232C cable Port shape FX 232CAB 1 PC AT compatible machine DOS V 9 pin D Sub female The screen data and sequence program can be transferred using a same cable installation and Wiring of F940GOT Caution on use of F920GOT K The F920GOT K and the Q Series PLC CPU direct connection are connected via RS 232C ports Therefore a
225. 3 Fe fe 5 5 Connect the F9GT HCABLI LIM external cable here Q 1 PLC port 9 pin D Sub type F9GT HCNB F9GT HCAB LIM PLC port Handy GOT connector GOT connector Description 5 D Sel clei a sense Sota 5209 RXD On 3 RTS RSA Signal wires for communication CTS CSA with PLC 3 corresponding to the connected seo 295 o c 2 TEE culo Sau Description ee ogg 5 T SEG For operation switches eit Sud 3 Terminal block for power supply and emergency stop switch TE F9GT HCNB F9GT HCAB LIM es Terminal block for Handy GOT connector Description power supply and 520 DC24V 24 25 DC24V4 DC24V 24y DC power supply of the main soa DC24VG 12 13 DC24VG unit Me ET Emergency stop switch Both ends of the contact of the switch sa are present here 56o cN g SEH a MITSUBISHI 5 23 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 5 7 Outline of Internal Wiring The Handy GOT is equipped with the following switches and indicator LEDs shown below Handy GOT Excluding RH model 1 Switch assignment The figure below shows the switch assignment Each switch is expressed in abbreviations as follows SW1 SW4 Operation switches 11 14 Indicator LEDs for 5 operation switches m 9 1 Grip L5 Indicator LED for grip switch switch 5 11 Switches requiring external wiring The
226. 5 GOT internal data register GD GD100 GD1023 a GD1023 1 The bit data M is available in the GT Designer version SW1 E and later 2 The special memory is offered for special application such as interrupt output and communication error information in the GOT 2 SYSMAC C Series manufactured by Omron Setting range Device Device name number GT Designer DU WIN representation I O relay 000000 614315 00000 51115 Internal auxiliary relay WR00000 WR51115 NENNEN Data link relay LR LR00000 LR19915 L0000 L6315 Bit Auxiliary memory relay AR AR00000 AR95915 1 A0000 A2715 2 RN Extension data memory E 0000 E 9999 SS bank specification 0 to C GOT internal data register GD GD100 GD1023 GD100 GD1023 1 When the CS1 Series is connected auxiliary memory relays AR cannot be set to ON or OFF Do not use them in the key operation setting bit Hexadecimal a MITSUBISHI 3 16 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 3 FLEX PC N Series manufactured by Fuji Electric Specifications 3 Introduction Setting range Device name GT Designer DU WIN Input X Bit device S T Internal relay Latch relay Special internal relay Y M L id X0 X7FF YO Y7FF MO M1FFF 4 Machine controller CP9200SH Series manufactured by Yasukawa Electric installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Setting range Device name GT Designer DU WIN Input relay IB IBO IBFFFF C
227. 5 46 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 C 3 Female type Male type Model name Application Connection diagram The connector figure shows the engagement face Application RS 232C connection F9GT HCAB5 150 The diagram on the right shows the wiring of the RS 422 signals For wiring of the operation switches and the power supply refer to chapter 5 MITSUBISHI Drain es F9GT HCAB F9GT HCAB LILIM Class D 1 1 B Z 5 6 1 L MEI R 14 25 i 2 25 pin D Sub female i 3 Y SHELL PL 12 PK 13 DC24VG 4 DC24VG oW gt common gt SW1 gt SW2 gt SW3 15 16 17 18 SW4 gt ESI Y W 22 BL W 24 21 ES1 GR W 25 DC24V DC24V HCABI1 LILIM Q Series 3 6 pin MINI DIN male Wire the power supply the operation switches and the emergency 0 47 Introduction Outline Specifications jum to o cr cO installation and Wiring of Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More GOT Unit
228. 5 pin D Sub male PL 12 gt DC24VG PK 13 DC24V Prepared by the user amp SB 15 common Wire the power 15 gt SWI supply the BK W 16 gt SW2 operation R W 17 lt lt gt SW3 switches and GR W 18 gt SWA oo BANN gt ES switch Y W 22 gt ES BL W 24 gt DC24V GY W 25 lt gt DC24V J a MITSUBISHI A FoGT HCABI HIDM 16 12 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Manufactured by Fuji Electric 16 C 2 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face Model name Application Connection diagram Application RS 232C connection F9GT HCAB or F9GT HCAB 1 on Handy GOT side Prepared by the user MITSUBISHI PLC side 1 8 e 9 15 15 pin D Sub male gt DC24VG gt DC24VG common Wire the power gt SW SUE INE SW2 operation gt SW3 switches and gt SW4 the emergency gt ES1 gt ES1 DC24V DC24V A FoGT HCABI HIDM 16 13 Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC Connection of FX Series Positioning Connection of FREQROL Inverter Connection of Microcom puter SOG oQga o c o gt Onn Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500
229. 55 current value CA010000 CA255255 megeri NO07000 N007255 NO07000 N007255 9 NO10000 N255255 NO10000 N255255 GOT internal data register GD GD100 GD1023 1 32 bit cannot be chosen when setting the screen creation software Introduction Outline c E Q o installation and Wiring of F940GOT installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 3 19 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 li GT Designer Version 5 05F or later and DU WIN Version 2 50 or later Setting range Device Device name number GT Designer DU WIN representation Bit B B3 0 0 B3 255 15 B3 0 0 B3 255 15 Hexadecimal B10 0 0 B255 255 15 B10 0 0 B255 255 15 Timer T T4 0 TT T4 255 TT T4 0 TT T4 255 TT timing bit T10 0 TT T255 255 TT T10 0 TT T255 255 TT Timer T T4 0 DN T4 255 DN T4 0 DN T4 255 DN completion bit T10 0 DN T255 255 DN T10 0 DN T255 255 DN 25 gg Counter C C5 0 CU C5 255 CU C5 0 CU C5 255 CU up counter C10 0 CU C255 255 CU C10 0 CU C255 255 CU Decimal Counter C C5 0 CD C5 255 CD C5 0 CD C5 255 CD down counter C10 0 CD C255 255 CD C10 0 CD C255 255 CD Counter C C5 0 DN C5 255 DN C5 0 DN C5 255 DN completion bit C10 0 DN C255 255 DN C10 0 DN C255 255 DN GOT
230. 599 The GOT F900 and the host link unit can be connected on the 1 1 basis TE One GOT F900 unit can be connected to the RS 232C built in the CQM1 or CS1 CPU and as many 9 9 GOT F900 units as the number of host link units attached to the C200H or CS1 can be connected 1 In the case of F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT 5 o 9 o GOT F900 a SYSMAC C Series 25 Host link EO EXT b RS 232C cable o Sa F940GOT 8E 5 SEE a SYSMAC C Series b RS 232C cable Remarks 2 3 8 x coeg 652 CS1G H CPU V1 equipped with built in RS 232C port CS1W SCB41 CS1W SCB21 CS1W SCU21 Applicable SYSMAC C Series products in the eed EE are host link units equipped with built in RS 232C interface Preparedbytheuser by the user CPU unit Prepared by the user Serial communication board Prepared by the user Serial communication board Prepared by the user by the user Serial communication board CQM1 equipped with built in RS 232C port Prepared by the user 25 pin D PrePared by the user Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 15 5 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 2 F943 Handy GOT
231. 7 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 2 Software Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 Ci Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures In the personal computer connected to the GOT F900 sequence Software such as GX Programs cannot be monitored or transferred Communication with the sequence software is disabled An error message is displayed Developer and FX WIN Communication with the screen creation software and screen data cannot be transferred a MITSUBISHI PLC bar code reader or printer is connected Causes The RS 232C connector to which the personal computer is connected is set to be used for another piece of equipment Countermeasures For monitoring or transferring sequence programs set a bar code reader to invalid and a printer to DON T USE If the PLC is connected select the GOT F900 equipped with two built in RS 232C channels Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 and the personal computer e Causes The wrong cable is used or the connection is bad e Countermeasures Check the cable Q computer link bar code reader or printer is connected Causes The RS 232C connector to which the personal computer is connected is set to be used for another piece of equipment Countermeasures In the GOT F900 select by hand SELECT MODE OTHER MODE DATA TRANSFER Or set a bar code reader to invalid and a printer to DON T USE Something is wrong with the cable between
232. 9 4 1 Caution when the GOT F900 is connected to the computer link unit 9 15 9 4 2 Caution when displaying the Ascii 9 15 9 5 Setting of Connected Equipment for 9 16 9 6 Gable Didaga Msc n T 9 21 9 ire cist inte fn Corde sivc Modus 9 24 MITSUBISHI GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Contents 10 Connection of MELSEC QnA Series 10 1 TOT sce 10 2 10 1 1 Restriction When Computer Link Unit for A Series is Used 10 2 10 2 System COMMOUIATON Moe goo 10 3 10 2 1 Configuration for Direct Connection 5 422 10 3 10 2 2 Configuration for QnA Computer Link Connection RS 422 10 5 10 2 3 Configuration for QnA Computer Link Connection RS 232C 10 7 10 3 Setting in QnA Computer Link 10 9 10 3 1 Communication Setting 10 9 10 3 2 Semo EXatmiples su aseo hu
233. 900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Manufactured by Fuji Electric 16 2 Software Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures A FLEX PC N Series PLC bar code reader or printer is connected Causes The RS 232C connector to which the personal computer is connected is set to be used for another piece of equipment Countermeasures In the GOT F900 select by hand SELECT MODE OTHER Communication with the screen MODE DATA TRANSFER creation software and screen data Or set a bar code reader to invalid and a printer to DON T cannot be transferred USE Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 and the personal computer Causes The connected cable is not proper Or cable connection is not correct e Countermeasures Check the cable a MITSUBISHI 16 16 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Machine Controller CP9200SH PLC Manufactured by Yaskawa Electric 17 o 17 Connection of Machine Controller CP9200SH PLC Manufactured by 593 Yaskawa Electric mes SEG This chapter explains the procedure to connect the GOT F900 Series display unit to the MP900 CP9200SH machine controller o Connection Procedure Bee oz This section introduces the procedure to connect the GOT F900 to the MP900 CP9200SH machine 59 controller 1 a Description Reference Reference System Condition can learn the connection availability as well
234. 900 on the panel face as well as the installation procedure 4 4 1 Caution on installation When installing the GOT on the control panel etc make sure that the display unit is set at an angle shown in the figure below If the GOT is installed at any other angle the GOT may be deteriorated earlier 1 F920GOT K F930GOT F930GOT K and F940GOT When installing the GOT inside the panel while placing the screen laterally set the installation angle to 0 to 90 while the temperature inside the panel during operation is 0 to 50 C L ateral installation Display unit Panel surface 90 GOT 2 F940WGOT When installing the GOT on the panel surface while placing the screen laterally set the installation angle to 90 while the temperature inside the panel during operation is 0 to 50 C When the required installation angle is other than 90 then the temperature should be 0 to 40 L ateral installation Display unit Panel surface 90 In the case of horizontal installation the temperature is 0 to 40 When installing the GOT on the panel surface while placing the screen longitudinally set the installation angle to 90 while the temperature inside the panel during operation is 0 to 40 C Longitudinal installation Display unit Panel surface 90 GOT 90 0 a MITSUBISHI 4 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of F920GOT K F930G
235. 91 RO R8191 Accumulator A L4 o o Z0 Z6 Z0 Z Z GOT internal data register GD 2 GD100 1023 GD100 1023 1 Latch relays L are treated as internal relays M in the GOT F900 2 GB132 to GB255 and GD100 to GD127 in the F920GOT K 3 In computer link connection index registers Z V cannot be monitored or written a MITSUBISHI 3 12 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 3 MELSEC QnA Q Q mode Series E Setting range Device 3 Device name number GT GT Designer DU WIN representation Input X AN L X1FFF X0 X1FFF Hexadecimal rag YO Y1FFF a Y1FFF 5 6 Internal relay M MO M32767 M32767 Latch relay L LO L382767 is L32767 Decimal Annunciator F FO F32767 ae F32767 Link relay B BO B7FFF asm B7FFF Hexadecimal Special link relay SB SBO SB7FF ase SB7FF Bit a TTO TT32767 uu _ 32767 imer device Col TCO TC32767 le CT32767 C0 C32767 Counter C 7 7 Special relay SM SM0 SM2047 SM0 SM2047 c E Q o SS0 SS32767 SS0 SS32767 Decimal co Retentive timer ST SC0 SC32767 SC0 SC32767 59 amp e Step relay S S0 S32767 S0 S32767 225 GOT internal bit GB GB132 GB1023 GB132 GB1023 Data register D DO D32767 DO D32767 Special register SD0 SD2047 SD0 SD2047 Link register W WO WTFFF WO WTFFF ETT Hexadecimal S
236. 920GOT K blue F930GOT BWD installation and Wiring of Handy GOT d Set CPU direct connection RS 422 link connection RS 422 RS The Setup Data dialog 232C of the GOT F900 box appears S the menu select View Project System Settings Setup DLE Data ces c Opening Screen Time s 4 m phas Time min O Sem E E Port 9 55 Type 6 SO PLC Station No aoe iam f On GOT Station No C Off e Set the following Port RS 422 20S RS 232C 5E x Type CPU LINK DST Station No Station No 00 to 15 GOT Station No S49 Combinations of Port and Type are as follows 502 o oOzo HS 422 LINK RS 232C LINK og oo que EJO g SE a MITSUBISHI 9 19 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 Operation Display screen name Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows a Open DU WIN b On the menu select File Open The Open dialog box c Select and open read the file of the screen data to be changed appears d When changing Terminal GOT F900 select View Project The Project settings System Settings Project settings on the menu dialog box appears For the contents of setting refer to c in Creation above The PLC selection item display varies depending on the OS version as follows PLC System selection item display in DU WIN DU WI
237. 940 W GOT 4 Note Even if momentary power failure of less than 5 ms occurs in the power supply the F930GOT F930GOT K F940 W GOT continues the operation If long time power failure or voltage drop occurs the F930GOT F940 W GOT stops the operation When the power supply is recovered the F930GOT F940 W GOT restarts the operation Use electric wires of 0 75 mm or more in wiring of the power supply so that voltage drop does not occur Use solderless terminals for M3 and tighten them securely with the tightening torque of 0 5 to 0 8 Nem so that troubles are not caused This section explains installation on the panel face and wiring of the power supply etc Wiring procedure This section introduces the procedure to connect the GOT F900 to connected equipment such as PLC 1 Preparation Wemmme Besp m e installation You can learn the method to install the F9220GOT K F930GOT F930GOT 44 K F940 W GOT Connector Pin Layout You check the connector signal names and Signal Name 2 Wiring WMemmame Description Reference Outline of Internal Wiring ie block diagrams of portions requiring wiring and the Wiring for 24V DC and 5V DC Power Supply and You can check the methods to wire the 24 VDC power supply and 47 perform Class D grounding Class D Grounding You can learn how to use the function keys KEYS Setting in the screen creation software is required 3
238. 940GOT black and white 9 2 redu HEINE Handy a black and white F940GOT color Pee ne Handy GOT color F930GOT K blue Sog F930GOT blue ER d Set RS 422 of the GOT F900 The Setup Data dialog On the menu select View Project System Settings Setup Data box appears 5 Opening Screen Time 5 5 S Backlight Off Time min O Cancel oe F Connection T 2 pot SLA Type GPU Y a Station No 0 ha ud Use GripSwitch oc co oo e Set the following ES Port RS 422 EEO Type CPU 852 DST Station No Station 00 GOT Station No D Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows 59 a Open DU WIN 50 b On the menu select File Open The Open dialog box e c Select and open read the file of the screen data to be changed appears om d When changing Terminal GOT F900 select View Project The Project settings System Settings Project settings on the menu dialog box appears For the contents of setting refer to c in Creation above 5 For setting of RS 232C RS 422 of the FX Series positioning unit 9 refer to in Creation above 595 Onn SHO son eu oz Onn MITSUBISHI 12 7 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FX Series Positioning Unit FX 2N 10 20GM 12 12 5 Cable Diagram This section explains cable diagrams to connect the GOT F900 and the FX Series positioning unit 1
239. 95 T DEVICE FORMAL m NO T um 19 9 19 5 2 File Number and Element Range 19 11 19 5 3 Restriction in Device Specification 19 11 19 6 Caution on Use of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC 19 12 19 6 1 Device setting in advance scissione a a e nnne nnn nn 19 12 19 6 2 Caution on use of the sampling function 19 12 19 7 Setting of Connected Equipment for 19 13 19 9 Gable DIAGN AIT See ean eea ses 19 17 19 9 TROUDISSHOOUING 19 19 20 Connection of SIMATIC 57 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG due gs 20 1 10 9 0 ETT 20 2 20 2 System sa Dto sedes i adest oe cim Gros 20 3 20 2 1 Configuration for CPU Direct Connection 5 2320 20 3 20 2 2 Introduction of Options Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 5 20 9 VGN IG 97 200 ot ht eue amt iue deu 20 6 20 3 1 Communication Setting Specifications 20 6 20 3 2 GOT F900 Transmission 20 8
240. A it T T T RS 232C bam GX Developer Even if there is an unused RS 232C connector in the last connected GOT unit connection and use of a personal computer are disabled for the following reasons a Because the response is slow during device monitoring this connection cannot be recommended for practical use b Because the communication time is long during program transfer or monitoring a communication error may occur in the software installed in the personal computer 2 When a personal computer is connected to the F240WGOT F940WGOT GOT F900 GOT F900 5 d RS 232C GX Developer The F940WGOT is equipped with 2 channels of RS 232C connectors However if the F940WGOT is connected to a GOT unit and a personal computer at the same time sequence program transfer and monitoring are disabled The two port interface function is available only for either the function to connect two or more GOT units or the program transfer monitoring function Use of these two functions at the same time is not allowed a MITSUBISHI 7 10 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Two or More GOT Units 7 7 6 7 6 1 7 6 2 Setting of Connected Equipment for GOT Connection of two
241. A Series PLC needs to be sa prepared by the user The 5V DC power is supplied from the PLC ES co z a MITSUBISHI 4 3 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of F920GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 4 2 Name of Each Part 4 2 1 Front Panel 1 Display F920GOT K Graphic display of 128 x 64 dots Character string 16 characters x 4 lines F930GOT F930GOT K Graphic display of 240 x 80 dots Character string 30 characters x 5 lines F940GOT Graphic display of 320 x 240 dots Character string 40 characters x 15 lines F940WGOT Graphic display of 480 x 234 dots Character string 60 characters x 14 lines Example Front panel of F940GOT e Alphabets and numbers can be displayed in the size of x1 2 to x4 in height and x1 to x4 in width 4 2 2 Rear Panel F920GOT K F930GOT K F930GOT 9 100000100000 piace 000000000000 000000000000 E cv S
242. Application Connection diagram Application Power Q Series GOT power cable connection oe power cable 1 5 Prepared by the user Cable length 3m 9 10 or less 6 9 Resistance per wire 0 67 Q or less 9 pin D Sub male Approximately AWG 28 or thicker F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT C 2 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face Model name Application Connection diagram Application RS 232C 1 connection GOT F200 Q CPU direct connection QC30R2 6 9 pin D Sub female 6 pin MINI DIN male FG class D FG class D RS 422 arounding Grounding connection GOT F900 i gt RXD RDA 6 RXD RDB Serial Q computer link E E D DA Terminal communication X lt X lt unit side E 5 Signal name of 9 pin D Sub male Tum FG cl D connection i CD DCD communication unit side PLC side GOT F900 5 Q computer link 3 Prepared by the user r 9 6 9 pin D Sub female Aa MITSUBISHI 11 22 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11
243. Assignment of device used to confirm the grip switch ON OFF status Assign a device used to confirm the grip switch ON OFF status using the screen creation software a In the case of screen creation software GT Designer In Common on the menu set Write device in System Information Then the specified write word device 4 is assigned to the grip switch The figure below shows the relationship between bits in the system signal area and the grip switch When the bit value is 1 the LED is ON When it is 0 the LED is OFF Write device 4 b15 614 b12 bii b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 bB b2 bl bO 1 11 C T T l Grip switch In the case of screen creation software DU WIN On the menu set Bit Device in View Project System Settings Interface Devices Then the 8th bit device is assigned to the grip switch The figure below shows the relationship between bits in the system signal area and the grip switch When the bit value is 1 the LED is ON When it is 0 the LED is OFF Bit device 2 b15 614 b13 b12 bil b10 b9 b8 qe Grip switch 2 Program example When the OS version is 6 00 or later It can be selected whether communication with the PLC is enabled even while the grip switch is invalid The grip switch LED ON OFF status can be controlled from the PLC a In the case of screen creation software GT Designer When the grip switch turns ON or OFF the 5th bit of the write device in the system information t
244. B21 PK 13 gt DC24VG g CS1W SCU21 FGR 14 lt gt common CS1G H CPU V1 SB 154 SWi suc te Prepared by the user BK W t6 lt gt SW2 operation R W 17 gt SW3 switches and GR W 18 gt SW4 oo ene gt ES switch Y W 22 gt ES1 BL W 24 DC24V GY W 25 lt DC24V J HCAB1 LILIM 15 20 a MITSUBISHI GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 o 15 8 Troubleshooting 599 209 For reference this section summarizes frequently asked questions about connection of the GOT F900 Sus to the SYSMAC C Series PLC manufactured by Omron 1 GOT F900 Contents of troubl COEUR DOS OMA OSvesion BE ontents of trouble eck points and countermeasures Sask ry The power of the SYSMAC C Series PLC is turned off 8x8 Cause Communication is disabled because the power of the COMMUNICATION SYSMAC C Series PLC is turned off ERROR OCCURS is Countermeasures So displayed when a Turn on the power FE screen changeover or Sie gt numeric data input is Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 and product product product 2 performed on the the SYSMAC C Series PLC GOT F900 screen e Causes The wrong cable is used or the connection is bad S Countermeasures E 9 Check the cable S52 o a Changeover to a nonexistent screen by a touch key or the SYSMAC C Series PLC was tried DISPLAY SCREEN Earlier
245. B3 150 F9GT HCAB5 150 The untied wire colors are shown above On each wire a label indicating the signal name SW1 to FOGT HCABS 50 SW4 and ES1 is adhered GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 2 Wiring between Handy GOT RH model operation switches and connected equipment E gt Wiring inside Connected Handy GOT D SUB 7 equipment PLC SW COM 12 xi COM m SW1 13 i XO LL 2 14 x E di SW3 15 xi X2 SW4 16 i X3 2 ES1 2 22 Wire them er as ES1 1 21 emergency stop switch ES1 2 23 Inputs HR DSW 1 24 329 229 OL DSW 2 26 l TOM should cok DSW 2 27 be 24V S25 T DC 1A CE KSW 1 29 or less BS KSW 2 30 I COM ES Electric circuit Power SOE irl Q DC24VG 18 supply wiring ed DC24VG 19 36 24V DC DC24V 37 98 DC24V O y 1 592 re Class D 9 5 grounding am 388 Cables for F9GT RHCAB OOM F9GT RHCAB2 150 Handy GOT F9GT RHCAB3 150 F9GT RHCAB5 150 On each wire a
246. Basic Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Handy GOT settings OK Opening Screen Time sec Backlight Off Time 10 Min r Connection Buzzer Port R5422 ON Type CPU M C OFF Station No E a MITSUBISHI 11 18 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 Operation Display screen name d In the case of SW4D5C GOTR PACKE earlier than version A EO 8 perform the setting in the GOT F900 833 Set the connection in CONNECTION in the GOT F900 For the setting method refer to 1 GOT F900 Series on the previous page e Set the following RS 422 25 RS 232C EO Type CPU DST Station No Station No 0 GOT Station No D Combinations of Port and Type are as follows Connection destination Pot Type E 5 Direct connection to CPU om RS 232C Computer link unit for CPU Computer link unit for Q RS 422 Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows The Select Project GT Designer dialog box appears Bo caog b Click the Open button S32 c Open read the screen data to be changed d On the menu select Common GOT PLC Type The GOT PLC Type dialog box appears The PLC type selection item display varies depending on the software version as follows PLC type selection item display in GT Designer M
247. C m c o O MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT C 2 Female type Male type Model name Application Connection diagram The connector figure shows the engagement face Application RS 422 connection QnACPU direct connection FX 40DU CAB FX 40DU CAB 10M FX 40DU CAB 20M FX 40DU CAB 30M FX 50DU CABL GOT F900 QnA Series 5 1 nN WP 1 6 9 DO 01 7 Sa 14 AAAAAAAAA 9 pin D Sub male ZD Co 25 pin D Sub male MEIN go N RS 422 connection A computer link FG class D grounding 7 FG class D gt grounding GOT F900 1 1 5 O O Terminal Computer link unit side PLC side gt RXD RDA RXD RDB gt TXD SDA 0 zs 6 2 S RR 5 4 TXD SDB gt SG GND 6 9 9 pin D Sub male Signal name of computer link RS 232C connection A computer link F2 232CAB 1 The connection diagram is partially different Computer link GOT F900 unit side 5 PLC side AAAAA 1 e e e Oi o o wN 13 Y 9 6 9 pin D Sub female
248. CONNECTION Connection of Two or More GOT Units 7 In the case of microcomputer connection E C 2 Female type Male type connector figure shows the engagement face 3 Model name Application Connection diagram Application connection 1 5 grounding Ta 6 mre HCAB or F9GT 1 1 940 O 2 4 e Handy GOT 6 9 6 p 5 Di gt Connection of two Da or more GOT units Prepared by the user ees wae 4 gt o j j common a in the table above is Wire the power 5 available also supply the eee d E operation switches and the SW3 a zx emergency stop SW4 switch ES1 51 4 p DC24V C DC24V lt 4 F9GT HCAB1 LILIM F9GT HCAB LILIM installation and Wiring of F940GOT switch 2 DC24V a DC24V lt RS 232C GOT F900 FG Class D connection i grounding i e HCAB or F9GT H 1 of F943 EM Handy GOT 5 E E og 9 pin D Sub endis m CE SEG gt ae SS gt CSI gt gt Wire the power gt 505 supply the gt 295 operation switches TO E and the ces emergency stop Om 25 GY W F9GT HCAB1 oOM 4 Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Con
249. CP9200SH Refer to section 3 2 H 529 500 ODD a MITSUBISHI 17 1 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Machine Controller CP9200SH PLC Manufactured by Yaskawa Electric 17 17 2 17 2 1 System Configuration The MP900 CP9200SH machine controller can be directly connected to the GOT via RS 422 or RS 232C This section explains the cables and options required in such a system Connectable Model and Connector Shape The table below shows applicable models and their connector shape Machine controller GOT Mode Unt Gonnector shape _ CP9200SH CP 217IF 25 pin D Sub male Rsa N2 N3 RS 422 8 pin connector male PORT2 RS 232C 9 pin D Sub male MP920 RS 232C 9 pin D Sub male CP 2171F RS 232C 9 pin D Sub male RS 422 8 pin connector male MP930 CPU equipped PORT1 RS 232C 9 pin D Sub male with built in ports PORT2 RS 232C 9 pin D Sub male Configuration for CPU Direct Connection RS 422 Connect the MP900 CP9200SH machine controller to the COM port of the MEMOBUS unit and the RS 422 communication port of the GOT The GOT F900 and the machine controller can be connected on the 1 1 basis As many GOT F900 units as the number of MEMOBUS units attached to the machine controller can be connected 1 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT CPU equipped PORT RS 232C 9 pin D Sub male GOT F900 MEMOBUS unit a Machine controller b RS 422 cable F930GOT F94
250. Changes for the Better a MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINALS U CX T HARDWARE MANUAL CONNECTION GOT F900 SERIES GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL Covered models F920GOT F920GOT BBD5 K E F930GOT F930GOT BWD E F930GOT BBD K E F940GOT F940WGOT TWD E F940GOT SWD E LWD E Handy GOT F940GOT SBD H E LBD H E F943GOT SBD H E LBD H E F940GOT SBD RH E LBD RH E F943GOT SBD RH E LBD RH E cor F 9D GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Foreword e This manual contains text diagrams and explanations which will guide the reader in the correct installation and operation of the GOT F900 SERIES GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL It should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Further information can be found in the GOT F900 Operation Manual F920GOT K Installation Manual F930GOT Installation Manual F930GOT K Installation Manual F940GOT Installation Manual F9240WGOT Installation Manual e f in doubt at any stage of the installation of GOT F900 SERIES GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL always consult a professional electrical engineer who is qualified and trained to the local and national standards which apply to the installation site e f in doubt about the operation or use of GOT F900 SERIES GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL please consult the nearest Mitsubisi Electric distributor his manual is subject to change without notice a MITSUBISHI GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION GOT F900 SERIES
251. Chapter 5 C 3 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face No Model name Application Connection diagram Application RS 422 To F9GT HCAB3 150 connection The connector on the 1 13 a leader side of the Handy 04654 connestoron Goris dedicated and 9 connection cannot be prepared by the user 14 25 25 pin D Sub male RS 422 F9GT HCAB1 3M connection b F9GT HCAB1 Dedicated connector on GOT is dedicated and y Loose wires 10M RS 232C Handy GOT side cannot be prepared by no connector connection heuset RS 422 Drai y oT CAP OTM connection wie ee 2 2 3 a 15 4 4 cable F9GT HCAB 22 Handy GOT sige 6 gt 3 A e 7 l6 J gt 20 3 25 14 s T 14 25 F9GT HCAB3 150 25 pin D Sub female 10 a 25 pin D Sub male The diagram on the right 1 A shows the wiring of the RS i 7 422 signals For wiring of 12 gt DC24VG the operation switches and 13 gt ado the power supply refer to Rants 5 i p common Wire the power I5 gt SW supply the 16 SW2 operation 17 gt SW3 switches and 18 gt
252. Communication message error nue COMME aOR MESSAGE WaS Deng Confirm the communication message format received EXT was not found by the time the 9 upper limit of the receive buffer was exceeded Command error Confirm the data of the transmitted request An unsupported request command was used command Parity error Confirm the transmission specifications of the The parity bit is not matching microcomputer and the GOT F900 Framing error Confirm the transmission specifications of the Data bits or stop bits are not matching microcomputer and the GOT F900 Overrun error Confirm the transmission specifications of the Overrun has occurred in receive microcomputer and the GOT F900 Communication message error HOD MES RAJE wae DEING Confirm the communication message format received EXT was not found by the time the 9 upper limit of the receive buffer was exceeded Timeout error no station specified in command Check whether the station number specification The GOT did not return a response within the is correct in the transmitted request command specified time Two or more unit function disable error ES The function to connect two or more GOT units is 11 2326 ports occupied by connecting of a 01 02 03 04 05 101 102 103 104 105 106 bar code reader or printer a MITSUBISHI 14 12 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14
253. Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 11 17 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 2 GT Designer Creation a Open GT Designer The Select Project dialog box appears b Click the New button The GOT PLC Type dialog box appears GOT type Fo4xGOT 20 240 Y OK PLC type MELSEGC Gn Cancel Set the following GOT type F940WGOT 480 x 234 lt WIDE gt F94 GOT 320 x 240 F93 GOT 240 x 80 F920GOT 128 x 64 PLC type MELSEC QnA Q MELSEC Q Multi Selection of GOT type F940WGOT 480x234 lt WIDE gt F940WGOT F94 GOT 320x240 UT F930GOT K F93 GOT 240x80 F920GOT 128x64 F920GOT K Click OK d Set CPU direct connection RS 422 RS 232C of the GOT F900 The Project Auxiliary This setting is enabled in the SW4D5C GOTR PACKE version Settings dialog box or later Make Serial Port Setup Language and Menu Key valid Project Auxiliary Settings x Basic Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Handy GOT settings OK Key window Cursor display setting Cancel Action when switching screens Don t display cursor and key window When touch input is detected open key window at the same time Click the Setup tab
254. DC external power supply When the input power supply of the external power supply is different perform dedicated ground ing to the PLC and to the F930GOT F930GOT K F940 W GOT separately External power supply Class D Class D grounding grounding aa F930GOT 24V DC F930GOT K F940 W GOT a MITSUBISHI 4 16 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of F920GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 4 8 Handling of Function Keys F1 to F8 E 3 The ON OFF status of the function keys is transmitted to the PLC via a communication cable E Allocation of keys F920GOT K F930GOT K LED JOOGA Punehon Switen Eunction switch OOO J EIEN pers E OOO PE E OQ Be 5 OOO Six function keys 1 to F6 are provided Eight function keys with green LEDs 1 to F8 are provided SE HoT Setting in the screen creation software ESL Select the followings on the menu in the screen creation software GT Designer DU WIN Functions of function key Common Operation Panel LED display on function key Draw Animation Display Lamp i installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More GOT Units Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC Connection of M
255. E check whether the changeover destination screen is free from error and displayed correctly If there is an error x is displayed at the head of the list on the screen There is an error on the screen to be displayed By selecting SELECT MODE TEST MODE in the GOT check whether the screen is displayed correctly If there is an error x is displayed at the head of the list on the screen From first product The GOT F900 is in the factory default settings and no screen data is available Write the screen data using the screen creation software The memory of the GOT F900 is cleared Write the screen data using the screen creation software The head screen has not been created The head screen is the screen number 1 in the GT Designer and the screen number 0 in the DU WIN The head screen is essential and must be created There is an error on the head screen By selecting SELECT MODE TEST MODE check whether the changeover destination screen is free from error and displayed correctly If there is an error x is displayed at the head of the list on the screen e The GOT F900 is in the status at shipment from the factory and no screen data is written From first Write the screen data using the screen creation software product The memory of the GOT F900 is cleared Write the screen data using the screen creation software If the screen with x in the list of TEST
256. ELSEC A GT Designer A MELSEC A MELSEC A QnA opes s MELSEC QnA Q da MELSEC Q Multi Connection of SYSMACC Series PLC Version SW1 A or later SW2 A or later SW4 F or later SW5 P or later Lc NN setting Available availability Not available Not available Select MELSEC QnA Q Available 1 Note that the selection item display is changed from MELSEC A QnA to MELSEC A and MELSEC QnA Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 11 19 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 3 DU WIN Operation Display screen name Creation a Open DU WIN The Project settings dialog box appears b On the menu select File New Terminal F940GOT SwWD System Cancel DU System Language English v Character Set Japanese Set the following Terminal F940WGOT TWD V H F940GOT LWD F940GOT SWD F930GOT BWD F920GOT BBD5 K PLC System MELSEC QnA Q Select Terminal in accordance with the LC display color Terminal Model name F940WGOT TWD V F940WGOT color F940GOT black and white oos Handy GOT black and white F940GOT color Handy GOT color F930GOT K blue F930GOT blue F940GOT SWD F930GOT BWD F920GOT BBD5 K F920GOT K blue d Set CPU direct co
257. ELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 4 17 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of F920GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 4 8 1 Use of function keys This section explains the use of the function keys and the indicator LEDs only in the F9O30GOT K 1 Wiring of function keys No wiring of the function keys is required because the keys and the connected equipment PLC communicate via a communication cable 2 Input of function keys The operations of the function keys alternate momentary set reset screen changeover can be set in the screen creation software The LED is turned ON OFF by turning ON OFF the devices allocated to each function switch in reference to Allocation of device to control LED below Set M200 as a momentary switch Operation of ON y the screen creation software function key OFF BN a OFF 3 Lighting of LEDs on function keys Available in the F930GOT K No wiring of the LEDs 1 to F8 is required because the LEDs and the connected equipment PLC communicate via a communication cable A green LED is lit when the device allocated to the function key using the screen creation software is turned ON a Allocation of device to control LED Device Function key M100 Function key SW1 Green lt Set this device using the screen creation software M101 Function key SW2 Green The LEDs for the function keys can be allocated successively
258. ERIES CONNECTION uononpoau 57 2 24 F940GOT suoneoyioodsg b 5 0 20 or less gt 162 6 38 screw center o c i T x pum 2 X uc N N N q ma0s Z1L S 0EL edeus e OW 19 9 0 109065 Bum pue uonejejsul gt 70 6 2 78 105 pueH Bum pue uonejejsul 193089 25 9 jueuudinb3 Jo gt lt Dimensions mm inches 5 0 20 or less 215 8 46 screw center 225 8 86 metal fixture external shape lt F940WGOT edeus 69 6 sun LOS 10 OML jo seues Xd 3 O3S TSN Jo uonoeuuo seues V O3S 1 uonpoeuuo seues vuO 93S 13N jo uonpoeuuo5 4 11 MITSUBISHI GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of F920GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 4 5 Connector Pin Layout and Signal Name Excluding the F920GOT K The figure below shows the pin layout in the serial interface connector built in the GOT F900 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT RS 422 RS 232C 9 pin D Sub female 9 pin D Sub male 5 1 M2 6 1 5 4 40UNC 0000 Metric screw thread COBO
259. F Initialize FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF I FFFF Action 5 FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF S22 Q FRFR J FEER JI EEEF FREF rs EMT 2 E Q wn M EE d EE a M c FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF SEG W Available Operation Panel eit f Click Available Operation Panel to display the check mark v Sud 1 Refer to Function key setting described later 9 a eo 50 5 o cog cn 54 c 899 gue cog mm MITSUBISHI 4 21 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of F920GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 Caution on setting of Lamp External 1 The contents of Lamp External you have set are not displayed on the screen 2 The check box is valid only in the F9330GOT K Handy GOT Never set the check box any other series 3 Set only one lamp for all screens of the created screen data 4 Make sure that the bit device assigned on the Basic tab in Lamp dialog box is not included in the read write device range set in Common System Information Function key setting The operations can be set to the switches from FO using the devices from 00 of X000 on the operation panel setting screen in the screen creation software The setting method and operations are the same as those of the touch keys however no key code setting is available
260. F900 b RS 232C cable a SLC500 Series port on the rear face CPU direct A B connection gt a i Handy GOT ES _ 5 232 6 ES 0000 To power supply O inscr and operation A C switches n E NE 4 Use the RS 2822C B RS 232C power supply and operation switches Total extension distance 6m 19 8 or less SLC5 03 SLC5 04 female MicroLogix1000 MicroLogix1000 Analog MicroLogix1200 MicroLogix1500 MINI DIN 9 pin D Sub 1 Only the Series D or later can be connected Make sure that the total cable extension distance A B or C is 6m 19 8 or less a MITSUBISHI 19 4 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley 19 o 19 3 Setting in SLC500 599 When directly connecting the SLC500 CPU the usage of the RS 232C port should be changed using Sus the peripheral equipment for the SLC500 Series package software RSLogix500 19 3 1 Communication Setting Specifications Set the transmission specifications in the SLC500 as shown in the table below For the setting method Sof refer to the manual of
261. F9LILDILIGOT DOOO O O O PAETE TEUAN AALTEN ACELE ACCETTA EU ARIES UD ACER AEN ARIETE MEC Ur KERERE ESSERE EER 1 LC display size 2 3 in 3 4 in 4 6 in 7 in in F940WGOT _ 2 PLC connection specifications 0 RS 422 RS 232C Interface 3 RS 232C x 2ch interface In the case of Handy GOT 0 RS 422 Interface 3 RS 232C interface 3 Screen shape None Standard W Wide screen 4 Screen color T TFT type 256 color LCD S STN type 8 color LCD L STN type black and white LCD B STN type blue LCD 5 Panel color W White B Black 6 Input power supply specifications D 24V DC D5 5V DC 7 Various keys None Not with a key K With a key 8 Type None Panel face installation type H Handy GOT RH Handy GOT 9 Overseas models z In built fonts vary depending on model T details refer to the next page PATITI ITIITI IIE IEIET IITTI IIINE ITIITI IIIT IEIET IEI IITIN AAIEN a MITSUBISHI 1 6 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Introduction 1 1 2 3 In built Fonts of Graphic Operation Terminal Japanese Overseas product Carefully confirm the in built fonts when selecting a model from the F920GOT K or F930GOT K Language displayed In built fonts user screen 3 GOT model name aos SE E Korean Chines F940WGOT TWD Japanese o4owGor F 40WGOT TWD E English At factory switched o
262. GOT F900 a FX Series positioning unit GM direct connection b RS 422 cable F930GOT F940GOT 8 pin MINI DIN FX2N 20GM FX 50DU CABOL port of the FX Series PLC FX 10GM FX 20GM 20 pin D Sub FX 30DU GM CAB E 20GM The L type cable FX 50DU CABOL cable with a right angle connector cannot be used for F930GOT or F930GOT K a MITSUBISHI 12 2 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 2 F940 Handy GOT Connection of FX Series Positioning Unit FX 2N 10 20GM 12 a GM CPU FX2N 10GM FX2N 20GM 8 pin MINI DIN FX 10GM FX 20GM E 20GM 20 pin D Sub GOT F900 b RS 422 cable a FX Series A B positioning unit a 2 E _ LUI
263. GOT F900 internal data register GD 1 Direct specification When setting the device specify the station number of the inverter of which data is to be changed Setting range 0 to 31 2 Indirect specification When setting the device indirectly specify the station number of the inverter of which data is to be changed using the 16 bit GOT internal data register GD100 to GD115 Setting range 100 to 115 Corresponds to each devive from GD100 to GD115 Setting example Screen on GOT F900 Numbers are specified where are indicated STATION NUMBER When setting GD100 PROGRAM OPERATION 0 100 Indicate GD100 PARAMETER DISPLAY 0 100 a Set the GOT internal data register GD100 as the station number under numerical setting in the screen creation software Upper b Specify the device of the parameter in the inverter of which numerical value is to be displayed or edited as follows PGO parameter for Device 100 for Station number Middle PrO parameter for Device 100 for Station number Lower The parameter PGO and PrO of the inverter with the station number corresponding to GD100 is displayed a MITSUBISHI 13 10 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 o 13 4 Cautions on Use of FREQROL Series Inverter 599 When using the GOT F900 connected to the FREQROL Series inverter observe the following cautions Sus on use 13 4 1 D
264. GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL HARDWARE MANUAL CONNECTION Manual number JY992D94801 Manual revision B Date JUNE 2002 MITSUBISHI i GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION a MITSUBISHI GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION FAX BACK Mitsubishi has a world wide reputation for its efforts in continually developing and pushing back the frontiers of industrial automation What is sometimes overlooked by the user is the care and attention to detail that is taken with the documentation However to continue this process of improvement the comments of the Mitsubishi users are always welcomed This page has been designed for you the reader to fill in your comments and fax them back to us We look forward to hearing from you Fax numbers Your NAIC oe MilSUDIShEEIeClFO e America 01 847 478 2253 YoUr T Australia 92 0390 7072 ee eta 0 Germany 0 21 02 4 86 1 12 Rn PPS opain 94933589 1579 United Kingdom 01707 278 695 Please tick the box of your choice What condition did the manual arrive in LIGood Minor damage LlUnusable Will you be using a folder to store the manual LlYes LINo What do you think to the manual presentation LITidy lUnfriendly Are the explanations understandable LlYes LINot too bad JUnusable Which explanation was most difficult to Are there any diagrams which n
265. H1 and the CH2 of the serial communication unit cannot be used at the same time Accordingly have in mind that connecting both of GOT unit and peripheral equipment for the GPP function or two GOT units to one serial communication unit is not allowed Serial communication unit Ki d Serial communication unit Personal computer GOT F900 Either one CPU Personal computer GOT F900 GOT F900 CPU GOT F900 However a GOT unit or a personal computer can be connected to the RS 422 port of the QnACPU while the computer link unit has one GOT unit 2 Compatible OS version of QnACPU When connecting a GOT unit to a serial communication unit or A Series computer link unit the OS version of QnACPU needs to be later than the version indicated below Programming port of CPU is compatible with any version 10 4 2 Caution when the GOT is connected to the computer link for the A Series PLC When connecting the GOT F900 to the A computer link attached to the QnACPU select A SERIES for PLC TYPE For setting method for the A computer link or screen creation software refer to Chapter 9 a MITSUBISHI 10 12 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 10 5 Setting of Connected Equipment for GOT The QnA Series PLC connection parameters c
266. HER MODE DATA TRANSFER Or set to invalid and a printer to DON T USE A personal computer is connected and the software for PLC such as GPP W and FX WIN and the screen creation software are used at the same time In the personal computer connected to the GOT F900 screen data cannot be transferred Communication with the screen creation software is disabled An error message Is displayed Cause Program transfer or monitoring is executed by the PLC software Countermeasures Terminate program transfer or monitoring by the PLC software If the error status still continues shut down the PLC Otherwise shut down the personal computer start it up again then start up only the screen creation software Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 and the personal computer e Causes The connected cable is not proper Or cable connection is not correct e Countermeasures Check the cable a MITSUBISHI 9 28 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 10 Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC This chapter explains connection of the GOT F900 Series display unit to the QnA Series PLC Connection Procedure This section introduces the procedure to connect the GOT F900 to the QnA Series PLC o 1 Preparation 8 Wemmme Desertion Reference System Condition You can learn the connection availability as well as the version of the 10 1 y GOT F900 OS and th
267. He direct connection memo bus Chapter 17 pp CPU direct connection CPU direct connection CPU direct connection Onapter 21 21 pf ee CC Link Q Series Q mode CPU direct connection Fs a F GT CCL Q Series multi CPU CPU direct connection Chapter 23 For the details of the connection type in accordance with the OS version of the GOT F900 refer to section 3 1 a MITSUBISHI GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Outline 2 2 2 Outline of Connection Types This section explains by means of diagrams the connection types of PLC bar code reader printer and personal computer for sequence programs connected to the GOT F900 The same type of equipment cannot be connected For example connection of two PLC units or connection of two bar code readers are not allowed The compatible connection types vary according to the model of the GOT F900 For details refer to the specifications shown later 2 2 1 PLC by Mitsubishi This section describes the outline of connection of the GOT F900 to the PLC manufactured by Mitsubishi c 2 5 he D d JI indicates that a PLC programming tool personal computer can be connected Program transfer and monitoring are available using the programming software for the FX A QnA Q Series FX Series PLC 1 CPU direct connection RS 422 GOT F900 is connected to the programming port of the FX Series PLC When a personal comput
268. IC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 20 7 Setting of Connected Equipment for GOT The SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC connection parameters can be set using the GOT F900 Series or the screen creation software GT Designer and DU WIN 1 GOT F900 Series When the main menu screen change operation is disabled Operation Display screen name a While pressing and holding the upper left corner of the screen The LANGUAGE screen appears turn on the power Keep holding the upper left corner for about 25 seconds more Then press END at the upper right corner The SET UP MODE screen appears b Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears Set the following PLC TYPE SIEMENS 57 200 SIEMENS S7 300 CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 232C S7 200 DST STATION 1 to 31 GOT STATION 0 to 31 57 300 DST STATION STATION 02 to 31 00 and 01 are treated as 02 GOT STATION D When the main menu screen change operation is enabled a Press the upper left corner of the screen The position to be The SELECT MODE screen appears pressed can be changed in the GOT and the screen creation software Press OTHER MODE on the menu The OTHER MODE screen appears c Press SET UP MODE on the menu The SET UP MODE screen appears d Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears e Set the following PLC TYPE SIEMENS 57 200 SIEMENS 57 300 CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 232C S7 200
269. IN Pa Signal name Data direction System information Control device Bar code input b6 of head write device 0 GOT Connected equipment Bar code input invalid b5 of head read device 0 GOT lt Connected equipment Bar code input read completed b6 of head read device 0 GOT lt Connected equipment For the method to assign control devices refer to Section 22 5 2 Signal Functions Signal name Because this signal becomes ON when the data read by the bar code reader is Bar code input stored in the PLC the write timing can be confirmed using this signal In order to set this signal to OFF set to ON the bar code input read completed signal When this bit becomes ON after a bar code input the bar code input becomes invalid The data read by the GOT F900 is cleared Bar code input read completed This signal sets the bar code input signal from ON to OFF Data is read Bar code input invalid Bar code reader Data is written to the PLC GOT 7 GOT PLC Bar code input read completed PLC GOT In either of the following conditions the data read by the bar code reader is not written to the PLC When the bar code input invalid signal is ON When the bar code input read completed signal remains ON When the bar code input signal is ON a MITSUBISHI 22 4 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Bar Code Reader
270. ION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 o 11 2 2 Configuration for Computer Link Connection RS 422 599 The GOT F900 and the serial communication unit be connected on the 1 1 basis TE As many GOT F900 units as the number of serial communication units connected to the Q Series PLC 999 can be connected 1 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT 5 o 9 o GOT F900 a Q Series PLC 25 Q computer link 5x8 b RS 422 cable F930GOT To oes TE F940GOT Connection of two or more GOT units 2 l lt gt S D A Series PLC b RS 422 cable Remarks Two piece Make sure the total cable Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC QJ71C24 terminal block Prepared by the user extension distance is 30m CH2 98 5 or less Applicable Q Series PLC products in the column a are computer link units equipped with built in RS 422 interface Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 11 5 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 2 F940 Handy GOT Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11
271. Input relay X Error alarm relay E Timer contact T and Counter contact C cannot be written from the GOT F900 Cautions on connection of the control unit the CPU unit and the computer communication unit When connecting the control unit or the CPU unit Connect the GOT F900 to either one between the tool port and the COM port When connecting the computer communication unit Connect the GOT F900 to either one between the COM1 port and the COM2 port Connection of two GOT units to one computer communication unit at the same time is not allowed Ed N GOT F900 Either one Control unit Computer or CPU unit communication unit GOT F900 GOT F900 Either one GOT F900 COM port Tool port a MITSUBISHI 18 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FP Series PLC Manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works 18 18 5 Setting of Connected Equipment for GOT The FP Series PLC connection parameters can be set using the GOT F900 Series or the screen creation software GT Designer Setting the Connection Type Set the connection type in accordance with the connected equipment as shown in the table below Connected equipment GOT F900 DU WIN classification in manual CONNECTION Control unit FPO Series CPU unit CPU direct connection RS 232C FP2SH Series Comp
272. K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 4 Recommended feature size of terminal E gt F920GOT K g No terminal block is provided F940GOT 3 2 0 13 Terminal screw Pressure terminal 6 2mm 0 24 i 5 or esi CIF 2 oi 2 0 13 a 6 2mm 0 24 or i When wiring one cable to a terminal o 2 0 13 2 Terminal screw Pressure terminal S o 6 2 0 24 2 ius MEG 6 3mm 0 25 7 or more 3 2 0 13 5 6 2mm 0 24 E Fa or less EO 6 3mm 0 25 359 Or m When wiring two cables to a terminal aes F930GOT F930GOT K F940WGOT Pressure 3 2 0 13 Pressure Terminal screw terminal 6 2mm 0 24 GT Terminal screw terminal 3 2 0 13 6 2mm 0 24 Sk or ET installation and Wiring of Handy GOT When wiring one cable When wiring J two cables to a terminal to a terminal Connection of Peripheral Equipment 5 Wiring Install wiring from 24V DC power supply and class D grounding to the terminal block on the rear panel of the GOT F900 No wiring is required because power is supplied to the F920GOT K via a communication cable Connection of Two or More GOT Units F930GOT F933GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F943GOT F940WGOT
273. LC Connection of FX Series Positioning Connection of FREQROL Inverter Connection of Microcom puter Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC a 25 c c 58 Oz troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FP Series PLC Manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works 18 MEMO a MITSUBISHI 18 18 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley 19 19 Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley This chapter explains the procedure to connect the GOT F900 Series display unit to the SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Connection Procedure This section introduces the procedure to connect the GOT F900 to the SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC 1 Preparation Description System Condition You can learn the connection availability as well as the version of the 19 1 GOT F900 OS and the screen creation software You can select the configuration between the GOT and the SLC500 19 2 9 MicroLogix Series PLC and proper cables i 2 Setting Description Setting in SLC500 Communication Setting Specifications GOT F900 Transmission Specifications The the transmission specifications set in the SLC500 CPU The communication specifi
274. LC Sus manufactured by Fuji Electric 1 Cable for the GOT and the FLEX PC N Series PLC manufactured by Fuji Electric C 2 Female type Male type connector figure shows the engagement face Application Connection diagram Application FE OX O FG cla s D RS 422 acc m connection gt RXD RDA N Series Ce RXD RDB Terminal S Prepared by the user Y TXD SDA block pi side T9 TXD SDB Bc SG GND 5 6 9 n link ESE 9 pin D Sub male unit side 862 FG class RS 232C GOT F900 connection 1 E i 2 2 5 Prepared by the user o0 2 8 2 14 EE Di E Or 7 pIN D Sub temale 2 25 pin D Sub male 653 4 0 G class D 5 232 Er 21982 PLC side H connection 2 5 1 c 3 so Prepared by the user 4 Qa e os 5 Ene 9 pin D Sub female 15 pin D Sub male Sige Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 16 11 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Manufactured by Fuji Electric 16 2 Cable for the Handy GOT and the FLEX PC N Series PLC manufactured by Fuji Electric C 2 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face
275. LSEC F FX Series PLC 8 2 To set by GX Developer GPP W Open GX Developer Read the sequence program to a personal computer From the project data list tree select Parameter PLC Parameter If the tree is not displayed check Project data list in View When the FX parameter dialog box appears click the PLC system 2 tab Memory capacit De Ice LG name 1 0 assignment LO 1 PLO system Click here to delete the Operate i F the box is not checked the parameters will be cleared E bat When GX Developer transfer the program to the communication board parameters check mark setting D8120 values the PLC must be cleard upon program transfer m Prat col Control line Data length HW tvpe Parity control mode Invalid top hit v Sum chech r Baud rate Transmission control procedure bps Station number setting Header 0 0 Time out judge time Terminator Ome 4 255 Default Check End Cancel After changing the setting transfer the program and turn off the PLC power The parameters are written into the special data register when the PLC is turned on MITSUBISHI 8 7 Introduction installation installation and Wiring of and Wiring of Handy GOT F940GOT Specifications Outline Connection of Peripheral Equipment
276. M102 Function key SW3 Green b Setting in creation software The devices to display the indicator LEDs on function keys should be set in the screen creation software For details refer to Setting of connected equipment for GOT described later c Program example The indicator LEDs on the function keys can be controlled by the PLC by turning ON OFF the devices allocated in the screen creation software When M100 in the PLC is allocated F1 ON signal ON OFF XO M100 ON F1 green LED OFF a MITSUBISHI 4 18 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of F920GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 4 8 2 Preparation of Function Key Name Sheet Available in the F930GOT K E This section explains how to prepare the function key name sheet 1 Preparing the name sheet a Make the mount sheet in reference to the following dimensions and prepare an OHP sheet transparent and colorless sheet b Write down the names of the switches used on the mount sheet Function key O 143 5 63 TES 23 0 91 8 23 0 91 8 23 0 91 23 0 91 6 0 24 0 31 0 31 0 31 C2 0 08 5 NE NE o Gv nsertion gt direction 8 BPW LZ LZ e 4 C2 0 08 3 0 12 5 ON l Unit mm inch co E o Note The shaded parts indicate the effective range for charac
277. MAC C by Omron SSS AE FLEX N by Fuji Electric Other CP9200SH by Yasukawa Electric OO ME F companies FP by Matsushita Electric Works 5 09 SLC500 by Allen Bradley SW1 H MicroLogix by Allen Bradley SW5 F 5 05F SIMATIC S7 300 by Siemens AG SW5 F 5 05F SIMATIC S7 200 by Siemens AG SW5 P 5 13P Printer with built in RS 232C SW1 E Others SWTH O of SWOD5C GOTR PACKE indicates a number c E Q o installation and Wiring of F940GOT installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 3 9 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 3 3 3 3 1 Device Names Which can be Monitored This section explains the device range of the PLC available in the GOT F900 The maximum device range which can be set in the screen creation software is shown here The device specifications vary depending on the model of the PLC even if the series name is equivalent Example In the FX Series the FX1N PLC has fewer devices than in the FX2N PLC When looking at the table change the device range shown in the table with the device range available in the actually connected PLC Devices in GOT F900 The table below shows intrinsic devices built in the GOT F900 Because these inte
278. MITSUBISHI 19 6 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley 19 19 4 19 4 1 19 4 2 Setting in MicroLogix When directly connecting the MicroLogix CPU the usage of the RS 232C port should be changed using the peripheral equipment for the PLC package software RSLogix500 Communication Setting Specifications Set the transmission specifications in the MicroLogix as shown in the table below For the setting method refer to the manual of the MicroLogix Series Setting the RS 232C channel 0 Parameters Parameter Set value System Mode Driver DF1 Half Duplex Slave DF1 Half Duplex Slave Channel Configuration Set the parameters in shaded boxes Leave other parameters in default values Parameter Set value Parameter _ GOT F900 Transmission Specifications Set value Transmission speed 9600 bps Data bit 8 bits Parity bit Not provided Data format Stop bit 1 bit Control method Not provided The specifications such as the transmission speed are fixed on the GOT F900 side and cannot be changed a MITSUBISHI 19 7 Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC Connection of FX Series Positioning Connection of FREQROL Inverter Connection of Microcom puter Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller FP Series PLC y c
279. N MELSEC A 1 MESEDA A MELSEC A QnA MELSEC QnA Q 2 00 or ELE 2 30 or later 2 40 or later ccc NR setting availability Available Available Select MELSEC A 1 Note that the selection item display is changed from MELSEC A QnA to MELSEC A and MELSEC QnA a MITSUBISHI 9 20 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 9 6 Cable Diagram gt This section explains cable diagrams to connect the GOT F900 and the A Series PLC E 1 Cable for the GOT and the A Series PLC F920GOT K C 2 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face Model name Application Connection diagram Application o RS 422 E connection ae j A Seri A CPU direct connection 4 gt ier o Prepared by the user b 2 5 E 13 8 Cable length 3m 910 orless P d y 3 6 9 8 gt a zs ni o Resistance per wire 0 67 or less m ENG 25 pin D Sub male Approximately AWG 28 or thicker F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940NGOT TA C 3 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face S56 mot Model name Application ESE RS 422 connection A CPU direct connection FX 40DU CAB FX 40DU CAB 10M FX 40DU CAB 20M FX 40DU CAB 30M FX 50DU CABL O 6 9 9 pin D Sub male A Series
280. NECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 o m m c 11 Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 89 g This chapter explains connection of the GOT F900 Series display unit the Series PLC mode When connecting the Q Series PLC in the A mode or in the computer link for A refer to chapter 9 o c D Connection Procedure See 59 This section introduces the procedure to connect the GOT F900 to the Q Series PLC Ir 1 Preparation x You can learn the connection availability as well as the version of the Si GOT F900 OS and the screen creation software Se 5 You can select the configuration between the and the Series sus Systane Maureen PLC computer link unit as well as proper cables ons 2 Setting Description S oO n In the Q computer link unit the following setting is required eor When connection is selected the GOT F900 is automatically set to 838 fixed values No setting is required in the Q Series PLC You can learn the communication specifications and the setting 11 3 Communicati S on Setting The contents of setting of computer link 11 3 1 Sog Specifications 25 3 ae Setting by How to set the switches in the computer link unit n Setting Q Serial GPPW using the software GX Developer Communication Unit Used Connectors model names and the manufacturer of the 5 connectors used in the GOT F900 and the serial 11 3 3
281. Note that the device names of X000 do not indicate the device names in the connected equipment PLC Allocation table of function key 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 as _ ee eee ee mes xw fe pe _ Screen display of GT Designer Key code is displayed Switch operation setting is available where is indicated Edit Operation Panel Display changeover Edit Operation Panel 00 01 02 Operation setting 00 01 X000 FFFF FFFF FFFF X000 X008 FFFF FFFF Key code X008 j Click and set a function to a function key FO for example Edit Action Key cade Action Trigger Action Write device Switching type 2 BISET M Switch function Switch functions already set are displayed here Key code F a MITSUBISHI 4 22 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of F920GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 3 DU WIN Operation Display screen name Setting a It is supposed that the DU WIN has started and the screen data to be set has been read b Select Common Screen on the Screen List window by clicking it to be highlighted fy Screen List Project Gommon Screen Device Monitor Operation State Monitor PG Diagnosis Current Time Time Channels set Back Light keyword Print Ala
282. O 22 parameters Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 13 23 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 In the column for S500 the numbers starting with c or n are the parameters displayed on the in built operation panel and the numbers below are the parameters for FR PUOA Note 1 Indicates the parameter settings which are ignored when the advanced magnetic flux vector control mode is selected Can be set when Pr 80 Pr 81 z 9999 Pr 60 7 or 8 Can be accessed when Pr 80 Pr 81 4 9999 Pr 77 801 Can be accessed when Pr 29 3 a MITSUBISHI 13 24 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 5 13 6 2 Communication Parameters 599 The parameters shown in the table below correspond to the following communication ports respectively n the A500 Series the following parameters are communication parameters for the FR A5NR computer link option n the E500 Series only the PU port is available 5 n the S500 Series the following parameters are available if the RS 485 communication function Sof is provided 952 If an inverter is connected to the PU port other than above set the parameters using Pr 117 to Pr 124 5 5 shown the previous RUN Ss ae a LR 6 1 331 Inverter station number n Inverter station number 331 oco
283. O is referenced on the screen No or one of the 6 00 or 4 00 or screen objects is placed outside the available screen nist later later displayed on the GOT F900 screen product area Countermeasures Check the devices used and placement of screen objects a MITSUBISHI 10 24 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 Contents of troubl suceso cus E gt ontents of trouble eck points and countermeasures Fo40w F940 F930 F920 There is data because the unit is new or the memory clear has been executed e Cause There is no screen data Countermeasures 2 Write the screen data using the screen creation 8 software A device that does not exist in the QnA Series PLC was referenced Example While the QnA Series PLC was connected a device provided only the Series PLC was specified for numeric input 5 Cause On the head screen a nonexistent device in the connected QnA Series PLC is specified Earlier Earlier The head screen is the screen No 1 in the GT than than 5 Designer and the screen No 0 in the DU WIN 6 00 4 00 LI Countermeasures SEG DATA IS NOT Check the devices used on the head screen PoS FOUND is 259 displayed on the While the QnA Series PLC is not connected the GOT F900 screen Connection mode for the FX2 Series PLC is selected Cause Check for the A QnA Series was executed the LE connec
284. O 5 n frequency FE oH Control panel PU main display DU PU main display data selection data selection 34 B4 0 52 Control panel display data selection gt PU level display data selection Frequency setting operation selection 5 4 f 54 FM terminal function selection 54 FM terminal function selection sr Premna uroon seein 64 9 Be Frequency monitoring reference Frequency monitoring reference Frequency monitoring reference og T Current monitoring reference Current monitoring reference Current monitoring reference Restart coasting time Restart coasting time Restart coasting time Restart cushion time Restart cushion time Restart cushion time 85 o 5 59 Remote setting function selection 59 Remote setting function selection 59 Remote setting function selection 2 1 65 lt selsctinh Shortest acceleration deceleration 9 mode 3C BC 0 5 Reference for intelligent mode Reference for intelligent mode l Ref for intelligent mode accel Ref for intelligent mode accel e 3 Ref for intelligent mode decel Ref for intelligent mode decel 5 Starting frequency for elevator mode Starting frequency for elevator mode SR So o 65 Retry selection 65 Retry selection LC ogo EN LN NE LN IEEE Tr Stall prevention operation level reduction Stall prevention operation level reduction co Retry selectio
285. OT K F940 W GOT 4 4 4 2 Installation procedure E The GOT F900 is so designed as to be embedded in the panel Install the GOT using the procedure shown below For the panel cut dimension refer to the previous page 1 Inserting the GOT into the panel face Attach a packing to the GOT Insert the GOT from the front of the panel face 2 2 b Packing Installation hole 5 3 1 Fixing the GOT a Hang the hook of the metal fixture offered as accessory to F920GOT K installation hook holes in the GOT Tighten a tightening bolt offered as accessory securely in each position 48 The GOT can be fixed in four positions at corners However to 25 prevent dusts and water fix the six positions excluding 525 the F930GOT ESL a Metal fixture b Tightening bolt Make sure that the tightening torque for each tightening bolt is 0 3 to 0 5 N m 0 18 to 0 22 Nem when installing the F9220GOT K installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More GOT Units Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 4 9 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of F920GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 2 Inner dimension of the panel required for installation When installing
286. OT product e F900 screen PLC IS RUNNING From is displayed on the This error is not displayed first GOT F900 screen product 5 85 COE Onn 529 gon 820 MITSUBISHI 12 11 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FX Series Positioning Unit FX 2N 10 20GM 12 2 Software Ci Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures An FX Series positioning unit bar code reader or printer is connected Causes The RS 232C connector to which the personal computer is connected is set to be used for another piece of equipment Countermeasures In the GOT F900 select by hand SELECT MODE OTHER Communication with the screen MODE DATA TRANSFER creation software and screen data Or set a bar code reader to invalid and a printer to DON T cannot be transferred USE Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 and the personal computer Causes The connected cable is not proper Or cable connection is not correct e Countermeasures Check the cable a MITSUBISHI 12 12 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 o 13 Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter aye oW g This chapter explains the procedure to connect the GOT F900 Series display unit to the FREQROL Series 8500 E500 A500 inverter o Connection Procedure Sof This section introduces the procedure to connect the GOT F900 to the FREQROL Series inverter FE Ska 1
287. OT BBD5 K PL MELSEC FX C System SEC The PLC selection item Select Terminal in accordance with the LC display color display varies depending Terminal on the software version In version 2 4 or later F940GOT black and white displayed instead of FX Handy GOT black and white F940GOT color Handy GOT color F930GOT BWD F930GOT blue F920GOT BBD5 K F920GOT K blue installation and Wiring of F940GOT F940GOT LWD F940GOT SWD installation and Wiring of Handy GOT d Set CPU direct RS 422 RS 232C of the GOT F900 The Setup Data dialog On the menu select View Project System Settings Setup box appears Data 5 Spt 22 E paS Opening Screen jis E ES Backlight Off Time mins Cancel Connection NE Port R5422 Type GPU a E PLC Station No 2 GOT Station No 26 gt Er NN 25 OFO touch Input detected dA mar e Set the following Port RS 422 ox RS 232C SLO Type CPU DST Station No Station 00 EO S GOT Station No m 838 Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows a Open DU WIN b On the menu select File Open The Open dialog box Select and open read the file of the screen data to be changed appears o d When changing Terminal GOT F900 select View Project The Project settings ME System Settings Project settings on the m
288. OT F900 YY Y 5i Connect the terminal resistor as follows in 9 1413161 1 91413161 1 accordance with the model of the inverter located 5 5 lt SSRRRis 2 farthest DIDD DI Dac D D D D D 4 gu AIBIAI BIR A B A B R PU port A500 E500 RS 485 5500 Connect as shown in A in the diagram on the right MES FR A5NR Inverter Inverter B t Upper line PU port Upper line PU port Connect m B n the diagram the right Lower line FR A5NR Lower line FR A5NR Terminal resistor M Station number 0 Station number n Connection chip 2 o T cog In cables connecting distributors do not wire the pin number 2 and 8 Inverters may fail by such wiring amp 1 Cable for the GOT and the FREQROL Series inverter C 2 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face Connection of SYSMACC Series PLC Model name Application Connection diagram Application GOT F900 PU port INV CPU direct 5 422 connection 1 PU port of A500 Series P E E500 Series or S500 1 8 oe ri ET Series 9 pin D Sub male PJ 45 plug male Ex 8 OJO RS 422 GOT F900 connection INV CPU direct 9 Terminal block of conne
289. OT F900 and the bar code reader 1 Cable for the GOT and the bar code reader C 2 Female type Male type connector figure shows the engagement face Model name Application Connection diagram Application GOT F900 gt RD RXD RS 232C gt SD TXD connection 5 1 gt DRIDSR gt CS CTS Prepared by the user 2 Eee Bar code reader 9 6 ER DTR 9 pin D Sub female Signal name on bar code reader side 22 Troubleshooting For reference this section summarizes frequently asked questions about connection of the GOT F900 to the FX Series PLC Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures The data is not written to the PLC Cause 1 The communication specifications are not satisfied 2 Wrong wiring 3 Either signal the bar code input signal the bar code input invalid signal or the bar code input read completed signal assigned to the device system information control device is ON Countermeasures 1 Check the specification of the bar code reader 2 Check the wiring between the GOT and the bar code reader 3 Change the bar code input read completed signal to ON in the PLC the GOT sets to The data is not written OFF the bar code input signal to the PLC normally The data is partially written to the PLC After receiving the end code CR ODH from the bar code reader the GOT writes data to the PLC Accordingly it does not usually occur that dat
290. OT settings OK Key window Cursor display settine Cancel Action when switching screens Don t display cursor and key window When touch input is detected open key window at the same time Click the Setup tab Basic Key window Serial Port Setup Language Handy GOT settings OK Opening Screen Time 5 Sec Cancel Backlight Off 0 Hmn System Information Connection Buzzer Port R5232 Y ON Type C OFF Station No a MITSUBISHI 19 14 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley 19 Change method Operation Display screen name In the case of SW4D5C GOTR PACKE earlier than version A perform the setting in the GOT F900 Set the connection in CONNECTION in the GOT F900 For the setting method refer to 1 GOT F900 Series on the previous page e Set the following Port RS 232C Type CPU DST Station No Station No 00 to 31 GOT Station No D Change the connection type of the already created data as follows The Select Project a Open GT Designer dialog box appears b Click the Open button C Open read the screen data to be changed d On the menu select Common GOT PLC Type The GOT PLC Type dialog box appears 19 15 MITSUBISHI Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC Connection of FX Series Positioning C
291. PLC Manufactured by Fuji Electric 16 2 DU WIN ego oa Operation Display screen name EE Creation a Open DU WIN The Project settings S20 dialog box appears b On the menu select File New H Project Settings 6 o Terminal F940GOT 5WD 35 5 System Cancel cT DU System Language English v 8 a 2 Character Set Japanese Set the following 5 Terminal F940WGOT TWD V H S F940GOT LWD 5 z F940GOT SWD c s F930GOT BWD SLE PLC System Fuji N Select Terminal in accordance with the LC display color F940WGOT TWD V H F940WGOT color _ cog _ F940GOT black and white 8e2 Handy GOT black and white F940GOT color Handy GOT color F930GOT K blue Sog AE NE F930GOT blue ET d Set CPU direct connection RS 232C or link connection RS 422 RS 232C of the GOT F900 On the menu select View Project System Settings Setup Data c 529 gea I cx ous Opening Screen Time s Backlight Off Time min 10 r Connection Port R5422 jum oc Type Link Unit Y co B PLO Station No 0 p 9 P GOT Station No E 5 585 m Handy GOT Setting Oss Use GripSwitch Pressed writing Switch OFF operation Touch Switch Off Y ca LED operation Concurrently With Grip Switch Y e Be co zi jum c o oon y c
292. PLC is the unit with the number specified under PLC Parameter I O assignment in the z GX Developer 555 No setting is available the version of GX Developer compatible with multiple PLC system 59 sa 33 A Em oon Sag 529 500 San MITSUBISHI 11 13 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 11 5 11 5 1 11 5 2 11 5 3 Caution on Use of MELSEC Q Series PLC When using the GOT F900 connected to the Q Series PLC observe the following caution on use Restriction in device specification Word specification of bit devices and bit specification of word devices are not supported in the GOT F900 Caution when the GOT is connected to the serial communication unit When the GOT is connected the CH1 and the CH2 of the serial communication unit cannot be used at the same time Accordingly have in mind that connecting both GOT unit and peripheral equipment for the GPP function or two GOT units to one serial communication unit is not allowed GOT F900 C Personal computer Personal computer Either one CPU Serial communication unit GOT F900 GOT F900 a ics Serial communication unit CPU GOT F900 However GOT unit RS 232C or a personal
293. Port RS 232C Type CPU DST Station No Station No 00 to 31 GOT Station No D Change the connection type of the already created data as follows a Open DU WIN b On the menu select File Open c Select and open read the file of the screen data to be changed d When changing Terminal GOT F900 select View Project System Settings Project settings on the menu For the contents of setting refer to c in Creation above For selection of RS 232C RS 422 refer to e in Creation above Display screen name The Project settings dialog box appears The Setup Data dialog box appears The Open dialog box appears The Project settings dialog box appears 19 16 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley 19 o 19 8 Cable Diagram 599 o 20 9 This section explains cable diagrams to connect the GOT F900 and the SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Sus manufactured by Allen Bradley 1 Cable for the GOT and the PLC manufactured by Allen Bradley C 2 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face 2 Model name Application Connection diagram Application 5 232 1 lt connection GOT F900 2 RXD SLC500 3 4 TXD COM port 5 1 5 SL C500 Series 5 Prepared by the user e 6 Ss 9 6
294. RENNEMEN swatches SW GayRe Operation switches B ome Sis Orange 18 GrayBue DC24V G 24V DC power supply 5 8 Gray Red EM 39 Pied 2 PikBle EST Emergency stop switch 5 10 22 sra SE Orange Blue ES1 2 White Red DSW 1 A White Blue DSW Y Grip switch 5 12 26 Yellow Red DSW 2 p cep Yellow Blue DSW 2 L9 1 White Blue KSW C Common for keylock switch Yellow Red KSW 1 9 YelowRed Keylock switch NER EN Yellow Blue KSW 2 DEN END Pink Red Spare SW Spare Loca Pink Blue Spare SW mais NO Ndumd Orange Blue 36 OrangeBlue DC 24V Sy Beisowar etiani vto 48 37 Orange Red Note 1 These are signals for communication with the PLC When connecting to a port other than the programming port of the FX A QnA or Q series PLC refer to the manual of the connected module Also use a relay cable For relay cable details refer to subsection 5 5 2 a MITSUBISHI 5 22 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 5 6 3 9 Conversion Box E gt The 25 pin D Sub connector of an external cable is converted into terminal blocks 2 3 and a PLC port 9 D Sub type 28 1 58 E This product is provided for RS 422 22 connection Not compatible with RH 8 I 9 model O
295. RIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 8 2 F943 Handy GOT gt 900 RS 232C cable b Option a FX Series PLC B FXCPU direct gt a gt connection _ mb OL 1 To power supply and operation Handy GOT switches FX1N 232 BD nerd FXen 232 BD m 5 lt o 5 To RS 232C 8 power supply and operation switches E RS 232 t on the a Total extension distance 6m 19 8 or less ae Connection of two or more GOT units c 2 z FXoN 232ADP SEO oos c Gu amp XSeiePLC FX Series PLC b Option c RS 232C cable M direct connection FX1N 232 BD A F9GT HCAB OIOM 9 pin D Sub FX1S FX1N endian irect connection 25 pin D Sub FX1N CNV BD FXoN 232ADP B Prepared by the user installation and Wiring of Handy GOT soe oup C F9GT HCAB1 3M ee 9 pin D Sub SpE EN FXCPU direct T SEE irect connection cas 25 pin D Sub FX2N CNV BD FXoN 232ADP 8 E 9 Piin direct Een
296. RRENTLY WITH GRIP SWITCH or ALWAYS OFF 2 Setting in Screen Creation Software GT Designer a Select Common Auxiliary Setting Project b Click Handy GOT settings tab For the details refer to section 5 14 LED Action It can be selected whether the LED ON OF status is controlled by the grip switch ON OFF status controlled by the PLC or always set to OFF CONCURRENTLY WITH GRIP SWITCH While the grip switch is being pressed the LED on the front panel is lit CONCURRENTLY WITH BIT DEVICE The LED on the front panel is lit or extinguished by a bit device of the PLC ALWAYS OFF The LED on the front panel is always extinguished When LED ACTION is set to CONCURRENTLY WITH BIT DEVICE the setting to assign a bit device of the PLC is required For the details refer to section 5 8 a MITSUBISHI 5 38 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 m 5 13 Handling of Keylock Switch RH model only gt So The keylock switch is wired to the input of the PLC or other device E 1 Connection Example Handy GOT RH model Handy GOT RH model In case the key is KSW KSW i iti S e S y in the left position KSW 2 KSW 1 KSW C KSW 2 KSW 1 KSW C o 30 29 28 30 29 28 5 C E X X P o As control signal to turn on off M power of external equipment As inp
297. RS 232C OOO OOO OOO E Screen data transfer cable FX A QnA Series PLC F920GOT K Personal computer CPU direct connection 3 In the case of the Q Series PLC CPU direct connection In order to execute data transfer between a personal computer and the GOT they should be connected by a screen data transfer cable via RS 232C ports following the procedure below First disconnect the data transfer cable between the Q Series PLC and the GOT Second connect the data transfer cable Third connect the PLC and the RS 422 port on the F920GOT K using the power cable which is prepared by the user in reference to the cable diagram in Chapter 11 Then execute data transfer using the screen data transfer cable 1 When transferring screen data Turn off the PLC Connect the RS 232C port on the GOT and the personal computer using the data transfer cable Connect the power cable to the RS 422 port Execute the transfer after selecting DATA TRANSFER on a system screen P Q T L I 2 RS 422 5 232 OL E m Power cable Screen data transfer cable Q Series PLC F920GOT K Personal computer On
298. RS 232C NS RS1 RS 422 RS 232C 1 GOT F900 Series When the main menu screen change operation is disabled a While pressing and holding the upper left corner of the screen The LANGUAGE screen appears turn on the power Keep holding the upper left corner for about 25 seconds more Then press END at the upper right corner The SET UP MODE screen appears b Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears c Set the following PLC TYPE FUJI N SERIES CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 232C LINK PORT RS 422 LINK PORT RS 232C DST STATION STATION 4 00 to 31 GOT STATION D When the main menu screen change operation is enabled a Press the upper left corner of the screen The position to be The SELECT MODE screen appears pressed can be changed in the GOT and the screen creation software b Press OTHER MODE on the menu The OTHER MODE screen appears c Press SET UP MODE on the menu The SET UP MODE screen appears d Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears e Set the following PLC TYPE FUJI N SERIES CONNECTION CPU PORT Executes communication as link unit RS 232C LINK PORT RS 422 LINK PORT RS 232C DST STATION STATION 00 to 31 GOT STATION S When the screen data is transferred to the GOT F900 the old data including the PLC type connection type and station number are overwritten a MITSUBISHI 16 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FLEX PC N Series
299. RS 422 The GOT F900 and the link unit can be connected on the 1 1 basis As many GOT F900 units as the number of link units attached to the FLEX PC N Series PLC can be connected 1 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT GOT F900 a FLEX PC N Series link unit FROGOT b RS 422 cable F940GOT a FLEX PC N Series b RS 422 cable Remarks NB RS1 AC NB RS1 DC Terminal NJ RS4 block NS RS1 Prepared by the user Applicable FLEX PC N Series products in the column a are link units equipped with built in RS 422 interface a MITSUBISHI 16 2 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Manufactured by Fuji Electric 16 2 F940 Handy GOT 599 eo GOT F900 b RS 422 cable a FLEX PC N Sus Series link unit a gt E gt E 65 Handy GOT 5 of RS 422 LL To RS 422 91 B 5 aaa To power supply and operation D switches ES _ E 5 E Org Use the RS 422 lt TF port on the rear ___ RS 422 Sue face power supply and operation i switches Total extension distance 11 5m 37 9 or less T 50 o a FLEX PC N
300. S CONNECTION Connection of FP Series PLC Manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works 18 Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures eee The display screen contains an error 6 00 or 4 00 or later later A device that does not exist in the FP Series PLC is referenced Earlier Earlier Example While an FPO is connected a device exists only in than than the FP2SH is specified for numeric input 6 00 4 00 DISPLAY SCREEN IS NOT AVAILABLE NO is displayed on the GOT F900 screen Causes A device that does not exist in the connected PLC is referenced on the screen No or one of the screen objects is placed outside the available screen area e Countermeasures Check the devices used and placement of screen objects There is not data because the unit is new or the memory clear has been executed Cause There is no screen data e Countermeasures Write the screen data using the screen creation software DATA IS NOT FOUND is displayed on the GOT F900 screen e Cause On the head screen a nonexistent device in the connected FP Series PLC is specified The head screen is the screen No 1 in the GT Designer and the screen No 0 in the DU WIN e Countermeasures Check the devices used on the head screen There is not data because the unit is new or the memory clear has been executed Cause There is no screen data e Countermeasures Write the screen data using the scr
301. S CONNECTION Connection of Two or More GOT Units 7 7 6 3 Setting Procedure 1 GOT F900 Series When the SELECT MODE screen change operation is disabled a While pressing and holding the upper left corner of the screen The LANGUAGE screen appears turn on the power Keep holding the upper left corner for about 25 seconds more Then press END at the upper right corner The SET UP MODE screen appears b Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears Set the following PLC TYPE FX SERIES A SERIES QnA Q SERIES Q MULTI SERIES UNIVERSAL CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 422 CPU PORT RS 232C DST STATION STATION 00 01 to 31 for microcomputer connection GOT STATION When the SELECT MODE screen change operation is enabled a Press the upper left corner of the screen The position to be The SELECT MODE screen appears pressed can be changed in the GOT and the screen creation software Press OTHER MODE on the menu The OTHER MODE screen appears c Press SET UP MODE on the menu The SET UP MODE screen appears d Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears e Set the following PLC TYPE FX SERIES A SERIES QnA Q SERIES Q MULTI SERIES UNIVERSAL CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 422 CPU PORT RS 232C DST STATION STATION 00 01 to 31 for microcomputer connection GOT STATION Be aware that when the screen data is transferred to the GOT F900 the old data including the PLC
302. S5n GOT F900 screen occ e Countermeasures o gt Check the devices used and placement of screen 520 objects 5 9 She ET E uo 82 Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 9 25 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 OS version Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures aiu Coments Check points and countermeasures F940W F940 F930 F920 There is not data because the unit is new or the memory clear has been executed e Cause There is no screen data e Countermeasures Write the screen data using the screen creation software A device that does not exist in the A Series PLC was referenced Example While the A1S Series PLC was connected a device provided only in the AnU Series PLC was specified for numeric input Cause On the head screen a nonexistent device in the connected A Series PLC is specified Earlier Earlier The head screen is the screen No 1 in the GT than than Designer and the screen No 0 in the DU WIN 6 00 4 00 e Countermeasures Check the devices used on the head screen While the A Series PLC is not connected the DATA IS NOT FOUND is displayed on the GOT F900 screen connection mode for the A Series PLC is selected Cause Check for the A or AnU Series was executed the connection mode was automatically changed over then the device range was checked This error oc
303. SEC QnA Q 54 2 00 ELE 2 30 or later 2 40 or later 252 cc NN setting availability E available Available Available Select MELSEC QnA Q SEE 1 Note that the selection item display is changed from MELSEC A QnA to MELSEC A and MELSEC QnA 5 I Qg o0 653 Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 11 21 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 11 7 Cable Diagram This section explains cable diagrams to connect the GOT F900 and the Q Series PLC 1 Cable for the GOT and the Q Series PLC F920GOT K C 2 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face Model name Application Connection diagram Application FG class D FG class D j HS 232C s rounding lt grounding Q Series Q CPU direct connection GOT F900 9 ie i i 9 connection Prepared by the user e Cable length 3m 9 10 or less 2 9 6 Resistance per wire 0 67 Q or less 9 pin D Sub female Approximately AWG 28 or thicker When connecting the F920GOT K directly to the Q Series PLC the below cable is required to transfer screen data C 2 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face Model name
304. SZO gt lt c 3008H 59 Date month 3009H GD4 01 to 12 month E c o 300CH 0 Sunday to 6 Sa i X 5 9 oon FE 529 oon eu oz ONA a MITSUBISHI 14 9 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 14 4 2 Special Memory Data List 32 bit counter of 100ms D8000 D8001 The time after the power is turned on is counted in the unit of 100ms The lower word is stored in D8000 and the upper word is stored in D8001 Contents of communication error in its own station error code Contents of communication error in another station error code lt available in versions in which connection of two or more GOT units is enabled gt The contents of error in communication with the microcomputer are shown Own station accessed GOT side Another station between accessed GOT and next GOT 1 The error code 106 indicates that the RS 232C port is occupied by connecting of a bar code reader or printer peepee a MITSUBISHI 14 10 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 o 590 9 LI Interrupt output SER When the bit data status is changed by a touch key the GOT sends an interrupt code to the microcomputer Device Event type Interrupt code hexadecimal D O Changed from OFF to ON 50H 926 M8000 EO Changed from ON to OFF Ox Changed from OFF to ON M8001 Changed from ON to OFF Changed from OFF to ON 2 8002 Sd M8000 to M8
305. Series PLC A computer link F930GOT F940GOT b RS 422 cable a ese a A Series PLC b RS 422 cable Remarks AJ71UC24 Make sure the total cable A1SJ71C24 R4 Terminal block Prepared by the user extension distance is 30m 98 A1SJ71UC24 R4 5 or less Applicable A Series PLC products in the column a are computer link units equipped with built in RS 422 interface MITSUBISHI 9 5 Introduction Outline Specifications installation and Wiring of F940GOT installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More GOT Units FX Series PLC Mm o O MELSEC F Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 2 F940 Handy GOT GOT F900 b RS 422 cable a A Series PLC A A computer link gt a gt i lt E LE RS 422 To power supply and operation A C switches Handy GOT gt E RS 422 ES 5 lt i poe OOOO L To RS 422
306. Setting Specifications This section explains the contents of setting in the host link unit 1 Setting the transmission specifications Set the transmission specifications in the host link unit as shown in the table below For the switch setting method refer to the manual of each host link unit mem Remarks 0 Data format 25s 0 The specifications such as the transmission speed are fixed on the GOT F900 side and cannot be changed 2 Setting the unit number station number setting switches The unit number is regarded as the station number in the GOT F900 Set the unit number setting switches to the value as in the GOT F900 0 to 15 Setting Examples in Host Link Units While referring to the setting examples in the SYSMAC C Series host link units set the transmission specifications The examples below explain the setting in the CQM1 equipped with built in RS 232C port the C200H LK201 V1 and the C200H LK202 V1 1 In the case of COM1 oetting by data memory DM Setting of standard communication 0001H Mode specification Upper link condition RS 232C DN6645 Communication condition In accordance with DM6646 Setting of communication condition 0304H Transmission format 7 data bits 2 stop bits even parity RS 232C DN6646 Transmission speed 19 200 bps Setting of transmission delay time 0000H NA RS 232C DM6647 default status Setting of unit
307. T F900 and Product product product performed on the the SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC GOT F900 screen 5 Causes S The wrong cable is used or the connection is bad E 9 Countermeasures cog Check the cable o a Changeover to a nonexistent screen by a touch key or the DISPLAY SCREEN SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC was tried 5 IS NOT AVAILABLE c pex pud 509 An 20 Is displayed on the The changeover destination screen has not been created yet 6 00 4 00 TE GOT F900 screen Countermeasures 8258 Create the screen DISPLAY SCREEN A nonexistent screen was tried to be displayed oo e Cause 6 00 4 00 629 ae The screen No has not been created yet later later 98 0 displayed on the GOT ue EX F900 screen gis Create the screen A device that does not exist in the SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series is referenced Example While an S300 is connected a e device exists only in the S400 is specified for numeric input cS Cause col On the changeover destination screen excluding the head SER screen a nonexistent device in the connected SIMATIC S7 DISPLAY SCREEN 200 300 400 Series PLC is specified Earlier Earlier IS NOT AVAILABLE Countermeasures than than 59 is displayed on the Check the devices used on the head screen 6 00 400 sa GOT F900 screen 50 There is an error on the screen to be displayed F S Cause One of the screen objects is placed outside the ava
308. T PLC Type a MITSUBISHI dialog box appears 15 16 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 3 DU WIN 599 o Operation Display screen name TE LI Creation a Open DU WIN The Project settings S20 dialog box appears b On the menu select File New H Project Settings 6 o 2 Terminal Eus 25 PLG System 3 C Cancel DU System Language ii 8 T Character Set Japanese Set the following 5 Terminal F940WGOT TWD V H S F940GOT LWD 29 F940GOT SWD c 95 F930GOT BWD SLE PLC System Omron C Select Terminal in accordance with the LC display color A Terminal Model name a F940WGOT TWD V F940WGOT color 9 F940GOT black and white 585 F940GOT LWD Handy Gor black and white F940GOT color F940GOT SWD Handy GOT color F930GOT K blue aoe On roS E F930GOT blue 25 o gt d Set link connection RS 422 RS 232C of the GOT F900 The Setup Data dialog On the menu ona View Project System Settings Setup Data box appears 5zo Opening Screen Time X 82 Backlight Off Time min PSU ENS Connection OLA Port Type Buzzer PLG Station No On 5 m GOT Station No C Off 58 c 5 oS e Set ia Buon Port RS 422 RS 232C Type LINK 59 DST Station No Station No 0 to 31 52 GOT Station
309. TING in SET UP 889 MODE HANDY GOT SETTING e GRIP SWITCH USE When using the grip switch press S49 the screen to display USE PUSH BUTTON WRITE DOES NOT WRITE Sus SWITCH OFF ACTION These items are added in the OS TOUCH SWITCH OFF version 6 00 For the details 5 refer to the next section 549 LED ACTION gu CONCURRENTLY WITH GRIP SWITCH Eu SE o Soo Soa s Aa MITSUBISHI 5 33 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 When the OS Version is earlier than 6 00 Set the grip switch valid USE or invalid DON T USE in GRIP SWITCH in SET UP MODE in the Handy GOT GRIP SWITCH GRIP SWITCH When using the grip switch press the screen to display USE 2 Setting in the screen creation software The grip switch can be set in the GT Designer and the DU WIN If a screen is created using the screen creation software whose version does not correspond the Handy GOT the grip switch is always valid on the screen For setting of items other than the grip switch the screen creation software of proper version is required 5 11 3 Grip switch operation specifications 1 Grip switch valid invalid When GRIP SWITCH is set to USE valid touch keys on user screens in the screen mode are enabled while the grip switch is being pressed Availability of the grip switch is being set to all user screens On system screens touch keys are always enabled
310. Terminal block HAR SASHES RSAC 59188 2 S ize Ma 1 RF Sa a HAHH 509 crew size a ow cue cH cr coc 59a soa 08 Roa Ros Ron sc LL ITA L8 1LC ET i co z Bate Terminal symbol H e amis P I a FR ASNR Pa S o Connected to the GOT F900 620 pem OLD oc 59 ES c c o oS gt 59 9o 59 o A X 8 8 85 Ege OJo 529 o oa 52 MITSUBISHI 13 9 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 13 3 4 Specification of Station Number in Creating Screen An inverter can be selected out of multiple units concurrently used by setting the station number under numerical setting in screen creation for GOT F900 The station number specified in the screen creation software corresponds to the station number specified for the parameter in an inverter There are a direct and an indirect methods to specify the station number when creating a screen If an individual screen is created for each inverter it is a direct specification Only one number corresponding to the inverter can be selected on one screen in order to edit its numerical value If one screen is created for selecting an unit out of multiple inverters to edit its value it is an indirect specification It is more effective in screen creation because the inverter of which the numerical value is to be changed can be selected on one screen using the
311. To power supply and operation A switches P i E _ i Handy GOT j RS 422 E Bd dud supply and operation A E be gt re E E 0 To power supply and operation switches F i Use the RS 422 G a gt port on the rear ES lt T To RS 422 power supply and operation switches A F9GT HCAB OOM B F9GT HCAB2 150 D F9GT HCNB E FX 50DU CABO or FX 50DU CABO 1M G F9GT HCAB1 OOM A F9GT HCAB OOM Equivalent to the 8 pin MINI DIN connector of the FX Series PLC D F9GT HCNB F FX 30DU GM CAB F9GT HCAB1 OOM C Prepared by the user Make sure that the total cable extension distance A B or C is 6m 19 8 or less MITSUBISHI 12 3 c O MELSEC Q Series PLC Connection of FX Series Positioning Connection of FREQROL Inverter Connection of Microcom puter Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FX Series Positioning Unit FX 2N 10 20GM 12 12 3 12 3 1 12 3 2 12 3 3 Cautions on use of FX Series positioning unit When using the GOT F900 connected to the FX Series
312. W3 switches and GR W 18 gt SWA resi Swen 22 Y W 22 ES1 OF 02 BL W 24 lt gt DC24V anes GY W 25 gt DC24V J OLD A FoGT HCABI HIDM RS 422 F9GT HCAB OOM Drain Y ao FG class D d 95 connection iren cn 58 2 gt RXD RDA E 92 W 3 RXD RDB Terminal Sic s cr 6 TXD SDA block BIG d 5 950 BR 7 TXD SDB PLC side O 10 4 gt SG GND Signal name of computer link E Q Seni PL 12 DC24VG 59 Qcomputer link PK 13 gt DC24VG Oe Prepared by the user FGR 4 SW common Wire the power 2 d SW supply the zd BK W 16 gt SW2 operation R W 17 gt SW3 switches and GR W 18 gt SWA Ms emergency BH W 21 gt ES i Y W 22 lt gt ES UN BL W 24 gt DC24V4 E a udi gt DC24V J F 8 c lt F9GT HCAB1 O10M gad SHO gen OF o SEI s MITSUBISHI 11 23 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 C 2 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face Model name Application Connection diagram Application RS 232C F9GT HCAB LILIM connection To cable F9GT HCAB or F9GT HCAB1 on Signal name of A Handy GOT side computer link DC24VG DC24VG gt common gt SW1 SW2 SW3 gt SWA gt ES1 gt ES1 gt DC24V Prepared by the user
313. When connecting the FREQROL Series inverter check the COM port designation the OS version of the GOT F900 and the applicable versions of the screen creation software Compatibility when connecting FREQROL 5500 500 500 Inverter COM port Connection type ISIS GOT F900 OS version creation software Series of GOT F900 RS 232C EMCO morg GT Designer DU WIN GOT units F920GOT K F930GOT F943 Handy GOT It cannot be connected Select the F940 handy GOT The screen creation software version corresponds to the model of the GOT F900 Series Refer to section 3 2 System Configuration This section explains the cables required to connect the FREQROL Series inverter through INV direct connection RS 422 Up to 10 FREQROL Series inverters can be connected to one GOT F900 unit Configuration for CPU Direct Connection RS 422 The GOT F900 can be connected to the FREQROL Series inverter equipped with built in PU port A500 E500 Series the FR A5NR computer link option A500 Series or the S500 Series equipped with the RS 485 communication function The GOT F900 can be directly connected to the interface to control two or more inverters 1 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT a When one inverter is connected a FREQROL inverter GOT F900 INV direct connection c RS 422 cable cable 10BASE T F930GOT
314. X2 FX2C 1 00 or later FX 10P FX Series FX2N FX2NC 2 00 or later FX 20P AnA AnN A2C 2 00 or lat Kd A Series A1S AOJ2H 2 10 or later A7PHP HGP The applicable dedicated equipment above can be connected to FX 2PIF 1 Even though the COMPUTER port RS 232C of FX 2PIF is available for connecting a personal computer there is no need to use it because the function is built in the GOT F900 2 Restrictions in the number of devices being monitored only when the A Series PLC is connected ACPU direct connection Two port interface Dedicated equipment p FX 2PIF GPP function Maximum number of devices GOT F900 that can be monitored when peripheral equipment for the A Series PLC A6GPP ora personal computer is used 103 devices Maximum number of devices that can be monitored in the _ OOo no USER SCREEN MODE 34 devices objects on the GOT F900 currently displayed screen See below for the details ko 3 Calculation of active devices at one time when the A Series PLC is connected The number of devices Number Numerical Display Bar Graph Indicator Lamp Change Screen Display screen changeover in the USER SCREEN MODE is calculated using the following formula Have in mind however the number of devices being monitored varies depending on the setting of the bar code reader
315. a ES nins SODOODS To power supply a and operation C Switches i d 52 3 O P lt 28 E RS 232C ou power supply and operation switches Total extension distance 6m 19 8 or less c m 2 c cor 1 Data transfer cable Personal computer Cable for Handy GOT a RS 232C cable Port Portshape A F9GT HCAB LILIM C F9GT HCAB1 O1OM PC AT compatible machine DOS V 9 pin D Sub female Prepared by user As to the C F9GT HCAB1 LILIM the user should attach an intermediate connector and prepare cable for Bio and a cable for personal computer Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 67 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Peripheral Equipment 6 6 3 2 Changeover of Connection between PLC and Personal Computer For connecting a personal computer the status of the PLC port of the F943 Handy GOT should be changed over from PLC connection to personal computer connection screen data transfer by the screen operation The operations of the Handy GOT are explained below 1 Startup operation lt When the OS version is 6 00 or later gt When the SELECT MODE screen change operation is disabled a While pressing and holding the upper left corner of t
316. a While pressing and holding the upper left corner of the screen The LANGUAGE screen appears turn on the power Keep holding the upper left corner for about 25 seconds more Then press END at the upper right corner The SET UP MODE screen appears b Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears Set the following PLC TYPE FX SERIES CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 422 CPU PORT RS 232C DST STATION STATION 00 GOT STATION D When the main menu screen change operation is enabled Operation Display screen name a Press the upper left corner of the screen The position to be The SELECT MODE screen appears pressed can be changed in the GOT and the screen creation software Press OTHER MODE on the menu The OTHER MODE screen appears c Press SET UP MODE on the menu The SET UP MODE screen appears d Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears e Set the following PLC TYPE FX SERIES CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 422 CPU PORT RS 232C DST STATION STATION 00 GOT STATION D When the screen data is transferred to the GOT F900 the old data including the PLC type connection type and station number are overwritten a MITSUBISHI 8 10 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 8 2 GT Designer E Creation a Open GT Designer The Select Project dialog box appears b Click the New button The GOT PLC Type GOT PLC Type dialog box appears
317. a command is being received 5 EZO R If an event occurs while sending Sog Oro Microcomputer sta aa back a response the GOT 9 o Response sends an interrupt code after Response finishing sending back the fInterrupt esponse 1st GOT S Command Command Interrupt Event occurs to 2nd GOT to 2nd GOT If receiving an interrupt code from another 2 GOT while sending back a response the iS Interrupt GOT sends the interrupt code after aoe finishing sending back the response 9 9 3rd GOT If receiving an interrupt code from another GOT in any status except sending back a response while receiving command for example the GOT immediately sends the interrupt code BL If an event such as change of the ON OFF status of a certain bit data or a screen changeover occurs 9 by a touch key the screen interrupt code is sent Em oon en 529 o ONA a MITSUBISHI 14 13 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 14 5 2 Command List and Compatible Version of GOT F900 The table below explains commands used to transfer data between the GOT F900 and the microcomputer Command list Command Command name Description Reference Consecutively reads data by as much as the specified number of 0 30H points from the specified device Batch read command To the command above specification with the stati
318. a is partially written e Cause 1 The number of devices may be small 2 The bar code reader specifications are not satisfied 3 The data may be interrupted while being transferred Countermeasures 1 Check the setting of the bar code in the screen creation software 2 Check the bar code reader specifications 3 Check whether there is imperfect contact in such places as a connector a MITSUBISHI 22 10 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Appendix 23 23 Appendix This chapter describes diversified technical information 2 EDT mm a MITSUBISHI 23 1 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Appendix 23 23 1 Connection of Programming Tools via FX 2PIF 23 1 1 How to Monitor Using AGGPP A7PHP HPP This section explains the connection method to execute program transfer monitoring from the dedicated equipment for PLC programming such as the AGGPP the A7PHP the FX 10P and the FX 20P using the FX 2PIF two port interface connected to the RS 422 port of the GOT F900 1 Connection condition Target model Applicable PLC Remarks F930GOT F930GOT K Only models equipped FX PLC direct connection F940GOT with RS 422 I F A Series CPU direct connection F940WGOT F940 Handy GOT 2 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT GOT F900 Two port interface a Dedicated equipment c RS 422 cable F930GOT FX 2PIF GPP functio d RS 422 ca
319. a memory DM number and the set value when the unit number is set to 00 Setting item Set value INC Arbitrary setting Provided Host link mode Communication DM30000 DM30010 8000H Data length 7 bits Stop bit length 2 bits Parity Even DM30001 DM30011 0007H Baud rate 19200 bps Transmission delay time DM30002 DM30012 0000H Transmission delay time CST control Not provided a MITSUBISHI 15 12 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 15 5 15 5 1 15 5 2 15 5 3 Caution on Use of SYSMAC C Series PLC When using the GOT F900 connected to the SYSMAC C Series PLC observe the following caution on use Modes in the SYSMAC C Series PLC When the GOT F900 is connected to the SYSMAC C Series PLC and the current value and the set value of each device of the SYSMAC C Series PLC are changed the PLC should be set to the monitor mode If the SYSMAC C Series PLC is started up in the running mode the GOT F900 sets automatically the PLC to the monitor mode Mode of PLC at startup Operation of GOT The GOT F900 changes over the PLC from the running mode the Running mode monitor mode to enable data change The PLC remains in the monitor mode and data change is enabled The PLC remains in the program mode and data change is enabled Forced ON OFF on the device monitor screen of the GOT F900 The bit device ON OFF function is provi
320. acking D has not come off b Attach the rear cover c Tighten four mounting screws Make sure the tightening torque is 0 49 to 0 68 Nem MITSUBISHI 5 15 Introduction Outline Specifications jum to o cr cO installation and Wiring of Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More GOT Units Connection of Connection of MELSEC A MELSEC F FX Series PLC Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 9 9 5 5 1 Selection of relay cable 1 Using F940 Handy GOT Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 Processing Panel Face of Control Box or Cabinet This section explains the panel processing procedure required when a connector is provided and the Handy GOT is attached or removed after a connector is provided to it a Installing a connector on the panel of control box or cabinet Control panel or F940 Handy GOT operation panel For the panel cut dimension refer to 5 5 4 a External cable with 25 pin D Sub male connector Other than RH model F9GT HCAB 3M 3m 9 10 F9GT HCAB 10M 10m 32 10 RH model F9GT RHCAB 3M 3m 9 10 F9GT RHCAB 6M 6m 19 8 F9GT RHCAB 10M 10m 32 10 Relay cable for connection to PLC Refer to 5 4 2 25 pin D Sub or 8 pin MINI DIN connector is offered to connect to FX CPU Choose a proper cable between the following
321. address If Start address gt End address or either address is over GB1023 an error is sent back 14 6 5 Interrupt Code The interrupt code is explained in the example below Switch M8000 50H Switch M8000 Screen 20H Screen changeover changeover Touch switch Use example When the touch switch on the GOT F900 is pressed the interrupt code for the switch and screen changeover is output a MITSUBISHI 14 22 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 14 7 Setting of Connected Equipment for GOT 599 o The microcomputer connection parameters can be set using the GOT F900 Series or the screen 5 Of creation software GT Designer and DU WIN 1 GOT F900 Series When the main menu screen change operation is disabled Sak a While pressing and holding the upper left corner of the screen The LANGUAGE screen appears 8x8 turn on the power Keep holding the upper left corner for about 25 seconds more Then press END at the upper right corner The SET UP MODE screen appears H b Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears Set the following 29 PLC TYPE UNIVERSAL S CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 422 CPU PORT RS 232C DST STATION STATION 00 01 to 31 when two or more GOTs are connected 5 GOT STATION S o0 When the main menu screen change operation is
322. al Settingiiem Port Ponz zag Arbitrary setting Provided Host link mode ane Communication DM32000 DM32010 8000H Data length 7 bits Stop bit length 2 bits Parity Even Transmission speed speed Transmission speed DM32001 DM32011 0007H 0007 Baud rate 19200bps oe a s t DM32002 DM32012 0000H T Transmission delay time Oms 0 22 ransmission aeiay time 0000H Transmission delay time Oms ransmission delay time of CST t Not ided E control No proni e Sac When connecting the GOT F900 to the port 2 RS 422 of the CS1W SCB41 set the following 59 O CS1W SCB41 4 wire type Refer to the description on the switches of e DIP switch without terminal resistor the CS1W SCB41 om 5 9 85 595 Onn o 529 gon TE oz Onn MITSUBISHI 15 11 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 3 In the case of CS1W SCU 1 In the CS1W SUC21 write the data to the data memory DM shown in the table below using a peripheral tool The data memory DM number to be written is a multiple of the unit number 0 to 16 as shown below DM3000 100 x Unit number Unit number is a number of 1 16 DM3000 100 x Unit number 10 Example When the unit number is set to 5 Write the following set values Port 1 DM3000 100 x 5 DM3500 Port 2 DM3000 100 x 5 10 DM3510 The table below shows the dat
323. al in the previous formula 34 4 Restriction in PLC current consumption The FX 2PIF current consumption is shown in the following table The power is supplied from the 5V DC power supply of the PLC For the 5V DC power capacity refer to the PLC manual 5V DC supplied from the PLC Specification 310mA when a personal computer PC9801 or PC AT compatible model is used Current consumption 340mA when FX 20P is used 180mA when A7PHP A7HGP AeGPP AGPHP AeHGP and MELSEC LM is used MITSUBISHI 23 5 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Appendix 23 23 1 3 Switch Setting in FX 2PIF Perform the following switch settings in accordance with the connected MELSEC F A Series PLC or peripheral equipment For the details refer to the FX 2PIF USER S GUIDE JY992D38501 1 Peripheral equipment selection switch Peripheral equipment selection switch f Underline indicates setting at shipment Peripheral equipment for GPP A7PHP HGP LE A6GPP PHP HGP Personal computer PC 9800 PC AT compatible equipment Dedicated peripheral equipment MELSEC LM Series 2 PLC selection DIP switches PLC selection DIP switches Number Applicable PLC Number Number Number Peripheral equipment selection switch PLC selection DIP switches FX 2PIF To the dedicated equipment To the personal computer PP HPP RS422 To GOT
324. al port In this case set the GOT F900 to CPU direct connection No setting is required in the FX Series PLC because programming communication is specified at the time of shipment from the factory FX FXSenesPLC PLC ee 6 FXiw 232 BD 232 BD FXiN 232BD FXiW 422 BD 422 BD FXie 422 BD FX1N FX1N 485ADP FXew 232 BD 232 BD eese I FXaN 422 BD 422 BD FXe 422BD Pace 1 1 These optional ports enable communication using either communication protocol no protocol communication computer link easy PLC link parallel link and programming For connecting the GOT F900 the programming communication mode should be selected which is set at the time of shipment from the factory If any other protocol or an improper protocol has been set release the setting by a sequence program or the software while referring to the procedure below 1 To set by a sequence program Delete the no protocol communication RS instruction Delete programs set by computer link easy PLC link and parallel link Delete the setting of communication parameters D8120 If the parameters are set using the software for sequence program refer to the description on the setting by the software also For the details on the program settings refer to the FX COMMUNICATION RS 232C RS 422 USER S MANUAL a MITSUBISHI 8 6 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of ME
325. an be set using the GOT F900 Series and the screen creation software GT Designer and DU WIN Setting the Connection Type Set the connection type in accordance with the connected equipment as shown in the table below When using the computer link unit for the A Series PLC select A SERIES for PLC TYPE Refer to Chapter 9 for details Have in mind that the computer link unit for the QnA requires CPU direct connection Connected equipment GOT F900 DU WIN classification in manual CONNECTION QnACPU direct connection _ Programming port Port of QnA CPU QnAS CPU PE eC COMMS CHOI AJAR Refer to the following setting method QnA computer link AJ71QC24 RS 422 RS 232C AJ71QC24 R2 RS 232C A1SJ71QC24 RS 422 RS 232C A1SJ71QC24 R2 RS 232C A computer link AJ71UC24 RS 422 RS 232C A1J71UC24 R4 RS 422 A1J71UC24 R2 RS 232C AJ71UC24 RS 232C CPU direct connection RS 422 or Communicates as programming port CPU direct connection RS 232C Refer to the following setting method Communicates as computer link Select A SERIES for PLC TYPE Refer to Chapter 9 Link connection RS 422 or link connection RS 232C 1 GOT F900 Series When the main menu screen change operation is disabled Operation Display screen name a While pressing and holding the upper left corner of the screen The LANGUAGE screen appears turn on the power Keep holding the upper left corner for about 25 seconds more Then press END at the u
326. ar and operation face switches Total extension distance 11 5m 37 9 or less Connection of two or more GOT units a QnA Series PLC b RS 422 cable AJ71QC24 R4 AJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24 AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24 R4 25 pin D Sub Terminal block Terminal block D F9GT HCNB C Prepared by the user E F9OGT HCAB1 LILIM A F9GT HCAB LILIM B Prepared by the user Connection of two or more GOT units is not possible Applicable QnA Series PLC products in the column a are computer link units equipped with built in RS 422 interface Make sure that the total cable extension distance A B or E is 11 5m 37 9 or less a MITSUBISHI 10 6 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 10 2 3 Configuration for QnA Computer Link Connection RS 232C E The GOT F900 and the computer link unit can be connected on the 1 1 basis As many GOT F900 units as the number of computer link units connected the QnA Series PLC can be connected Because the programming port of the PLC is not occupied peripheral programming equipment dedicated equipment for PLC can be connected for monitoring and transfer of sequence programs 1 In the case of F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT 8 GOT F900 a QnA Series PLC QnA computer link b RS 232C cable F930GOT j
327. ard to the inverter connection order No problem is expected even if station numbers are not consecutive GOT F900 Setting in the GOT F900 Leave the station number setting in 00 Station Station Station Station Station number 3 number 0 number 1 number 21 number 6 PL p LG Zs Za Example of station number setting a MITSUBISHI 13 6 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 o 13 3 2 Setting Examples 599 DN 1 Communication port corresponding parameters TE When connecting the GOT F900 to the inverter parameters corresponding to the communication port should be set S500 Series E500 Series A500 Series gol Remove the front cover Remove the operation panel Remove the operation panel uic _ 252 IP ER 0o m uN LN FR ASNR 5 ol ree Remove the SO d PU port front cover EOT Ste RS 485 port PU port o Communication port GOT connection destination parameters corresponding to inverter 5 o A500 Series Built in inverter PU port Pr117 to Pr124 FE i FR A5NR computer link option Pr331 to Pr342 E500 Series Built in inverter PU port Pr117 to Pr124 e500 Series vent RS 485 port n1 to n12 Pow only in certain model
328. as executed the 6 00 4 00 connection mode was automatically changed over then the device range was checked This error occurs when the device range set on the changeover destination screen excluding the head screen is beyond the range for the FX2 Series Countermeasures Connect the PLC installation and Wiring of F940GOT There is an error on the screen to be displayed installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Cause One of the screen objects is placed outside the available screen area Countermeasures Check the placement of screen objects I The display screen contains an error oo cos 88g DISPLAY SCREEN 20585 A device that does not exist in the connected PLC is IS NOT AVAILABLE From RA referenced on the screen No or one of the 6 00 or 4 000r NO is first screen objects is placed outside the available screen later later oo displayed on the product S5n GOT F900 screen OT E e Countermeasures o gt Check the devices used and placement of screen 520 objects Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 8 19 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 8 OS version Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures EE eee Coments Check points and countermeasures 4 F940 F930 F920 DATA IS NOT FOUND is disp
329. asures S 9 Check the cable E52 os Canaveral to a nonexistent screen by a touch key or the FP Series PLC was tried Do Earlier Earlier T IS NOT AVAILABLE Cause nes sian 5 ic di The changeover destination screen has not been created yet 6 00 4 00 Sog GOT F900 screen OS o e Countermeasures 2 0 Create the screen dod DISPLAY SCREEN A nonexistent screen was tried to be displayed uo aa Cause 6 00 or 4 00 or n The screen No has not been created yet later later em displayed on the GOT C sga Fo00 screen e Countermeasures ory Create the screen Sus LL o A device that does not exist in the FP Series PLC was referenced Example While an FPO is connected a device exists only in the FP2SH is specified for numeric input e 58 Cause 52 On the changeover destination screen excluding the head EEO screen a nonexistent device in the connected FP Series 852 DISPLAY SCREEN PLC is specified IS NOT AVAILABLE ee Countermeasures than than is displayed on the Check the devices used on the head screen 6 00 400 GOT F900 screen ca There is an error on the screen to be displayed So e Cause 8g Earlier Earlier One of the screen objects is placed outside the available Screen area Countermeasures Check the placement of screen objects Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 18 15 GOT F900 SERIE
330. ata using the screen creation software Programs and device set values of the FX Series PLC cannot be changed Causes The write protect switch of the memory cassette is set to ON PLC Password protection is on Countermeasures Set the write protect switch to OFF Enter the keywords by SELECT MODE OTHER MODE ENTRY CODE Earlier Earlier Earlier than than than 1 10 6 10 4 10 8 20 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 8 Contents of trouble Check point d t eck points and countermeasures 5 Programs and device set values of the FX Series PLC cannot be changed CAN NOT WRITE Causes den The write protect switch of the memory cassette is set 1 100r 6 100r 4 100r is displayed on the 2 to ON PLC Password protection is on later later later C GOT F900 screen Countermeasures Set the write protect switch to OFF Enter the keywords by SELECT MODE OTHER MODE ENTRY CODE F Programs and device set values of the FX Series PLC 5 NOT USE THE cannot be changed FUNCTION WHILE Causes PROTECTED is displayed on the GOT F900 screen PLC Password protection is on Countermeasures Enter the keywords by SELECT MODE OTHER MODE ENTRY CODE product product product product An attempt was made to edit the set value of the timer or counter or the current value of the file registers of the FX Series PLC
331. availability A computer link Available _ connection is available 1 Note that the selection item display is changed from MELSEC A QnA to MELSEC A MELSEC QnA Q a MITSUBISHI 10 16 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 3 DU WIN E Operation Display screen name 3 Creation a Open the DU WIN The Project settings E dialog box appears b On the menu select File New Project Settings Terminal F940GOT SWD System MELSEGC GQnA Q DU System Language English o Character Set Japanese Set the following T Terminal F940WGOT TWD V H 9 F940GOT LWD 5 F940GOT SWD F930GOT BWD T5 F920GOT BBD5 K PLC System MELSEC QnA Q QnA CPU QnA computer link MELSEC A A computer link Select Terminal in accordance with the LC display color Terminal Model name F940WGOT TWD V F940WGOT color installation and Wiring of F940GOT F940GOT black and white Handy ET black and white F940GOT color Handy GOT color F930GOT K blue F930GOT BWD F930GOT blue F920GOT BBD5 K F920GOT K blue F940GOT LWD F940GOT SWD installation and Wiring of Handy GOT o d Set CPU direct connection RS 422 RS 232C link connection The Setup Data dialog Sat RS 422 RS 232C of the GOT F900 box appears H Ww ww E Ww ww On the menu select View Project System Settings Setup EIS Data
332. bad eene edet etae 5 23 5 OutneofJIntermal WIKIA ssi oti o E Ii E EE eR Re Hte AE 5 24 5 8 Wiring for 24V DC Power Supply and Class D Grounding 5 26 5 9 Wiring and Handling of Operation Switches SW1 to SWA 5 27 5 9 1 Handling of operation switches ccccccssecccceeceeceeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeseueeesaeeeessaeeesaaueeenaes 5 27 5 9 2 Preparation of Operation Switch Name Sheet 5 29 5 10 Wiring and Handling of Emergency Stop Switch 51 5 31 5 11 Handling of grip switch excluding RH Model ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeenees 5 33 5 11 1 Function of Grip Re REI pae kc 5 33 5 11 2 Setting in main unit and screen creation 5 33 5 11 3 Grip switch operation 5 34 5 11 4 Communication with connected equipment grip switch ON OFF signal 5 36 5 12 Handling of grip switch RH model 5 37 WINA O ak 5 37 5122 Seung or Gp SWEN LED 5 38 5 12 93 LEDACUON ta lot ort cu dU ud Delta e Den 5 38 5 13 Handling of Keylock S
333. be connected also to the computer link option FR A5NR c 2 5 he D d Station No Station No 1 Station No 31 mu GOT F900 Inverter Inverter Inverter One GOT F900 unit can control up to 10 inverters 1 Excluding the F920GOT K Specifications 2 2 2 PLC by Other Companies This section describes the outline of connection of the GOT F900 to the PLC manufactured by other companies General purpose equipment 1 Microcomputer connection The GOT F900 can be connected to the serial communication port of a personal computer or microcomputer board Be gt 422 a P NF RS Ld installation and Wiring of F940GOT Either one unit LA installation and Wiring of Handy GOT RS 232C Personal computer or B Printer Bar code microcomputer board GoT F900 reader 1 Excluding the F920GOT K 5 c 2 Connection of two or more GOT units ee Up to four GOT F900 units can be connected to the serial communication connector of a personal X computer or microcomputer board Either one unit amp gt 5 SS an ED EM 232c N 255 Personal a or Printer Bar code SSO microcomputer board GOT F900 GOT F900 Only one Handy GOT unit can be one Handy GOT unit can be reader oro connected at the end 1 Excluding the F920GOT K o r c PLC by Omron Sz Qui Upper link connection XE One GOT F900 unit
334. be set using the GOT F900 Series and the screen creation software GT Designer and DU WIN 1 GOT F900 Series When the main menu screen change operation is disabled Operation Display screen name a While pressing and holding the upper left corner of the screen The LANGUAGE screen appears turn on the power Keep holding the upper left corner for about 25 seconds more Then press END at the upper right corner The SET UP MODE screen appears b Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears c Set the following PLC TYPE A SERIES CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 422 LINK PORT RS 422 LINK PORT RS 232C DST STATION STATION 2 00 to 15 GOT STATION D When the main menu screen change operation is enabled Operation Display screen name a Press the upper left corner of the screen The position to be The SELECT MODE screen appears pressed can be changed in the GOT and the screen creation software Press OTHER MODE on the menu The OTHER MODE screen appears c Press SET UP MODE on the menu The SET UP MODE screen appears d Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears e Set the following PLC TYPE A SERIES CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 422 LINK PORT RS 422 LINK PORT RS 232C DST STATION STATION 00 to 15 GOT STATION D When the screen data is transferred to the GOT F900 the old data including the PLC type connection type and station number are overwritten The PLC t
335. ble RS 232C connection is not allowed F940GOT 8 pin MINI DIN or 25 pin D Sub connector Cables for the dedicated equipment a Dedicated equipment b RS 422 cable FX 10P FX 20P FX 20P CAB AGPHP A6GPP A7PHP A7HGP AC 30R4 Cables for the GOT F900 c RS 422 cable e Connectable PLC d RS 422 cable FX 40DU CAB FX PLC direct connection 25 pin D Sub FX 422CAB FX 40DU CAB OOM A Series CPU direct connection 25 pin D Sub Fx 422CAB 150 FX SODU CABL FX PLC direct connection 8 pin MINI DIN FX 422CABO OO indicates cable length The right angle type cable FX 50DU CABL cannot be used for the F930GOT and F930GOT K a MITSUBISHI 23 2 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Appendix 23 3 F940 Handy GOT 5 o og GOT F900 c RS 422 cable Two port interface 1 7 _ a B OL E GO P S Handy GOT E RS 422 59 5 a To power supply Sac m7 and operation A C
336. box is not included in the bit device range in set in View Project System Settings Interface Devices oTo oul o 12 2 599 vga o ete 2 MITSUBISHI 5 43 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 5 15 Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 Connection Diagram of Handy GOT Operation Switches and Power Supply This section explains the wiring method of the operation switches while picking up an example in which the operation switches are connected to inputs and outputs of the PLC 1 Wiring between Handy GOT operation switches and connected equipment Wiring inside Connected Handy GOT 25 pin D Sub Untied wires equipment PLC SXAGOOM pm Fresh green COM ANE LAM 15 Sky blue XO Sh eui Black white X1 gt Inputs RN SWS s 71 Red white 2 7 SWA ue Green white ES1 21 7 cs e Brown white Wire them as emergency EST 22 Nellow white Stop switch Electric circuit Power DC24VG 12 Purple supply wiring 13 Pink DC24VG 2 in 1 o4V DC DC24V Blue white DC24V 25 Gray white FG 1 Drain wire 4 Class D grounding F9GT HCAB1 150 Cables for Handy GOT a MITSUBISHI F9GT HCAB LILIM F9GT HCA
337. by the user Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 5 9 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 5 4 Selection and Installation of External Cable A cable combined for the PLC varies among the F940 F930 Handy GOT RH model and other models Select a suitable cable in reference to the figures below 5 4 1 Handy GOT Excluding RH model 1 F940 Handy GOT D For the details refer to 5 4 2 jose eee C To FXo FXos FX1Ss FXoN FX1N FX2N FX2NC Series PLC To power supply and operation switches K z gt ee ae To FX FX1 FX2 FX2c A QnA Series PLC To power supply and operation switches For the details refer to 5 4 2 For the details refer to 5 4 4 e f K gt lt gt Connect the cable to the port inside the rear cover To FXo FXos FX1s FXoN FX1N FX2N FX2NC Series PLC exem To EX PX1 FX2 FX2C A operation switches g
338. c cannot be connected depending on the OS operating system version of the GOT F900 In this section you can check the OS version and check whether it corresponds to the equipment to be connected OS type There are following five types of OS GOT F900 Series F940GOT Handy GOT 940 system lt 81 F930GOT 930 system F930GOT K 930 system Ver 4 60 is the first product How to Confirm OS Version of GOT F900 When the power of the GOT F900 is turned on the screen shown below is displayed for several seconds to indicate the series name and the version number version 2 10 in the lower right position The period of time to be displayed can be changed by the screen creation software or the GOT MELSEC GOT F940GOT Series name Copyright C 1998 Ver 2 10 Version Mitsubishi Electric Corporation On the rear panel of the GOT F900 main unit the nameplate indicating the manufacturer s serial number the model name and the OS version is adhered However because the OS can be upgraded it is recommended to confirm it using the method above MITSUBISHI 3 1 Introduction Outline c E Q o installation and Wiring of F940GOT installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC Q
339. calibration parameters Pr900 to Pr905 the following value should be written to the second extension parameter SP108 depending on the used device number and inverter model Value to be written to second extension parameter SP108 ag Restriction in simultaneous specification of PG and Pr devices one screen When creating a screen of the GOT F900 specify either program operation PG device or parameter Pr 900 to Pr 905 device Do not specify both on one screen Caution on connecting to the PU port only in the E500 and the A500 When the power of the inverter is turned on the external operation mode is automatically selected In order to rewrite values of parameters etc in the GOT F900 changing operation mode to PU operation in advance is required To change the operation mode write 2 to the special parameter SP123 a MITSUBISHI 13 12 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 o 13 5 Correspondence Between Devices of GOT and Parameters 599 o 20 The devices of the GOT F900 correspond to the parameters and the communication data of the inverter Sus as shown in the following table For the device range refer to section 3 3 Device name Function of inverter in GOT F900 6 of oC c When the inverter status monitor read and the operation command write of the inverter are 232 changed over by instruction codes b0 to b7 correspond to devices SO to S7 and can be read
340. can be connected to a port having the upper link communication function of the 9 SYSMAC C Series C200H CQM1 CS1 Upper link unit Either one unit Eu RS 422 or 5 RS 232C z SYSMAC C GOT F900 Printer code reader 1 Excluding the F920GOT K 54 599 SE a MITSUBISHI 2 7 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Outline 2 PLC by Fuji Electric Link unit connection One GOT F900 unit can be connected to the link unit of the FLEX PC N Series NB NJ NS PLC Link unit Either one unit RS 422 5 232 FLEX PC GOT F900 Printer code reader 1 Excluding the F920GOT K PLC by Yasukawa Electric Memo bus unit connection One GOT F900 unit can be connected to the MEMOBUS port of the machine controller or the memo bus unit CPU or memo bus unit Either one unit RS 422 or RS 232C CP9200SH Printer Bar code reader MP920 GOT F900 MP930 1 Excluding the F920GOT K PLC by Matsushita Electric Works CPU direct connection RS 232C One GOT F900 unit can be connected to the FP Series CPU or computer communication unit Either one unit SA LBS Printer GOT F900 FP Series Bar code reader SS SS Su NC RS 232C Printer FP2 CCU GOT F900 Either one unit SA 5 Bar code reader 1 Excluding the F920GOT K PLC by Allen Bradley CPU direct connection RS 232C One GOT F900 u
341. cation format of the printer as shown in the table below 1 Applicable printer The printer which can be connected via ESC P Epson Standard Code for Printer control code and the RS 232C interface is applicable 2 Transmission specifications Setting item Communication setting Remarks GOT F900 GT Designer DU WIN default value in Write set value of printer DATA BIT Data Bit Databits 7 bits 8 bits LS STOP rbi 2 bi po PARITY Even Odd None es HANDSHAKING Handshaking Handshake DTR DSR XON XOFF special cases For the setting of DON T USE USE of the printer refer to section 21 5 a MITSUBISHI 21 2 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Printer 21 3 Setting of USE DON T USE In SERIAL PORT RS 232C in the GOT F900 set PRINTER to USE or DON T USE When PRINTER is set to DON T USE the RS 232C port of the GOT F900 is automatically changed over in accordance with each communication When PRINTER is set to USE only the printer is available When the power is turned off once then turned on again the changed setting becomes valid Connection of o Have in mind that screen data transfer sequence program transfer or sequence program monitoring is So disabled while PRINTER is set to USE For the details refer to section 21 4 9939 38d E E e x MITSUBISHI 21 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Printer 21 21 4 21 4 1
342. cations set in the GOT Example of Setting Screen The setting screen of the package software of RSLogix500 RSLogix500 Software Setting in MicroLogix Communication Setting Specifications GOT F900 Transmission Specifications The transmission specifications set in the MicroLogix CPU The communication specifications set in the GOT Example of Setting Screen The setting screen of the package software of RSLogix500 RSLogix500 Software Device Specification ile Number and The file number and allowable element 19 5 2 Element Range specification range Restriction in Device Cautions on unsupported devices Specification Caution on Use of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Setting of Connected Equipment for GOT Set the PLC type using the GOT or the screen creation software 19 7 a MITSUBISHI 19 1 You can learn the restrictions in connecting the GOT to the SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC Connection of FX Series Positioning Connection of FREQROL Inverter Connection of Microcom puter Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller FP Series PLC y c O Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley
343. ce screen data transfer is finished make sure to turn off the PLC and disconnect the power cable before connecting the Q Series PLC to the RS 232C port of the GOT Otherwise it may cause critical damage to the connected equipment such as the F920GOT K PLC or personal computer a MITSUBISHI 6 10 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Peripheral Equipment 6 2 When connecting to the PLC E Turn off the PLC 3 Disconnect the power cable used for screen data transfer E Connect a cable between the RS 232C ports of the F920GOT K and QCPU i RS 232C th Cable to connect 6 Q Series PLC F920GOT K 5 3 installation and Wiring of F940GOT 20 Col Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 6 11 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Peripheral Equipment 6 6 5 Cable Diagram This section explains the cable diagram when the GOT F900 is connected to a personal computer 6 5 1 Cable for Personal Computer 1 Cable for the GOT and a personal computer C 2 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face Model
344. cement of screen objects a MITSUBISHI 13 32 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 Contents of troubl Check point d t pe 258 ontents of trouble eck points and countermeasures The display screen contains an error One DISPLAY SCREEN A device that does not exist the connected PLC is 6 00 or 4 00 or is referenced on the screen one of the screen later later cm displayed on the GOT 5 objects is placed outside the available screen area 25 0 F900 screen CH Countermeasures 5 0 Check the devices used placement of screen objects There is not data because the unit is new or the memory clear has been executed 6 1 Cause 525 There is screen data Countermeasures Write the screen data using the screen creation software A device that does not exist in the FREQROL inverter was referenced Example While an S500 Series is connected a Earlier Earlier device exists only in the A500 Series is specified for numeric than than E input 6 00 4 00 9 m DATA IS NOT 838 FOUND is displayed Cause on the GOT F900 On the head screen a nonexistent device in the connected screen FREQROL inverter is specified T The head screen is the screen No 1 in the GT Designer and M the screen No 0 in the DU WIN Countermeasures FE Check the devi
345. ces used on the head screen dod There is not data because the unit is new or the memory clear has been executed o e Cause 520 There is no screen data B50 Countermeasures ul Write the screen data using the screen creation software M AMEN Earlier Earlier Earlier PLC MEMORY is ie displayed on the GOT This error is not displayed than than than 1 10 6 10 4 10 oo F900 screen Be A parameter Pr in the FREQROL inverter was tried to be E92 changed 5 NOT WRITE Cause is displayed on the The FREQROL inverter is not set to the computer link 59 GOT F900 screen operation mode or the inverter is running 9o Countermeasures In the manual of the FREQROL inverter confirm the allowable zr write range in each operation mode ou CAN NOT USE THE FUNCTION WHILE From 5 PROTECTED is This error is not displayed first 5 displayed on the GOT product goo F900 screen ae IS RUNNING From is displayed on the This error is not displayed first GOT F900 screen product 529 TE Onn a MITSUBISHI 13 33 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 2 Software Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 Ci Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures Communication with the screen creation software and screen data cannot be transferred a MITSUBISHI A bar code reader or printer is connected Such equipment cannot be connected to the FREQROL inverter
346. ch OK Enable Cancel Disable Write condition of the grip switch to the PLO ON OFF behavior of the momentary switch Depend on touch switch Depend on grip switch Grip switch LED settings Depend on grip switch Depend on bit device condition always OFF lt When the GT Designer version is earlier than SW5 F 5 05F gt Click the Basic tab Click Enable in Grip switch to display the check mark When using the grip switch function making it valid display the check mark When not using it making it invalid do not display the check mark Caution on setting of Lamp External 1 The contents of Lamp External you have set are not displayed on the screen 2 The check box is valid only in the F9220GOT K F930GOT K Handy GOT Never set the check box in any other series 3 Set only one lamp for all screens of the created screen data 4 Make sure that the bit device assigned on the Basic tab in Lamp dialog box is not included in the read write device range set in Common System Information a MITSUBISHI 541 Introduction Outline Specifications jum G 0 installation and Wiring of Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA
347. computer USB port be connected to the QCPU while the computer link unit has one GOT unit Caution when connecting to Q multiple CPU system 1 Restriction in Device Monitor Function of GOT F900 The PLC number cannot be specified on the screens for device monitor or sampling in HPP mode on the system screen Hence GOT F900 monitors only the connected CPU When a GOT is connected to the serial communication unit the GOT monitors only the control PLC 2 Restriction in Monitored CPU The GOT F900 should be connected only when the system is configured with QCPU If the system includes a motion control or CPU of personal computer GOT F900 should not be connected because monitoring cannot be performed properly even if it is connected to the QCPU GOT F900 Motion control a MITSUBISHI 11 14 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 o 11 5 4 Caution when setting screen creation software 599 QCPU of function version B or later except Q00JCPU QOOCPU or Q01CPU is compatible with the XE multiple PLC system with 4 GOT units maximum SE When two or more QCPU are attached to the main unit the configuration is called a multiple PLC system and monitoring of other CPU number specified from the CPU connected with the GOT F900 is 5 enabled Sue According to the PLC type specified in the screen creation software the CPU which can be monitored is 25 determined as fol
348. computer 14 2 GT Designer Creation a Open GT Designer The Select Project dialog box appears b Click the New button The GOT PLC Type dialog box appears GOT type F94 GOT 320 X 240 Y OK PLG type Computer Cancel Set the following GOT type F940WGOT 480 x 234 WIDE F94 GOT 320 x 240 F93 GOT 240 x 80 PLC type Computer Selection of GOT type GOT type F940WGOT 480x234 lt WIDE gt F940WGOT F94 GOT 320x240 fu F93 GOT 240x80 Balas Click OK d Set CPU direct connection RS 422 RS 232C of the GOT F900 The Project Auxiliary This setting is enabled in the SW4D5C GOTR PACKE version Settings dialog box or later Make Serial Port Setup Language and Menu Key valid Project Auxiliary Settings x Basic Serial Port Setup Language Handy GOT settings OK r Key window Cursor display setting Cancel Action when switching screens Don t display cursor and key window Y When touch input is detected open key window at the same time Click the Setup tab Project Auxiliary Settings x Basic Serial Port Setup Language Handy GOT settings OK Opening Screen Time p Sec Backlight Off Time 18 Min r Connection Buzzer Port R5422 ON Type CPU M C OFF Station a MITSUBISHI 14 24 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomp
349. connection is available a MITSUBISHI 6 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Peripheral Equipment 6 6 4 6 4 1 Caution on Use of Peripheral Equipment When connecting a personal computer to the GOT in order to transfer screen data or sequence program or to monitor the personal computer observe the following cautions on use Caution when connecting the GOT and PLC via RS 232C port Only in case of the F9220GOT K F930GOT F930GOT K or F940GOT If the GOT F900 which is equipped with one RS 422 port and one RS 232C port has already been set to connect with the PLC using the RS 232C port the data transfer screen is not displayed automatically even when a personal computer is connected to the RS 232C port instead of the PLC due to the RS 232C port priority To eliminate the inconvenience described below it is recommended to use the GOT F900 with two RS 232C ports Available only in certain models ABIASA AAAS E p ee I I I I ZIEL I S 2 2 S R 3 C sie inp ELE EET TE TEC T e S XS ro eo re e CAS C9 63 eo cea f 1 The connected equipment is changed Personal computer GOT F900 RS 232C Follow the procedures below and changeover the screen manually from SELECT MODE DATA TRANSFER in order to transfer
350. connection may not be allowed if the connected PLC FX A QnA Q Series PLC or o c O Peripheral Equipment microcomputer is the CPU direct connection type or the OS version of the GOT F900 Series does not 222 match 52 P S For OS version compatible with Q multiple PLC system refer to Chapter 11 829 COM ponto OS version of GOT F900 GOT F900Series can be connected 85 422 RS 232C FXCPU ACPU QnACPU QCPU ENT FL o v v 1 20 220 30 BE o mower v oO war 1 00 1 00 3 00 4 10 5 00 Sg Screen creation GT Designer SW 1A SW 1A SW 2A SW 4F SW 1A iiid 54 1 Only one Handy GOT unit be connected at the ES mm 2 MITSUBISHI 7 1 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 7 2 When connecting two or more GOT F900 units for the first Connection of Two or More GOT Units 7 Connection Configuration for Two or More GOT Units GOT F900 unit refer to the connection method for each equipment FX A QnA Q Series PLC and microcomputer in this manual This section explains cables required to connect among the second and later GOT units Handling of the Handy GOT Only one Handy GOT unit can be connected at the end Up to including one Handy GOT unit 7 2 1 This section explains the configuration when the first GOT F900 four GOT units can be co
351. control unit the CPU unit and the computer communication UNM PORTE E UOTE 18 8 MITSUBISHI xi GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Contents 18 5 Setting of Connected Equipment for 18 9 16 0 Gable DIAGI a Wi T tude cet 18 12 18 7 TKOUDISSMOOUNG eu 18 15 19 Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley 19 1 Um Ecce 19 2 19 2 CoD ello kit Ra Rao CO edv 19 3 19 2 1 Configuration for CPU Direct Connection 5 232 19 3 T EE 19 5 19 3 1 Communication Setting 19 5 19 3 2 GOT F900 Transmission 19 5 19 3 3 Example of Setting Screen of RSLogix500 Software 19 6 19 4 Setting IN MICrOLOQIX qe ers 19 7 19 4 1 Communication Setting 19 7 19 4 2 GOT F900 Transmission 19 7 19 4 3 Examples of Setting Screen of RSLogix500 Software 19 8 19 5 Device Specification Method 19 9 1
352. creen appears pressed can be changed in the GOT and the screen creation software Press OTHER MODE on the menu The OTHER MODE screen appears Press SET UP MODE on the menu The SET UP MODE screen appears Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears Set the following PLC TYPE OMRON C SERIES CONNECTION LINK PORT RS 422 LINK PORT RS 232C DST STATION STATION 00 to 31 GOT STATION D When the screen data is transferred to the GOT F900 the old data including the PLC type connection type and station number are overwritten a MITSUBISHI 15 14 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 2 GT Designer 599 Creation a Open GT Designer The Select Project SEH dialog box appears b Click the New button The GOT PLC Type A SP Sas 525 GOT type FoseGOTG20X240 OK Ege type ts 8 ix a Set the following GOT type F940WGOT 480 234 WIDE 5 F94 GOT 320 x 240 9 F93 GOT 240 x 80 org PLC type OMRON SYSMAC Sc gt Selection of GOT type GOT type F940WGOT 480x234 lt WIDE gt F940WGOT 5 F940GOT F94 GOT 320x240 Handy GOT i O F930GOT K F93 GOT 240x80 ee Click OK d Set link connection RS 422 RS 232C of the GOT F900 oo This setting is enabled in the SW4D5C GOTR PACKE version A 59 or later TE Make Serial Port
353. ction FR A5NR n FR A5NR of A500 Series 56 9 pin D Sub male HN RS 422 Distrib TE istributor Distributor connection Do not connect a INV direct connection 4 Between distributor 5 59 and distributor E Sy PJ 45 plug male PJ 45 plug male Qu iis Do not connect 8 i E RS 422 ES ot x Distributor connection Do not connect 2 INV direct connection Terminal block of Between distributor and sa FR ASNR E o FR A5NR of A500 Series Bon PJ 45 plug male FE o 500 BE cao oz OVNA Aa MITSUBISHI 13 29 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 2 Cable for the Handy GOT and the FREQROL Series inverter When using the Handy GOT RH model refer to the cable diagrams below for the RS 422 RS 232C connector but not the wiring for the power supply the operation switches and the emergency stop switch because it is different For details refer to Chapter 5 C 2 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face No Model name Application Connection diagram Application RS 422 To F9GT HCAB2 150 connection The connector on the ps
354. ction is not correct e Countermeasures Check the cable a MITSUBISHI 8 22 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 9 Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC This chapter explains connection of the GOT F900 Series display unit to the CPU unit or the computer link unit of the A Series PLC The same procedure is taken when connecting to the CPU of the motion controller in which CPU direct connection is available Connection Procedure E This section introduces the procedure to connect the GOT F900 to the A Series PLC 1 Preparation System Condition You can learn the connection availability as well as the version of the 9 1 GOT F900 OS and the screen creation software F You can select the configuration between the GOT and the A Series PLC System Configuration 9 2 computer link unit as well as proper cables 2 Setting 5 o uL PM In the A computer link the following setting is required meet When A connection is selected the GOT F900 is automatically set to fixed values No setting is required in the A Series PLC You can learn the communication specifications and the setting 9 3 The contents of setting of computer link 9 computer link ace n ae disi signal control q prog connection eng Switch setting in each computer link 9 3 3 examples installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 295 SEE cc Caution on Use of Sau MELSEC A S
355. ction of two or more GOT units a QnA Series PLC b RS 422 cable Remarks A F9GT HCAB LILIM F9GT HCAB3 150 QnACPU direct connection 25 pin D Sub D F9GT HCNB E F9GT HCAB1 LILIM A B C FX 40DU CAB D E Make sure that the total cable extension distance A B E is 11 5m 37 9 or less a MITSUBISHI 10 4 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 10 2 2 Configuration for QnA Computer Link Connection RS 422 E The GOT F900 and the computer link unit can be connected on the 1 1 basis As many GOT F900 units as the number of computer link units connected the QnA Series PLC can be connected Because the programming port of the PLC is not occupied peripheral programming equipment dedicated equipment for PLC can be connected for monitoring and transfer of sequence programs e 1 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT 8 GOT F900 a QnA Series PLC QnA computer link b RS 422 cabl F930GOT SI i d 3 o Connection of two or more GOT units F940GOT installation and Wiring of F940GOT m aM a QnA Series PLC b RS 422 cable Make sure the total cable AJ71QC24 R4 25 pin D Sub extension distance is 30m 98 5 or less
356. curs when the device range set on the head screen is beyond the range for the A Series The head screen is the screen No 1 in the GT Designer and the screen No 0 in the DU WIN Countermeasures Connect the PLC There is not data because the unit is new or the memory clear has been executed Cause 6 00 or There is no screen data later e Countermeasures Write the screen data using the screen creation software CAN NOT WHITE TO PLC MEMORY is displayed on the GOT F900 screen CAN NOT WRITE is displayed on the This error is not displayed GOT F900 screen Earlier Earlier Earlier This error is not displayed than than than 1 10 6 10 4 10 1 100r 6 100r later later a MITSUBISHI 9 26 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 OSversion ME ontents of trouble eck points and countermeasures 5 Programs and device set values of the A Series PLC CAN NOT USE THE cannot be changed FUNCTION WHILE Causes PROTECTED is PLC Password protection is displayed on the product product product product A GOT F900 screen e Countermeasures Enter the keywords by SELECT MODE OTHER MODE ENTRY CODE PLC IS RUNNING is displayed onthe _ This error is not displayed GOT F900 screen product product product product 2 5 2 installation installation and Wiring of and Wiring of Handy GOT F94
357. d cannot be written 3 Word device SM cannot be monitored 4 Word devices T and C are the 16 bit type 5 Word device HC is the 32 bit type 6 Only even byte addresses are available Note on number representation A decimal point exists when using the GT Designer but not when using the DU WIN Bit device Device name Byte address Bit address V 1 Q M SM T C S 0 to 7 Word device Device name Device number VW IW QW AI AQ M SM T C HC S a MITSUBISHI 3 22 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 S7 300 Series E Setting range Device 3 Device name number GT GT Designer DU WIN representation Input relay 15117 10 0 1511 7 Bit Output relay Q 00 05117 Q0 0 Q511 7 device Bit memory M M0 M20477 M0 0 M2047 7 GOT internal bit register GB GB132 GB1023 GB132 GB1023 Present value of timer TO T511 TO T511 Word Present value of counter C CO C511 511 device Data register D000100000 D102365534 DBO DBW0 DBO DBW65534 GOT internal data register GD GD100 GD1023 GD100 GD1023 L1 indicates a number in the range from 1 to 1023 Only even values are available as byte addresses of data register DBW values c E Q o Note on number representation A decimal point exists when using the GT Designer but not when using the DU WIN installation and Wiring of F940GOT B
358. d The serial communication unit of the Q QnA Series PLC is connected through CPU direct connection The GOT F900 can be connected to only either one between two ports Connection of two GOT F900 units to one serial communication unit is not allowed CPU Serial communication unit Either one unit A HA REZ CS EMEN RS 232C Nd SS _ MELSEC A Bar code Series GOT F900 Only one Handy GOT unit can be i NE MELSEC Q Series connected at the end Motion controller 1 Either one unit S RS 422 D E NH NH NH NH NH E M 2 WAS RS 232C RS 2320 Wl A rs MELSEC Q Series Dinter Bar code GOT F900 Only one Handy GOT unit can be reader connected at the end 1 Excluding the F920GOT K FX positioning unit 10GM 20GM CPU direct connection RS 422 GOT F900 is connected to the programming port of the FX Series positioning unit 10GM 20GM A personal computer printer or bar code reader can be connected only when the GOT is equipped with RS 422 and RS 232C Either one unit SA RS 422 RS 232C 1 d 10GM 20GM Gone piner 1 Excluding the F920GOT K a MITSUBISHI 2 6 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Outline 2 FREQROL Series CPU direct connection RS 422 GOT F900 is connected to the built in PU port of the FREQROL Series inverter In the A500 Series the GOT F900 can
359. d A500 For the details of each function refer to the manual of the inverter respectively Parameters The inverter is equipped with the following parameters For the details make sure to refer to the manual of the inverter Output Basic functions c o c 2 c pun c oO 09 terminal functions E Torque boost EX Torque boost EM Torque boost Maximum frequency Maximum frequency Maximum frequency Minimum frequency Minimum frequency Minimum frequency 3 Base frequency Base frequency Base frequency Multi speed setting high speed Multi speed setting high speed Multi speed setting high speed Multi speed setting middle speed Multi speed setting middle speed Multi speed setting middle speed RCM Multi speed setting low speed za Multi speed setting low speed ea Multi speed setting low speed 7 Acceleration time Acceleration time Acceleration time Deceleration time 18 1 Deceleration time pee Deceleration time Electronic thermal O L relay ET Electronic thermal O L relay 9 Electronic thermal O L relay DC injection brake operation frequency DC injection brake operation frequency DC injection brake operation frequency 11 DC injection brake operation time DC injection brake operation time DC injection brake operation time 18 High speed maximum frequency High speed maximum frequency ee Base frequency voltage
360. d countermeasures The display screen contains an error 6 00 or 4 00 or later later A device that does not exist in the SYSMAC C Series PLC was Earlier Earlier referenced Example While an C200H is connected a device than than exists only in the CS1 is specified for numeric input 6 00 4 00 DISPLAY SCREEN IS NOT AVAILABLE NO is displayed on the GOT F900 screen Causes A device that does not exist in the connected PLC is referenced on the screen No or one of the screen objects is placed outside the available screen area e Countermeasures Check the devices used and placement of screen objects There is not data because the unit is new or the memory clear has been executed Cause There is no screen data e Countermeasures Write the screen data using the screen creation software DATA IS NOT FOUND is displayed on the GOT F900 screen Cause On the head screen a nonexistent device in the connected SYSMAC C Series PLC is specified The head screen is the screen No 1 in the GT Designer and the screen No 0 in the DU WIN e Countermeasures Check the devices used on the head screen There is not data because the unit is new or the memory clear has been executed Cause There is no screen data e Countermeasures Write the screen data using the screen creation software CAN NOT WRITE TO PLC MEMORY is displayed on the GOT F900 screen CAN NOT WRITE is displayed
361. d countermeasures F940W F940 F930 F920 The power of the A Series PLC is turned off COMMUNICATION ERROROCCURS is Communication is disabled because the power of the displayed when a A Series PLC is turned off screen changeover Countermeasures or numeric data input Turn on the power is performed on the Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT GOT F900 screen by F900 and the A Series PLC a touch key 1 product product product product Causes 1 No touch key is The wrong cable is used or the connection is bad available on the Countermeasures F920GOT K Check the cable Changeover to a nonexistent screen by a touch key or the A Series PLC was tried Earlier Earlier IS NOT AVAILABLE Cause ME gt than than is displayed on the The changeover destination screen has not been 6 00 4 00 GOT F900 screen created yet l Countermeasures Create the screen DISPLAY SCREEN A nonexistent screen was tried to be displayed IS NOT AVAILABLE From NO is Cause first 6 00 or 4 00 or The screen No has not been created yet later later displayed on the GOT F900 screen roduct Countermeasures Create the screen a MITSUBISHI 9 24 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 gt 2200 E 5200 MM A device that does not exist in the A Series PLC was referenced Example While an A1S Series
362. d or ER lt another company s PLC Connect the cable Bane to the port inside posu Ens the rear cover For the details refer to 5 4 2 p 5 Sse Oo For the details refer to 5 4 3 258 Ooo When connecting via RS 232C ports make sure that the distance between the Handy GOT and PLC is 19 8 or less aS es ER a External cable one side 25 pin D Sub F9GT HCAB 3M 3m 9 10 052 External cable Eok 5 0 one side Untied 20 wires PEGI rine SFG Prepared by the user except Relay cable for PLC connection 44 C PLC side 6 pin MINI DIN F9GT HCAB5 150 1 5m 4 11 for the cable for QCPU 25 connection LO Reference gua The length of some external cables is different from the value above 3m 9 10 When using such ut cables cut them properly so that the maximum allowable connection distance is satisfied ids b F9GT HCAB1 LILIM 10 10 32 10 540 50 EO EO 5 MITSUBISHI 5 11 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 5 4 2 Wiring between Handy GOT RH model operation switches and connected equipment 1 F940 Handy GOT um For the details refer to 5 6 2 gt lt 15 E E FXoN FX1N FX2N EX FX2Nc Series PLC To power supply and operation switches
363. ded on the user screen of the GOT F00 and the forced ON OFF function is provided on the device monitor screen in the HPP mode These functions are also available when the SYSMAC C Series PLC is connected as the host unit Have in mind that these ON OFF functions offer the following operation in the SYSMAC C Series PLC The forced setting resetting function in the SYSMAC C Series PLC holds the current ON OFF status without regard to the sequence program However when using the forced ON OFF function described here the set reset status of all the bit devices are released by turning ON OFF the specified bit ON OFF operation in the sequence program is valid after operating the forced ON OFF in the GOT F900 Forced ON SET Forced set specification Turn ON the contact Cannot be changed by sequence program Forced status of all the contacts released Can be changed by Forced set reset release the sequence program after the release In the following version of the GOT when the forced ON OFF is operated only the bit forcedly turned ON OFF is released GOT F900 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT Handy GOT Restriction in functions In host link connection the following functions of the GOT F900 are disabled or restricted e The switch function of the GOT F900 which sets a bit to ON or OFF uses the host link FK command which sets resets multi points forcedly e Set values of the timer T and the counter T cannot be monitor
364. dedicated wiring N b Connector of cable between FREQROL Series inverters 5 Use the commercial connectors and cables shown in the table below or the comparable products 38 1 Refer to the manual for the inverter 538 Introduced products as of June 2000 5 554720 3 RJ45 connector Tyco Electronics AMP K K Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Modular ceiling BMJ 8 HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO LTD rossette Telephone number 03 3806 91 71 Cable conforming to EIA568 MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES The company name is changed Conventional name AMP Incorporated New name Tyco Electronics AMP K K Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 13 31 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 13 9 Troubleshooting For reference this section summarizes frequently asked questions about connection of the GOT F900 to the FREQROL Series inverter 1 GOT F900 Contents of troubl Check points and t OS version ontents of trouble eck points and countermeasures The power of the FREQROL inverter is turned off Cause Communication is disabled because the power of the COMMUNICATION FREQROL inverter is turned off ERROR OCCURS is Countermeasures displayed when a Turn on the power screen changeover or numeric data input is Somethi
365. e 14 17 14 6 Command Details cccccccssccccssceceseeecseeceseeeaeeecsuseccaseessuseseuseessuseseuseessues 14 18 14 6 1 Batch Read Command 14 18 14 6 2 Batch Write Command WR ccccccsscccccssseeecceeeseecceeeeeeceseseeesseuseeeeseaseesseaaeeess 14 19 14 6 3 Bit oriented Write Command ccccceecccceecceceeeeeeeeeceeceuceeseseeseeeceeseueeessueeeesaneees 14 20 146 4 FIC OMAN cas es UI Ea Linee dc oce sinu al a a uiu LL 14 22 14 6 5 Intel COGO 15r beoe tae atrio pede uia e pet missa eoe Ret cepe pel rim recom DR 14 22 14 7 Setting of Connected Equipment for amp 14 23 14 9 able DIAG al Tisi dint Du UD ee ce 14 28 14 9 Troubleshooting dosi etm dte uico deduc ttal 14 30 14 10BASIC Program Example suene iuerGaui deris ue Rui ba Ree aue 14 32 15 Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 1 Iot System COMGINIOM sistat odd dead tert 15 2 15 1 1 Classification of Host Link Serial Communication 15 2 MITSUBISHI x GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Contents 15 2 System GOMMOUEATION tice ee rete 15 3 15 2 1 Configuration for SYSMAC C Host Link Connection RS 422
366. e Causes The RS 232C connector to which the personal computer is connected is set to be used for another piece of equipment Countermeasures In the GOT F900 select by hand SELECT MODE OTHER MODE DATA TRANSFER Or set a bar code reader to invalid and a printer to DON T USE Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 and the personal computer e Causes The connected cable is not proper Or cable connection is not correct e Countermeasures Check the cable 13 34 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 o 14 Connection of Microcomputer p Sus This chapter explains the procedure to connect the GOT F900 Series display unit to controllers such as a microcomputer board having the serial communication function RS 422 RS 232C and a personal computer hereafter referred to as microcomputer o 9 o oot Connection Procedure 258 c o The procedure to connect the microcomputer is introduced Ska 1 Preparation tion Reference Y learn th ti i i ll as the version of th 3g ah ou Can learn tne connection avallabillty aS Well as the Version e Ors GOT F900 OS and the screen creation software TE You can select the configuration of between the GOT and the System Configuration 14 2 microcomputer and proper cables 2 Setting QE ten Outline of Communication You can learn the communication speci
367. e OPERATION MANUAL attached to the screen creation software Make sure that this manual is delivered to the end user Trademarks and registered trademarks Microsoft Windows WindowsNT MS DOS 5 and Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation USA in the USA and other countries ESC P is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION FLEX PC N Series is a registered trademark of Fuji Electric Co LTD SYSMAC C Series CS1 Series C200H and COM are registered trademarks of OMRON Corporation oL C500 Series is a registered trademark of Allen Bradley Co Inc in the USA and other countries Other company names and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of each company Windows95 is written as an abbreviation of Microsoft Windows 95 operating system Windows98 is written as an abbreviation of Microsoft Windows 98 operating system WindowsNT4 0 is written as an abbreviation of Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4 0 operating system Windows2000 is written as an abbreviation of Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional a MITSUBISHI vi GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Contents e DUOOUCHO M UU tee 1 1 1 1 Rank and Use Method of This 1 1 1 1 1 Classification of Manuals in Accordance with Purpose 1 2 1 2 Abbreviations Generic Names and Terms Used in This Manua
368. e PLC It is not available for a RS 232C a personal computer RS 422 D 6 Handy GOT The rear cover removal method is roughly explained below Rear panel face When the cover is removed enlarged view O Or SSP 0 lee Je RS 232C port a Remove the four mounting screws b Open the rear cover c Connect the other end of the data transfer cable to the 9 pin D Sub RS 232C port a MITSUBISHI 6 6 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Peripheral Equipment 6 6 3 Connection of F943 Handy GOT for PLC and Personal Computer E gt The F943 Handy GOT can transfer the screen data when a personal computer is connected using the E cable shown below to the cable with an RS 232C connector for PLC OS versions for the F943 Handy GOT Version 6 00 and later If the OS version is former than earlier 6 00 remove the rear cover of the F943 Handy GOT and connect the cable to the personal computer port Refer to section 6 2 3 6 3 1 When Screen Data is transferred through PLC Connector GOT F900 a RS 232C cable Personal computer E 9 Qe A a B E Handy GOT 5 232 i 6
369. e bar code 223 2 Devices Bar Code Data Rules on how the bar code data read by the 22 3 3 Setting bar code reader is stored Sequence Program The outline of the sequence program 22 3 4 Example Caution on Use of Bar You can learn the cautions on connecting the personal computer while 22 4 Code Reader the bar code reader is connected Setting of Connected Set the devices used in communication with the PLC using the screen 22 5 Equipment for GOT creation software 3 Others Cable Diagram Cable diagrams for bar code reader GOT connection 22 6 Troubleshooting Description of errors and how to fix them a MITSUBISHI 22 1 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Bar Code Reader 22 22 1 22 2 22 2 1 System Condition When connecting the bar code reader check the COM port designation the OS version of the GOT F900 and applicable versions of the screen creation software While the screen data is transferred from a personal computer or a printer is used in another mode in the GOT the communication with a bar code reader is disabled because the RS 232C port is already occupied Compatibility when connecting the bar code reader COM port Version of screen j OS version creation software Series of GOT F900 FBAOWGOT SWF F943 Handy GOT si SWI H 1 The RS 232C port for the Handy type GOT is provided inside the rear cover As a result environmental protection is lost when using this port and s
370. e checked Fixed values a MITSUBISHI 9 10 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 9 3 3 Setting Examples S S 1 RS 422 connection a When the AJ71UC24 is connected Asriuces E Mode selector a switch Station number setting switches 1 Transmission specifications 28 setting switches o installation and Wiring of F940GOT b When the A1SJ71UC24 R4 A1SJ71C24 R4 is connected installation and Wiring of Handy GOT A1SJ71UC24 R4 RUN c Ne U Ooooo000 E 28852538 Ooooooo0 5 2 2282 Transmission specifications setting switches Connection of Peripheral Equipment Station number setting switches Mode selector switch BHEBHRBHEH HBBH Connection of Two or More GOT Units A1SJ71UC24 R4 FX Series PLC m o O MELSEC F Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC a MITSUBISHI 9 11 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 2 RS 232C connection a When the AJ71UC24 is connected Aun UC24 RUNL 2 Mode selector switch Station number setting switches Transmission specificatio
371. e destination station number DST STA in the screen creation software or in the GOT Do not set the same number to multiple GOT units No setting for GOT STA is required It is 0 Microcomputer GOT F900 GOT F900 GOT F900 GOT F900 STATION STATION STATION 81 82 3 STATION DST STATION DST STATION DST STATION DST STATION STATION STATION STATION STATION GOT STATION GOT STATION GOT STATION GOT STATION STX Command Station No Data 4 unit max Station No 1 to 31 1 to 31 lt gt STX Command Data L 1 unit max e Communication disabled STX Command Salon No Data Communication disabled kK gt When connecting on the 1 1 basis When connecting one GOT unit to the microcomputer set 0 for the destination station number DST STA in the screen creation software or in the GOT No setting for GOT STA is required It is 0 Microcomputer GOT F900 STATION 1 DST STATION STX Command Data 14 5 6 Sum Check Code The sum check code indicates the numeric value of the lower 1 byte 8 bits of the result obtained when the data in the sum check range is added as the binary data Sum Example When the RD command is executed for the
372. e first GOT F900 is already connected to some equipment FX Q Series PLC or microcomputer through RS 232C The configuration of the 1st unit is as shown in the table below For the details refer to section explaining each connected equipment also F930GOT K F930GOT K F930GOT K F930GOT kK a FX Q Series PLC F940 W GOT F940 W GOT F940 W GOT F940 W GOT F943 Handy GOT J E 3 Q computer link PLC Snes eee Microcomputer 1 2 3 4 e zLa a Lat j a za b RS 232C A c RS 422 A d RS 232C c RS 422 som 15m j 0 98 5 15m ra 49 3 98 5 49 3 11 5m 37 9 or less when using Handy GOT t F940WGOT F940WGOT F940WGOT F943 Handy GOT Option 1 2 3 0 RS 232C d RS 232C d RS 232C d RS 2320 15m a 15 D 15m r 15 49 31 8 49 3 49 3 49 37 6m 19 8 or less when using Handy GOT Nr 1 For the length of the Handy GOT cable refer to chapter 5 1 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT and F940WGOT a FX Q Series PLC b RS 232C cable c RS 422 cable d RS 232C cable FX1S FX1N 232 BD FX1N FX1N 232 BD FX2N FX2N 232 BD 9 pin D Sub
373. e memory clear has been executed 5 Cause 525 5 Countermeasures Write the screen data using the screen creation software A device that does not exist in the FX Series positioning unit was referenced Example While the FX2N 10GM was Earlier Earlier connected a device provided only in the FX2N 20GM was than than SE specified for numeric input 6 00 4 00 28 DATA IS NOT 858 FOUND is displayed Cause on the GOT F900 On the head screen a nonexistent device in the connected screen FX Series positioning unit is specified The head screen is the screen No 1 in the GT Designer and the screen No 0 in the DU WIN e Countermeasures Check the devices used on the head screen Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC There is not data because the unit is new or the memory clear has been executed e Cause 520 There is no screen data B50 Countermeasures ul Write the screen data using the screen creation software CAN NOT WRITE TO Earlier Earlier Earl PLC MEMORY is Cee eee 6 This error is not displayed than than than oc displayed on the GOT c 1 10 6 10 4 10 oo F900 screen 2 CCo bro 1 100r 6 100r 4 100r 83 is displayed on the This error is not displayed iater ater later GOT F900 screen CAN NOT USE THE m FUNCTION WHILE From ea PROTECTED is This error is not displayed first 33 displayed on the G
374. e name of each part of the main unit MANUAL iis mcudedwiiiih learn how to install the main unit and wire the F940GOT SWD E and power supply F94O0GOT LWD E To look at the external dimensions diagram of the main unit Y e F940WGOT INSTALLATION MANUAL No JY992D93901 To learn the features of the main unit confirm the specifications of the main unit 5 INSTALLATION To learn the name of each part of the main unit MANUAL ie inciuded wihihe learn how to install the main unit and wire the F940WGOT TWD E power supply look at the external dimensions diagram of the main unit a e F940 HANDY GOT HARDWARE MANUAL No JY992D86901 learn the features of the main unit installation and Wiring of F940GOT 19 the of wii unit HARDWARE O learn the Dane each part 4 tne MANUAL R learn how to install the main unit and wire the F94LIGOT SBD H E and ELS power supply F94LIGOT LBD H E SEO To look at the external dimensions diagram of the Sue main unit A EGI F940 HANDY GOT RH model HARDWARE MANUAL No JY992D99901 learn the features of the main unit a Tu 9st To confirm the specifications of the main HE HARDWARE TH learn the name of each part of the main unit MANUAL I
375. e new name 20 Conventional Newname Remarks GPPW GX Developer Abbreviation of software package SWLID5C GPPW E cN 9 cus SEH 599 600 XE ous Ozo MITSUBISHI 1 9 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Introduction 1 BR Bow Connection O 2p2 85E8 s 5 lt diagram a MITSUBISHI 1 10 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Outline 2 2 Outline o 3 This section describes the outline of PLC bar code reader printer etc which can be connected to the GOT F900 2 1 Connection Type Supported by GOT F900 The table below shows connection types supported by the GOT F900 having the lastest OS version 2 1 1 GOT type list and index Connected equipment connection Description Reference destination F920GOT K F930GOT F930GOT K idi of each part installation and power supply Chapter 4 F940GOT F940WGOT 9 Dedicated wiring and functions of Handy GOT such as name of each part installation cables dedicated Chapter 5 to Handy GOT and switch control method Connection of peripheral Peripheral Transfer of screen data and sequence programs Chapter 6 equipment equipment through connection of personal computer Connection of two more GOT aor Gor Wiring when connecting up to four GOT units Chapter 7 Specifications Handy GOT installation and Wiring of F940GOT units installation and Wiri
376. e screen creation software You can select the configuration between the the QnA Series System Configuration 10 2 PLC computer link unit as well as proper cables o 2 setting Wemmme Rerence TP In the QnA computer link the following setting is required n When QnA connection is selected the GOT F900 is automatically set to fixed values No setting is required in the QnA Series PLC installation and Wiring of F940GOT You can learn the communication specifications and the setting Setting in QnA Computer UEM The contents of setting of computer link 10 3 1 Link Connection Seti Switch setting in each computer link 10 3 2 examples You can learn the restrictions in connecting the GOT to the QnA Series installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Caution on Use of MELSEC QnA Series PLC PLC S o Bong Set the PLC type using the GOT the screen creation software S Equipment for SEE 958 d Others ui Cable Diagram Cable diagrams for QnA Series PLC GOT connection 5 Troubleshooting Description of errors and how to fix them Eo S26 Ie SLO ol oga EO 8 529 oon DH oll o O20 Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 10 1 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 10 1 10 1 1 System Condition When co
377. e setting examples in the link units set the transmission specifications The examples below explain the setting in the NJ CPU B16 link unit the NJ RS4 and the NJ RS2 1 NJ CPU B16 In the NJ CPU B16 use the parameter 50H for setting Baud rate 19200 bps Stop bit 1 bit S0H 0057H Character length 8 bits Parity Odd 2 NJ RS4 In the NJ RS4 use each switch for setting position Mode MODE SW 3 Command setting type asynchronous system no protocol Front face Station number Upper digit setting SW x 10 Correspond to the station Station number number in the GOT F900 Lower digit Station number setting SW x 1 Selector SW 1 Receive line provided Terminal resistor Rear face Selector SW2 SW2 ON Transmission line Transmission line provided Communication DIP SW 1 ELE the condition using switches condition 2 8 ON 19200 bps 7 bits 1 stop bit and even parity 3 NJ RS2 In the NJ RS2 use each switch for setting position Mode MODE SW 1 Command setting type asynchronous system no protocol Rear face Communication DIP SW 1 OFF Set the condition using switches condition i 2 to 8 ON 19200 bps 7 bits 1 stop bit and even parity a MITSUBISHI 16 6 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Manufactured by Fuji Electric 16 16 4 Caution on Use of FLEX PC N Series PLC When using the GOT F900 connected to the FLEX PC N Ser
378. e specification Specification Exampe Original data ON Set 1 for the bit to turn ON with the bit Br pattern specification pattern Set 0 for the bit not to change Original data OFF Set 1 for the bit to turn OFF with the bit Bit pattern specification pattern Set 0 for the bit not to change Original data Reverse Set 1 for the bit to reverse with the bit Bit pattern specification pattern Set 1 for the bit not to change Original data Bit pattern Write Set the numerical value to write with the specification bit pattern a MITSUBISHI 14 20 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 o 2 Write address 599 The address of bit device or word device hexadecimal is specified to write 20 3 Quo 3 Bit pattern 0 The bit pattern is specified to change The pattern expressed in 1 byte is set to a 2byte ASCII code 5 o 9 o Use example 252 o In case only M30 bit in the GOT F900 virtual device is set ON by ON specification SEE Number 5 of points 9 amp Write address m z5 Transmitted from the E a microcomputer to the GOT 92 0 1 02 4 0 5 S0H 31H 30H 30H 30H S3H 34H 30H OSH 36H 37H fot SE Execution is normally Error has occured ACK ACK Transmitted from the GOT to the microcomputer Connection of Microcom puter
379. e tables above devices related to input image output image status control floating point and network are not available in the GOT Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 19 11 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley 19 19 6 Caution on Use of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC When using the GOT F900 connected to the SLC500 Micro Logix Series PLC observe the following caution on use 19 6 1 Device setting in advance The user is required to set devices to be used for the SLC500 MicroLogix Series Accordingly if devices to be monitored or set are not specified in the PLC a communication error occurs 19 6 2 Caution on use of the sampling function The GOT F900 is always monitoring sampling devices in the sampling mode even if the sampling condition is not set As a result a communication error occurs if sampling devices are not present In such a case change sampling devices or set devices in the SLC500 MicroLogix Series a MITSUBISHI 19 12 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley 19 o 19 7 Setting of Connected Equipment for GOT 599 o The SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC connection parameters connection can be set using the GOT F900 505 Zzo Series or the screen creation software GT Designer and DU WIN 1 GOT F900 Series E
380. e type The connector figure shows the engagement face No Model name Application Connection diagram Application To cable prepared RS 422 by user connection The connector on the 13 FOGT HCAB 3M Dedicated connector _ 1296 side of the Handy x a FOGT HCAB 10M RS 232C on Handy GOT side GOT is dedicated and 5 connection cannot be prepared by the user 25 25 pin D Sub male The connector on the b F9GT HCAB1 3M Dedicated connector ee may Loose wires FOGT HCAB1 10M RS 232C on Handy GOT side no connector cannot be prepared by connection heuer F9GT HCAB LILIM RS 232C Drain FG class D grounding 991 3B connection wire 1 1 CD DCC 0 R 4 2 RD RXD PC PPI cable BK 2 gt 3 SD TXD 5 1 O 10 S SG GND S F9GT HCABor 9 NC F9GT HCAB1 on Shell 9 6 Handy GOT side PL 12 lt gt DC24VG 9 pin D Sub male SIMATIC S7 200 Series ee Prepared by the user common Wire the power SB 15 lt gt SW supply the BK W 16 lt gt SW2 operation R W 17 gt SW3 switches and GR W 18 gt SW4 Q1 gt ES switch Y W 22 lt gt ES1 BL W 24 gt DC24V GY W 25 DC24V J FoGT HCABI HIDM RS 232C connection SIMATIC S7 300 400 Series d Prepared by the us
381. eated data as follows a Open DU WIN b On the menu select File Open c Select and open read the file of the screen data to be changed d When changing Terminal GOT F900 select View Project System Settings Project settings on the menu For the contents of setting refer to c in Creation above The Open dialog box appears oet the transmission specifications consecutively 14 26 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 Setting the transmission specifications for microcomputer connection 590 oo Creation a On the menu select View Project System Settings DU The DU Serial Printer SED Printer Settings dialog box Soe Cancel Handshake ETE 9 In 5 C XON XOFF r Databits Ens DTR DSR c Ox C8 Parity None Stopbits Even 1 Odd c Sz o x E TE b Set the transmission specifications set in the microcomputer GE Set Speed Parity Databits and Stopbits Handshake not available Connection of Microcom puter Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 14 27 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 14 8 Cable Diagram Connection of Microcomputer 14 This section exp
382. eation software Generic name SWLID5C GTWORKS E GT Designer SWLID5C GOTR PACKE Screen creation software FX PCS DU WIN E DU WIN Applicable GOT F900 Series models and the correspondence to the connected equipment related to the OS version also vary depending on the version of the screen creation software In this section you can check the version of your screen creation software and confirm applicable GOT models and connectable equipment The table in Section 3 2 2 shows the screen creation software version corresponding to each GOT F900 The table in Section 3 2 3 shows the screen creation software version corresponding to each connected equipment Compare these two tables The newer version is required 3 2 1 Conform Version of Screen Creation Software You can confirm the version by displaying the help screen after starting up the screen creation software in the personal computer or by confirming the contents indicated on the FD or CD ROM of the product 1 When confirming the version using the help function of the software by selecting Help H Version Information A on the menu You can confirm the version of the GT Designer and the DU WIN a GT Designer In the case of Version SW4 or former GT Designer Version 509K SW5D5 GOTR PACKE A version An alphabet at the end indicates the small COPYRIGHT C 2000 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION version ALL RIGHTS RESERVED This product is licensed to the fol
383. ected to the GOT F900 programs can be created The serial communication unit of the Q QnA Series PLC is connected through CPU direct connection The GOT F900 can be connected to only either one between two ports Connecting two GOT F900 units to one serial communication unit is not allowed 2 5 he D d CPU Serial communication unit Either one unit 1 MELSEC QnA Series Motion controller o c 2 i Personal Printer Bar code reader MELSEC A Series GOT F900 complet 2 computer O 5 RS 422 RS 232C in MELSEC QnA Q GOT F900 Personal Printer Bar code reader Series computer 1 Excluding the F920GOT K 2 CPU direct connection RS 232C GOT F900 is connected to the programming port of the Q Series PLC Multi CPU system applicable 1 or the serial communication unit of the Q QnA Series PLC When a personal computer is connected to the GOT F900 programs can be created The serial communication unit of the Q QnA Series PLC is connected through CPU direct connection The GOT F900 can be connected to only either one between two ports Connecting two GOT F900 units to one serial communication unit is not allowed A personal computer printer or bar code reader can be connected only when the GOT is equipped installation and Wiring of F940GOT installation and Wiring of Handy GOT
384. ection 5 Li Li RD RXD 5 Prepared by the user DR DSR Printer CS CTS SG GND V DA ER DTR a MITSUBISHI 21 6 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Bar Code Reader 22 22 Connection of Bar Code Reader m o O Printer This chapter explains the procedure to connect the GOT F900 Series display unit to the bar code reader If equipment such as PLC or printer is connected to the RS 232C port of the GOT F900 the bar code reader cannot be connected Connection of Connection Procedure This section introduces the procedure to connect the GOT F900 to the bar code reader 1 Preparation Wemmme Reece System Condition You can learn the connection availability as well as the version of the GOT F900 OS and the screen creation software Appendix __ You can select the configuration between the GOT and the bar code Connection Configuration 22 2 reader and proper cables 2 Setting Description Bar Code Reader You can learn the communication specifications and the contents of 22 3 Communication Setting devices Transmission Specifications The communication specifications and the and format of the GOT Align the setting in the bar 22 3 1 Communication code reader with the setting in the GOT Format Bar Code Reader Control Functions of control devices of th
385. ed or changed MITSUBISHI 1513 Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC Connection of FX Series Positioning Connection of FREQROL Inverter Mm c c O Microcom puter Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 15 6 Setting of Connected Equipment for GOT The SYSMAC C Series PLC connection parameters can be set using the GOT F900 Series or the screen creation software GT Designer and DU WIN 1 GOT F900 Series When the main menu screen change operation is disabled a While pressing and holding the upper left corner of the screen The LANGUAGE screen appears turn on the power Keep holding the upper left corner for about 25 seconds more Then press END at the upper right corner The SET UP MODE screen appears b Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears Set the following PLC TYPE OMRON C SERIES CONNECTION LINK PORT RS 422 LINK PORT RS 232C DST STATION STATION 00 to 31 GOT STATION When the main menu screen change operation is enabled Operation Display screen name a Press the upper left corner of the screen The position to be The SELECT MODE s
386. edicated port M2 6 F940GOT BD H RS 422 F940GOT BD RH RS 422 5 Metric screw thread F943GOT BD H RS 232C F943GOT BD RH RS 232C 55 Ss 4 switches External 4 switches 8 5 For operation External e 4 contacts cable with 4 contacts switch cable with SEO External 1 0 common 25 pin D common 37 pin D connection Sub 1 switch connectoror 1 switch Sub stop switch a contact untied contact connector 5 5 uO k c EO 8 ous 0 S10 soa BU g cn z 54 Soo e TE C ogo en g mm SEH MITSUBISHI 3 27 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 MEMO a MITSUBISHI 3 28 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of F920GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 4 Installation and Wiring of F220GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT Cautions on installation e Use the F920GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT in the environment for the general specifications described in this manual Never use the F920GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT in a place with dusts soot conductive dusts corrosive gas or flammable gas place exposed to high temperature condensation or wind and rain or place subject to vibrations and impacts If the F9220GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT is used in an unfavorable place described above electrical shock fire or malfunction damages or deterioration of the F930GOT F940 W GOT may be caused e Never drop cutting chips and electric wire ch
387. eee grounding 3 BK 2 gt 2 4 To cable F GT HCAB 44 gt 1 o 6 on Handy GOT side Y 6 gt 7 109 13 1 BR 7 lt gt 4 2 e BL 8 4 6 F9GT HCAB2 150 d GY 9 5 5 25 14 O04 ed Ta 8 pin MINI DIN male The diagram on the right 25 pin D Sub female 7 TE c shows the wiring of the RS dr c Bes 422 signals For wiring of PK 13 gt DC24VG the power supply refer to SB 15 gt SW1 supply the chapter 5 BK W 16 gt Swe operation R W 17 gt SW3 switches and GR W 18 gt SW4 BH W Q1 5 51 switch Y W 22 a gt ES1 BL W 24 DC24V GY W 25 gt DC24V J FoGT HCAB1 HIEIM F9GT HCAB OOM RS 422 b gt FG connection Drain Class D wire 1 MEE grounding BK 2 4 2 cable 9 9 EX FX1 EX2 FXe2c Handy GOT side _ 4 gt 4 13 1 GR S lt gt 4 i 6 gt 3 E d J BR 7 4 lt 16 o 25 14 BL 8 a 5 14 25 F9GT HCAB3 150 25 D Sub female 2109 9 pud O 10 ee The diagram on the right ae shows the wiring of the RS d 422 signals For wiring of 21 R the operation switches and PL 12 gt DC24VG the power supply refer to PK 13 lt gt AN dade chapter 5 14 common Wire the power SB 15 lt gt SW1 supply the BK W 16 SW2 operation R W 17 SW3
388. een creation software H Press OTHER MODE on the menu The OTHER MODE screen appears c Press SET UP MODE on the menu The SET UP MODE screen appears 25 d Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears S gt 5 Set the following PLC TYPE YASKAWA CP9200SH CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 422 CPU PORT RS 232C zo DST STATION STATION 01 to 16 00 is treated as 01 zona GOT STATION D ex d SHS When the screen data is transferred to the GOT F900 the old data including the PLC type connection type and station number are overwritten Machine Con Connection of troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 17 7 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Machine Controller CP9200SH PLC Manufactured by Yaskawa Electric 17 2 GT Designer Creation a Open GT Designer The Select Project dialog box appears b Click the New button The GOT PLC Type GOT type Fo4xGOTG20 X 240 Y OK type YASUKAWA CPO2D SH MPOOD Cancel Set the following GOT type F940WGOT 480 x 234 lt WIDE gt F94 GOT 320 x 240 F93 GOT 240 x 80 PLC type YASKAWA CP9200SH MP900 Selection of GOT type F940WGOT 480x234 lt WIDE gt F940WGOT R F940GOT F94 GOT 320x240 Handy GOT F930GOT K F93 GOT 240x80 F930GOT Click OK d Set CPU direct connection RS 422 RS
389. een creation software b arbi E Earlier Earlier Earlier PLC MEMORY is This error is displayed than than than displayed on the GOT 1 10 6 10 4 10 F900 screen CAN NOT WRITE is displayed on the This error is not displayed GOT F900 screen CAN NOT USE THE FUNCTION WHILE PROTECTED is This error is not displayed displayed on the GOT product product F900 screen PLC IS RUNNING is displayed on the This error is not displayed GOT F900 screen product product 1 10 or 6 10 or 4 10 or later later later a MITSUBISHI 18 16 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FP Series PLC Manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works 18 2 Software IE Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures Communication with the screen creation software and screen data cannot be transferred MITSUBISHI An FP Series PLC bar code reader or printer is connected Causes The RS 232C connector to which the personal computer is connected is set to be used for another piece of equipment Countermeasures In the GOT F900 select by hand SELECT MODE OTHER MODE DATA TRANSFER Or set a bar code reader to invalid and a printer to DON T USE Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 and the personal computer e Causes The connected cable is not proper Or cable connection is not correct e Countermeasures Check the cable 18 17 Connection of MELSEC Q Series P
390. een creation software to the GOT F900 the contents above are replaced with the contents set in the screen creation software Have in mind that the setting about the grip switch is overwritten a MITSUBISHI 5 40 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 2 GT Designer Operation Display screen name Setting a It is supposed that the GT Designer has started up and the screen data to be set is read b Open a user screen to be set Any screen is available as far as it has been already created Refer to Caution on setting of Lamp External below LED setting c Select Draw Animation Display Lamp on the menu The Lamp dialog box appears OK Lamp External d On the Basic tab click Lamp External to display the check mark v click the Device button input a bit device to be assigned then click OK Refer to Caution on setting of Lamp External described later Switch setting e On the menu select Common Auxiliary Setting Project The Project Auxiliary Grip switch f The setting varies depending on the version of the screen creation Settings dialog box software appears When the GT Designer version is SW5 F 5 05F or later Click the Handy GOT settings tab Click Enable in Grip switch to display the check mark v Project Auxiliary Settings Basic erial Port etur Language Menu Ke Handy GOT settings Grip swit
391. ement device number 129 a MITSUBISHI 19 10 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley 19 o 19 5 2 File Number and Element Range aye This section explains file numbers and element range of devices which can be monitored in the GOT Xr F900 Oo 1 SLC500 Series Temat romat E gE format specification range Sg Bt BB 3 10 to 255 0 to 2552 FE Timer timing bit a eee T 0 to 255 Sia a Tir va m um Timer dus TA T 0 to 255 Mid Counter set value CP C 5 1010255 0 to 255 5 Counter current value Counter current value C 5 10 to 255 0 to 255 2 1 The number 10 to 255 are available in the user settings 2 The bit position can be specified in the range from 0 to F 15 for each element 2 MicroLogix1000 1200 1500 Series Available element LI H 1 Device name symbol File number specification range Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC E EE z Bit Timer bit u eme oes BER Counter completion bit 3 to 255 0 to 255 Timer m i c 59 n 1 The file numbers 3 to 255 are available in the user settings 59 2 The bit position can be specified the range from 0 to 15 for each element 58 19 5 3 Restriction in Device Specification e Word specification of bit devices and bit specification of word devices are not enabled in the GOT Devices not shown in th
392. en press END at the upper right corner The SET UP MODE screen appears b Press SERIAL PORT RS 232C The SERIAL PORT screen appears X Set the transmission specifications for communication with the printer amp Set PRINTER to DON T USE For the available transmission specifications refer to section 21 3 When the screen data is transferred from screen creation software GT Designer or DU WIN to the GOT F900 the old data including the PLC type connection type and station number excluding the printer status are overwritten 2 GT Designer Creation a Open GT Designer b Read the file of the screen data for which printer connection is to be set c Set the transmission specifications The Project Auxiliary On the menu select Common Auxiliary Settings Project Settings dialog box Project Auxiliary Settings x appears Basic Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Handy GOT settings OK Key window Gursor display setting Action when switching screens Don t display cursor and key window v When touch input is detected open key window at the same time On the Basic tab check Use Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Select the Serial Port tab Project Auxiliary Settings Lx OK Speed 300bps _ Handshaking DSR DTR 1 Parity Een Data Bit 7 bits Basic Key window Serial Port Setup Language Menu Ke
393. en nn nnn 4 7 edid m ueber oett 4 8 4 4 1 Caution on installation seesseessessssssseeeeeneene nnne nnne nnns 4 8 1nstallauon DLOCCOUlCs uiae uites dep Ue eed 4 9 4 5 Connector Pin Layout and Signal Name Excluding the F920GOT K 4 12 4 Outire or Intermal ee ao E 4 13 4 7 Wiring for 24V DC and 5V DC Power Supply and Class D Grounding 4 14 4 8 Handling of Function Keys F1 to 8 4 17 4 8 1 Use or function Ke VS uito dandi Bow Vicus AREAS a tus E 4 18 4 8 2 Preparation of Function Key Name Sheet Available in the F930GOT K 4 19 4 8 3 Label pattern F9830GOT K cccccccessceeceesseeeceeeeeeeecsaseeeecsagseeceseuseeecseaueeesesssees 4 20 4 9 Setting of Connected Equipment for 4 21 5 Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 1 c MEE NoBTesit euo nee ESTHER 5 3 5 T 1 Handy GOT Excluding RPH MOdEl ss alll E dehet et 5 3 SkA Handy GOT RE RO een 5 5 Aa MITSUBISHI vi GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Contents 52 Name ONE ACI aient ci eva 5 6 SANE MC RE 5 6 5 2 2 totem 5 7
394. enabled an 625 a Press the upper left corner of the screen The position to The SELECT MODE screen appears pressed can be changed in the GOT and the screen creation software A Press OTHER MODE the menu The OTHER MODE screen appears 59 SET UP MODE the menu The SET UP MODE screen appears d Press PLC The PLC TYPE screen appears mE Set the following PLC TYPE UNIVERSAL CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 422 m CPU PORT RS 232C zog DST STATION STATION 00 01 to 31 when two or more Ex 8 GOTs are connected Vim GOT STATION D oet the transmission specifications consecutively no i Setting the transmission specifications for microcomputer connection a While pressing and holding the upper left corner of the screen The LANGUAGE screen appears 59 turn on the power Keep holding the upper left corner for about zm 25 seconds more oe Then press END at the upper right corner The SET UP MODE screen appears EO SERIAL PORT The SERIAL PORT screen appears Set the transmission specifications as in the microcomputer Make sure to set a printer to DON T USE When the screen data is transferred to the GOT F900 the old data including the PLC type connection type and station number are overwritten boa 5 529 oon cae oz ONA a MITSUBISHI 14 23 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Micro
395. ency stop switch 5 C CN6 3 pin CN6 For keylock switch 222 CN7 2 pin CN7 Not to be wired zm 889 Note The connection distance between the Handy GOT and the PLC a c or b should be within 6m 19 8 ors Caution for EMC TE For compliance to CE EMC regulations it is necessary to add a e ferrite filter on the external cable for F943GOT SBD H E or F943GOT LBD H E The filter should be attached as shown right with the filter 5 surrounding the external cable 549 The recommended ferrite filter is the 2 2035 0930 OOOO e py equivalent Sus 100mm a Ferrite filter Vv 54 589 z MITSUBISHI 5 13 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 5 4 3 Installation of External Cable This section explains the procedure to install an optional external cable to the Handy GOT 1 Remove rear cover Rear face of Handy GOT Remove four mounting screws a and open the rear cover Installation screw M3 0 12 x 8 Note Never remove any screw among seven screws located around the rear face of the Handy GOT other than the mounting screws If such a screw is removed the waterproof ability may deteriorate or failure may occur When rear cover is open Handy GOT Handy GOT RH model A Power supply A Power supply connector 8 pins connector B Connector for CN1 8 pins B Co
396. ent Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 5 5 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 5 2 Name of Each Part This section explains roughly the name and the function of each part of the Handy GOT 5 2 1 Front Panel The name and the function of each part on the front panel of the Handy GOT are shown below Handy GOT 4 Handy GOT RH model 4 POWER GRIP SW 1 3 10 1 POWER LED Lit while the DC power is supplied to the Handy GOT 2 Touch key LCD unit Consists of LC elements with touch keys There are two types 8 color and black and white Display size 320 x 240 dots Effective display size 115 4 53 W x 86 3 39 H mm 7 For the detailed functions refer to the GOT F900 SERIES OPERATION MANUAL When operation switch cover is removed 3 Operation switches 4 switches Direct connection to inputs in the PLC The of these operation switches be personalized using name sheet offered as accessories Each switch is equipped with a green LED which indicates its status The green LED lighting command is transferred between the PLC through serial communication The display control can be set freely usi
397. ent for the FP Series or in the computer _ communication unit using the DIP switches For the DIP switch setting method refer to the manual of the computer communication unit Bes Parity check Provided even Fixed in the FP2 CCU 5 EE STX not provided Fixed in the FP2 CCU FE o a The specifications such as the transmission speed are fixed on the GOT F900 side and cannot be changed 2 Setting the station number Align the station number to the value 01 to 31 set in the GOT F900 If 00 is set in the GOT F900 it is treated as 01 Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC oo o otf c c SG troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 18 5 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FP Series PLC Manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works 18 18 3 2 Setting Examples in Control Unit and CPU Unit While referring to the FPWIN GR software operation examples shown below set the transmission specifications in the FPO Series control unit or the FP2SH Series CPU unit 1 FPO Series control unit Setting example using the FPWIN GR software RIENE IBSEN setting the tool port Open the dialog box by selecting ok Option PLC System register setting Bim ERE mer FARAN YI cowW HEE No410 zzshNo Hoth on the
398. enu dialog box appears ozo For the contents of setting refer to c in Creation above For setting of RS 232C RS 422 of the FX Series refer to e in Creation above 54 500 4 ci og du a MITSUBISHI 8 13 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 8 5 Cable Diagram Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 8 This section explains cable diagrams to connect the GOT F900 and the FX Series PLC 1 Cable for the GOT and the FX Series PLC F920GOT K Model name C 3 Female type Male type Connection diagram The connector figure shows the engagement face Application RS 422 connection FXCPU direct connection FX 50DU CABO FX 50DU CABO 1M Qoo o EN YYYYYYY OE OO N 9 pin D Sub male ON ON ao 15 FXoN FX1N FX2N FX2NC 3 4 299 O 2 8 5 8 pin MINI DIN male RS 422 connection SN FXCPU direct connection Prepared by the user Cable length 3m 9 10 or less The cable length must be 3m 9 10 or less when used for the F920GOT K a MITSUBISHI TO 2 2 13 gi y N A MM SD M UT OD DO OOOO OOo NS 9 pin D Sub male Resistance per wire 0 67 or less Approximately AWG 28 or thicker S 14 25 25 pin D Sub male 8
399. enu Key S c ok 0390 Oro Click the Setup tab Project Auxiliary Settings Basic Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Handy GOT settings ox Opening Screen Time sec Backlight Off Time fio Min E Connection Buzzer Ozo Port Rs422 1 CON Type CPU C OFF Station No 0 2 549 sega the case of SW4D5C GOTR PACKE earlier than version A cO S perform the setting in the GOT F900 Set the connection CONNECTION the GOT F900 For the setting method refer to 1 GOT F900 Series on the previous page 54 Soo m 2 cog c z a MITSUBISHI 7 13 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Two or More GOT Units 7 RS 422 e Set the following The Setup Data dialog connection Port RS 422 box appears Type CPU DST Station No Station No 00 01 to 31 for microcomputer connection GOT Station No D RS 232C e Set the following The Setup Data dialog connection Port RS 232C box appears Type CPU DST Station No Station No 00 01 to 31 for microcomputer connection GOT Station No D Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows The Select Project a Open GT Designer dialog box appears b Click the Open button The GOT PLC Type C Open read the screen data to be changed dialog box appears d On the menu select Common GOT PLC
400. eq e x 5 4 5 25 pin D Sub female pes 3 8pin MINI DIN male The diagram on the L ui ER us M right shows the wiring PL 12 gt DC24VG el the Ro nac PK 13 DG24VG or wiring of the switches pus dc CUN Wire the power the power supply refer 15 supply the to chapter 5 BK W 16 gt SW2 operation R W 17 gt SW3 switches and GR W 18 gt SWA the emergency stop BR W 21 gt ES1 switch Y W 22 ES1 BL W 24 gt DC24V GY W 25 gt DC24V F9GT HCAB1 O0M F9GT HCAB LILIM Drain FG RS 422 connection BK 2 4 2 F9GT HCAB W 3 15 FX FX1 FX2 FX2c A F9GT HCAB1 R 4 lt 4 QnA Series 13 GR 5 r 7 1 13 Y 6 3 t 7 e BR 7 lt e 16 14 25 BL 8 im 5 14 25 F9GT HCAB3 150 25 D Sub female Gv 9 a 18 25 pin D Sub male O 10 gt 7 The diagram on the om Hood right shows the wiring 8 d of the RS 422 signals 21 For wiring of 4 PL 12 gt DC24VG operation switches an the power supply refer E 13 lt gt DC24VG to chapter 5 14 lt gt common Wire the power SB 15 gt SW1 supply the BK W 16 lt gt SW2 operation R W 17 gt SW3 switches and GR W 18 gt SWA the emergency 29 gt ES switch BL W 24 DC24V GY W 25 gt DC24V E9GT HCAB1 O0M s MITSUBISHI
401. equipped with Communication with the sequence two built in RS 232C channels software is disabled An error Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 message is displayed and the personal computer Developer and FX WIN e Causes The wrong cable is used or the connection is bad e Countermeasures Check the cable A PLC bar code reader or printer is connected Causes The RS 232C connector to which the personal computer is connected is set to be used for another piece of equipment Countermeasures In the GOT F900 select by hand SELECT MODE OTHER MODE DATA TRANSFER Or set a bar code reader to invalid and a printer to DON T USE A personal computer is connected and the software for PLC such as GPP W and FX WIN and the screen creation In the personal computer connected software are used at the same time to the GOT F900 screen data cannot be transferred e Cause Communication with the screen Program transfer or monitoring is executed by the software creation software is disabled for PLC An error message is displayed Countermeasures Terminate program transfer or monitoring by the PLC software If the error status still continues shut down the PLC Otherwise shut down the personal computer start it up again then start up only the screen creation software Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 and the personal computer e Causes The connected cable is not proper Or cable conne
402. er a MITSUBISHI F9GT HCAB or F9GT HCAB 1 on Handy GOT side Drain Y F9GT HCAB LILIM FG class D grounding wire 1 R 4 BK 2 W 3 GR 5 Y 6 BR 7 PL 12 gt DC24VG PK 13 gt DC24VG FGR 14 gt SW mon SB 15 SW1 BK W 16 SW2 R W 17 SW3 GR W 18 gt SWA BR W 21 gt ES1 Y W 22 gt ES1 BL W 24 gt DC24V GY W 25 gt DC24V J FoGT HCAB1 HIEM poen 1 CD DCC SIMATIC S7 HMI Adapter 5 1 e 9 6 9 pin D Sub female Wire the power supply the operation switches and the emergency stop switch 20 18 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 20 9 Troubleshooting 599 o 20 9 For reference this section summarizes frequently asked questions about connection of the GOT F900 Sus to the SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC manufactured by Siemens AG 1 GOT F900 SOMEONE T eo M ontents of trouble eck points and countermeasures Ses 20 The power of the SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC is Sx turned off Cause COMMUNICATION Communication is disabled because the power of the ERROR OCCURS is SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC is turned off ZO displayed when a Countermeasures POL screen changeoveror Turn on the power SEE numeric data input is Something is wrong with the cable between the GO
403. er 1 GOT F900 Classification Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures When the screen data is transferred by The RS 232C port of the GOT F900 is used by another GT Designer the screen creation software No connected equipment bar code reader or printer DU WIN response from terminal etc is displayed Causes 1 RS 232C is specified for PLC connection 2 The bar code reader is set valid 3 The printer is set valid Confirm the settings above the screen creation When the screen data is transferred by software 9 the screen creation software the GOT F900 DATA TRANSFER screen does not Countermeasures appear in the GOT F900 Select by hand the data transfer mode in the GOT F900 Start up the system screen display the SELECT MODE screen select OTHER MODE DATA TRANSFER on the menu then transfer the screen data installation and Wiring of F940GOT cat o 20 2 Rae c cor Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 6 13 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 2 Program Classification Contents of trouble GX Developer FXGP WIN or Sequence program transfer dedicated monitoring is disabled machine When transfer is executed by the GX Developer a communicat
404. er is connected to the GOT F900 sequence programs can be created MELSEC FX Series GOT F900 FX FX1 FX2 FX2C Specifications installation and Wiring of F940GOT Either one unit a personal computer and one unit in F940WGOT A ox Qe SAX Personal Printer Bar code reader computer installation and Wiring of Handy GOT By attaching the optional RS 422 communication board a programming port can be added As a result a GOT F900 or personal computer for sequence programs can be connected to each port 5 m FX1N 422 BD Either one unit a personal computer and S E FX2N 422 BD one unit in F940WGOT D E Qs SE RS 232C MELSEC FX Series GOT F900 diua Printer Bar code reader 5 FXo FXos FX1s FXon t 55 Either one unit a personal computer and DoE one unit in PONO E 55 SR SSQ RA 9 CN OF NZ eus RS 422 RS 232C Personal Printer Bar code reader ox only in FX1S FX1N FX2n COT F900 computer T On 1 Excluding the F920GOT K 9o g ous Oozo o in DH yy E0 9 g Oo2n oc Soo On OW y Ed o ous O a MITSUBISHI 2 3 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Outline 2 2 CPU direct connection RS 232C By attaching the optional RS 232C communication board a programming port can be added As a result the GOT F900 or personal computer for sequence programs can be connected to each port A personal computer printer or bar code reader
405. er and m except timer and E wm One counter a counter a Bit device Bit device Word device A 2299 Word device A 2299 timer and counter a timer and counter a Sa ox 5 Word device Word device co 5 except timer and except timer and m oy 8 2 counter a counter a 1 Bit device except timer and counter 5 Specify the device symbol an alphabet SE b Specify the device byte number corresponding to each device GT Designer DU WIN 1 to 4 digit decimal number without 0 suppression 1 to 4 digit decimal number with 0 suppression C Specify the bit position in a 1 digit number to 7 Example To specify M20 5 Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Device symbol M Device byte number 20 Bit position 5 2 Bit device and word device timer and counter The specification method is equivalent to that of the bit device except c Specify the bit position 52 9 a Specify the device symbol in an alphabet RE b Specify the device byte number corresponding to each device SLA GT Designer DU WIN 1 to 4 digit decimal number with O suppression 1 to 4 digit decimal number with 0 suppression 5 Example To specify Timer present value 250 Ee Device symbol FF Device byte number 250 950 3 Word device except timer and counter a Specify the d
406. er b RS 422 cable Remarks A F9GT HCAB LILIM B Prepared by the user CPU direct connection D F9GT HCNB E F9GT HCAB1 LILIM A B C Prepared by the user D E a MITSUBISHI 14 4 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 14 2 2 Configuration for CPU Direct Connection RS 232C 599 OW y Connect the GOT F900 to the RS 232C communication port of the microcomputer TE 0 1 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT GOT F900 a Microcomputer a CPU direct connection NN 9 o b RS 232C cable 252 Ox F930GOT Sa SEE F940GOT Connection of two more GOT units a MES 5 o z 2 X n o9 o o D D 625 o a a Microcomputer b RS 232C cable Remaks CPU direct connection Prepared by the user NENNEN 5 OO 2 F943 Handy GOT Onn GOT F900 b RS 232C cable a Microcomputer CPU direct A B connection 5 gt d gt c20 S
407. ere is screen data 5 Countermeasures Write the screen data using the screen creation software A device that does not exist in the FLEX PC N Series PLC was Earlier Earlier referenced than than 5 6 00 4 00 2 DATA IS NOT Cause a FOUND is displayed On the head screen a nonexistent device in the connected 585 the GOT F900 FLEX PC Series PLC is specified screen The head screen is the screen No 1 in the GT Designer and the screen No 0 in the DU WIN Countermeasures Check the devices used on the head screen 59 C There is not data because the unit is new or the memory clear has been executed Cause There is no screen data Countermeasures 55 Write the screen data using the screen creation software oy c W S oon TE T9 Earlier Earlier Earlier 828 PLC MEMORY is This error is not displayed than than than displayed on the 110 6 10 4 10 GOT F900 screen l Se co C AOT MS 1 100r 6 100r 4 100r 2 is displayed on the This error is not displayed P ater iater of GOT F900 screen 92 CAN NOT USE THE FUNCTION WHILE From PROTECTED is This error is not displayed first sO displayed on the product ca GOT F900 screen 32 PLC IS RUNNING From EO is displayed on the This error is not displayed first GOT F900 screen product 5 9 835 cO O ONA SHO son MITSUBISHI 16 15 GOT F
408. erform common grounding with the strong electrical system Caution on design While executing monitoring in the GOT GOT F900 if a communication error including disconnection of a cable occurs communication between the GOT and the PLC CPU is interrupted and the GOT is disabled When establishing the system configuration using the GOT make sure that a switch which gives a significant operation to the system is executed from any equipment other than the GOT while postulating communication error in the GOT Otherwise accidents may be caused by incorrect output and malfunction Caution e Do not bind the control cable and the communication cable together with the main circuit and the power line Keep such cables off the main circuit and the power line by 100 mm or more Otherwise malfunction may be caused by noise e Make sure to press touch keys on the display screen with hand If touch keys are subject to an excessive force or pressed by a hard or sharp object they may fail gt D Aa MITSUBISHI 4 1 installation Connection of Two or More GOT Units Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Connection of installation Connection of Peripheral Equipment MELSEC QnA Series PLC and Wiring of F940GOT and Wiring of Handy GOT Introduction Outline c 2 Q o Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of F920GOT K F930GOT K F
409. eries PLC You can learn the restrictions in connecting the GOT to the A Series PLC Pen Set the PLC type using the GOT the screen creation software Equipment for GOT T 3 Others c ob 82S Cable Diagram Cable diagrams for A Series PLC GOT connection 96 Troubleshooting Description of errors and how to fix them 5 9 SS y 345 TE oci Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 9 1 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 9 1 9 2 System Condition When connecting the A Series PLC check the COM port designation the OS version of the GOT F900 and the applicable version of the screen creation software Compatibility when connecting A Series PLC COM port Connection type Version of screen GOT F900 OS version creation software Series F900 GT Designer DU WIN A in the table indicates that only CPU direct connection is available and computer link connection is not available The screen creation software version corresponds to the model of the GOT F900 Series Refer to section 3 2 1 The RS 232C port for the Handy type GOT is provided inside the rear cover As a result environmental protection is lost when using this port and such a connection is not practical The Handy GOT can be connected as the final unit in a string of two or more GOTs System Configuration The A Series PLC can be connected
410. eries positioning unit FX CPU direct connection posi RS 422 tioning FX2N 10GM FX2N 20GM FX 10GM FX 20GM E 20GM FREQROL Series inverter 1 10 6 10 4 10 CPU direct connection or later S500 Series R 485 port built in type RS 422 only A500 Series PU port FR A5NR E500 Series PU port 1 Excluding the 920 system installation and Wiring of F940GOT installation and Wiring of Handy GOT or later or later Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 3 3 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 3 1 PLC Manufactured by Other Companies Connection of two or OS version 1 3 Manufac Connected equipment name and RS 232C turer series name 422 940W 940 930 920 system system system system Microcomputer general purpose communication RS 422 1 00 1 00 General Personal computer or or later or later microcomputer board equipped with RS 232C RS 232C or RS 422 interface SYSMAC C Series upper link 1 built in upper link Ns Ey C200H Series C200H LK202 V1 RS 232C Omron C200H LK201 V1 CS1 Series 4 00 CS1G H CPUODO V1 CS1W or later or later SCB21 41 CS1W SCU21 1 00 z or later 1 00 RS 232C or later or later Machine controller memo bus connection 5 00 3 00 MP920 MP930 CP920
411. eveloper 2 Setting in the screen creation software a GT Designer Select MELSEC Q Multi in the GOT PLC Type dialog box specify RS 422 or RS 232C for Port CPU for Type and 0 for Station No in the Project Auxiliary Setting dialog box b DU WIN The setting is not available 3 PLC numbers when appointing device PLC numbers from 1 to 4 are allocated smaller number for the unit closer to the power Specify the target PLC number and device number when creating screen data When using QCPU with GOT F900 connected number 0 own station can also be specified PLC number of CPU Example opecify 1 to monitor the unit with PLC number 1 Specify 0 or 3 to monitor the unit with PLC number 3 a MITSUBISHI 11 12 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 o 11 4 2 Connection to serial communication 599 The required setting PLC numbers for connecting the GOT F900 to the serial communication unit XE attached to the multiple PLC system are shown below Note that there are restrictions on use of the 999 serial communication unit not compatible with the multiple PLC system See below for its set
412. evice specification H Devices correspond to parameters of the FREQROL Series inverter Accordingly the device range Sof specifications vary depending on the model 952 For the details of parameters refer to section 13 6 Sx Device names and devices a b c d which can be monitored Unsigned Screen System information Status GOT 16 bit changeover control device monitor Control status 5 SO 5 ecc ors Alarm code Parameter Pr Program operation PG 5 Special parameter SP GOT internal data register FE GD e Among word devices only unsigned 16 bit numeric values can be used GOT internal data registers GD are excluded e n screen changeover GOT internal data registers GD can be specified e Only GOT internal data registers GD can be specified for the system information of the GT Designer GOT internal bit registers GB and GOT internal data registers GD only can be specified for control devices of the DU WIN Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC e n the status monitoring function the alarm code A device cannot be specified as the operation e device word SET CFE In the control status S device only one operation bit device can be specified o o Because the time switch cannot use the bit device control status S this function is not available e alarm code A device cannot specified in the following devices Recipe function Wr
413. evice symbol in two or three alphabets 59 b Specify the device byte number corresponding to each device DU WIN dE 1 4 digit decimal number with 0 suppression 1 to 4 digit decimal number with 0 suppression Only even number specified 1 Only an even number can be specified 1 Example To specify Special memory MW25 5 Device symbol MW 59 Device byte number 25 ES 1 Except the high speed counter HC 595 Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 20 9 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 20 5 2 Device Format in SIMATIC S7 300 400 GT Designer version SW5 F 5 05F or later DU WIN ee A 0000 0 except timer and a b c counter a b c Word device A OOOO ore A OOOO Word device timer and counter a b timer and counter a b Word device Doooo 00000 DB OOOO DBWO0000 data register except timer and a o ENS ae counter 1 Bit device a Specify the device symbol in an alphabet b Specify the device byte number corresponding to each device GT Designer DU WIN 3 to 4 digit decimal number without 0 suppression 1 to 4 digit decimal number with O suppression C Specify the bit position in a 1 digit number to 7 Example M01205 Device symbo
414. executed FOUND is displayed From on the GOT F900 first There is no screen data product screen Countermeasures Write the screen data using the screen creation software CAN NOT WRITE TO This error is not displayed pd Sm mm displayed on the GOT paye F900 screen 1 10 6 10 4 10 RN 1 10 or 6 10 or 4 10 or is displayed on the This error is not displayed ja later GOT F900 screen a MITSUBISHI 14 30 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 OS version Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures CN contents Check points and countermeasures F940W F940 F930 CAN NOT USE THE FUNCTION WHILE PROTECTED is displayed on the GOT F900 screen PLC IS RUNNING is displayed on the GOT F900 screen 2 Software This error is not displayed This error is not displayed product product product product product product ee Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures Communication with the screen creation software and screen data cannot be transferred MITSUBISHI A microcomputer bar code reader or printer is connected Causes The RS 232C connector to which the personal computer is connected is set to be used for another piece of equipment Countermeasures In the GOT F900 select by hand SELECT MODE OTHER MODE DATA TRANSFER Or set a bar code printer to invalid and a printer to DON T
415. external power supply Connect the power cable untied wires or connector of the Handy GOT to the 24V DC external power supply Handy GOT t ClassD External grounding power supply To operation switches of Handy GOT Idi eum 1 Caution on class D grounding according to input power supply a When the input power supply is equivalent b When the input power supply is different 200V AC 100V AC 4 Class D grounding PLC ale pos PLC dia eor supply supply FG FG Class D grounding Class D grounding When the input power for the PLC main unit is When the input power supply of the external equivalent to the input power for the external power supply is different PLC 200V AC power supply 24V DC grounding may be external power supply 100V AC perform performed by connecting the frame ground of dedicated grounding to each of the PLC and the Handy GOT to the ground terminal of Handy GOT separately the PLC Pin layout Sj External cable Connector conversion box ignal name 9 F9GT HCAB LIM F9GT HCAB1 LIM F9GT RHCAB LIM F9GT HCNB 24 25 Blue white gray white 36 37 DC24V 12 13 Purple orange 18 19 DC24VG Recommended feature size of terminal H9GT HCNB conversion box 3 2 0 13 Terminal screw Pressure terminal 6 2mm 0 24 Or 2 gu 03 2 0 13 6 2mm 0 24 Sik or ess a MITSUBISHI 5 26 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wi
416. f Handy GOT 5 MEMO a MITSUBISHI 5 50 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Peripheral Equipment 6 6 Connection of Peripheral Equipment Screen data transfer Sequence program transfer and monitor This chapter explains connection between the GOT F900 and peripheral equipment 6 1 Outline of Connection The GOT F900 and the peripheral equipment are connected as follows accordance with each purpose When a personal computer is connected screen data transfer and sequence program transfer are executed in the same cable configuration The dedicated programming tool for the PLC is connected using the FX 2PIF 9 Screen Creation 1 GOT Personal computer screen creation software Refer to 6 2 1 3 o 1234 Sg p RS296 dE GOT F900 Personal computer Screen creation ROM writer Connection when screen data transfer and OS transfer are executed between the GOT F900 and the screen creation software installed in the personal computer 2 F943 Handy GOT PLC connector lt Personal computer screen creation software Refer to 6 3 a 525 09g Col Usually open the rear cover and connect
417. fications and the contents of setting 14 3 585 and Specifications Outline of The outline of data transferred between the 14 3 1 Communication microcomputer and the GOT Us icati Gommunicat The communication specification values Soo on Setting ej idc available in the GOT og Specifications 5 co z 82 You can learn the detailed contents of the memory inside the GOT 14 4 Addresses specified from the microcomputer Data Area and assignment of the word data D and the 14 4 1 5 bid data inside the GOT 5 9 r ogo Special The assignment status of the memory inside Ex 8 memory the GOT used for special application Ide Sag Data List P 54 Error Code Codes of errors related to communication which 144 3 List are stored in D8002 u b 58 Communication You can learn the detailed contents of communication commands of the 14 5 Be Command microcomputer EEO 852 Outline of Communication The outline of data transmission 14 5 1 Procedure 0 Command List and ca The types of commands used in 29 transmission and receive between the GOT 1432 of GOT F900 E Data Transfer The chart of the data transfer format 14 5 3 Format Character code list The characters available in statements 14 5 4 5 Procedure of station number setting 14 5 5 Hm Setting 920 Sum Check Code The contents of the sum check code 145 6 onc included in the data format Interrupt Code List The cor
418. gi L2 SW2 ow o 5 SW4 t T LS La SW3 p SW COM 75 221 9 L4 SW4 ES E L5 mergency stop switch S GRIP SW ES1 C a MITSUBISHI 5 24 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 Handy GOT RH model E 3 1 Switch assignment The figure below shows the switch assignment Each switch is expressed in abbreviations as follows E Abbreviation Name Reference SW1 SW4 Operation switches KSW1 KSW2_ Keylock switch 3 i O L1 L4 Indicator LEDs for 59 1 Grip operation switches switch i L5 Indicator LED for grip 5122 switch DSW1 DSW2 Grip switch 5 Switches requiring external wiring The following switches have to be connected to the PLC or external input equipment through the operation switch connector Operation switches Emergency stop switch Grip switch Keylock switch LEDs not requiring external wiring Because the following switch and LEDs are connected to the display unit CPU and ready for serial communication with the PLC through the communication port they do not have to be wired Indicator LED for grip switch Indicator LEDs for operation switches jum to o cr cO G 0
419. he power line Keep such cables off the main circuit and the power line by 100 mm or more Otherwise malfunction may be caused by noise e Make sure to press touch keys on the display screen with hand If touch keys are subject to an excessive force or pressed by a hard or sharp object they may fail Note Even if momentary power failure of less than 5 ms occurs in the power supply the Handy GOT continues the operation If long time power failure or voltage drop occurs the Handy GOT stops the operation When the power supply is recovered the Handy GOT restarts the operation This section explains installation wiring and usage of the operation switches and the grip switch as well as control of the LEDs for switch pressing confirmation in the following order a MITSUBISHI 5 1 Introduction Outline Specifications jum to o cr cO installation and Wiring of Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 Wiring Procedure This section introduces the procedure to connect the Handy GOT to connected equipment such as PLC Outline of Connection You can learn the outline of the connection method 5 1 Name of each Part You can learn the name of
420. he specifications setting transmission speed is o switches set to 19 200 bps 2 for CH1 son SW installation and Wiring of F940GOT A1sJ71QC24 RUN ERR C R W lO SD W installation and Wiring of Handy GOT DISPLAY STS ERR m oy 56 a 4 5 6 STATION NO amp 2 x Me re CH1 Mode selector switches Transmission specifications setting When the switches transmission speed is set to 19 200 bps Connection of Peripheral Equipment WCH1 RS 232 C Connection of Two or More GOT Units Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC m c o O MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC a MITSUBISHI 10 11 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 10 4 Caution on Use of MELSEC QnA Series PLC When using the GOT F900 connected to the QnA Series PLC observe the following caution on use 10 4 1 Caution when the GOT is connected to the serial communication unit 1 Simultaneous use of 2 ports When the GOT is connected the C
421. he GOT F900 correspond to parameters in the inverter respectively For the details of each parameter refer to the manual of the inverter Caution Some parameters cannot be written or read Parameter Pr 1 In the case of S500 Series Pr 37 cannot be read or written from the GOT When monitoring Pr 10 or later write 1 to Pr 30 2 Parameter device range The ranges of Pr 288 to Pr 299 Pr 343 to Pr 899 Pr 906 to Pr 921 and Pr 942 to Pr 989 cannot be monitored from the GOT F900 Aa MITSUBISHI 13 14 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 c Am Only in the A500 Series 833 Parameters Pr 201 to Pr 230 in the inverter correspond to devices PGO to PG89 1 Preparation When using the program operation function set Pr 79 in the inverter to 5 Confirm 4 Related parameters below in accordance with the contents of operation 5 of 2 Explanation FE In the inverter 30 parameters Pr 201 to Pr 230 are classified into 3 groups each of which EPE consists of 10 parameters The three types of contents the time the operation frequency and the rotation direction are set to each parameter In the GOT F900 by monitoring PGO to PG89 the contents of setting in Pr201 to Pr230 can be easily used without considering the instruction codes of the inverter described below 2 Setting point Rotation direction frequency start time ot 9 No 1 Pr 201 SE 2 Pr 20
422. he connector on the POL connection leader side of the Handy Oo 2 b F9GT HCAB1 3M Dedicated connector is dedicated F9GT HCAB1 10M RS 232C on Handy GOT side Cannot be prepared by cable connection the user o F9GT HCAB OOM CP 247IF E Nurs Ta FG class D grounding MEMOBUS unit SS 2 gt 2 RXD RDA ESS To cable 3 OP G 852 6 7 TXD SDA Pen quia o 6 TXD SDB ao F9GT HCAB1 Signal name of _A on Handy GOT MEMOBUS port o PL 12 DC24VG mi Machine controller CP 2171F side Ne Sog C PK 13 gt DC24VG 5g Prepared by the user ez FGR 14 lt gt common Wire the power o gt O BK W 16 SW2 operation R W 17 gt SW3 switches and GR W 18 lt gt SW4 e id BR W 21 lt gt ES1 switch Szo Y W 22 gt ES1 zog BL W 24 gt DC24V GY W 25 gt DC24V J Sus FoGT HCAB1 HIEIM F9GT HCAB OOM RS 232C Drain Y FG class D grounding connection wire 1 1 FG Drain wire R 4 58 BK 2 Zo Y 6 CP 217IF GR 5 un oz To cable 5 E GND o F9GT HCAB or 5 F9GT HCAB1 W 3 14 25 s9 Signal name of 25 pin D Sub male Machine controller 2171 ancy GO MEMOBUS 5 Prepared by the user side PL 12 gt DC24VG 9 PK 13 gt DC24VG zm FGR 14 inion l SB 15 gt ene BK W 16 gt SW2 operatio
423. he screen The LANGUAGE screen appears turn on the power Keep holding the upper left corner for about 25 seconds more Then press END at the upper right corner The SET UP MODE screen appears b Press END at the upper right corner The SELECT MODE screen appears c Press OTHER MODE on the menu The OTHER MODE screen appears d Press DATA TRANSFER on the menu The DATA TRANSFER screen appears When the main SELECT MODE change operation is enabled Operation Display screen name a Press the upper left corner of the screen The position to be The SELECT MODE screen appears pressed can be changed in the GOT and the screen creation software b Press OTHER MODE on the menu The OTHER MODE screen appears c Press DATA TRANSFER on the menu The DATA TRANSFER screen appears 2 Screen operation When the DATA TRANSFER screen shown below appears set PORT to EXTERNAL PORT by touching the screen DATA TRANSFER PORT EXTERNL PORT GOT o PC WATING EXTERNL PORT Specifies the PLC connector PORT INTERNAL PORT Specifies the personal computer port RS 232C provided on the rear face When changing over the screen to a user screen after having transferred the screen data INTERNAL PORT is automatically specified and communication with the PLC is enabled 3 Caution on use Though PORT is displayed also in the F940 Handy GOT it is invalid because only RS 422
424. he setting below is not required RS 422 3 Command setting type asynchronous system no protocol 5 c RS 232C o Command setting type asynchronous system no protocol 9 262 FE 2 Setting the transmission specifications OLS Set the transmission specifications in the link unit as shown in the table below For the switch setting method refer to the manual of the link unit 5 o Transmission peaa T 19200 bps 7 bits JIS 8 bits HEX format Stop bit The specifications such as the transmission speed are fixed on the GOT F900 side and cannot be changed p c ood ooa lt 0 2 gt Qoo 3 Setting the station number setting switches link connection In the NJ CPU B16 the station number cannot be set o The setting range varies depending on the OS version as shown in the table below 520 0 p F930GOT 3 00 or later F930GOT K 4 60 or later H 1 F940GOT 5 00 or later cS Set the value set in the GOT F900 0 to 31 zo F940WGOT 1 00 or later F940 Handy 5 00 or later 550 F943 Handy GOT 5 00 or later Any version earlier than above Set the value set in the GOT F900 0 to 15 Ee 9o 5 2 Sg o Em 85 Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 16 5 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Manufactured by Fuji Electric 16 16 3 2 Setting Examples While referring to th
425. he unit figure on 5 the right 5 9 Sg RS 422 RS 232C SEQ 52 2 F930GOT 223 Connect the other side of the data transfer cable to the RS 232C port located in the right position seen from the rear face of the unit figure on the right cat c c cor 3 F930GOT K Connect the other side of the data transfer cable to the RS 232C port located in the left position seen from the rear face of the unit figure on the right Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More GOT Units 4 F940GOT Connect the other side of the data transfer cable to the RS 232C port located in the upper position seen from the right side of the unit figure on the right Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC RS 232C RS 422 in F940GOT RS 232C in F943GOT Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 6 5 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Peripheral Equipment 6 5 F940WGOT Connect the other side of the data transfer cable to the RS 232C port RS 232C b b located in the upper position seen from the right side of the unit The RS 232C port a is offered for th
426. hort circuit because the pins number amp 2 2 and 8 are connected to power supply Sample products connector cable and distributor are introduced in Cable Diagram in this chapter o S500 It is called RS 485 communication port Prepared by the user oe eon cable 10BASE T A500 5 229 A500 FR A5NR by Option for computer link connection is required 522 twisted pair cable The 500 Series be connected using the PU port the option for computer link connection Though the port of the S500 Series is the RS 485 communication port it is called PU port in this manual z oc 59 Attaching a terminal resistor Sf Communication may be affected by reflection depending on the transmission speed and the 550 transmission distance If communication is hindered by this reflection provide a terminal resistor When the PU port or the RS 485 port is used for connection Attach a terminal resistor between the pin number 3 RDA and the pin number 6 RDB 59 Because the terminal resistor cannot be attached use the distributor Attach the terminal 20 resistor only to the inverter located farthest from the GOT F900 terminal resistor 100 Q o S When the FR A5NR is used for connection Attach a terminal resistor chip included with the FR A5NR between the terminals RDB and RDR of the last inverter o ig coc O o 529 500 cas oz ONA a MITSUBISHI 13 3
427. however the extra devices are not monitored correctly b While the GPP function is being used for monitoring timer counter settings of the PLC CPU it displays the original set value even after a change is made by the GOT In such a case the program should be read from the PLC CPU so that the latest set value is displayed The display of the set value in the PLC CPU and the GOT is changed if any setting change is made using the GOT MITSUBISHI 23 7 Connection of Printer Connection of Bar Code Reader Appendix GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Appendix 23 23 1 5 Cable Diagram 1 Cable for the GOT and the FX 2PIF C 2 Female type Male type The figure shows the connector type Model name Application Connection diagram Application RS 422 connection FX CPU direct connection FX 40DU CAB 1 5 FX 40DU CAB 10M FX 40DU CAB 20M e 9 FX 40DU CAB 30M 6 9 FX 50DU CABL 9 pin D Sub male GOT F900 FX FX1 FX2 FX2c 1 13 J 14 25 25 pin D Sub male nN oO Wr NOO Lye 7 N N N h h o EON HA Se 2 Cable for the FX 2PIF and PLC C 3 Female type Male type The figure shows the connector type Model name Application Connection diagram Application RS 422 connection ze FXo FXos FX1sS FXoN FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2NC 3 E N mm mm FX 232AW C
428. ication format are fixed on the GOT F900 side and cannot be changed Align the settings in the bar code reader with the settings in the GOT F900 Data format Parity bit Provided even Bd 2 Communication Format Not provided Data Data CR ODH Header ASCII character code End code MITSUBISHI 22 3 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Bar Code Reader 22 22 3 2 Bar Code Reader Control Devices The information on the bar code reader communication status and bar code input start can be controlled from the connected equipment Such as PLC Set devices used to control the bar code reader using the screen creation software This section describes assignment of devices set by the screen creation software and their functions 1 Device Assignment a GT Designer Write device 0 615 b1 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO System Signal 2 Bar code input Read device 0 b15 b1 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO System Signal 1 Bar code input invalid Bar code input read completed b DU WIN Control device M 15M 4 M 10 M 9 M 8 M 7 M 6 M 5 M 4 M 3 M 2 M 1 M 0 Bar code input Bar code input invalid Bar code input read completed GT Designer DU W
429. ication unit connected to the GOT F900 is set to the dedicated MC protocol format 5 CHT RS 232C RS 232C Switch 2 2 din 422 Switch 4 For communication using binary codes of QnA QJ71C24 R2 EE compatible 4 frame CH2 RS 422 2 Setting the transmission specifications setting switches Set the transmission specifications setting switches of the serial communication unit to realize the transmission specifications shown in the table below For the switch setting method refer to the manual of the serial communication unit epee Gea LE CH1 CH2 38400 bps 09H CH1 side Switch 1 upper CH2 side Switch 3 upper Data Parity bit Provided odd format 66H CH1 side Switch 1 lower CH2 side Switch 3 lower Write in RUN mode The specifications such as the transmission speed are fixed on the GOT F900 side and cannot be changed b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO CH1 side Switch 1 lower CH2 side Switch 3 lower Description 0 1 Remarks Operation setting Independent Interlocking Make prn CH1 Data bit 7 8 The parity bit is excluded Parity bit Not provided Provided Vertical parity l Valid only when the parity bit Odd even parity Odd Even is set io odd or even Stop bit 1 2 Sum check code Odd Provided Write RUN mode Forbidden Permitted Setting change Forbidden Permitted
430. ications set in the Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC 57 200 Specifications m The transmission specifications set in the i GOT F900 Specifications 5 520 SIMATIC S7 300 400 Selection ex 8 Communication Setting The transmission specifications set in the ae SIMATIC S7 300 400 Specifications ae The transmission specifications set in the Se 900 2 Specifications Bo col Device Specification SSe Method HO Device Formatin 22 The supplementary explanation device OE tS specification EG S7 300 400 P F Supplementary Sit ltems Caution on Use of You can learn the restrictions in connecting the GOT to the SIMATIC S7 9 SIMATIC S7 200 300 50 300 400 Series PLC 5 400 Series PLC 930 COE Onn Setting of Connected Set the connected PLC type using the GOT or the screen creation 20 7 Equipment for GOT software Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC a MITSUBISHI 20 1 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 20 1 3 Others Cable diagrams for SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC and GOT Cable Diagram 20 8 connection Troubleshooting Description of errors and how to fix them System Condition When connecting the SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC check the COM port designation the OS version of the GOT F900 and applicable versions of the screen c
431. ies PLC observe the following caution on use Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 16 4 1 Devices which can be monitored When the GOT F900 is connected to the FLEX PC N Series link unit set values of the timer T and the counter C cannot be monitored Connection of FX Series Positioning Connection of FREQROL Inverter Connection of Microcom puter c O SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 16 7 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Manufactured by Fuji Electric 16 16 5 Setting of Connected Equipment for GOT The FLEX PC N Series PLC connection parameters can be set using the GOT F900 Series or the screen creation software DU WIN Setting the Connection Type oet the connection type in accordance with the connected equipment as shown in the table below Have in mind that the NJ CPU B16 link unit requires CPU direct connection Connected equipment GOT F900 DU WIN classification in manual CONNECTION Link unit l _ Executes communication as NJ CPU B16 RS 232C CPU direct connection RS 232C programming port Link unit NB RS1 AC RS 422 RS 232C NB RS1 DC RS 422 RS 232C Link connection RS 422 or NJ RS4 RS 422 link connection RS 232C NJ RS2
432. ignals marked with the input signal varies depending on the setting of 180 to Pr 186 input terminal function selection When the operation command b7 Output stop MRS is executed by a touch key on the display 5 unit 89 Set a device for the switch S7 to a touch switch 287 595 Instruction code HFA 529 Fr eto oz o ONA a MITSUBISHI 13 13 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 Device name Function of inverter in GOT F900 The contents of abnormalities number 1 to 8 in the inverter correspond to devices AO to A7 in the GOT From the GOT F900 only Most recent No 1 No 2 alarm display clear can be executed In the GOT F900 abnormalities can be read only code H0000 to HFFFF Contents of two previous abnormalities Example of abnormality contents display when the instruction code is H74 Example When the read data is H30A0 b15 b8 b7 bO 0 0 1 1 0 000 0 1 0 1 0 0 00 0 Previous abnormality Current abnormality Data H30 Contents THT Data HAO Contents Contents of abnormality Contents of abnormality Nos 1 3 5 7 Nos 2 4 6 8 Abnormality data correspondence table Data Contents Contents Ho om Fis RD H20 HCO CPU H21 HC1 CTE H22 HC2 P24 H40 HD7 MB3 H41 HD8 MB4 H50 HD9 MB5 H51 HDA MB6 Parameter devices in t
433. ilable screen area D Countermeasures UN Check the placement of screen objects ren Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 20 19 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 emer ae ontents of trouble eck points and countermeasures F040 F30 The display screen contains an error 6 00 or 4 00 or later later Write the screen data using the screen creation software A device that does not exist in the SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC was referenced Example While an S300 is Earlier Earlier connected a device exists only in the S200 is specified for than than numeric input 6 00 4 00 DISPLAY SCREEN IS NOT AVAILABLE NO is displayed on the GOT F900 screen Causes A device that does not exist in the connected PLC is referenced on the screen No or one of the screen objects is placed outside the available screen area e Countermeasures Check the devices used and placement of screen objects There is not data because the unit is new or the memory clear has been executed e Cause There is no screen data Countermeasures DATA IS NOT FOUND is displayed Cause on the GOT F900 On the head screen a nonexistent device in the connected screen SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC is specified The head screen is the screen No 1 in the GT Designer and the screen No
434. ility as well as the version of the 8 1 y GOT F900 OS and the screen creation software You can select the configuration between the GOT and the FX Series System Configuration 8 2 PLC and proper cables 5 2 sett i Setting FXCPU Selection in When FXCPU connection is selected the GOT F900 is automatically set Direct Connection to fixed values No setting is required in the FX Series PLC 48 Cautions on Use of You can learn the restrictions in connecting the GOT to the FX Series 8 3 SEO MELSEC F FX Series 529 co Setting of Connected Equipment for GOT Set the PLC type using the GOT or the screen creation software gt Others Cable Diagram Cable diagrams for FX Series PLC GOT connection Troubleshooting Description of errors and how to fix them installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 8 1 System Condition Ost When connecting the FX Series PLC check the COM port designation the OS version of the GOT EE F900 and the applicable version of the screen creation software Compatibility when connecting FX Series PLC COM port Connection type version or GOT F900 OS version creation software 5 Soo GT Designer DU WIN 9 5 c 2 F920GOT K sws 26c 270 889 F930GOT SW1 H 2 20 F930GOT K SW5 26C 2 70 ox F940GOT SW1 A 2 00 Suo F940WGOT SW5 F 250 Bie l F940 Handy GOT 2 10 SES F943 Handy GOT RS 232C in the COM port column may not be available i
435. ine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 15 23 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 MEMO a MITSUBISHI 15 24 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Manufactured by Fuji Electric 16 16 Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Manufactured by Fuji Electric 332 olg This chapter explains the procedure to connect the GOT F900 Series display unit to the FLEX PC N Series PLC manufactured by Fuji Electric Connection Procedure a This section introduces the procedure to connect the GOT F900 to the FLEX PC N Series PLC 588 1 Preparation References Siem Condition You can learn the connection availability as well as the version of the 16 1 5 y GOT F900 OS and the screen creation software S To System Configuration You can select the configuration between the GOT and the FLEX PC N 16 2 55 5 Series PLC proper cables sug 2 Setting Description Reference 5 4 E Setting in Link Unit You can learn the communication specifications and the contents of setting 16 3 d The communication specifications between 9 the link unit and the GOT unit Specifications Setting The contents and position of setting in each Examples link unit Caution on Use of FLEX You can learn the restrictions in connecting the GOT t
436. ins the restrictions in connecting two or more F920GOT K units to the programming port on the optional RS 422 expansion board FXON 422 BD The RS 422 expansion board cannot be used in the following combinations FX1S 1 FX1N 5DM FX1N 422 BD F920GOT K FX1S 1 F920GOT K or FX 10DM FX1N 422 BD F920GOT K or FX 10DM FX2N Special function block F920GOT K or FX 10DM FX2N 422 BD F920GOT K or FX 10DM When connecting to FX1S FX1N PLC One F920GOT K can be connected to one PLC a The display module FX1N 5DM or FX 10DM cannot be used concurrently Example Example F920GOT K FX 10DM F920GOT K Or Or FX 10DM F920GOT K FXiN5SDM gs og Tu qu SEO FX1S FX1N us m si FX1N 422 BD PLC Key TM 22 455 MELSEO me o CHEPEDNHEBC VI JG ee eyo 2 installation and Wiring of Handy GOT When connecting to FX2N PLC Up to two units can be connected using the FX2N 422 BD Note however that the units are to be connected on the condition shown belo
437. installation and Wiring of Handy GOT AJ71QC24 Make sure the total cable Terminal block extension distance is 30m A1SJ71QC24 Prepared by the user 98 5 or less t _ AJ71UC24 Connection of two or more GOT 8 units is not possible E Terminal block Make sure the total cable 555 ATSJ71UC24 R4 extension distance is 30m 98 5 or less Applicable QnA Series PLC products in the column a are computer link units equipped with built in RS 422 o interface 222 o 85 gt cok 889 5x SLO eo coc 45 EO 8 Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC a MITSUBISHI 10 5 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 2 F940 Handy GOT Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 GOT F900 b RS 422 cable a QnA Series PLC QnA computer A B link m iu 5 lt gt RS 422 To power supply and operation A C switches nl gt 6 5 To RS 422 Handy GOT 7 RS 422 D l To power supply and operation E switches i gt lt Use the RS 422 port on the re
438. inverter indirectly using 16 bit GOT internal registers GD100 to GD115 when setting the device Multiple inverters can be changed on one screen Available setting range 100 to 115 The station No corresponds to each device of GD100 to GD115 a MITSUBISHI 3 14 Specifications 3 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION indicates a set numeric value GOT F900 screen O O O C a euo g J ei 2 05 fL a odi Todi Y os t 5 2 S o Z c 2 O dp A A suoneoyioodsg 1095064 Bum pue 5 105 pueH Bum pue uonejejsul jueuudinb3 Jo sium LOS 9J0 N JO OML jo uonoeuuo2 seues Xd 3 O3S TSN Jo uonoeuuo seues V O3S 1 uonpoeuuo seues VUu0 94S 13lN jo uoipeuuo 3 15 MITSUBISHI GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 3 3 3 PLC Units Manufactured by Other Companies 1 Microcomputer board general purpose communication Setting range Device Device name number GT Designer DUWIN DUWIN representation Bit data M MO M2047 1 MO M2047 m Special memory M M8000 M8063 M8000 M8063 M8063 Decimal GOT internal bit a GB GB132 GB1023 Cou GB1023 Word data D DO D4095 DO D4095 Word device Special memory M 2 D8000 D8015 08000 08015 D801
439. ion Drain yy COM port S gt SD To cable 3 wire type F9GT HCAB or FOGT HCAB1 on Handy GOT side 5 6 7 8 9 Prepared by the user gt DC24VG DC24VG common Wire the power 5 1 supply the SW2 operation SW3 switches and SWA oo gt ES switch gt ES1 gt DC24V gt DC24V D FoGT HCAB1 LILIM AA A a MITSUBISHI 18 14 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FP Series PLC Manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works 18 18 7 Troubleshooting 599 o 20 9 For reference this section summarizes frequently asked questions about connection of the GOT F900 Sus to the FP Series PLC manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works 1 GOT F900 Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures FMOW ruo reso 2 coz The power of the FP Series PLC is turned off 8x8 Cause Communication is disabled because the power of the FP COMMUNICATION Series PLC is turned off ERROR OCCURS is Countermeasures O displayed when a Turn on the power age screen changeover or Sie gt numeric data input is Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 and product product product 2 performed on the the FP Series PLC GOT F900 screen e Causes 5 The wrong cable is used the connection is bad 6 e Counterme
440. ion error sometimes occurs GX Developer only a MITSUBISHI Connection of Peripheral Equipment 6 Check points and countermeasures The RS 232C port of the GOT F900 is allocated to another connected equipment bar code reader printer e Causes 1 RS 232C is specified for PLC connection 2 The bar code reader is set valid The printer is set valid Confirm the settings above in the screen creation software Countermeasures Against 1 set PLC connection to RS 422 Or select a model equipped with two built in RS 232C ports such as the F943GOT SBD H Against 2 and 3 Change the setting in the screen creation software The sequence programming tool dedicated machine is connected to the RS 422 port of the GOT F900 e Cause The sequence programming tool dedicated machine cannot be connected to the RS 422 port of the GOT F900 Countermeasures Only a personal computer can be connected to the RS 232C port The dedicated machine can be connected using the two port interface FX 2PIF The GOT F900 does not support the GX Developer only in the initial version of the F940GOT e Cause The version of the GOT F900 is earlier than 1 00 and does not correspond to the GX Developer Countermeasures Check the OS version of the GOT F900 and upgrade the OS 6 14 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Two or More GOT Units 7 7 Connection of Two GOT Un
441. ion is bad Countermeasures 5 Check the cable 2E e or coeg 653 EED cz co z Sad SZO zga Cx ous 59 Xt eg 9o o 2 Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 19 21 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley 19 MEMO a MITSUBISHI 19 22 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 o 20 Connection of SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by 98 Siemens AG TE SER This chapter explains the procedure to connect the GOT F900 Series display unit to the SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC one SOE Connection Procedure 262 This section introduces the procedure to connect the GOT F900 to the SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series Gite PLC 1 Preparation c TENE od Wemmme scription Reference 8 NUES You can learn the connection availability as well as the version of the 20 1 GOT F900 OS and the screen creation software Ons You can select the configuration between the GOT and the SIMATIC S7 Gusta S ntm E 200 300 400 Series PLC and proper cables d y 9 You can learn options such as adapter and cable manufactured by M Siemens z E D con Setting Description Setting in SIMATIC ommnnieatiOn The transmission specif
442. ion is lost when using this port and such a connection is not practical The Handy GOT canbe connected as the final unit in a string of two or Sus o 45 soa eo coc 858 54 599 600 en g ca S38 MITSUBISHI 7 7 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 7 4 Connection of Two or More GOT Units 7 Connection of Four or More Display Units When satisfactory operation program transfer at high soeed and monitor response are required through connection of peripheral equipment for the PLC dedicated equipment or personal computer while two or more sometimes wore than four GOT units are connected the following configurations are recommended 1 Adding a programming port using an option In the FX1S FX1N FX2N FX2NC Series one programming port can be added by installing an option By this method prepare a port to connect a peripheral equipment for the PLC display unit and a port to connect a display unit Applicable PLC Optional model name RS 422 FX1N 422 BD RS 232C FX1N 232BD or FX1N CNV BD FXoN 232ADP 2 FX1S FX1N Series RS 422 FX2N 422 BD RS 232C FX2N 232BD or FX2N CNV BD FXoN 232ADP Configuration example FX2N 422 BD FX2N Series e wry oo ge SS R zT Using the PLC easy link function
443. ion item display in DU WIN DU WIN MELSEC A 1 MELSEC A MELSEC A QnA MELSEC QnA Q 2 00 or later 2 30 or later 2 40 or later Connection setting availability Available Available A computer link connection is available Select MELSEC QnA Q 1 Note that the selection item display is changed from MELSEC A QnA to MELSEC A and MELSEC QnA Q a MITSUBISHI 10 18 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 10 6 Cable Diagram This section explains cable diagrams to connect the GOT F900 and the QnA Series PLC 1 Cable for the GOT and the QnA Series PLC F920GOT K C 2 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face Model name Application Connection diagram Application RS 422 connection QnA CPU direct connection Prepared by the user Cable length 3m 9 10 or less oS eel QnA Series NO oi 14 25 pin D Sub male Qc ooEgN Ns 6 9 pin D Resistance per wire 0 67 or less SUP male Approximately AWG 28 or thicker 99 SSN ODD NO a MITSUBISHI 10 19 Introduction Outline Specifications installation and Wiring of F940GOT installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More GOT Units Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PL
444. ion of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 18 1 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FP Series PLC Manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works 18 18 1 18 1 1 System Condition When connecting the FP Series PLC check the COM port designation the OS version of the GOT F900 and applicable versions of the screen creation software Compatibility when connecting FP Series PLC COM port Connection type ISIS GOT F900 OS version creation software of GOT F900 RS 232C EMCO morg GT Designer DU WIN GOT units Fe _ Fewer Series Fur 1 7 1 99 SWSK 29 FOO HaneyGOT Wear sonnaio Slate FO Hay GOT v 7 SW 2 _ The screen creation software version corresponds to the model of the GOT F900 Series Refer to section 3 2 1 Though RS 422 can be selected in the GOT F900 and the screen creation software FP Series products which can be connected to the GOT are not equipped with RS 422 interface Classification of Product Names PLC CPU names are classified by the series as shown in the table below For the product model name and the built in interface specifications corresponding to each series name mentioned here refer to catalogs offered by Matsushita Electric Works Series name Built in interface Tool port Control unit FPO Series PLC COM port which is not built i
445. ips into the ventilation window of the F920GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT when you drill screw holes or perform the wiring work Otherwise fire failure or malfunction may be caused Connect connection cables securely to the specified connectors while the power is turned OFF Imperfect connection may cause malfunction or failure Caution on wiring e Make sure to shut down all phases of the power supply outside the F9220GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT before starting the installation or wiring work Otherwise electrical shock and damages of the F930GOT F940 W GOT may be caused Caution The F920GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT has the DC power specifications Connect the DC power cable to dedicated terminals as described in this manual If the AC power supply is connected to power terminals the F930GOT F940 W GOT may be burnt Mount and connect a fuse of 2 A to the 24V DC power supply Connect the and sides of the DC power supply correctly as described in this manual If the power supply is connected reversely failure may be caused Perform Class D grounding to the ground terminal of the F930GOT F930GOT K F940 W GOT using a wire of 1 25 mm or more When supplying the power from the PLC excluding the F940WGOT connect the F930GOT F930GOT K F940 W GOT to the ground terminal of the PLC When supplying the power from the outside connect the F930GOT F940 W GOT to the ground terminal of the external power supply However never p
446. ired to fulfill that job These engineers should also be trained in the use and maintenance of the completed product This includes being completely familiar with all associated documentation for the said product All maintenance should be carried out in accordance with established safety practices c All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and coordinated manner in compliance to established safety practices The operators should also be familiar with documentation which is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment Note Note the term completed equipment refers to a third party constructed device which contains or uses the product associated with this manual Notes on the Symbols Used in this Manual At various times through out this manual certain symbols will be used to highlight points of information which are intended to ensure the users personal safety and protect the integrity of equipment Whenever any of the following symbols are encountered its associated note must be read and understood Each of the symbols used will now be listed with a brief description of its meaning Hardware Warnings 1 Indicates that the identified danger WILL cause physical and property damage 2 Indicates that the identified danger could POSSIBLY cause physical and property damage 3 Indicates a point of further interest or further explanation OPE o e
447. it There is no restriction AJ71UC24 AJ71QC24 A1SJ71UC24 R4 AJ71QC24 R4 a MITSUBISHI 10 2 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 10 2 System Configuration E 5 The QnA Series PLC be connected to the GOT through a computer link connection RS 422 or RS E 232C or directly via RS 422 This section explains the cables and options required in such a system 10 2 1 Configuration for Direct Connection RS 422 Connect the GOT F900 to the programming port of the QnA Series PLC Program transfer and monitoring are available in the GOT F900 Series using the built in two port interface function through connection of a personal computer to the RS 232C port excluding the 8 F920GOT K 1 F9220GOT K F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT GOT F900 a QnA Series PLC z QnACPU direct 9 connection 3 o b RS 422 cable F930GOT installation and Wiring of F940GOT TP Not enabled with F920GOT K Connection of two or more GOT units ye yy yyy yy ey yy yy yy yy yyy yyy yy Py Pye eee F940GOT installation and Wiring of Handy GOT F920GOT K a QnA Series PLC b RS 422cabe RS 422 cable Remarks E E ows QnACPU direct connection M Make sure the total cable extension 5 E 25 pin D Sub P y distance is 3m 9 10
448. it device Device name Byte address Bit address I QM 0 to 511 2047 0 to 7 Word device Device name Device number 5 TC 000 to 511 526 sto CI Device name Block number Byte address 525 1101023 DBWO to DBW65534 cSt Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 3 23 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 3 4 Hardware Specifications This section explains the hardware specifications of the GOT F900 Series 1 General specifications L1 of the GOT model name indicates 0 or 3 F940WGOT F940GOT F930GOT K F930GOT Product model F940WGOT F940GOT F940GOT F930GOT F930GOT name TWD E SWD E LWD E BBD K E BWD E Supply voltage 24V DC 10 15 service power supply of PLC or separately prepared DC power supply 24V DC current consumption 410mA 390mA 24V DC 24V DC 650mA 24V DC 220mA 24V DC 200mA 24V DC backlight OFF 400mA 24V DC 120mA 24V DC Built in irreplaceable Allowable momentary Operation continues against power failure of 5ms or less power failure time Built in lithium PM 20BL PM 20BL FX2NC 32BL FX2NC 32BL battery life Approx 5 years life Approx 5 years life Approx 3 years life Approx 3 years 0 50 C 0 50 C 2 0 50 C 0 50 C temperature Ambient Ambient humidity 35 to 8596 RH no condensa
449. ite device of operation panel word SET 5 Bar code Numeric input 8 ASCII input Operation device of touch key word SET 228 Device for storing number of histories of alarm history cox Device for storing number of occurrences of alarm list 13 4 2 Changeover from the GOT communication the PU operation mode HO available in the S500 Series 5 Available in the E500 Series 85 Not available in the A500 Series if the GOT is connected to the communication board 5 Sa 13 4 3 When 8888 or 9999 is set to a parameter Pr of the inverter Numbers 8888 and 9999 have special meaning respectively When specifying such numbers from 55 the GOT F900 specify them as follows 5 see o 529 500 cas oz ONA a MITSUBISHI 13 11 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 13 4 4 13 4 5 13 4 6 13 4 7 Specification of the program operation PG devices When setting the start time PG10 to PG19 PG40 to PG49 PG70 to PG79 specify the hour or the minute to the upper 8 bits and specify the minute or the second to the lower 8 bits Example When setting 13 35 Time to be specified 13 hour 35 minute Remarks Convert the hour and the minute to hexadecimal HOD H23 Hexadecimal HEX number respectively Add the upper bits and the lower bits Input HOD23 or 3363 Caution on setting of the calibration parameters Pr900 to Pr905 When setting the
450. its 9 EU 4 5V supply SW Not used to be set to OFF 1 N procedure 1 1 procedure 5V is not 5V is supplied supplied Switch setting on the rear face 5 CTS selector SW Set the switch to the OV side to always set the CTS to ON Set the switch to the external side to receive from the outside Usually set this switch to the OV side a MITSUBISHI 15 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 o 3 In the case of C200H LK202 V1 when the host link unit attached to C200H 599 o Setting by each switch 0 d TE Switch Ue 0 Bos Setting item position SW1 BCD upper digit aime oe 4 pp 3 Correspond to the station e UEM BCD lower digit number of the GOT F900 p WN o Communication mam c JM m 2 stop bits even parity command Sx condition level 1 2 or 3 are valid Right Rear face Terminal resistor Left selector Presence 50 connection SW PP Es cll O SEE Setting Example Switch setting on the 5 front face QE 1 SW1 and SW2 setting of unit number RI LK202 V1 Set SW1 0 SW2 0 to set the unit number 00 525 RUN XM 2 SW3 setting of transmission speed RCV Set SW3 6 to set 19200bps 59 3 SW4 setting of command level EFL parity and transmission code San Set SW4 2 to set even parity 7 bit ASCII
451. its 2 This chapter explains the setting method the cable connection diagram and cautions when two or more GOT units are connected Connection Procedure 1 Preparation 2 System Condition You can learn the connection availability as well as the version of the 7 GOT F900 OS and the screen creation software i System Configuration for Two or More GOT Units You can select the GOT configuration and proper cables 8 Rules in Confiauration You can learn the connection procedure in accordance with the 73 3 9 specifications of the interface built in the GOT o Connection of Four or This section introduces connection of two or more GOT units and the 74 More Display Units means to use satisfactorily the peripheral equipment for PLC Cautions on Connecting You can learn the restrictions in connecting two or more GOT units 7 5 Sg Two or More GOT Units SEO aes 2 Setting Sisi Description Reference Setting of Connected You can set the connection type RS 232C RS 422 of the second and 76 Equipment for GOT later GOT units 3 Others installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Description Cable Diagram Cable diagrams for two or more GOT unit connection 7 7 Troubleshooting Description of errors and how to fix them 7 1 System Condition When connecting two or more GOT units check the COM port designation the OS version of the GOT F900 and applicable version of the screen creation software Have in mind that
452. jects is placed outside the available screen area e Countermeasures Check the devices used and placement of screen objects There is not data because the unit is new or the memory clear has been executed Cause There is no screen data e Countermeasures Write the screen data using the screen creation software DATA IS NOT FOUND is displayed on the GOT F900 screen Cause On the head screen a nonexistent device in the connected machine controller is specified The head screen is the screen No 1 in the GT Designer and the screen No 0 in the DU WIN e Countermeasures Check the devices used on the head screen There is not data because the unit is new or the memory clear has been executed Cause There is no screen data e Countermeasures Write the screen data using the screen creation software CAN NOT WRITE TO PLC MEMORY is displayed on the GOT F900 screen CAN NOT WRITE is displayed on the This error is not displayed GOT F900 screen CAN NOT USE THE FUNCTION WHILE PROTECTED is This error is not displayed displayed on the GOT product product F900 screen PLC IS RUNNING is displayed on the This error is not displayed GOT F900 screen product product Earlier Earlier Earlier This error is not displayed than than than 1 10 6 10 4 10 1 10 or 6 10 or 4 10 or later later later a MITSUBISHI 17 14 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Machine Controller
453. k the Setup tab Project Auxiliary Settings x Basic Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Handy GOT settings OK Opening Screen Time Eec Backlight Off Time Min r Connection Port R5422 v GPU Y Station No e Set the following Port RS 422 Type CPU DST Station No Station No 00 GOT Station No D Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows The Select Project a Open GT Designer dialog box appears b Click the Open button C Open read the screen data to be changed d On the menu select Common GOT PLC Type The GOT PLC Type dialog box appears Aa MITSUBISHI 12 6 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FX Series Positioning Unit FX 2N 10 20GM 12 3 DU WIN Operation Display screen name Creation a Open DU WIN The Project settings dialog box appears m c O MELSEC Q Series PLC b On the menu select File New S48 Terminal F940GOT SWD 3 S PLC System TAN S d E DU System Language English Character Set Japanese Set the following 5 Terminal F940WGOT TWD V H S F940GOT LWD Se 5 F940GOT SWD s F930GOT BWD Sie PLC System FX GM Select Terminal in accordance with the LC display color A Model name St F940WGOT TWD V F940WGOT color 9 coeg F
454. king not available 925 838 59 9o 32 X 5 c 85 10 O Onn cN Sog H Eq 52 Onn MITSUBISHI 14 25 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 3 DU WIN Operation Display screen name Creation a Open DU WIN The Project settings dialog box appears b On the menu select File New a Cancel English Japanese Y Set the following Terminal F940GOT LWD F940GOT SWD F930GOT BWD PLC System MELSEC QnA Q Select Terminal in accordance with the LC display color Terminal System DU System Language Character Set o Temna F940GOT LWD F940GOT SWD Model name Eee black and white Handy a black and white F940GOT color Change method a MITSUBISHI d Set CPU direct connection RS 422 RS 232C of the GOT F900 The Setup Data dialog Handy GOT color F930GOT K blue F930GOT BWD F930GOT blue On the menu select lues System Settings Setup box appears Data Setup Data x Opening Screen Time 5 4 Backlight Off Time min O Barcel Connection RS422 Y Port Type Station No Use GripSwitch e Set the following RS 422 RS 232C Type CPU DST Station No Station No 00 01 to 31 when two or more GOTs are connected GOT Station No D Port Change the connection type of the already cr
455. l 1 5 1 2 1 Types and Names of GOT F900 1 5 1 2 2 Information Offered by Model ccccceesccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeessaeeeeeesaess 1 6 1 2 3 In built Fonts of Graphic Operation Terminal Japanese Overseas product 1 7 12 4 Elec Ice E 1 8 ZONE E 2 1 2 1 Connection Type Supported by 9 2 1 ZR GO FAV OS IST and MAEA ERREUR T TM 2 1 2 1 2 Connection type list and index resesi a nnns 2 2 2 2 Outline of Connection Types ccceccccseeceeceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeceeeueeeseueesseeeessaneeesagess 2 3 2 2 PLO Dy MIISUDISTII iu sic co Rn petes an i mederi EL pu Uie Eius 2 3 22 2 PEG DY Other GompallieS lee Eua n eoe qub 2 7 TTC c 2 9 Ox SPSCIICAUON 3 1 3 1 OS Version and Correspondence to Connected Equipment of GOT F900 3 1 3 1 1 How to Confirm OS Version of GOT F900 3 1 3 1 2 PLC Manufactured by nennen 3 2 3 1 3 PLC Manufactured by Other Companies 3 4 T 3 5 3 2 Version of
456. l M Device byte number 0120 BIEDOSITIOR 5 2 Word device timer and counter The specification method is equivalent to that of the bit device except c Specify the bit position a Specify the device symbol in an alphabet b Specify the device byte number corresponding to each device GT Designer DU WIN 3 to 4 digit decimal number without O suppression 1 to 4 digit decimal number with O suppression Example Timer T present value T250 Device symbol T Device byte number 250 3 Word device data register a Specify the device symbol in two alphabets D or DB b Specify the block number corresponding to each device GT Designer DU WIN 4 digit decimal number without 0 suppression 1 to 4 digit decimal number with 0 suppression Specify the device byte number corresponding to each device GT Designer DU WIN 5 digit decimal number without 0 suppression 1 to 5 digit decimal number with 0 suppression Only an even number can be specified Only an even number can be specified Example Data register D D102031004 Device symbol D Block number 1020 Device byte number 31004 a MITSUBISHI 20 10 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 o 20 5 3 Supplementary Items 599 DU 1 Data register specification
457. l only grip pe You can learn how to use the keylock switch RH model only os 3 Setting Setting of Connected Using the screen creation software you can enable the operation switch 514 Equipment for GOT LEDs and the grip switch 4 Others DesWpim e Connection Diagram of Handy GOT Operation Switches and Power You can confirm connection to confirm continuity of relay cables etc Supply one You can confirm wiring of the cables dedicated to Handy GOT a MITSUBISHI 5 2 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 5 1 Outline of Connection z gt This section explains the outline of connection of the Handy GOT which is attached and removed or E directly wired 5 1 1 Handy GOT Excluding RH model When Handy GOT is attached and removed using only external cables Handy GOT External cable Cable to PLC a Wiring outside panel Wiring inside panel gt i F9GT HCAB 5 o Eo oir supply and operation switches c pot c Gu For power supply and S operation switches cok ceo zuco vss RS 232C For power supply and operation switches E 255 958 Oo LL EE LEE iss For untied cc cable T S Oro ee Supplied from external power Ql supply or service cis power supply of PLC 24V DC 45
458. label indicating the signal name ox SW 1 to SW4 and ES1 is adhered 640 eo 8 cut SER 254 12 SEH eGo Soa y 2 SEH MITSUBISHI 5 45 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 5 16 Cable Specification Optional For connection to PLCs refer to the corresponding sections in the following chapters 1 Cable for the Handy GOT and the PLC G3 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face No Model name Application Connection diagram Application To F9GT HCAB2 150 RS 422 F9GT HCAB3 150 connection The connector on the or F9GT HCAB5 150 F9GT HCAB 3M leader side of the Handy 1 13 a FOGT HCAB 10M RS 232C Dedicated connector GOT is dedicated and 7 connection cannot be prepared by C the user 14 25 25 pin D Sub male e The connector on the E connection leader side of the Handy b F9GT HCAB1 3M Dedicated connector GOT is dedicated and Untied cable F9GT HCAB1 10M RS 232C cannot be prepared by the connection user F9GT HCAB LILIM D FG FXo FXos F X1s F XoN RS 422 MIT m Class D FX1N FX2N FX2NC connection FoGT HCAB re A grounding 3 1 H 2 1 13 W 3 lt 1 e gt 7 1 E 7 R 7 4 BNO 6 F9GT HCAB2 150 E 55 Gv a n
459. lains cable diagrams to connect the GOT F900 and the general purpose equipment microcomputer 1 Cable for the GOT and the microcomputer Model name C 3 Female type Male type Application The connector figure shows the engagement face Connection diagram Application RS 422 connection General purpose equipment Prepared by the user FG class D GOT F900 ess 1 1 O 6 9 9 pin D Sub male FG class D gt grounding gt RXD RDA gt RXD RDB Microcomputer gt TXD SDA side gt TXD SDB y SG GND Signal name on microcomputer side RS 232C connection Prepared by the user GOT F900 5 1 e e 9 6 9 pin D Sub female 1 Control lines RTS CTS DTR and DSR are not used a MITSUBISHI FG class D go grounding gt SD TXD RD RXD Microcomputer side u SG GND Signal name on microcomputer side 14 28 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 2 Cable for the Handy GOT and the microcomputer Connection of Microcomputer 14 When using the Handy GOT RH model refer to the cable diagrams below for the RS 422 RS 232C connector but not the wiring for the power supply the operation switches and the emergency stop switch because it is different For details refer to Chapter 5 C 3 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face
460. layed on the GOT F900 screen CAN NOT WRITE TO PLC MEMORY is displayed on the GOT F900 screen a MITSUBISHI There is not data because the unit is new or the memory clear has been executed e Cause There is no screen data e Countermeasures Write the screen data using the screen creation software A device that does not exist in the FX Series PLC was referenced Example While an FXos Series PLC is connected a device exits only in the FX2N Series PLC is specified for numeric input Cause On the head screen a nonexistent device in the connected FX Series PLC is specified Earlier Earlier The head screen is the screen No 1 in the GT than than Designer and the screen No 0 in the DU WIN 6 00 4 00 e Countermeasures Check the devices used on the head screen While the FX Series PLC is not connected the connection mode for the FX2 Series PLC is selected Cause Check for the FX2 or FX2N Series was executed the connection mode was automatically changed over then the device range was checked This error occurs when the device range set on the head screen is beyond the range for the FX2 Series The head screen is the screen No 1 in the GT Designer and the screen No 0 in the DU WIN Countermeasures Connect the PLC There is not data because the unit is new or the memory clear has been executed Cause 6 00 or 4 000r There is no screen data later later e Countermeasures Write the screen d
461. le port a b Option iom F930GOT E c RS 422 cable E gt EP 3 FX1N 422 BD FX2N 422 BD Not enabled with F920GOT K Connection of two or more GOT units VAI RK 90000999 ee i MITSUBISHI 690506865 1 dar 1 i eae a TYT Ed i MESE FXar32MR beeps eee j SEES ES PES i a als 4 WAG s i 1 1 1 1 1 a FX Series PLC b Option c RS 422 cable FXCPU direct connection FX 50DU CABO 8 pin MINI DIN i FX 50DU CABO EN FX S0DU CAB0 O1OM FXCPU direct connection FX1S FX1N 8 pin MINI DIN at 422 BD FX 50DU CABOL FX2N FXCPU direct connection 352336 8 pin MINI DIN FX2N 422 BD FXCPU direct connection FX 40DU CAB FX FX1 FXa FX2c FXGPU direct connection FX 40DU CAB EIEIM 25 pin D Sub FX 50DU CABL F940GOT GH 0100 Only one of the cables listed in column is required for connection The L type cable FX 50DU CABOL or FX 50DU CABL cable with a right angle connector cannot be used for 9 or F930GOT K Note the following distinctions when using the F9220GOT K Only the FX 50DU CABO and FX 50DU CABO 1M are applicable The c RS 422 cable 3
462. ley 19 o SOO 19 2 System Configuration Soa coG The SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC can be directly connected to the GOT via RS 232C This section Sus explains the cables and options required in such a system 19 2 1 Configuration for CPU Direct Connection RS 232C H The GOT F900 the SLC500 MicroLogix Series CPU be connected on the 1 1 basis Sof For the cable length or the detailed specifications of the SLC500 MicroLogix Series refer to the 258 corresponding manual Sx 1 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT GOT F900 a SLC500 Series CPU direct connection Sa Or o F930GOT b RS 232C cable TE SEE O F940GOT A o M S TE oS 5 o a a SLC500 b RS 232C cable Remarks SLC5 03 pin D ELT NN Prepared by the user a SLC5 04 male MicroLogix1000 1 cz MicroLogix1000 o 5 IN MicroLogix1200 MicroLogix1500 s29 1 Only the Series D or later can be connected Sao 2 1761 CBL PMO cable Series C or later manufactured by Allen Bradley is available oc 58 59 o EOD EE 59 sa 33 3t Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 19 3 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley 19 2 F943 Handy GOT GOT
463. low In addition to the panel cut dimension the space for metal fixture is required by approximately 10 mm in the left right up and down directions respectively For the details refer to 2 Installation space below Space for metal fixture installation and Wiring of F940GOT 1 Panel cut dimension Unit mm inches F920GOT K F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT 91 3 58 137 5 39 155 6 10 153 6 02 206 8 11 installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 119 4 69 66 2 60 170 6 69 121 4 76 124 4 88 Make sure that the processing accuracy is 0 to 1 mm Make sure that the thickness of the installation panel is 5 mm or less 2 Installation space Reference Connection of Peripheral Equipment For the details refer to the next page Unit mm inches EN F920GOT K F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT 109 4 29 136 5 35 174 6 85 172 6 77 225 8 86 119 4 69 85 3 35 189 7 44 140 5 51 143 5 63 GOT Units The dimension above is offered for reference Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 4 7 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 4 4 Installation Installation and Wiring of F220GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 This section explains the caution on installation of the GOT F
464. lowing person swo D5C GOTR PACKE NAME COMPANY MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 5 HOS SW2 indicates the large version An alphabet at the end indicates the small version Caution This product is protected by Japanese copyright law and International Treaties Copying reproducing or distributing all or any part of this product is a violation of its copyright In the case of Version SW5 or later Version 5 05F L Small version SW5 b DU WIN mmm SW PC FXDU WIN E Version 240 Copyriehl C 1997 verion Mitsubishi Electric Corporation a MITSUBISHI 3 6 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 2 When confirming the version through the contents indicated on the media E You can confirm the version by checking the contents indicated on the media of the product 3 a GT Designer CD ROM MITSUBISHI DATE MELSEC r In the case of Version SW4 or former 6 9812AA A version disc An alphabet at the end indicates the small version In the case of Version SW5 or later 5 05F is indicated SW2D5C GOTR PACKE SWe indicates the large version MODEL SW2D5C GOTR PACKE c E Q o b DU WIN FD Va installation and Wiring of F940GOT SWOPC FX DU WIN E FD model name V1 0 The model name of the software package is FX PCS DU WIN E Version
465. lows EO 9 Ore In one unit CPU configuration In the screen creation software select MELSEC QnA A for PLC type PLC type in screen creation CPU connected with Other CPU Galial Communication unii ZO 5 software and GOT GOT F900 eO gt MELSEC MELSEC QnA Q Q 333 Only control PLC monitored Sms LI In multiple PLC system Z5 o In the screen creation software select MELSEC Q Multi for PLC type FE o a PLC type in screen creation CPU connected with software and GOT GOT F900 Other CPU Serial communication unit MELSEC MELSEC QnA Q Q a Only control PLC monitored Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC PLC number of CPU 1 2 3 4 GOT F900 x LLL 2 2 7 7 5 ail c Je a CE pes 7 cJ je O9 2 ig Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Other CPU Control PLC A QCPU 4 units Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 11 15 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 11 6 Setting of Connected Equipment for GOT The Q Series PLC connection parameters can be set using the GOT F900 Series and the screen creation software GT Designer and DU WIN Setting the
466. luding the head Earlier Earlier than than 6 00 4 00 screen is beyond the range for the A Series e Countermeasures Connect the PLC There is an error on the screen to be displayed e Cause One of the screen objects is placed outside the available screen area e Countermeasures Check the placement of screen objects The display screen contains an error Causes DISPLAY SCREEN A device that does not exist in the connected PLC is IS NOT AVAILABLE From NO is referenced on the screen No or one of the 6 00 or 4 00 or screen objects is placed outside the available screen later later displayed on the GOT F900 screen product area Countermeasures Check the devices used and placement of screen objects a MITSUBISHI 11 26 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 There is not data because the unit is new the memory clear has been executed Cause There is no screen data 295 Countermeasures 259 Write the screen data using the screen creation 8x8 software A device that does not exist in the Q Series PLC was referenced S2 e Cause og 5 On the head screen a nonexistent device in the connected Series PLC is specified The head screen is the screen No 1 in the GT Earlier Earlier Designer and the screen No 0 in the DU WIN than than Countermeasures 6 00 4 00 Check the devices used on the head
467. m 4 11 HH model 5 F9GT RHCAB5 150 1 5m 4 11 8 s p A relay cable for any series other than the Q referto 5 5 4 Series should be prepared by the user F9GT HCAB1 LILIM external cable untied should be used when the user chooses a specific connector for the F943 Handy GOT excluding RH model according to the specifications of equipment jum to o cr cO G 0 installation and Wiring of Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 5 17 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 5 5 2 Appearance shape of Relay Cable The panel cut dimension on the panel face is as shown in section 5 5 4 Handy GOT Excluding RH model 1 F9GT HCAB2 150 relay cable for FX Series FXo FXos FX1S FXoN FX1N FX2N FX2NC PLC 1 5m 4 11 gt c To power supply and operation switches name label is provided at end each cable gt Gm untied wire To PLC pin MINI DIN t 25 pin D Sub 0 5m gt 8 pin connector female lt gt connector panel face Accessories For FG Class D grounding mounting type Jack socket Nut 2 2 F9GT HCAB3 150 relay cable for FX FX1 FX2 FX2c A QnA Series PLC 1 5m 4 11
468. m 9 10 or shorter to connect to the FX FX1 FX2 FX2c Series PLC needs to be prepared by the user Before attempting to connect the GOT units per b Option above 8 3 Cautions on Use of MELSEC F FX Series should be read and understood 8 2 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 8 2 F940 Handy GOT RS 422 E 3 i a FX Series PLC GOT F900 c RS 422 cable FXCPU direct A B connection t gt ES p E ES 7 power supply and r operation ic A C switches gt a gt ES _ Handy GOT ES B 5 422 jg To power supply and operation A E switches 5 d gt gt o ES ES S i m isses o D E 5 Use
469. m the first GOT F900 unit 1st GOT F900 2nd GOT F900 3rd GOT F900 4th GOT F900 For example if the power is turned on in the 1st and 4th GOT F900 units then turned on in the 2nd and 3rd GOT F900 units after a while a communication error occurs in the 4th GOT F900 unit And even when the power is turned on in four GOT F900 units at the same time if communication starts as soon as the opening screen is displayed in the GOT units and it takes considerable time until communication is enabled in the 4th GOT F900 unit a communication error may occur 1 Communication timing If communication is aborted for some reason it is retried If communication is not executed in the specified judgement time a communication error occurs Power supply 24V DC supplied to GOT The opening screen is displayed 1st GOT is enabled in the 2nd unit Communication j A user screen is displayed 2nd GOT is enabled in the 3rd unit Communication Retry A user screen is displayed m Communication is enabled in the GOT Ath unit Communication _ Retry J A user screen is displayed Communication Retry error displayed The error screen is 2 Countermeasures To prevent communication errors the communication start timing in the GOT F900 should be delayed using the following method a Delay the timing of turning on the power of the GOT F9
470. mmunication unit is as follows Board Built in the CPU Unit Card type to be attached a MITSUBISHI 15 2 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 o 15 2 System Configuration 599 In the SYSMAC Series PLC manufactured by Omron using either RS 422 connection RS 232C Sus connection in host link units including serial communication units boards is available This section explains the cables and options required to connect the SYSMAC C Series PLC 15 2 4 Configuration for SYSMAC C Host Link Connection RS 422 9 o The GOT F900 and the host link unit can be connected on the 1 1 basis As many GOT F900 units as FE the number of host link units attached to the C200H CS1 can be connected Sx 1 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT GOT F900 a SYSMAC C Series Host link RE F930GOT b RS 422 cable HE F940GOT i Sg U o0 XE 888 a SYSMAC C Series b RS 422 cable Remarks C200H LK202 V 1 9 pin D Sub Prepared by the user Host link unit CS1W SCBA1 9 pin D Sub Prepared by the user Serial communication unit Applicable SYSMAC C Series products in the column a are host link units equipped with built in RS 422 interface Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC
471. ms for FX Series positioning unit GOT connection Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Troubleshooting Description of errors and how to fix them Ezo 82 2 12 1 System Condition ED When connecting the FX Series positioning unit check the port designation the OS version of the GOT F900 and the applicable version of the screen creation software L TON oc Compatibility when connecting FX Series positioning unit 58 Bo COM port Connection type persion WEES 225 GOT F900 OS version creation software 585 of GOT F900 RS 232C EMG or morg GT Designer DU WIN GOT units cA wowor v SK 943 Handy GO t cannot be connected Select the F940 handy GOT Ses The screen creation software version corresponds to the model of the GOT F900 Series Refer to section 82 3 2 ODA o 529 500 cas oz ONA a MITSUBISHI 12 1 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FX Series Positioning Unit FX 2N 10 20GM 12 12 2 System Configuration This section explains the cables required to connect the FX Series positioning unit GMCPU connection via RS 422 It does not mean connection to the FX Series PLC CPU 12 2 4 Configuration for GMCPU direct connection RS 422 The FX Series positioning unit is equipped with a built in RS 422 interface for positioning program The GOT F900 can be connected directly to this interface 1 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT
472. n E dedican The GOT communication specifications n Align the setting between the GOT and the 21 3 1 communication printer Cautions on Use of You can learn the cautions on connecting the personal computer while Printer the printer is connected to the GOT Setting of Connected Set the communication specifications of the RS 232C port for the printer 2 Equipment for using the GOT or the screen creation software 3 Others Itemname Description Reference Cable Diagram Cable diagrams for a printer GOT connection System Condition System Configuration You can select the configuration between the GOT and the printer and 212 proper cables Description 21 4 1 5 When connecting the printer check the COM port designation the OS version of the GOT F900 and applicable versions of the screen creation software Compatibility when connecting the printer GOT F900 COM port OS version Version of screen creation software Series RS 232C ofGOT F900 GT Designer DU WIN F920GOT K F930GOT SWR SW5 ec SWTA v 1 F940GOT F940WGOT F940 Handy GOT F943 Handy GOT v 3 SWD The screen creation software version corresponds to the model of the GOT F900 Series 1 The RS 232C port for the Handy type GOT is provided inside the rear cover As a result environmental protection is lost when using this port and such a connection is not practical The Handy GOT can be connected as the final
473. n R W 17 gt SW3 switches and 5 GR W 18 SW4 the emergency 5 BR W 21 gt ES1 310p Boa switch DO n Y W 22 gt ES 0 BL W 24 gt DC24V SHH GY W 25 gt DC24V J E9GT HCAB1 O00M 529 o EE s MITSUBISHI 17 11 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION C 3 Female type Male type Model name Application Connection of Machine Controller CP9200SH PLC Manufactured by Yaskawa Electric 17 The connector figure shows the engagement face Application Connection diagram RS 232C connection wire To cable F9GT HCAB or FOGT HCAB1 on Handy GOT side G UJ yO 00 D lt 920 MP930 CP 2171F Prepared by the user a MITSUBISHI MM IAN AA N Ol UNA oe es O Drain Y F9GT HCAB LILIM FG class D grounding 1 FG Drain wire MEMOBUS unit CPU unit 9 male Signal name of MEMOBUS Bones PL 2 PK 13 gt DC24VG DC24VG gt SW common gt SW1 SW2 SW3 SWA ES1 ES1 gt DC24V DC24V J Wire the power supply the operation switches and the emergency stop switch 4 FoGT HCAB1 HIDIM 17 12 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Machine Controller CP9200SH PLC Manufactured by Yaskawa Electric 17 17 6 Troubleshooting 599 o 20 9 For reference this section summarizes frequently asked questions
474. n o gt 5 starting frequency starting frequency Onn Number of retries at alarm occurrence Number of retries at alarm occurrence Number of retries at alarm occurrence 2 ju Retry waiting time Retry waiting time Retry waiting time 2 e Rewws ngime ee Pery wan 68 Fery waiin R ispl rasur Retry count display erasure Retry count display erasure vm 8 69 etry count display erasure 69 y cou play 69 y play 5 2 Special regenerative brake duty Special regenerative brake duty DESDE Applied motor Applied motor Applied motor 9 PWM frequency selection PWM frequency selection PWM frequency selection 50 LL 0 5V 0 10V selection 0 5V 0 10V selection 0 5V 0 10V selection Filter time constant Filter time constant Input filter time constant 75 SseenenUsopscecion 75 gaectonPUsupscccton Reset selectonPL top seleclon Se Alarm code output selection Alarm code output selection Cooling fan operation selection 2 Parameter write disable selection Parameter write disable selection Parameter write disable selection 2 T Ome Reverse rotation prevention selection Reverse rotation prevention selection Reverse rotation prevention selection 6 s2e 79 Operation mode selection 79 Operation mode selection 79 Operation mode selection er n umber of motor poles 59 x o 84 Rated motor frequenc 84 Rated motor frequenc B c co quen EX E B
475. n of FX Series Positioning Unit FX 2N 10 20GM 12 12 4 Setting of Connected Equipment for GOT c O MELSEC Q Series PLC The FX Series positioning unit connection parameters can be set using the GOT F900 Series and the screen creation software DU WIN 1 GOT F900 Series When the main menu screen change operation is disabled E Lak c nZ a While pressing and holding the upper left corner of the screen The LANGUAGE screen appears 8x o turn on the power Keep holding the upper left corner for about 25 seconds more Then press END at the upper right corner The SET UP MODE screen appears b Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears c Set the following Se 5 PLC TYPE FX GM SERIES S CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 422 DST STATION STATION 00 GOT STATION D When the main menu screen change operation is enabled B Qg a Press the upper left corner of the screen The position to be The SELECT MODE screen appears 838 pressed can be changed in the GOT and the screen creation software Press OTHER MODE on the menu The OTHER MODE screen appears c Press SET UP MODE on the menu The SET UP MODE screen appears d Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears e Set the following PLC TYPE FX GM SERIES CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 422 DST STATION STATION 00 GOT STATION D Connection of SYSMAC C Series
476. n some FX Series PLC Refer to section 3 1 The screen creation software version corresponds to the model of the GOT F900 Series Refer to section 3 2 1 The RS 232C port for the Handy type GOT is provided inside the rear cover As a result environmental protection is lost when using this port and such a connection is not practical The Handy GOT can be connected as the final unit in a string of two or more Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 8 1 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 8 2 8 2 1 a MITSUBISHI Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 8 System Configuration The FX Series PLC can be directly connected to the GOT via RS 422 or RS 232C This section explains the cables and options required in such a system Configuration for CPU Direct Connection RS 422 Connect the GOT F900 to the programming port of the FX Series PLC Program transfer and monitoring are available in the GOT F900 Series using the built in two port interface function through connection of a personal computer to the RS 232C port In the Handy GOT the rear cover would have to be open 1 F920GOT K F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT a FX Series PLC GOT F900 FXCPU direct connection To programming c RS 422 cab
477. n some models Tool port CPU unit FP2SH Series PLC COM port Computer communication unit FP2SH Series CCU COM port x 2 channels a MITSUBISHI 18 2 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FP Series PLC Manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works 18 o 18 2 System Configuration 599 The FP Series PLC be directly connected to the GOT RS 232C using control unit CPU unit Sus computer communication unit This section explains the cables and options required in such a system 18 2 1 Configuration for CPU Direct Connection RS 232C H The FPO Series control unit the FP2SH Series CPU unit is equipped with built in tool port Sof port RS 232C interface Only one GOT unit can be connected to an either interface 258 The GOT F900 and the FP2SH Series CPU unit can be connected on the 1 1 basis As many GOT Sx F900 units as the number of computer communication units can be connected 1 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT o GOT F900 a FP Series Sa CPU direct connection ogg FE p b RS 232C cable us ous F930GOT 2 T EE 853 F940GOT zi
478. nA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 3 1 2 PLC Manufactured by Mitsubishi OS version Connection Connected equipment and series RS 232C of two or RS 422 940W 940 930 920 more GOT yp system system system system Wee name MELSEC F FX Series CPU direct connection FXo FXos FX1s FXoN FX1N mpm ae FX2N FX2NC RS 422 vil 8 2 1 or later or later or later connection FX FX1 FX2 FX2c RS 422 FX2N F X2N 422 BD FX1S FX1N 422 BD FX1N FX1N 422 BD 1 00 or later MELSEC F FX Series CPU direct connection FX1S FX1N CNV BD FXON 232ADP FX1N FX1N CNV BD FXON 232ADP 100 1 00 FX2N FX2N CNV BD FXoN 232ADP RS 232C v 8 2 2 FX 1S4 FX 48 232 BD or later or later connection RS 232C FX1N FX1N 232 BD FX2N F X2N 232 BD FX1NC FXON 232ADP FX2NC FXON 232ADP MELSEC A Series CPU direct connection 1 00 AnN AnA AnS AnSJ AnSH or later A1SH A2C A2CJ A0J2H AnU ACPU A2US S1 A2USH A1FX RS 422 od NC 7 direct 9 2 1 or later or later Motion controller connection CPU direct connection A171SCPU S3 A171SHCPU A172SHCPU A273UHCPU MELSEC A Series computer link connection RS 422 A 9 2 2 Computer link unit 1 00 1 00 computer or later or later link AJ71UC24 A1SJ7IUC24 R2 R4 RS 232C connection 92 3 MELSEC QnA QnAS Series CPU direct connection QnACPU RS 422 3 00 2 00 1 00 J direct QnACPU Q4ARCPU Q2ACPU or later or late
479. nce 6m 19 8 or less Connection of two or more GOT units a QnA Series PLC b RS 232C cable AJ71QC24 3 25 pin D Sub AJ71QC24 R2 B Prepared by the user A1SJ71QC24 C F9GT HCAB1 3M A1SJ71QC24 R2 9 pin D Sub A1SJ71UC24 R2 Connection of two or more GOT AJ71UC24 25 pin D Sub units is not possible In the C F9GT HCAB1 3M shown in the column b RS 232C cable the end on the PLC side is loose wires Make sure that the total cable extension distance A B or C is 6m 19 8 or less a MITSUBISHI 10 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 10 3 10 3 1 Setting in QnA Computer Link Connection In QnA computer link connection the switches in the computer link unit Shown in the following page should be set as described below Connected equipment classification in manual QnACPU direct connection Port of QnA CPU QnAS CPU QnA computer link AJ71QC24 RS 422 RS 232C Refer to the following setting method AJ71QC24 R2 RS 232C A1SJ71QC24 RS 422 RS 232C A1SJ71QC24 R2 RS 232C A computer link AJ71UC24 RS 422 RS 232C A1J71UC24 R4 RS 422 Refer to Chapter 9 A1J71UC24 R2 RS 232C AJ71UC24 RS 232C Communication Setting Specifications 1 Setting the mode selector switch Set the mode so that the COM port of the computer link unit connected
480. ncy stop TO switch TO a MITSUBISHI TO DAB WwW gt A WW CO TO TO PD DC24V J X 5 48 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 C 3 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face No Model name Application Connection diagram Application pe ee ee Class D RS 422 oo grounding 5 FX FX1 FX2 FX2c A 1 FX2 FX2c 4 gt 4 13 5 7 1 13 6 lt 3 i 7 6 o 14 25 8 a gt 5 14 25 37 pin D Sub female L 25 pin D F9GT RHCAB3 150 i we Hood The diagram on the right hr 8 Shows the wiring of the gt 21 HS 422 signals For 18 wiring of the operation 7 DC24VG switches and the power 19 DC24VG supply refer to chapter 5 12 lt e c ion 13 lt gt SW1 14 lt gt SW2 15 lt lt gt SW3 diis Wire the power gt ES1 1 ae gt ES1 1 supply the operation 22 lt gt ES1 2 switches and 23 ES1 2 the emergency 24 lt gt DSW 1 us 25 lt gt ps
481. ne controller b RS 232C cable Remarks 9 pin D Sub 1 2171 25 oin D Sub 4 F9GT HCAB DIOM MEMOBUS unit MP920 Prepared by the user 9 pin D Sub CPU unit MP930 C F9OGT HCAB 1 LIDIM Applicable machine controller products in the column a are CPU or MEMOBUS units equipped with built in RS 232C interface 1 In the CP 217IF the COMI is the 9 pin D Sub port and the COM2 is the 25 pin D Sub port The COMG is an RS 422 port a MITSUBISHI 17 4 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Machine Controller CP9200SH PLC Manufactured by Yaskawa Electric 17 o 2 F943 Handy GOT 599 OW y co GOT F900 b RS 232C cable a Machine controller Sus A B A 2 B NENNEN S ES T3 i Sale Handy GOT ES i Soc RS 232C To power supply 5 5 seg 3 switches Kio 217 D 92009 920 d 4 lt 5 I B E ER 5 Use the RS 232C power supply Qt 5 port on the rear and operation B ES face switches 862 pou oom Total extension distance 6m 19 8 or less a Machine controller b RS 232C cable Remarks FE 2171 9
482. nection r Buzzer ors Port Rsa22 gt ON eot cz Type CPU OFF 9 o Station No 0 EJ Click OK 5 In the case of SW4D5C GOTR PACKE earlier than version A 549 perform the setting the GOT F900 9 a Set the connection in CONNECTION in the GOT F900 sas For the setting method refer to 1 GOT F900 Series on the Sit previous page 54 599 opa cN g c SET a MITSUBISHI 8 11 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 8 Operation Display screen name e Set the following Port RS 422 RS 232C Type CPU DST Station No Station No 00 GOT Station No Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows The Select Project a Open GT Designer dialog box appears b Click the Open button c Open read the screen data to be changed d On the menu select Common GOT PLC Type The GOT PLC Type dialog box appears a MITSUBISHI 8 12 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 8 3 DU WIN E Operation Display screen name E Creation a Open DU WIN E b On the menu select File New The Project settings Terminal F940GOT SWD PLG System MELSEC F X T Cancel e DU System Language English E Character Set Japanese o Set the following Terminal F940WGOT TWD V H F940GOT LWD F940GOT SWD 5 F930GOT BWD 9 F920G
483. nection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 7 19 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Two or More GOT Units 7 3 Cable for the PLC personal computer and the FX 232AW C C 2 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face Model name Application Connection diagram Application RS 422 connection FXo FXos FX1sSs FXoN FX1N FX 2N F X2NC 4 199 O 2 i 5 8 pin MINI DIN male MM 1 7 FX 232AW C FX 422CABO M 14 25 25 pin D Sub male TO fo N N Ce TO RS 422 connection FX 232AW C 1 13 FX 422CAB i 14 25 25 pin D Sub male C1 FX FX1 FX2 F X2c A QnA 1 14 25 pin D Sub male guo CO OL IO h h gt A AAAAAAAAAAAAA PTT TT TTT VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVYVY C a ae Zr CT CY ONOOWN 2 NOP PO I SSN gt NM MP Ww a RS 232C connection FX 232AW C 1 13 F2 232CAB 1 i p 14 25 25 pin D Sub male N
484. neric name of FX1N Series main units Generic name of FX1 Series main units Generic name of FX Series main units 5 c Generic name of FX Series main units FX2N Series Generic name of FX2N Series main units FX2c Series Generic name of 2 Series main units FX2NC Series Generic name of FX2NC Series main units Generic name of FXo FXosS FX1S FXoN FX1N FX1 FX FX2 FX2N FX2C FXCPU FX2NC Series main units FX Series GM FX 10GM FX 20GM E 20GM FX2N 10GM and FX2N 20GM positioning unit Motion controller CPU Generic name of A171SCPU S3 A171SHCPU A172SHCPU and SPUR A273UHCPU FREQROL Series A500 E500 S500 Series inverter a MITSUBISHI 1 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Introduction 1 PLC by Omron Generic name of C200H CQM1 CS1 and A273UHCPU Generic name of FLEX PC N Series Introduction PLC by Fuji Electric NB RS1 AC NB RS1 DC NJ RS4 NJ RS1 and NJ RS2 di Generic name of machine controllers CP 9200SH MP 920 and MP 930 PLC by Electric other PLO by Matsushita Epo FP2SH and FP2SH FP2 CCU 2 companies Electric Works PLC by Allen Bradley Generic name of SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 PLC by Siemens Generic name of SIMATIC S7 200 S7 300 and S7 400 PLC by another Generic name of PLC manufactured by Omron Fuji Electric Yasukawa gt Electric Allen Bradley or Siemens 5 S Abbreviation of GOT system software Q o Abbreviation of screen creation software for GOT A900
485. ng is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 and the personal computer e Causes The connected cable is not proper Or cable connection is not correct e Countermeasures Check the cable MITSUBISHI 20 21 Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC Connection of FX Series Positioning Connection of FREQROL Inverter Connection of Microcom puter Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Mm o O SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SIMATIC 57 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 MEMO a MITSUBISHI 20 22 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Printer 21 21 21 1 Connection of Printer This chapter explains the procedure to connect the GOT F900 Series display unit to the printer The printer cannot be used if another equipment is connected to the RS 232C port of the GOT F900 Connection Procedure This section introduces the procedure to connect the GOT F900 to the printer 1 Preparation Wemmme Reierene Gustem Condition You can learn the connection availability as well as the version of the d GOT F900 OS and the screen creation software 2 Setting Printer Communication You can learn the communication specifications 21 3 eating Transmissio
486. ng is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 and product product product the FREQROL performed on the GOT F900 screen e Causes The wrong cable is used or the connection is bad Countermeasures Check the cable Changeover to a nonexistent screen was tried by a touch key DISPLAY SCREEN Earlier Earlier IS NOT AVAILABLE Cause than than is displayed on the The changeover destination screen has not been created yet 6 00 4 00 GOT F900 screen Countermeasures Create the screen DISPLAY SCREEN A nonexistent screen was tried to be displayed IS NOT AVAILABLE NO is displayed on the GOT F900 screen Cause 6 00 or 4 00 or The screen No has not been created yet later later e Countermeasures Create the screen A device that does not exist in the FREQROL inverter was referenced Example While an S500 Series is connected a device exists only in the A500 Series is specified for numeric input Cause On the changeover destination screen excluding the head DISPLAY SCREEN screen a nonexistent device in the connected FREQROL j i ifi Earlier Earlier IS NOT AVAILABLE inverter is specified is displayed on the e Countermeasures than than GOT F900 screen Check the devices used on the head screen 6 00 4 00 There is an error on the screen to be displayed e Cause One of the screen objects is placed outside the available screen area e Countermeasures Check the pla
487. ng of Handy GOT Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 2 1 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 2 1 2 Connection type list and index Connected equipment A Series Motion controller Q Series A mode Q Series Q mode PLC by Mitsubishi Q Series multi CPU FX positioning unit 10GM 20GM General purpose equipment such as microcomputer board Machine controller by Yasukawa Electric PLC by other companies FP Series by Matsushita Electric Works SLC500 MicroLogix Series by Allen Bradley SIMATIC S7 200 SIMATIC S7 300 Series by Siemens General purpose printer Others Outline 2 v indicates can connect Transmission specifications RS 232C Connection destination CPU direct connection CPU direct connection A computer link CPU direct connection En indicates cannot connect Connection of two or Reference ee 9 more GOT units ae a consent 6 7 GPU direct v ene CPU direct connection Sl UN SNC a Serial communication unit Chapter 11 CPU direct connection CPU direct connection Link unit PEOR SENGS CPU direct connection Chapter 13 inverter SYSMAC C Series by 4 v FLEX PC N Series by v v
488. ng programs in the PLC 4 Emergency stop switch Independent contact 24V DC specification 5 Grip switch While the grip switch is being pressed manipulation of the touch keys on the screen is effective 6 GRIP SW LED While the grip switch is being pressed manipulation of the touch keys on the screen is effective 7 Name sheet insertion slot Can be seen when the operation switch cover is removed from the lower portion of the Handy GOT 8 Keylock switch 2 positioned switch A key can be inserted or removed to lock the switch position 9 Grip switch The 3 positioned operation switch OFF ON OFF turns ON when pressed halfway and turns OFF when pressed all the way or when released 10 Grip switch LED LED for confirming ON OFF status of the grip switch The parameters for controlling the LED can be set in the screen creation software and PLC program 11 Strap holders Loops for the strap a MITSUBISHI 5 6 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 E 5 2 2 Rear Panel and Connectors E gt The name and the function of each part on the rear panel of the Handy GOT are shown below When the rear cover is removed diversified connectors can be seen When rear cover is removed enlarged view 2 s O e O a 3y e o E M Q o 1 S ge c Not used eco 525 TEO 25 aos 1 Hand
489. nit can be connected to the SLC500 MicroLogix Series CPU A personal computer printer or bar code reader can be connected only when the GOT is equipped with two RS 232C channels CPU SS Printer RS 232C SLC500 Series GOT F900 Either one unit LBS Y Bar code reader 1 Excluding the F920GOT K a MITSUBISHI 2 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Outline 2 PLC by Siemens CPU direct connection RS 232C By connecting the HMI adapter to the SIMATIC S7 300 Series CPU one GOT F900 unit can be connected to the SIMATIC S7 300 Series CPU By connecting the PC PPI cable to the SIMATIC S7 200 Series CPU one GOT F900 unit can be connected to the SIMATIC S7 300 Series CPU A personal computer printer or bar code reader can be connected only when the GOT is equipped with two RS 232C channels CPU Either one unit HMI Adapter PC PPI Cable f RS 232C SIMATIC S7 300 Series GOT F900 Printer Bar code reader SIMATIC S7 200 Series 1 Excluding the F920GOT K 2 2 3 Others Not only the PLC a printer or bar code reader can be connected to the GOT F900 The connection shown below is available also in the Handy GOT However because the rear panel of the Handy GOT must be removed when a cable is connected to the RS 232C connector the waterproof ability and the operability operation of the Handy GOT while it is held by hand are lost Accordingly the connection shown belo
490. nnected in total Configuration When First GOT Unit is Connected through RS 422 is already connected through RS 422 The configuration of the first unit is as shown in the table below For the details however refer to section explaining each connected equipment also IANAO 800 RENES Microcomputer Eas dal E bRS422 4 c RS 232C 4 d s422 AgRs 232C _ easy ase tee ian arte 6m 19 8 or less when using Handy GOT F940 Handy GOT o r3 E m 1 For the length of the Handy GOT cable refer to chapter 5 1 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT and F940WGOT SOOO E b RS 422 c RS 232C computer lin 30m 15m 11 5m 98 5 wes 379 a a FX A QnA Q Series PLC microcomputer b RS 422 cable c RS 232C cable RS 422 cable FX FX1 FX2 FX2c CPU direct connection 25 pin D Sub A QnA CPU direct connection 25 pin D Sub FXo FXoS FX1sSs FxoN FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2NC CPU direct connection 8 pin MINI DIN FX1S FX1N 422 BD FX1N FX1N 422 BD FX2N FX2N 422 BD 8 pin MINI DIN FX 40DU CAB FX 40DU CAB LILIM FX 50DU CABL FX 50DU CABO FX 50DU CABO EN FX 50DU CABO LILIM FX 50DU CABOL
491. nnecting the QnA Series PLC check the COM port designation the OS version of the GOT F900 and the applicable version of the screen creation software Compatibility when connecting QnA Series PLC COM port Connection type Version of screen GOT F900 OS version creation software co Two or more of GOT F900 GOT units GT Designer DU WIN SEA ws 266 SEA Sus A in the table indicates that only CPU direct connection is available and computer link connection is not available Connection of two or more GOT units is possible only in QnACPU direct connection and QnA computer link connection It is not possible in A computer link connection The screen creation software version corresponds to the model of the GOT F900 Series Refer to section 3 2 1 The RS 232C port for the Handy type GOT is provided inside the rear cover As a result environmental protection is lost when using this port and such a connection is not practical The Handy GOT can be connected as the final unit in a string of two or more GOTs Restriction When Computer Link Unit for A Series is Used When the computer link unit for the A Series shown in the table below is attached to the QnA Series CPU then the GOT F900 Series display unit is connected to the QnA Series CPU there is restriction in the available device range Refer to the description on the MELSEC QnA Series in section 3 3 Computer link unit There is restriction Serial data communication un
492. nnection RS 422 RS 232C of the GOT F900 The Setup Data dialog On the menu select View Project Data Setup Data x Opening Screen Time 4 Backlight Off Time fi 10 Connection Port R3422 al Type System Settings Setup box appears Station No Use GripSwitch e Set the following Port RS 422 RS 232C Type CPU DST Station No Station No 0 GOT Station No Combinations of Port and Type are as follows Connection destination Direct connection to Q CPU z RS 422 Computer link unit for Q Computer link unit for Q RS 232C a MITSUBISHI 11 20 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 Operation Display screen name aye Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows EO 8 a Open DU WIN 8s b On the menu select File Open The Open dialog box c Select and open read the file of the screen data to be changed appears d When changing Terminal GOT F900 select View Project The Project settings o System Settings Project settings on the menu dialog box appears 33 For the contents of setting refer to in Creation above IE The PLC selection item display varies depending on the software version as follows ota PLC System selection item display in DU WIN DU WIN MELSEC A 1 MELSE MELSEC A C A MELSEC A QnA MEL
493. nnection of FREQROL Inverter Connection of Microcom puter Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC a 25 c c 58 Oz troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FP Series PLC Manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works 18 2 GT Designer Display screen name Creation a Open GT Designer The Select Project dialog box appears b Click the New button The GOT PLC Type dialog box appears GOT type F94 GOTG20 X 240 OK type Set the following GOT type F940WGOT 480 x 234 lt WIDE gt F94 GOT 320 x 240 F93 GOT 240 x 80 PLC type MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP Selection of GOT type F940WGOT 480x234 WIDE F940WGOT F940GOT Handy GOT F930GOT K F93 GOT 240x80 F930GOT Click OK d Set CPU direct connection RS 232C of the GOT F900 The Project Auxiliary This setting is enabled in the SW4D5C GOTR PACKE version A Settings dialog box or later appears Make Serial Port Setup Language and Menu Key valid F94 GOT 320x240 Project Auxiliary Settings x Basic Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Handy GOT settings OK Key window Cursor display setting Cancel Action when switching screens Don t display cursor and key window When touch input is detected
494. nnector for communication and operation switches CN2 20 pins C Connector for grip switch CN4 5 pins D Connector for emergency stop CN5 4 pins E Installation hole CN6 3 pins F Installation hole G Packing communication and operation switches 20 pins Installation hole 2 Connect an external cable a Insert an external cable into the installation hole of the main unit and connect to the ports A and B Lap t When pushing the cable through make each connector face downward a MITSUBISHI 5 14 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 b Tighten the hexagon nut Packing Make sure to tighten the hexagon nut for cable Installation hexagon nut mounting with a sufficient force to avoid looseness Tightening hexagon nut As guideline tighten it until the packing is crushed by 0 5 mm 0 02 or more Is 22mm 0 87 c Pull lightly on the cable until it naturally stops gt Pulling direction d Securely tighten the hexagon nut for cable sewring so that the cable will not come out or the waterproof ability will not be deteriorated sie As guideline tighten until the clearance is 3 5 mm 0 14 or less 3 Attach rear cover a Before closing the rear cover make sure that the p
495. ns setting switches 2885958 OOOOOOOO Mode selector switch Transmission specifications setting switches RS 232 C J71UC24 R2 a MITSUBISHI 9 12 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 When the A1SCPU24 R2 is connected o Mode selector switch i gt Transmission 58 specifications setting E 28 switches a C9 Oo o o o 5 When the cover is open N o d When the A2CCPUC24A is connected installation and Wiring of F940GOT O Mode selector switch Station number setting switches Ree GEH V J PILAM HTHHIIEME 6595555555 30990900009 2325 38 999009 MITSUBISHI E o E ao E o E o E o ao i d E d E o E o E c i o d E o E c H H H installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 8 S 0000000000 Bn 2 JD00000000 i
496. ns the format used to specify devices of the SLC500 Series Sus For the device range which can be set in the GOT F900 refer to section 3 3 19 5 1 Device Format H o e GT Designer version SW5 F 5 05F or later GT Designer earlier than version SW5 F 5 05F 28 DU WIN version 2 5 or later DU WIN earlier then version 2 5 FE Bit device F b ENS d Bit device word device 000 m 5 000 m b coc d FE Word device a b d SEE 1 Bit device a Specify the device symbol or two alphabets Sc b Specify the file number corresponding to each device in a 1 to 3 digit decimal number For the dc available specification range refer to the next section ges The file numbers 10 to 255 should be set in advance using the package software manufactured by Allen Bradley c Specify the element device number in a 1 to 3 digit decimal number For the available specification range refer to the next section Son d Bit position E GT Designer version SW5 F 5 05F or later 9o opecify the bit position in a 1 digit decimal number 0 to 15 while using slash as the delimiter Example To specify bit B B3 64 14 5 Device symbol File number 520 Element device number 64 Bit position 14 82 gt lt GT Designer earlier than version SW5 F 5 05F sus DU WIN Specify the bit position in a 1 digit hexadecimal number 0 to F Example To specify
497. ntroduction Outline Specifications installation and Wiring of F940GOT installation and Wiring of Handy GOT m c c O Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Two or More GOT Units 7 Operation Display screen name RS 232C d For selecting RS 232C of the GOT F900 select View Project The Setup Data dialog connection System Settings Setup Data on the menu box appears e Set the following Port RS 232C Type CPU DST Station No Station No 00 01 to 31 for microcomputer connection GOT Station No D Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows a Open DU WIN b On the menu select File Open The Open dialog box Select and open read the file of the screen data to be changed appears d When changing Terminal GOT F900 select View Project The Project settings System Settings Project settings on the menu dialog box appears For the contents of setting refer to c in Creation above For setting of RS 232C RS 422 of the FX Series refer to d in Creation above a MITSUBISHI 7 16 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Two or More GOT Units 7 7 7 Cable Diagram This section explains cable diagrams
498. number 00xx lt H xx 2 digit BCD RS 232C DM6648 in accordance with the setting on the GOT side MITSUBISHI 15 7 Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC Connection of FX Series Positioning Connection of FREQROL Inverter m S 9 c c O Microcom puter Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 2 In the case of C200H LK201 V1 when the host link unit attached to C200H Setting by each switch Setting item position Unit number wb BCD upper digit Correspond to the station e BCD lower digit number of the GOT F900 Front face Transmission Transmission speed 6 f 9200bps i BENE ASCII 2 stop bits even parity command condition level 1 2 or 3 DIP SW 5V power supply Ed 5V is not supplied Setting Example Switch setting on the front face 7 1 SW1 and SW2 setting of unit number LK201 V1 Set SW1 0 SW2 0 to set the unit number 00 RUN XM 2 SW3 setting of transmission speed RCV Set SW3 6 to set 19200bps ERROR 3 SWA setting of command level parity and transmission code Set SW4 2 to set even parity 7 bit ASCII Swi e Sw2 and 2 stop b
499. o the FLEX PC N 164 PC N Series PLC series PLC 2c ngo e Une ed Set the PLC type using the GOT or the screen creation software 16 5 Equipment for GOT 9 c cod o c o gt Onn 3 Others Szo soa z OTA Cable Diagram Cable diagrams for FLEX PC N Series PLC GOT connection oio Troubleshooting Description of errors and how to fix them 16 1 System Condition 5 When connecting the FLEX PC Series PLC check the COM port designation the OS version of the oE 5 c oc GOT F900 and applicable versions of the screen creation software See Compatibility when connecting FLEX PC N Series PLC COM port Connection type Cro 900 OS version creation software c Series Two or more of GOT F900 50 GOT units GT Designer DU WIN F _ _ 7 7 7 Mm F930GOT K 40 Not applicable 2 70 S LO NN 100 QNetapplirable 2 00 MEM OJO The screen creation software version corresponds to the model of the GOT F900 Series Refer to section 3 2 SDO son ODD a MITSUBISHI 16 1 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Manufactured by Fuji Electric 16 16 2 System Configuration The FLEX PC N Series PLC can be connected to the GOT via RS 422 or RS 232C using a link unit This section explains the cables and options required to connect the FLEX PC N Series PLC 16 2 1 Configuration for Link Unit Connection
500. oard Es 5 A N Bar code reader S r i This manual describes how to set the screen creation software select cables and perform wiring in TE connecting the GOT F900 Series to a connected equipment Oa u This manual is divided into the following portions in accordance with the type of the GOT F900 Series 5 e F920GOT K F930GOT K 940 or 940 Series From Section 4 32 e 940 Handy GO Ve ME From Section 5 92 828 5 fet 7 Bo Xt zit o Sto Ss co g Su SET o 599 du Is 0 MITSUBISHI 1 1 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Introduction 1 1 1 1 Classification of Manuals in Accordance with Purpose When requiring a manual not included with the product contact our sales representative THIS MANUAL Describes in details the connection to a PLC or personal computer and the setting method e GOT F900 SERIES GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL HARDWARE MANUAL CONNECTION To understand how to connect the main unit to equipment ut HARDWARE Itis stored as a PDF file in Tolearn how to set the screen creation software MANUAL the CD ROM of the SWLID5C GOTR PACKE y HARDWARE MANUAL AND INSTALLATION MANUAL Describes mainly the outside dimension the installation the power supply wiring and the electrical specifications e F920GOT BBD5 K E INSTALLATION MANUAL No JY997D02201 To learn the features of the main
501. oc jum Sog ies o lt o MITSUBISHI 16 9 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Manufactured by Fuji Electric 16 a MITSUBISHI Operation Display screen name e Set the following The Setup Data dialog Port RS 422 box appears RS 232C Type CPU LINK DST Station No Station No 0 to 31 GOT Station No D Combinations of Port and Type are as follows Connection destination Pot Type NB RS1 AC RS 422 RS 232C NB RS1 DC RS 422 RS 232C NJ RS4 RS 422 diced LINK NJ RS2 RS 232C NS RS1 RS 422 RS 232C NJ CPU B16 RS 232C RS 232C Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows a Open DU WIN b On the menu select File Open The Open dialog box Select and open read the file of the screen data to be changed appears d When changing Terminal GOT F900 select View Project The Project settings System Settings Project settings on the menu dialog box appears For the contents of setting refer to c in Creation above 16 10 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Manufactured by Fuji Electric 16 o 16 6 Cable Diagram 599 o 20 9 This section explains cable diagrams to connect the GOT F900 and the FLEX PC N Series P
502. ock switch m Z m CoD Oj Power indicator LED 1 LED green 8 switches green ouert 802281 Built in buzzer Provided Provided em Handy GOT F94LIGOT SBD H E F94LIGOT SBD RH E F94LIGOT LBD H E F94LIGOT LBD RH E 4 switches 4 switches a contact Operation switch 4 contacts 4 contacts 10 mV 24V DC common common Life 1 000 000 10 mV 24V DC 1 switch Life 1 000 000 JSHD4H2 1 switch times manufactured in 2a contact Grip switch assigned as key Sweden 1A 24V DC in display unit 3 positioned resistance load OFF ON OFF individual wiring 1 switch b contact 1 switch 2b contact Switch key AH165 VRO1 1A 24V DC AH165 VR02 1A 24V DC Emergency stop switch manufactured by resistance load manufactured by resistance load Fuji Electric Life 100 000 Fuji Electric Life 100 000 individual wiring times or more individual wiring times or more Operation indicator LED Function key LED Grip switch indicator LED Provided 1 switch with 2 keys c contact AS6M 2KT1PB 1A 24V DC Keylock switch manufactured by resistance load IDEC Life 100 000 Corporation times or more individual wiring Power indicator LED 1 LED green 1 LED green 1 Operation indicator LED 4 LED green 4 LED green amp Function key LED Grip switch indicator LED 1 LED green 1 LED green a MITSUBISHI 3 26 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 Handy GOT
503. od longer Turn on the second and later GOT When the screen data is transferred by The RS 232C port of the GOT F900 is allocated to GT Designer the screen creation software No another connected equipment bar code reader or DU WIN response from terminal etc is printer o gt displayed 520 Causes 1 RS 232C is specified for PLC connection 2 The bar code reader is set valid 3 The printer is set valid When the screen data is transferred by Confirm the settings above in the screen creation soa GOT F900 the screen creation software the software XE DATA TRANSFER screen does not SEH appear in the GOT F900 Countermeasures Select by hand the data transfer mode in the GOT F900 Start up the system screen display the SELECT 5 MODE screen select OTHER MODE DATA S40 TRANSFER on the menu then transfer the screen data zga gt 54 599 gue S38 MITSUBISHI 7 21 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Two or More GOT Units 7 MEMO a MITSUBISHI 7 22 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 8 8 Connection of MELSEC F Series PLC gt This chapter explains connection of the GOT F900 Series display unit to the FX Series PLC Connection Procedure This section introduces the procedure to connect the GOT F900 to the FX Series PLC 1 Preparation Wemmme Reference 4 System Condition You can learn the connection availab
504. og box appears b Click the Open button Open read the screen data to be changed d On the menu select Common GOT PLC Type The GOT PLC Type dialog box appears The PLC type selection item display varies depending on the software version as follows PLC type selection item display in GT Designer GT Designer MELSEC A 1 MELSEC A MELSEC A QnA MELSEC QnA SW1 A or later SW2 A or later SWA F or later Connection setting availability Available Available Available Select MELSEC A 1 Note that the selection item display is changed from MELSEC A QnA to MELSEC A and MELSEC QnA a MITSUBISHI 9 18 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 3 DU WIN E Operation Display screen name 3 Creation a Open DU WIN The Project settings dialog box appears b On the menu select File New Project Settings Terminal EO NNI PLC System C Cancel E DU System Language o Character Set Japanese Set the following T Terminal F940WGOT TWD V H 9 F940GOT LWD 5 F940GOT SWD F930GOT BWD y F920GOT BBD5 K PLC System MELSEC A Select Terminal in accordance with the LCD display color Terminal Model name F940WGOT TWD V F940WGOT color F940GOT black and white black and white F940GOT color Handy GOT color installation and Wiring of F940GOT F940GOT SWD F930GOT blue F930GOT K blue F920GOT BBD5 K F
505. oil MB MBO MB4095F device GOT internal bit register GB GB132 GB1023 Input register IW IWO IW7FFF s Holding register MW MWO MW32767 device GOT internal data register GD GD100 GD1023 1 Word address decimal Bit position hexadecimal MITSUBISHI Device number representation Hexadecimal Device number representation Hexadecimal 1 Decimal Hexadecimal Hexadecimal Decimal 3 17 Outline c E Q o installation and Wiring of F940GOT Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 5 FP Series manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works Setting range Device Device name number GT GT Designer DU WIN representation Input relay X 3 oo X511F X0000 X511F Output relay Y0000 Y511F Y0000 Y511F Decimal 6 Internal relay R R0000 R910F R0000 R910F Bit Link relay L 1 L0000 L639F L0000 L639F device Error alarm relay E 2 3 0 2047 0 2047 Timer contact T 3 TO T3071 TO T3071 Counter contact C 3 C0 C3071 C0 C3071 GOT internal bit register GB GB132 GB1023 GB132 GB1023 Pulse relays P and index registers IX IY and l are not available 1 FPO is excluded 2 Only FP2SH is available 3 Write is disabled 4 Special rela
506. on E o uw TE To power supply OLD S and operation AN C switches C ui Handy GOT ES on RS 232C 56 E To RS 422 EI power supply G3g and operation switches Total extension distance 6m 19 8 or less Connection of two or more GOT units 2g i m mm 1 x EN 82 a Microcomputer b RS 232C cable Remarks 5 9 F9GT HCAB 3M FE CPU direct connection B Prepared by the user 820 F9GT HCAB1 3M Make sure that the total cable extension distance A B C is 6 or less 15 son oz Onn a MITSUBISHI 14 5 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 14 3 Outline of Communication and Specifications When the GOT F900 is connected to the microcomputer the outline of data transfer and the communication specifications should be set as described below 14 3 1 Outline of Communication 1 Outline In microcomputer connection the microcomputer functions as the master station and the GOT F900 functions as the slave station The GOT F900 is equipped with the built in data area in which word data and bit data are stored The microcomputer executes read and write to this internal data area using Communication commands GOT F900 Microcomputer Screen data Screen displayY Write read command a 422 or Display RS 232C Input Interrupt output p p
507. on number is added 14 6 1 A 41H Available in versions in which connection of two or more GOT units is enabled n Consecutively writes data by as much as the specified number of 1 31H M points to the specified device Batch write command To the command above specification with the station number is added 14 6 2 B 42H Available in versions in which connection of two or more GOT units is enabled 3 33H Bit ori 13 33 Bit oriented write Wit specified bit device in a byte unit according to a pattern ic command Write specified data to all the devices between specified data and 14 6 4 specified data Compatible version of GOT F900 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT Handy GOT Batch read command Ver1 00 Ver4 60 Ver1 00 Ver1 00 Ver1 00 Batch write command Ver1 00 Ver4 60 Ver1 00 Ver1 00 Ver1 00 Bit oriented write command Ver4 50 Ver4 60 Ver6 50 Ver1 50 Ver6 50 Fill command Ver4 50 Ver4 60 Ver6 50 Ver1 50 Ver6 50 a MITSUBISHI 14 14 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 o 14 5 3 Data Transfer Format protocol 599 D The table below explains the data transfer format protocol when commands used TE Protocol list o Command Command Sue 0 30H 0 30H Soe 1 31H 1 31H FE 3 33H 3 33H seg 4 34H 4 Format while Sum check range data is 25 t
508. on selection 542 Cc gt or 9 190 RUN terminal function selection 190 RUN terminal function selection RUN terminal function selection E SU terminal function selection 191 SU terminal function selection s O E IPF terminal function selection 192 A B C terminal function selection e S 5 o cx 195 C terminal function selection 6 A B C terminal function selection cu pe 2 199 User s initial value setting E oc co FE eg 9o Q os C f o c y O O Qoo o cht 500 500 cu 8 Qoo MITSUBISHI 13 21 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 200 Programmed operation minute second selection a 201 Program seting Pf 202 Program seting Tf 203 Program seting Pf 204 Program seting Pf 205 Program seting Tf 206 Program seting Tf 207 Program seting fe 208 Program seting Pf 209 Program setting ff 210 Program seting Tf 211 Progamseting2 ff 212 Program seting2 Tf 213 Program seting2 Tf 214 Program seting2 Tf 215 Program seting2 EXEC AU a OO O a ee 7 aa S a RN ee al a fe o a 50 229 Program setting 3 230 Program setting 3 c Q O
509. on the This error is not displayed GOT F900 screen CAN NOT USE THE FUNCTION WHILE PROTECTED is This error is not displayed displayed on the GOT product product F900 screen PLC IS RUNNING is displayed on the This error is not displayed GOT F900 screen product product Earlier Earlier Earlier This error is not displayed than than than 1 10 6 10 4 10 1 10 or 6 10 or 4 10 or later later later a MITSUBISHI 15 22 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 2 Software S IE Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures EO 8 LI A SYSMAGC C Series PLC bar code reader or printer is SEH connected Causes The RS 232C connector to which the personal computer is 5 of connected is set to be used for another piece of equipment FE e Countermeasures seg In the GOT F900 select by hand SELECT MODE OTHER 9 Communication with the screen MODE DATA TRANSFER creation software and screen data Or set a bar code reader to invalid and a printer to DON T cannot be transferred USE 2 O l Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 9g and the personal computer coL 2 Causes The connected cable is not proper Or cable connection is not correct Countermeasures St Check the cable 99 XE Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Mach
510. on when switching screens Don t display cursor and key window When touch input is detected open key window at the same time M Use Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key I 8 Bo 225 Click the Setup tab 555 In the case of SW5D5C GOTR PACKE earlier than version P Setting is disabled in the S7 200 Project Auxiliary Settines x Basic Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Handy GOT settings 56 OK Opening Screen Time b Hiec Cancel Backlight Off Time 0 System Information Connection Buzzer Port Rs232 ON Type GPU v C OFF Station p H 2 _ Son O10 Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 20 13 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 e Set the following Port RS 232C Type CPU S7 200 DST Station No 1 to 31 GOT Station No to 31 57 300 DST Station No Station 02 to 31 00 and 01 are treated as 02 GOT Station No Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows The Select Project a Open GT Designer dialog box appears b Click the Open button c Open read the screen data to be changed d On the menu select Common GOT PLC Type The GOT PLC Type dialog box appears a MITSUBISHI 20 14 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SIMATIC S7 2
511. oning unit was referenced Example While the FX2N 10GM was connected a device provided only in the FX2N 20GM was specified for numeric input Cause On the changeover destination screen excluding the head DISPLAY SCREEN screen a nonexistent device in the connected FX Series tiani iti Wi Earlier Earlier IS NOT AVAILABLE positioning unit is specified is displayed on the Countermeasures than than GOT F900 screen Check the devices used on the head screen 6 00 4 00 There is an error on the screen to be displayed Cause One of the screen objects is placed outside the available Screen area Countermeasures Check the placement of screen objects a MITSUBISHI 12 10 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FX Series Positioning Unit FX 2N 10 20GM 12 Contents of troubl Check points and t OS version ontents of trouble eck points and countermeasures c o O MELSEC Q Series PLC The display screen contains an error DISPLAY SCREEN A device that does not exist the connected PLC is 6 00 or 4 00 or is o referenced on the screen one of the screen later later Sas displayed on the GOT 5 2 E objects is placed outside the available screen area 25 0 F900 screen CH Countermeasures Sx Check the devices used and placement of screen objects There is not data because the unit is new or th
512. onnection of FREQROL Inverter Connection of Microcom puter Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller FP Series PLC y c O Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 3 DU WIN Creation Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley 19 Operation a Open the DU WIN b On the menu select File New Project Settings Terminal PLO System DU System Language Character Set EO A Gn MELSEC Gn Q English Japanese I Cancel Set the following Terminal F940WGOT TWD V H Change method a MITSUBISHI F940GOT LWD F940GOT SWD F930GOT BWD PLC System AB SLC500 AB MicroLogix Select Terminal in accordance with the LC display color Terminal Model name F940WGOT TWD V F940WGOT color F940GOT black and white oo Handy GOT black and white F940GOT color Handy GOT color F930GOT K blue F930GOT blue F940GOT SWD F930GOT BWD d Set CPU direct connection RS 232C of the GOT F900 On the menu select CHAM agp System Settings Setup Data Setup Data x Cancel Opening Screen Time s Backlight Off Time min Connection Port Type PLC Station No GOT Station No When touch Mputdetectedm e Set the rem
513. onnection of MELSEC A MELSEC F FX Series PLC Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Two or More GOT Units 7 2 Cable for the GOT and the Handy GOT in connection of two or more GOT units C 2 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face Model name Application Connection diagram Application RS 422 connection Connection of two or more GOT units Prepared by the user F9GT HCAB LILIM m T F einen FG shield 4 1 5 6 9 9 pin D Sub male To cable F9GT HCAB or F9GT HCAB1 of F940 Handy GOT n SOI EO M ON M nn Oe DC24VG lt DC24VG SW lt Wire the power SW1 supply the operation switches QU and the SWS 4 emergency stop SWA lt switch ES1 ES1 lt DC24V DC24V a F9GT HCAB1 LILIM RS 232C connection a MITSUBISHI F9GT HCAB OOM GOT F900 FG shield 5 1 Drain 6 9 pin D Sub female To cable F9GT HCAB or F9GT HCAB1 of F943 Handy GOT Wire the power supply the operation switches and the emergency stop switch GES DC24V lt 4 DC24V lt 4 25 GY W F9GT HCAB1 OOM 4 7 18 GOT F900 SERIES
514. onnection of Peripheral Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Peripheral Equipment 6 6 4 2 Caution when transferring screen data to the F9220GOT K Caution on Start up Y Never connect any cable other than a screen data transfer cable to the RS 232C port on the F920GOT K when transferring screen data Otherwise it may cause critical damage to the F920GOT K or connected equipment such as a PLC and personal computer Do not connect the PLCs to the RS 232C port and RS 422 port on the F920GOT K at the same time Otherwise consequential effect or damage may be caused to the F920GOT K or PLCs When transferring screen data make sure to connect to the PLC which is turned on in order to supply power to the F920GOT K In the case of the FX A QnA Series PLC CPU direct connection Connect the PLC to the RS 422 port When connecting the FX A QnA Series PLC use the applicable RS 422 cables shown in the cable diagrams in Chapter 8 9 and 10 respectively A personal computer is to be connected to the RS 232C port via a screen data transfer cable TIAE ZA 8 AES 22252267 RS 422 Su s dau edm Cable E est co
515. operation as shown above jum to o cr cO Connection example Handy GOT RH model DSW 1 E 7 cok SEG DSW 2 HE 240 250 260 27 a 5 M m Neal 90E COM X1 cas As control signal to turn on off ower of external equipment As input signal of PLC E TAE When turn on and off the control signal of external equipment make sure that the load is 24V DC 1A contact specification or less Es co cok Pin assignment 889 External cable Signal name F9GT RHCAB LIM ex DSW se ors DSW as ec DSW 2 323 swa 45 soa co g cg 2 54 589 du Is OSH MITSUBISHI 5 37 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 9 12 2 9 12 3 Setting of Grip Switch LED The grip switch LED provided on the front face of the Handy GOT can be set as follows in the main unit or screen creation software 1 Setting in Main Unit of Handy GOT The following screen is displayed when selecting OTHER MODE SET UP MODE HANDY GOT SETTING HANDY GOT SETTING GRIP SWITCH USE PUSH BUTTON WRITE DOES NOT WRITE When using RH model of Handy GOT these settings are invalid SWITCH OFF ACTION TOUCH SWITCH OFF SUIT CONCU
516. or less z B FR A5NR a MITSUBISHI 13 4 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 o b When two or more inverters are connected 599 Up to 10 inverters can be connected through RS 422 g 900 0 Station number Station number 1 Station number 9 Inverter Inverter Inverter Handy GOT AAAA gt Seer rear 5 422 o 70000 ee 553 A 4 The FR A5NR PU port PU port PU port can be used 5 the 500 E Distributor Series 50 x D _ T Lr Terminal Prepared by the user resistor ous Cable 10BASE T twisted pair cable for the FR A5NR Total extension distance 11 5m 37 9 or less For connection between the GOT F900 and the distributor refer to a the previous page SE a a For connection between the distributors prepare connectors and cables while referring to section F 5 13 8 later Do not use the commercial straight connection type Ethernet 10BASE T cable 8 amp 3 Category 3 or 5 if this cable is used inverters will have a short circuit because the pins number 2 and 8 are connected to power supply Sample products
517. or separately PPly 9 Supplied from PLC prepared DC power supply 220mA 5V DC 300mA 24V DC 2 consumption 5 backlight OFF 180mA 5V DC 200mA 24V DC Built in irreplaceable Allowable momentary power failure time Built in lithium FX2NC 32BL battery life Approx 3 years 40 temperature Ambient humidity 35 to 85 RH no condensation Working Free from corrosive gas and much dusts atmosphere NENNEN LL a In conformance With intermittent 10 97Hz a 0 075mm Pu in d ofX Y an Operation continues against power failure of 5ms or less c E Q o installation and Wiring of F940GOT Vibration resistance to JIS B3502 vibration 57 150Hz 9 8m s 61131 2 With continuous 10 57Hz 0 035mm for 80 min directions installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Impact resistance In conformance to JIS B3502 and IEC 61131 2 147 m s 3 times in each of X Y and Z directions By noise simulator of 1 000 Vp p in noise voltage 1 us in noise width and 30 to 100 Hz in frequency BSE F fete Withstand 500V AC for 1 min 5 500V AC for 1 min 556 voltage between all power terminals and ground terminal Insulation 5 MQ or more by 500V DC 5 MQ or more by 500V DC megger resistance megger 5 between all power terminals and ground terminal 5 Class D grounding If grounding is impossible it be omitted
518. ot clear Yes LINo NS OW CIN TEES What do you think to the manual layout LIGood Not too bad JUnhelpful If there one thing you would like to see improved what is 1 Could you find the information you required easily using the index and or the contents if possible please identify your experience esseesesesssssseseeneen nennen nennen nnne nnns Thank you for taking the time to fill out this questionnaire We hope you found both the product and this manual easy to use MITSUBISHI i GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION a MITSUBISHI GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Guidelines for the Safety of the User and Protection of the Graphic operation terminal GOT F900 This manual provides information for the use of the Graphic operation terminal GOT F900 The manual has been written to be used by trained and competent personnel The definition of such a person or persons Is as follows a Any engineer who is responsible for the planning design and construction of automatic equipment using the product associated with this manual should be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that role These engineers should be fully aware of all aspects of safety with regards to automated equipment b Any commissioning or service engineer must be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards requ
519. over 8x8 SP109 6D ED Running frequency RAM SP110 Running frequency E2PROM SP111 oF Frequency monitor HE SP112 70 Output current monitor FEE SP113 71 8 Output voltage monitor SE SP114 X8 Dowd Special monitor Special SP115 73 F3 Special monitor selection No ar NN d SP SP116 Most recent No 1 No 2 alarm display clear T SP117 Le Most recent No 3 No 4 alarm display clear E S SP118 76 Most recent No 5 No 6 alarm display clear 585 SP119 m ose Most recent No 7 No 8 alarm display clear SP122 Inverter status monitor run command SP123 Operation mode acquisition SP125 Inverter reset SP127 Link parameter extension setting S A PG PR SP124 and SP125 can execute write only SP111 to SP114 can execute monitoring only Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Caution In the case of E500 S500 Series When SP127 is 1 and Pr37 is not 0 SP109 to SP111 cannot execute monitoring write read Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 1347 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 13 6 13 6 1 Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List This section describes for reference the list of comparison of parameters in the FREQROL Series inverters S500 E500 an
520. patibility when connecting SYSMAC C Series PLC CQM1 C200H COM port Connection type Version of screen GOT F900 OS version creation software Series F900 F920GOT K F930GOT The screen creation software version corresponds to the model of the GOT F900 Series Refer to section 3 2 Compatibility when connecting SYSMAC C Series PLC CS1 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT Handy GOT The screen creation software GT Designer version SW5 F version 5 05F or later which is applicable to the CS1 Series is required If screens are created using a version earlier than SW5 F version 5 05F or the DU WIN some devices extended in the CS1 Series cannot be set In such a case set devices in the range for the C200H Series The DU WIN will be applicable Classification of Host Link Serial Communication Units In this section the SYSMAC C Series units are classified as shown in the table below Classification Series Product model name Product type CQM1 CQM1 CPU equipped with built in RS 232C port equipped with built in RS 232C port set as host link unit C200H LK201 V1 Host link unit C200H C200H LK202 V 1 Host link unit CS1G H CPU V1 CPU equipped with built in serial equipped with built in RS 232C port communication board CS1W SCB41 Serial communication board CS1W SCB21 Serial communication board CS1W SCU 1 Serial communication unit The difference between the CS1 serial communication board and the CS1 serial co
521. pecial link register SW SW0 SW7FF SW0 SW7FF a TN32767 TO T32767 Timer T Word installation and Wiring of Handy GOT device CN32367 C0 C32367 Counter S E see 352 EFE Decimal Retentive timer present value SN SNO SN32767 SNO SN32767 5 File register RO R32767 2 RO R32767 2 Oo ul Index register Z 20 715 GOT internal data register GD 1 GD100 GD1023 GD100 GD1023 5 ooo 1 GB132 to GB255 and GD100 to GD127 in the F920GOT K See 2 File registers in a block changed over by the RSET instruction regarded as targets o5 SEG Restriction in set monitor in computer link for A Series When a computer link unit for the A Series is attached to the QnA CPU and the GOT F900 is connected to the unit the set monitor range is equivalent to that in the AnA CPU and the restriction shown in the eit table below is applied by the restriction in computer link s o Setting range Device Bog Device name number gus GT GT Designer DU WIN representation Timer Present value EL LAM 0 to 255 Timer Set value md Word Qu 4 Counter Present value to 255 Decimal Om evice o Counter Sel value HE Monitor and write disabled 599 cO mm 2 a MITSUBISHI 3 13 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 Specification of PLC number when using Q multiple PLC system Specify the PLC number when appointing the
522. pheral Equipment Connection of Two or More GOT Units Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC m c o O MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 In the case of SW4D5C GOTR PACKE earlier than version A perform the setting in the GOT F900 Set the connection in CONNECTION in the GOT F900 For the setting method refer to 1 GOT F900 Series on the previous page e Set the following Port RS 422 RS 232C Type CPU LINK DST Station No Station No 00 to 15 GOT Station No D Combinations of Port and Type are as follows Connection destination Pot Type QnA CPU direct connection CPU A computer link unit QnA computer link unit A computer link unit QnA computer link unit Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows The Select Project a Open the GT Designer dialog box appears b Click the Open button C Open read the screen data to be changed d On the menu select Common GOT PLC Type The GOT PLC Type dialog box appears The PLC type selection item display varies depending on the software version as follows PLC type selection item display in GT Designer GT Designer MELSEC A 1 MELSEC A MELSEC A QnA MELSEC QnA Q SW1 A or later SW2 A or later SW4 F or later Not available Available Connection setting
523. played on the GOT F900 if two word devices are located in the reverse order the correct value is not displayed because the most significant bit is regarded as Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC the sign or NN Specification by Memory inside GOT F900 microcomputer device name specified by screen creation software cx O O Word data 16 bits Double word data 32 bits 1FFFH D4095 L 1FFEH D4095 H S co gO oe E59 8228 59 9o 5 0 Sg 1 D shown in this chapter indicates a virtual device inside the GOT F900 but does not indicate any data register of the PLC o Em oon O ONA SDO gee Eoo ONA a MITSUBISHI 14 7 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 2 Bit data M The bit data consists of 2 048 points MO to M2047 The serial number address is assigned to each point Each address stores 8 bit data Specification by Memory inside GOT F900 microcomputer device name specified by screen creation software 1 Le je o a aum NEM NUMEN NENNEN UMEN eM Me ME M M GENE 107 3K 25 2E DE A9 3E E ENE AN BN V ENE 1 M shown in this chapter indicates a virtual device inside the GOT F900 but does not indicate any bit device of the PLC 3 Special memory The GOT is equipped with 16 word devices D8000 to D8015 and 64 bit devices M8000 to M8063 for special purpose For
524. power cable needs to be prepared by the user when transferring screen data o cat o 20 2 Rae c cor Connection of Peripheral Equipment RS 232C QCPU F920GOT K Personal computer Select a cable for connecting personal computers from the table above e The cable to connect QCPU units should be prepared by the user in reference to Cable Diagram in Chapter 11 For details refer to Caution on Use of Peripheral Equipment described later Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 6 3 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Peripheral Equipment 6 6 2 2 Sequence Program Transfer two port interface function built Sequence program transfer and monitoring can be executed through the two port interface function built in the GOT F900 GOT F900 Personal computer COT Fa a RS 232C cable s 4 gt GX Developer Handy FXGP WIN GOT 5 Nessie e i Two port interface built FXCPU direct connection D ACPU direct connection QnACPU direct connection QCPU direct connection Q computer link connection QnA computer link connection
525. pper right corner The SET UP MODE screen appears b Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears c Set the following PLC TYPE QnA Q SERIES QnA CPU QnA computer link A SERIES A computer link CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 422 CPU PORT RS 232C LINK PORT RS 422 LINK PORT RS 232C DST STATION STATION 00 to 15 GOT STATION Connection PLC TYPE CONNECTION STATION destination QnACPU direct CPU PORT CPU PORT QnA computer RS 422 link unit Sinn Seriesi OPU PORT RS 232C LINK PORT A computer link A Series or RS 422 QnA Q Series LINK PORT RS 232C a MITSUBISHI 10 13 Introduction Outline Specifications installation and Wiring of F940GOT installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More GOT Units Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 529 oon DH oll o O20 Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 When the main menu screen change operation is enabled Operation Display screen name a Press the upper left corner of the screen The position to be The SELECT MODE screen appears pressed can be changed in the GOT and the screen creation software Press OTHER MODE on the menu The OTHER MODE screen appears c Press SET UP MODE on the menu The SET UP MODE screen appears d Press PLC TYPE The
526. printer connection and GOT system in the screen creation software Common screen Base screen Overlap window 1 Overlap window 2 lt 34 Overlapped screens The total sum of devices from the Common screen only in the DU WIN software and each of the screens is calculated while referring to the table on the next page and should be within the range shown above Correct monitoring cannot be executed if too many devices are connected a MITSUBISHI 23 4 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Appendix 23 5 Connected PLC AnA Connected PLC AnN A2C A1S A0J2H 9 5 cE Number of Number of 6a objects used objects used Number Numerical Display Number Numerical Display Bar Es 16 bits Bar En 16 bits Number Numerical Display Number Numerical Display ae Bar Graph 32 bits Bar 32 bits EOS Indicator Lamp ac Indicator Lamp Device settings other than Input X Device settings Input X Change Screen Display screen Change Screen Display screen changeover changeover using device Device settings other than Input X conditions Device settings Input X Q lt The current value and indirectly specified value set by the Number Numerical Display and Bar Graph is counted The device conditions used in the Change screen Display screen changeover setting is counted When performing the screen display or screen overlap make sure the total number of devices on displayed screens does not exceed the tot
527. r or later Q2AHCPU Q2ASCPU Q2ASH S1 CPU QnA 3 00 2 00 computer or later or later link connection MELSEC QnA QnAS Series a MITSUBISHI 3 2 CPU direct connection RS 422 Serial communication unit AJ71QC24 AJ71QC24 R2 AJ71QC24 R4 A1SJ71QC24 RS 232C A1SJ71QC24 R2 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 S UID 8 Connected equipment name and series RS 232C of two or 3 name RS 422 940W 940 930 920 more GOT yp system system system system Wee name 5 MELSEC Q Series CPU direct connection 100 410 2 20 1 00 11 2 1 Q02CPU Q02HCPU 006 or later or later or later or later Q12HCPU Q25HCPU OCPU MELSEC Q Series RS 232C direct CPU direct connection 1 30 6 30 4 30 1 00 or later later or later or later Meee Q multiple PLC system Ver B or later Q02CPU QO2HCPU Q06HCPU vy Q12HCPU Q25HCPU c E Q o 11 2 2 computer connection 11 2 3 GM direct 155 4 connection INV direct 13 24 connection Y connect Cannot connect or later or later CPU direct connection 1 00 4 10 2 20 Serial communication unit or later QJ71C24 QJ71C24 R2 RS 232C MELSEC Q Series RS 422 CPU direct connection Rs 422 130 630 4 30 Serial communication unit aier Q multiple PLC system Ver B or later RS 232C QJ71024 QJ71024 R2 FX S
528. r The screen No has not been created yet later later e Countermeasures Create the screen A device that does not exist in the FLEX PC N Series PLC was referenced Cause On the changeover destination screen excluding the head screen a nonexistent device in the connected FLEX PC N DISPLAY SCREEN Series PLC is specified IS NOT AVAILABLE Countermeasures aud is displayed on the Check the devices used on the head screen than than 6 00 4 00 GOT F900 screen There is an error on the screen to be displayed Cause One of the screen objects is placed outside the available screen area Countermeasures Check the placement of screen objects a MITSUBISHI 16 14 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Manufactured by Fuji Electric 16 m RT OSvesin 32 ontents of trouble eck points and countermeasures The display screen contains an error DISPLAY SCREEN A device that does not exist the connected PLC is 6 00 or 4 00 or is referenced on the screen No or one of the screen later later yE displayed on the GOT 5 2 E objects is placed outside the available screen area 5 0 F900 screen CH Countermeasures Sx Check the devices used and placement of screen objects There is not data because the unit is new or the memory clear has been executed 5 Cause 525 Th
529. r SW FGR 14 gt common Wire the power SB 15 gt SW supply the BK W 16 gt SW2 operation R W 17 gt SW3 switches and GR W 18 gt SWA PES Switch Y W 22 lt gt ES BL W 24 DC24V GY W 25 gt DC24V J A FeGT HCAB1 HEM s MITSUBISHI 19 18 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley 19 19 9 Troubleshooting 599 o 20 9 For reference this section summarizes frequently asked questions about connection of the GOT F900 Sus to the SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC manufactured by Allen Bradley 1 GOT F900 WN Check Boin and OSversion ontents of trouble eck points and countermeasures coz F940W F940 F930 8 8 The power of the SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC is turned off Cause 5 Communication is disabled because the power of the 5 COMMUNICATION si c500 MicroLogix Series PLC is turned off 50 5 ERROR OCCURS is Countermeasures displayed when Turn on the power Snes screen changeover or numeric data input is Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 and product product product performed on the the SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC 2 GOT F900 screen c e Causes 2 E The wrong cable is used or the connection is bad e o 5 Countermeasures ss 5 Check the cable Changeover to a nonexistent screen by a touch key or the DISPLAY SCREEN
530. r from the GOT communication to the PU operation mode 13 11 13 4 3 When 8888 or 9999 is set to a parameter Pr of the inverter 13 11 13 4 4 Specification of the program operation PG 13 12 13 4 5 Caution on setting of the calibration parameters Pr900 to Pr905 13 12 13 4 6 Restriction in simultaneous specification of PG and Pr devices on one screen 13 12 13 4 7 Caution on connecting to the PU port only in the E500 and the A500 13 12 13 5 Correspondence Between Devices of GOT and Parameters 13 13 13 0 FRHEQROL Inverter Parameter copa ree Bela n DO S e Ra ch dO PR Ed 13 18 Paramielelsu eni de ee b o a tumet Uc adu lug ead 13 18 13 6 2 Communication Parameters nnns 13 25 13 7 Setting of Connected Equipment for amp 13 26 15 9 Cable DIagtalTi o ciet 13 29 13 9 Troubleshoot Van bes 13 32 14 Connection of Microcomputer 14 1 PAT OV SIC IM OMGINIO EE 14 2 142 OY Ste MrGONNOUl AON sen deca dide tuas 14 3 14 2 1 Configuration for CPU Direct Connection
531. r was referenced Example While a MP900 is connected a device exists only in the 92005 is specified for numeric input 59 of Cause cox On the changeover destination screen excluding the head screen a nonexistent device in the connected machine DISPLAY SCREEN controller is specified Earlier Earlier iPad LET Countermeasures than than 59 Is displayed on the Check devices used on the head screen 6 00 4 00 So GOT F900 screen Dus There is an error on the screen to be displayed EN St Cause One of the screen objects is placed outside the available screen area 5 Countermeasures 5 Check the placement of screen objects goo ate 529 o ONA a MITSUBISHI 17 13 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Machine Controller CP9200SH PLC Manufactured by Yaskawa Electric 17 Contents of troubl Check points and t OS version ontents of trouble eck points and countermeasures The display screen contains an error 6 00 or 4 00 or later later A device that does not exist in the machine controller was Earlier Earlier referenced Example While a MP900 is connected a device than than exists only in the CP9200SH is specified for numeric input 6 00 4 00 DISPLAY SCREEN IS NOT AVAILABLE NO is displayed on the GOT F900 screen Causes A device that does not exist in the connected PLC is referenced on the screen No or one of the screen ob
532. ransmitted aa of two more GOT units is enabled gt or more GOT units is enabled ZO GOT Command Command EOL TARON STX A 41H Station Data CR STX Station Data or more GOT B 42H No No Ont 02H D 44H E 45H units 02H Sum check range SE When read ETX FE command O22 Format of ic 03H response data transmitted gt in normal status Sum check range 5 When write sog microcomputer Command 256 cago transmitted Format of response data when error has occurred gt GOT microcomputer 529 96 Cx Format of interrupt output Interrupt GOT microcomputer output data c 14 5 4 Character Code List E o The following characters are available in statements Interrupt codes include unused codes FE es e Character code hexadecimal hexadecimal 80F FFH Valid only when data length is 8 bits ES c A F 41 46H ge dE o 529 gon ODD 14 15 MITSUBISHI GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 14 5 5 Station Number Setting When connecting two or more GOT units When connecting two or more GOT units to the microcomputer add a station number 1 to 31 to the command of microcomputer and then set th
533. read command As the trigger of change the interrupt code can be transmitted a MITSUBISHI 14 6 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 o 14 3 2 Communication Setting Specifications 599 vy The table below shows the transmission specifications available in the GOT F900 TE oet the transmission specifications in accordance with those in the microcomputer Setting range Setting in microcomputer Baud rate rate 19200 or 9600 or 4800 or 2400 or 1200 or 600 or 300 bps Lo S Data bit None even or odd i E05 control a _ or XON XOFF Setting invalid For the iud F900 transmission specifications setting method refer to section 14 7 O l 14 4 Memory Map EE FE The data stored the GOT F900 is classified into word data and bit data An address is assigned to each data and each data is positioned as described below 14 4 1 Data Area 2 S The microcomputer specifies data by address The screen creation software specifies data by D or M 99 coeg 1 Word data D 653 There are 4096 word devices DO to D4095 A serial number address is assigned to each of them a Word data 16 bits Each 8 bit word data is lined in the order of upper side H and lower side L b Double word data 32 bits Each 16 bit word data is lined from the higher address to the lower address When a 32 bit numeric value is dis
534. reation software Compatibility when connecting SIMATIC S7 200 Series PLC COM port Connection type Ol sereen GOT F900 OS version creation software Series of GOT F900 RS 232C GT Designer DU WIN GOT units F930GOT P cw F930GOT EN NN F940GOT F940WGOT SW5 R 2 52 It cannot be connected Select the F943 F940 Handy GOT Handy GOT Compatibility when connecting SIMATIC S7 300 400 Series PLC COM port Connection type vue ien GOT F900 OS version creation software Series of GOT F900 RS 232C more GT Designer DU WIN GOT units F930GOT SW5 F 2 40 SW5 26C 2 70 a __ F930GOT K Poe c e ERN v v F940WGOT It cannot be connected Select the F943 F940 Handy GOT F943 Handy GOT Handy GOT v v SWS a MITSUBISHI 20 2 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 o 20 2 System Configuration 599 The SIMATIC 57 200 300 400 Series PLC be directly connected the GOT via RS 232C This Sus section explains the cables and options required in such a system 20 2 1 Configuration for CPU Direct Connection RS 232C H Connect the connector
535. refer SB 5 SW1 supply the cod to chapter 5 BK W 16 gt SW2 operation 8 R W 7 gt SW3 switches and GR W 18 gt SWA Bs emergency 21 gt ES Z Y W 22 gt ES1 BL W 24 lt gt DC24V 529 GY W 25 lt gt DC24V J 805 cx F9GT HCAB 1 LILIM 345 RS 422 F9GT HCAB OOM connection Drain We FG D grounding wire Saaremaa Bs 2 oc W 3 12 9 4 t 4 cable F9GT HCAB 2905 5 ausi SE Y 6 3 Sao 13 BR 7 3 4 FX206M OSs e BL 8 14 2 e GR 9 5 o 25 14 P 7 11 20 50 Prepared by the user 25 gin D Sub female 10 20 pin D Sub male o i 20 Ow The diagram on the right 8 52 d shows the wiring of the s 1 01 RS 422 signals For wiring Hood 5o of the operation switches OL and the power supply refer PL 12 DC24VG to chapter 5 PK 13 gt DC24VG FGR 14 gt common Wire the power SB 15 SWI supply the BK W 16 gt SW2 operation 5 R W 17 lt gt SW3 switches and Bon GR W 18 4 gt SWA E 21 gt ES1 OJo Y W 22 lt 4 gt ES1 BL W 24 gt DC24V GY W 25 gt DC24V J FoGT HCABI DIEM ae SE o ca SSS 2 a MITSUBISHI 12 9 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FX Series Positioning Unit FX 2N 10 20GM 12 12 6
536. respondence between interrupt 145 7 j codes and event types cr TOo 205 H MITSUBISHI 14 1 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 14 1 Description Reference Command Details You can learn the operation of each communication command Batch Read The format used to read data from the Command RD GOT to the microcomputer Batch Write The format used to write data from the Command WR microcomputer to the GOT Bit oriented Write The format used to write the bit device to 1 Command the GOT according to a specified pattern 1 Fill Command The format used to write data to a specified range in the GOT 14 6 1 4 6 2 4 6 3 4 6 4 4 6 5 Interrupt Code The function of interrupt code Setting of Connected Set the PLC microcomputer type and the communication specifications Equipment for GOT using the GOT or the screen creation software 3 Others Cable Diagram Cable diagrams for Microcomputer GOT connection Troubleshooting Description of errors and how to fix them BASIC Program Example BASIC programs for the personal computer connected to the GOT for 14 10 communication System Condition When connecting the microcomputer check the COM port designation the OS version of the GOT F900 and applicable versions of the screen creation software Compatibility when connecting microcomputer COM port Connection type Maon GOT F900 OS version creation software Series of GOT F900
537. ress is regarded as the station number in the GOT F900 Align the slave address setting switch to the value 1 to 16 set in the GOT F900 If the station number of the GOT F900 is set to 00 it is treated as 01 a MITSUBISHI 17 6 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Machine Controller CP9200SH PLC Manufactured by Yaskawa Electric 17 17 4 Setting of Connected Equipment for GOT 599 o The machine controller MP900 CP9200SH connection parameters be set using the GOT F900 Series Sus or the screen creation software GT Designer and DU WIN 1 GOT F900 Series When the main menu screen change operation is disabled 9 a u a While pressing and holding the upper left corner of the screen The LANGUAGE screen appears 8x8 turn on the power Keep holding the upper left corner for about 25 seconds more Then press END at the upper right corner The SET UP MODE screen appears H b Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears Set the following Se 5 PLC TYPE YASKAWA CP9200SH CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 422 CPU PORT RS 232C DST STATION STATION 01 to 16 00 is treated as 01 GOT STATION D c I When the main menu screen change operation is enabled SE Display screen name FE a Press the upper left corner of the screen The position to The SELECT MODE screen appears pressed be changed in the GOT and the scr
538. ring of Handy GOT 5 5 9 Wiring and Handling of Operation Switches SW1 to SW4 E 5 This section explains the wiring and the use of the operation switches and the grip switch as well as E control of the LEDs for confirming pressing of the switches 5 9 1 Handling of operation switches This section explains the use of the operation switches and control of the LEDs for confirming pressing of the switches 2 The switches should be wired by the user LED indication is executed through communication 8 1 Wiring the operation switches The operation switches are assigned as follows and connected to the PLC through an external cable Connection example 3 Handy GOT SW EA E E E SW1 sw2 swa sw jum to o cr cO G 0 5 RES 525 Co Pin layout ESE External cable Conversion box Signal name F9GT HCAB LIM F9GT HCAB1 LIM F9GT RHCAB LIM F9GT HCNB 5 swoom 4 Fesgen R SWOOM Bg cc S26 In the wire colors of the F9GT HCAB1 OM the indication Color 1 Color 2 indicates striped two 882 colors 55 590 2 Input of operation switches Use the operation switches of the Handy as follows How to use the operation switches 5x Because the operation switches SW1 to SW4 are directly connected to inputs of the PLC they can TE be controlled freely by programs in the PLC in the same way as general inputs Er An operation swi
539. rm History Buzzer Sound serial Communication If the window is closed select View Project Screen List on the menu LED setting c Click the Objects button The Objects Scr Common window appears d Select Object Indicator Output Indicator on the menu Output Indicator is displayed in the New Object Type field on the Mew Object Tvpe Output Indicator Objects Scr Common Bl Objects Scr Common Project window PEELE z Delete Exit e Click the Insert button The Output Indicator ERES dialog box appears Bit Device M100 DL Output Cancel Operating when Cun D Gti Input a bit device to be assigned and click OK Refer to Caution on setting of Output Indicator below Close all windows except the Screen List window Switch setting f Select Common Screen on the Screen List window by clicking it to be highlighted To enable the switch function for all the screens select Common Screen To enable it for an user screen select an arbitrary screen If the Screen List window is closed select View Project Screen List on the menu MITSUBISHI 4 28 installation and Wiring of installation Connection of Peripheral Connection of Two or More GOT Units Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC and Wiring of Handy GOT Introduction Outline
540. rnal devices have no relevance to the devices in the connected PLC or the memory of the microcomputer board they can be used without regard to the connected equipment These internal devices in the GOT F900 can be rewritten by the status monitoring function the switch function and the numeric value input function and used for lamp indicator numeric value display switch condition etc Available screen creation software GT Designer from the first version DU WIN from Version 2 50 and later Allocation of devices for internal processing i i Device number Device name Available range representation GBO to GB131 Not available except devices in table a GB GOT internal devi EN PN device GB GOT internal device Ga 135 10 GB255 Available ecima GB256 to GB1023 Available excluding the F9220GOT K K GDO to GD99 Not available except devices in table Word below GD GOT internal device T device GD100 to GD127 Available GD128 to GD1023 Available excluding the F9220GOT K GBOto GB 131 and GD 0 to GD 99 are used for the processing inside the GOT F900 Note however that the devices with functions shown below are available for user use uno Fumo GD13 to G Current time day of week GB19 to 131 Not to be used GB132 to GB1023 For user s use Not to be used GD8 GD9 Upper limit of input numerical value 32 bit 1 Buzzer is available in the following OS GD10 GD11 Lower limit of input n
541. rt in the computer link unit may be included in a package 9 3 5 Cable Specifications and Length 1 Cable for RS 422 excluding the Handy GOT Any cable satisfying the following specifications can be used Conductor resistance at 20 C Insulation resistance Electrostatic capacity at 1kHz Characteristics impedance at 100kHz Recommended cable SPEV SB MPC 0 2 x 3P MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES LTD SPEV SB 0 2 x The recommended cables SPEV SB MPC 0 2 x 3P and SPEV SB 0 2 x 3P are equivalent in the electrical characteristics but partially different in the outside dimension and the internal wire color 2 Cable for RS 232C excluding the Handy GOT Use a cable less than 15m 49 3 in conformance to the RS 232C standard Recommended cable 7 0 127LIP HRV SV L1 Specifies the number of pairs RS 232C cable manufactured by Oki Electric Cable Company Limited Example In the case of 13 pairs 7 0 127 13P HRV SV a MITSUBISHI 9 14 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 9 4 Caution on Use of MELSEC A Series PLC E 5 When using the GOT F900 connected to the A Series PLC observe the following caution on use E 9 4 1 Caution when the GOT F900 is connected to the computer link unit When the GOT is connected the CH1 and the CH2 of the computer link unit cannot be used at the same time Accordingly only one GOT uni
542. s Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 2 Cable for the Handy GOT RH model and the PLC C 3 Female type Male type Model name The connector figure shows the engagement face Application Connection diagram Application RS 422 connection F9GT RHCAB 3M F9GT RHCAB 6M F9GT RHCAB 10M RS 232C connection To F9GT RHCAB2 150 The connector on the F9GT RHCABS 150 leader side of the Handy GOT is dedicated e O O Dedicated connector cannot be prepared by the user 14 25 37 pin D Sub male shows the wiring of the RS 422 signals For wiring of the operation RS 422 connection F9GT RHCAB2 150 The diagram on the right 1 13 F9GT RHCAB OOM gt FG 5 15 be mu Class D FXiN FX2N FX2NC Drain wire F9GT RHCAB e 14 25 37 pin D Sub female 1545 2 O Se VOCI AAAAAAA ee ee Ree 5 ppm MINI DIN male Co N switches and the power supply refer to chapter 5 OO ONO ON NN I ll 4 C2 eee Nees No N N N Wire the power NO O supply the TO operation TO N c switches and N the emerge
543. s Pulse Catch Bits Background Time Portis Retentive Ranges Password Output Table Input Filters Port 0 Port 1 Defaults PLC Address 2 range 1 126 Highest Address 31 range 1 126 Baud Rate 192 kbps X Retry Count 3 range 0 8 Gap Update Factor 10 range 1 100 Configuration parameters must be downloaded before they take effect Not all PLO types support every System Block option Press F1 to see which options are supported by eac Aa MITSUBISHI 20 6 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 o d Transfer the program to the PLC 590 son im 2 Setting of the PC PPI cable 6ES7 901 3BF20 0XA0 SER Set the DIP switches as shown below DIP switch down 0 up side 1 GOT F900 57 200 CPU Sut stis 000000000000 ogs FE RS 232C B4 o FE c i cable 50 2 o LI S 99 c o m Band Rate Sog SWITCH 123 oza 000 38 4 kbit 001 19 2 kbit 010 2 9 6 kbit 5 100 2 4 kbit 101 1 2 kbit son FE SWITCH 4 1 10 BIT 858 0211 BIT SWITCH 5 1 DTE 0 DCE 5 20 e x 8 oc BE e r5 590 OSS 59 9o Sg 8 XE
544. s E software version 5 lt When the DU WIN version is 2 50 or later gt 3 o Opening Screen Time 4 Backlight Off Time min O Connection Port R5422 v PLG Station No 0 jum G 0 GOT Station Handy GOT Setting Use GripSwitch Pressed writ Wie T cS ressed writing 6 2o Switch OFF operation Touch Switch Of v EO a LED operation Concurrently With Grip Switch Sse ESI When the DU WIN version is earlier than 2 507 295 Opening Screen Time 4 B25 Backlight Off Time min 10 MICE S pae 5 55 Port RS422 Type GPU v Station No 5 Use GripSwitch o exu h Click Use GripSwitch to display the check mark 55 When using the grip switch function making it valid display the check mark When not using it making it invalid do not display ero the check mark Caution on setting of Output Indicator 5x LL 1 The contents of Output Indicator you have set are not displayed on the screen Sud i 2 check box is valid only in the Handy GOT Never set the check box any other series p 9 c t 3 Set Output Indicator only on the common screen Even if it is set on a user screen it does 838 function 4 Make sure that the bit device assigned on the Output Indicator dialog
545. s el 94 99 o gt o EZO o 45 gt 9o Ou o oc 59 cco oS SEF 59 9o BL St o Em oon FE 595 gee Eoo ONA a MITSUBISHI 13 7 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 2 Communication setting in inverter oet the following parameters using the PU parameter unit to realize the communication specifications of the GOT F900 Though these parameters can be monitored from the GOT F900 do not change them If they are changed communication with the GOT F900 is disabled Parameter number A500 A500 E500 arameter PU FR ASNR PU p Contents of setting Pr 117 Pr 331 pr 117 Inverter station 00 31 10 inverters can be number connected at maximum Pr 118 Pr 332 118 Communication speed 192 19200 bps 10 Data length 7 bits Pr 119 Pr 333 Pr 119 Stop bit length Stop bit 1 bit Communication S500 RS 485 1 m 2 2 3 2 0 No parity check Pr 120 Pr 334 Pr 120 Parity check yes no 1 1 Odd parity 2 Even parity Communication retry 121 335 121 couri A500 9999 No abnormal stop E500 9999 Communication check 23002995 122 336 mit 500 999 Communication check stop time interval 7 123 Pr 337 Pr 123 Waiting time setting Oms CReE LF yes no CR Provided n11 Pr 124 Pr 341 Pr 124 1 LF Not provided Pr79
546. s function allocation for touch keys however note that no key code setting is available Table of function key allocation Screen of DU WIN DU WIN F920GOT K F930GOT K mark indicates switch operation has already allocated External Key 0 MH keys Scr Common Projecti New Object T Brema Key 2 Functions oe emake 78 05 memet m m Delete Change Screen No 10 Exit a MITSUBISHI 4 24 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 9 gt pb p Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Cautions on Installation Usethe Handy GOT in the environment for the general specifications described in this manual Never use the Handy GOT in a place with dusts soot conductive dusts corrosive gas or flammable gas place exposed to high temperature condensation or wind and rain or place subject to vibrations and impacts If the Handy GOT is used in an unfavorable place described above electrical shock fire or malfunction damages or deterioration of the Handy GOT may be caused Never drop cutting chips and electric wire chips into the ventilation window of the Handy GOT when you drill screw holes or perform wiring Otherwise fire failure or malfunction may be caused e Connect connection cables securely to the specified connectors while the power is turned OFF Imperfect connection may cause malfunction or failure
547. s cannot be monitored or such as GX transferred Communication with the sequence and FX WIN software is disabled An error message is displayed only in QnA CPU direct connection Communication with the screen creation software and screen data cannot be transferred a MITSUBISHI QnA PLC bar code reader or printer is connected Causes The RS 232C connector to which the personal computer is connected is set to be used for another piece of equipment Countermeasures For monitoring or transferring sequence programs set a bar code reader to invalid and a printer to DON T USE If the PLC is connected select the GOT F900 equipped with two built in RS 232C channels Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 and the personal computer e Causes The wrong cable is used or the connection is bad e Countermeasures Check the cable QnA computer link bar code reader or printer is connected Causes The RS 232C connector to which the personal computer is connected is set to be used for another piece of equipment Countermeasures In the GOT F900 select by hand SELECT MODE OTHER MODE DATA TRANSFER Or set a bar code reader to invalid and a printer to DON T USE Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 and the personal computer e Causes The connected cable is not proper Or cable connection is not correct e Countermeasures Check the cable 10 26 GOT F900 SERIES CON
548. s enabled in the SW4D5C GOTR PACKE version A appears o or later m Make Serial Port Setup Language and Menu Key valid S52 XH Basic Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Handy GOT settings 62 i OK Key window Cursor display setting Cancel Action when switching screens Don t display cursor and key window 5 When touch input is detected open key window at the same time ae 0390 Oro Click the Setup tab Project Auxiliary Settings 5 Basic Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Handy GOT settings Su su oN i Opening Screen Time sec T o Backlight Off Time 10 Min 8 Y r Connection Buzzer Port R5422 ON Type CPU Y C OFF o Station No oO o Ed o olg oa 599 EP EJO g MITSUBISHI 9 17 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 In the case of SW4D5C GOTR PACKE earlier than version A perform the setting in the GOT F900 Set the connection in CONNECTION in the GOT F900 For the setting method refer to 1 GOT F900 Series on the previous page e Set the following Port RS 422 RS 232C Type CPU LINK DST Station No Station No 00 to 15 GOT Station No D Combinations of Port and Type are as follows RS 422 Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows The Select project a Open GT Designer dial
549. s related to the grip switch ON OFF status Even whilea 5 T touch key is ON the control target bit device is set to OFF when the grip switch is released 255 c c Others 839 When the grip switch is pressed while the screen is blacked out by the screen save function the screen save function is released and the screen display becomes active 4 LED operation ce o 1 It can be selected whether the LED ON OF status is controlled by the grip switch ON OFF status gg controlled by the PLC or always set to OFF HE Selection item Description ozo CONCURRENTLY WITH GRIP SWITCH While the grip switch is being pressed the LED on the front panel is lit CONCURRENTLY WITH BIT DEVICE The LED on the front panel is lit or extinguished by a bit device of the PLC oO ALWAYS OFF The LED on the front panel is always extinguished goa o o When LED ACTION is set to CONCURRENTLY WITH BIT DEVICE the setting to assign a bit Sus device of the PLC is required For the details refer to section 5 8 54 589 mm 2 Aa MITSUBISHI 5 35 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 5 11 4 Communication with connected equipment grip switch ON OFF signal The grip switch ON OFF status can be confirmed in a bit device Have in mind that the bit device number varies depending on the screen creation software In the Handy GOT while the grip switch is being pressed the GRIP SW LED on the front face Is lit in green 1
550. saaeees 7 9 7 5 2 Transfer of sequence program and use of monitor 7 10 7 6 Setting of Connected Equipment for 7 11 7 6 1 Connection Type RS 422 RS 232C setting 7 11 7 6 2 Station Number Setting seeeeessssessssssseseeeeeeee nennen nnns 7 11 70 9 OCUN zdrele ie ld TET m 7 12 FE Ge IBI eae UM 7 17 re 7 21 8 Connection of MELSEC F FX Series 8 1 SYSTEM T em 8 1 9 2 System COMMGUFATO Michie cadet nutu dud baee 8 2 8 2 1 Configuration for CPU Direct Connection 422 8 2 8 2 2 Configuration for CPU Direct Connection 5 2320 8 4 8 3 Cautions on Use of MELSEC F FX 8 6 9 9 1 Device SDeCITICalIO LI susci ul 8 6 8 3 2 Devices which can be 8 6 8 3 8 When GOT F900 is connected to optional 8 6 8 3 4 Restrictions in connecting two or more F920GOT K units to FX Series
551. screen S DATA IS NOT 50 FOUND is While the Q Series PLC is not connected the 5 displayed on the connection mode for the A Series PLC is selected ges GOT F900 screen Cause Check for the A or Q Series was executed the T connection mode was automatically changed over M then the device range was checked 59 This error occurs when the device range set on the FE head screen is beyond the range for the Q Series EPT The head screen is the screen No 1 in the GT Designer and the screen No 0 in the DU WIN Countermeasures 5 Connect the PLC 520 There is data because the unit is new or the 525 memory clear has been executed pul Cause There is no screen data Countermeasures Se Write the screen data using the screen creation 3 software FF mM Earlier Earlier Earlier ui This error is not displayed than than than is displayed on the 1 10 6 10 410 GOT F900 screen l 59 CAN NOT WRITE oF a 1 10 oo is displayed on the This error is not displayed Moni 25 GOT F900 screen Sa CAN NOT USE THE FUNCTION WHILE From From PROTECTED is This error is not displayed first first E displayed on the product product product product 5 GOT F900 screen goo PLC IS RUNNING From From EO is displayed on the This error is not displayed first first GOT F900 screen product product product product sog Pe MITSUBISHI 11 2
552. screen data Operating procedures 1 While pressing and holding the upper left corner of the screen turn on the power Keep holding for a while 2 The LANGUAGE screen appears Press END 3 The SET UP MODE screen appears Press END 4 The SELECT MODE screen appears Press OTHER MODE 5 The OTHER MODE screen appears Press DATA TRANSFER 6 Transfer screen data Not automatically GOT F900 changed over DATA TRANSFER o RS 232C port function priority The setting for the function with higher priority is confirmed first If the function has been set the one with lower priority is not executed For example if a connected equipment PLC or bar code reader is set valid screen data transfer or sequence program transfer and monitor is not enabled because those functions have lower priority as shown in the table Rank order RS 232C functions Connected equipment PLC general purpose equipment 2 port interface function 1 Screen data transfer mode 1 Available only in the FX A or QnA Q Series CPU direct connection including the QnA or Q serial communication However when using the F920GOT K available only in the FX Series CPU direct connection MITSUBISHI 6 9 Introduction Outline Specifications installation and Wiring of F940GOT c m 2 c cor Equipment C
553. sg Protective 252 6 7 6 cok ice Equivalent to IP65f Equivalent to IP54 889 Display A h ki ORO iod i 50 000 hours working temperature 25 Guarantee period is 1 year Backlight 4 7 5 Cold cathode tube working temperature 25 C Guarantee period is 1 year Qu EN g 1 When the power is turned on the current consumption of 750 mA 24V DC maximum is applied 8 8 2 0 to 50 C when the screen is installed laterally 0 to 40 C when the screen is installed longitudinally or horizontally 3 0 to 40 C when the extension interface is used 4 The life of the backlight above indicates the value at 25 C 5 Between all power terminals of the PLC and ground terminal 6 The relevancy is confirmed in the test for IP65f or IP54 However this test result does not provide any guarantees that the product stands against use in all sorts of environment 7 As regarding the front panel Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC a MITSUBISHI 3 25 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 2 Switch lamp buzzer specifications L1 of the GOT model name indicates 0 or 3 F940WGOT F940GOT F930GOT K F930GOT F920GOT K F940WGOT F940GOT SWD E F930GOT F930GOT F920GOT SWD E F940GOT LWD E BBD K E BWD E BBD5 K E Function key 6 switches Grip switch Operation switch Emergency stop switch L3 Switch key Keyl
554. sing a different OHP sheet use the following type Make sure that the selected OHP sheet can be used in a copy specification Recommended OHP sheet Material Polyester film Thickness 0 1mm 0 004 jum to o cr not oll Handy GOT installation and Wiring of Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 5 29 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 2 Attaching the sheet a Remove the operation switch cover Insert a screwdriver into the clearance 1 or 3 between the operation switch cover and the main unit then slowly push the switch cover up Operation switch When the either side 1 or 3 comes off pull it in the Sliding direction shown on the left to remove it Tu n Sliding direction b Insert the sheet Insert it into the following position shown below of the Handy GOT Name sheet insertion slot C Attach the operation switch cover Let it be slightly warped Align the operation switch cover with a protrusion in Se ee the position 1 or shown in the figure in a above 1 then attach the operation switch cover while flexing it slightly a MITSUBISHI 5 30 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Hand
555. ss SET UP MODE on the menu The SET UP MODE screen appears Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears Set the following PLC TYPE When monitoring only the connected CPU QnA Q SERIES When monitoring other CPU via Q multiple PLC system Q MULTI SERIES CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 422 CPU PORT RS 232C DST STATION STATION 00 GOT STATION CPU direct connection RS 422 or CPU direct connection RS 232C a MITSUBISHI 11 16 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 o When the screen data is transferred to the GOT F900 the old data including the PLC type connection type 599 and station number are overwritten pm The PLC type selection item display varies depending on the OS version as follows cis SE PLC TYPE selection item display in GOT GOT F900 A SERIES 1 ELA A QnA SERIES QnA Q SERIES Q Multi SERIES 5 c D F940WGOT 1 00 or later 1 30 or later iic ZT O F940GOT Handy GOT 1 00 or 3 00 or HEN 4 10 or later 6 30 or later cis F930GOT 1 00 or later 2 00 or later 2 20 or later 4 30 or later F920GOT K SYS S00 or ater 1 00 orlater 5 Available 5 Connection setting availability Not available Not available Select QnA Q Available ot 9 SERIES cae 1 Note that the selection item display is changed from A QnA SERIES A SERIES QnA SERIES I e coeg 653
556. strap Sor Helps the user to hold the Handy GOT The length of the strap can be adjusted 2 Metal hook for wall hanging Offered to mount the Handy GOT on a wall for operation or accommodation S59 3 External cable option ces Offered to connects PLC power supply or operation switch to ports outlined in 3 mem The port 3 are provided for RS 422 or RS 232C communication depending on the product as shown in the table below 5 F940GOT SBD H E F940GOT SBD RH E 00 dm F940GOT LBD H E F940GOT LBD RH E 828 F943GOT SBD H E F943GOT SBD RH E RS 232C F943GOT LBD H E F943GOT LBD RH E gt lt 4 Personal computer port RS 232C 9 D Sub male Sud soa Offered to transfer the screen data created using the screen creation software or to use the two port interface function Sus 5 Battery FX2NC 32BL is built into back up data 209 coc Soo SOR TE 2 MITSUBISHI 57 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 5 3 Installation This section explains installation of the Handy GOT Understand the specifications sufficiently then install the Handy GOT 5 3 1 Holding When holding the Handy GOT for operation place your hand through the hand strap provided on its rear face You can adjust the length of the hand strap Hand strap 5 3 2 Hanging Wall When operating the Handy GOT while keeping it hung on the wall use
557. t 2 H 13 To cable BK 2 gt 3 F F9GT HCABor 6 lt gt 4 o F9GT HCAB1 BR 7 gt 5 be 29 Handy GOT side O 10 gt 7 25 pin D Sub male PL 12 gt DC24VG PK 3 gt DU e e C200H LK201 V 1 FGR 14 gt common wire the power Prepared by the user SB 15 gt Supply ihe BK W 16 gt SW2 operation R W 17 gt SW3 switches and GR W 19 gt SWA M RER BRM Ca ES switch 22 gt ES1 BL W 24 gt DC24V GY W 25 gt DC24V J HCAB1 LILIM F9GT HCAB LILIM RS 232C Drain gt FG class D grounding CQM1 side connection uc penses i COM port 5 To cable BK 2 8 7 4 FoGT HCABor 50 _ BR 7 lt 5 c A aN See pin D Male Handy GOT side PL 12 gt DC24VG 7 u PK 13 DC24VG 1 CPU duum gt Common Wire the power f Prepared by the user SB 15 gt SW1 supply the BK W 16 lt gt SW2 operation R W 17 gt SW3 switches and GR W 19 gt SWA oe BANEN ES switch Y W 22 gt ES1 BL W 24 gt DC24V GY W 25 gt DC24V J F9GT HCAB 1 LILIM F9GT HCAB LILIM Communication board RS 232C Drain FG grounding Communication unit SODHSeHnen gt 2 CS1 side To cable pur mE 26 FOGT HCABor qos 4 T F9GT HCAB 1 on 6 9 gt 5 CS1W SCB41 anay a SIOS PIE W pose y D Sub malo CS1W SC
558. t can be connected to the computer link unit GOT F900 GOT F900 mE CPU GOT F900 i Computer link unit 2 However GOT unit or a personal computer can be connected the RS 422 port of the ACPU while the computer link unit has one GOT unit installation and Wiring of F940GOT 9 4 2 Caution when displaying the Ascii code When a GOT F900 is connected to the computer link unit Ascii data created using GT Designer or DU WIN is displayed in reverse order as shown below lower character on the left upper character on the right installation and Wiring of Handy GOT GOT F900 GOT F900 mE p 4 See CPU E cas Computer link unit 555 Station No indicated AB BA AB Station No 16 o When connecting two or more set the station number on the GOT connected to the computer link 58 unit so that the characters displayed on all the GOT units look the same 55 Station number of computer link unit 16 Set Value on GOT F900 DST STATION 889 pom tuo ed o Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 9 15 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 9 5 Setting of Connected Equipment for GOT The A Series PLC connection parameters can
559. t ieu aiu Cay E acd luteo ct anu eue Lire 10 10 10 4 Caution on Use of MELSEC QnA Series 10 12 10 4 1 Caution when the GOT is connected to the serial communication unit 10 12 10 4 2 Caution when the GOT is connected to the computer link for the A Series PLC 10 12 10 5 Setting of Connected Equipment for amp 10 13 10 6 able o cidit potita e sut o t ieee 10 19 PO 10 23 11 Connection of MELSEC Q Series 11 1 i is Met 11 2 icem MM 11 3 11 2 1 Configuration for Direct Connection RS 232C sese 11 3 11 2 2 Configuration for Q Computer Link Connection 5 422 11 5 11 2 3 Configuration for Q Computer Link Connection 5 232 11 7 11 3 Setting in Q Serial Communication Unit 11 9 11 3 1 Communication Setting 11 9 Lt3 2 5ellidg DY GP PWV aesthetic ea laa Sa ad A cuu im eee ae 11 10 11 3 3 Used Connectors and Connector Covers eese 11 11 11 4 Setting in Q Multi PLC System Function
560. t is included with the del To learn how to install the main unit and wire the rel nane m ah power supp F94LIGOT LBD RH E To look at the external dimensions diagram of the main unit yy 250 OPERATION MANUAL of GOT 520 Describes how to operate system screens and how to create and operate user screens display covers all of the F930GOT F940GOT and Handy GOT Series e e GOT F900 SERIES OPERATION MANUAL No JY992D94701 Essential EE _ a To learn the display function of the GOT F900 Applicable GOT Eog To execute items in the HPP mode such as GOT F900 F920GOT BBD5 K E Ss PROGRAM LIST and MONITOR SERIES F930GOT BWD E execute DEVICE MONITOR and display alarms OPERATION F930GOT BBD K E MANUAL F94LIGOT SWD E 5 F94LIGOT LWD E lt 0 F940WGOT TWD E gu FO4LHIGOT SWD H E eut F94LIGOT LBD H E SET 50a S38 MITSUBISHI 1 3 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION OPERATION MANUAL of screen creation software Two types of screen creation software are offered The manual of the software you are using is required It is included with the software e GT Designer S WLID5C GOTR PACKE OPERATING MANUAL To install the software to the personal computer To start up the software To learn how to connect the personal computer to the GOT To learn the screen configuration of the software To learn the outline of diversified monitoring functions To learn
561. tch is taken into the PLC as a momentary type switch with N O contact EE Example When a switch is wired to of the PLC Operation or Eds operation switch OFF Xo EN ER por CYo O 89 X0 XE OFF EE When you would like to treat input of an operation switch as N C contact or an alternate type switch create a proper program in the PLC 54 589 ogo cN g mm 2 MITSUBISHI 5 27 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 3 Lighting of LEDs for confirming operation A green LED is provided for each of four operation switches SW1 to SW4 and one grip switch so that pressing of each switch can be confirmed Each LED is assigned to a bit device by the screen creation software When the value of a bit device is 1 the corresponding switch is lit When the value is 0 the corresponding switch is extinguished a Assignment of devices controlling the LEDs Device M100 Operation switch SW1 green lt Set this device using the screen creation software M101 Operation switch SW2 green The LEDs for the operation switches and grip switch can be allocated successively M102 Operation switch SW3 green M103 Operation switch SW4 green M104 Grip switch green lt Valid when the OS version is 6 00 or later b Setting in the screen creation software The head device for the LEDs of the operation switches should be set in the screen creation soft ware For the details refer to
562. tempted In the manual of the inverter check the allowable write range in operation mode Connection of Bar Code Reader Appendix From first In the program of the FX Series PLC passwords are registered and write is disabled product By selecting SELECT MODE OTHER MODE ENTRY CODE in the GOT release the passwords While the FX Series PLC was running with the EEPROM memory cassette the set value of the timer From first counter or the file register was attempted to be changed from the screen of the GOT F900 product Specify the set value of the timer or the counter indirectly using the data register D or run the PLC with the built in memory MITSUBISHI 23 13 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Appendix 23 MEMO a MITSUBISHI 23 14 HARDWARE MANUAL CONNECTION GOT F900 SERIES GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL Aa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG MARUNOUCHI TOKYO 100 8310 TELEX J24532 CABLE MELCO TOKYO HIMEJI WORKS 840 CHIYODA CHO HIMEJI JAPAN Effective JUNE 2002 JY992D94801B Specification are subject MEE to change without notice
563. ter available 2 F943 Handy GOT GOT F900 b RS 232C cable EE A HMI Adapter Handy GOT RS 2320 A pa B gt 300007 Es i i 6 1l i y Dedicated cable _ To power supply a SIMATIC S7 Series and operation CPU direct C switches connection ina FUNT Use the RS 232C m BE port on the rear ga 5 lt Ln To RS 232C epu power supply SIMATIC 57 300 Series and operation SIMATIC 57 400 Series switches Total extension distance 6m 19 8 or less PC PPI cable Dedicated cable a SIMATIC S7 Series CPU direct connection SIEMENS OOOOO00000000 SIMATIC 57 200 Series SIMATIC 57 200 Series A F9GT HCAB LILIM B Prepared by the user 9 pin D Sub C F9GT HCAB 1 LILIM connector of PC PPI cable a MITSUBISHI 20 4 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 Series PLC Manufactured by Siemens AG 20 SIMATIC 57 300 Series A F9GT HCAB OOM B Prepared by the user 9 pin D Sub F9GT HCAB1 O0M port of HMI adapter
564. tered in the PLC 3 If the PLC is equipped with EEPROM memory cassette memory board data cannot be changed when the write protect switch is turned ON data can be changed when the write protect switch is turned OFF and the PLC is in the STOP status Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 3 11 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 2 MELSEC A Q A mode Series including motion controller Setting range Device number GT Designer DU WIN representation X0 XOFFF X0 XOFFF Hexadecimal YO YOFFF YO YOFFF Device name Y c O Link relay Special internal relay M BO B1FFF BO B1FFF M9000 M9255 M9000 M9255 Contact TTO TT2047 TO T2047 Contact CTO CT1023 CO0 C1023 Decimal GOT internal bit register GB 2 GB132 1023 GB132 1023 Data register D 3 imer Counter Input X Y Internal relay M 1 M0 M8191 Mo M8191 Latch relay L LO L8191 LO L8191 Decimal Annunciator F FO F2047 FO F2047 Bit B device T C D0 D8191 D0 D8191 Special data register D D9000 D9255 D9000 D9255 Link register W W0 W1FFF W0 W1FFF imer T TNO TN2047 T0 T2047 TS0 TS2047 TO T2047 Word CNO CN1023 C0 C1023 Counter C device CS0 CS1023 C0 C1023 Decimal 3 File register R RO R81
565. terlink link Do direct connection QCPU direct connection multi CPU system CPU system SW5 P 5 13P Seca computer link multi CPU system GM direct connection FX positioning unit SW5 K 5 09K INV direct connection INV direct connection inverter connection pene purpose communication SYSMAC C by Omron EN NN A FLEX PC N by Fuji Electric Not applicable Other CP9200SH by Yasukawa Electric SWA F 2 40 companies FP by Matsushita Electric Works SW5 K 5 09K O wA 2 00 code reader aa reader SW1 H 2 20 of SWLID5C GOTR PACK indicates a number 2 The F930GOT is applicable in Version 2 30 and later a MITSUBISHI 3 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 direct connection direct connection SW1 E 2 00 A computer link link Mitsubishi Products in E SWLID5C GOTR PACKE FX PCS DU WIN E 3 Connected equipment Connected equipment abbreviation g Version Version aa direct connection SW2 A 2 30 QnAcomputerlink link E direct connection SW4 F 2 40 Q Qcomputerlink link Loo NM direct connection QCPU direct connection multi CPU system CPU system SW5 P 5 13P computer link multi CPU system GM direct connection FX positioning unit SW5 K 5 09K INV direct connection INV direct connection inverter connection purpose communication SYS
566. ters 525 When the work b is completed the contents of the name sheet base sheet the actual dimensions 100 using a copy machine When using a different OHP sheet use the following type Make sure that the selected OHP sheet can be used in a copy specification Recommended OHP sheet Material Polyester film Thickness 0 1mm 0 004 2 Attaching the sheet Insert it into the following position shown below of the F930GOT K installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Connection of Peripheral Equipment Front panel Rear panel o Function key COMO RS422 Connection of Two or More GOT Units rr Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 4 19 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of F920GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 4 8 3 Label pattern F930GOT K Copy this pattern to the OHP sheet offered as an accessory Insertion direction Insertion direction With switch 4 Without switch 4 frames frames d _ _ d _ _ _ _ _ _ Actual size a MITSUBISHI 4 20 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of F92
567. the GOT take into consideration the inner dimension shown below a PLC cable b Packing F920GOT K _109 4 29 metal fixture external shape 168 6 61 99 3 90 screw center E 35 5 1 40 90 3 54 9 K D ole Fe amp 3 SL d JE 5 8 o 5 0 20 or less 2 i 37 5 1 48 6 4 0 25 TZ X ry d E ERHI Oo N i yo o B j2 a S 89 J qz d o x 9 is oO 7 ET B S E 3 Ns i s 94 5 3 72 20 0 79 5 0 20 or less 2 8 154 6 06 e 164 6 46 screw center IL 168 6 61 D 174 6 85 metal fixture external shape D D o D 20 lomo eo o0 qz ES o 8 ST 1201923 Dimensions mm inches 4 10 a MITSUBISHI Installation and Wiring of FI2Z0GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 GOT F900 S
568. the GOT F900 and the personal computer e Causes The connected cable is not proper Or cable connection is not correct e Countermeasures Check the cable 11 28 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FX Series Positioning Unit FX 2N 10 20GM 12 12 Connection of FX Series Positioning Unit FX 2n 10 20GM c O MELSEC Q Series PLC This chapter explains connection of the GOT F900 Series display unit to some FX Series positioning units Connection Procedure Sof Q This section introduces the procedure to connect the GOT F900 to the FX Series positioning unit FE Ska 1 Preparation Wemmme Reference Svele You can learn the connection availability as well as the version of the 124 y GOT F900 OS and the screen creation software 89 5 S You can select the configuration between the GOT and the FX Series ci ystem Configuration ae 12 2 ome positioning unit and proper cables 2 Setting ugue M FX Positioning Unit When GMCPU connection is selected the GOT F900 is automatically set 9 9 A Selection to fixed values No setting is required in the FX Positioning unit 525 Q You can learn the restrictions in connecting the GOT to the FX Series 12 3 Cautions io positioning unit Cone tee Set the PLC type using the GOT or the screen creation software 12 4 Equipment for GOT 9 l 3 Others Cable Diagram Cable diagra
569. the RS 422 SEO port on the rear FoS face To power supply and oco operation switches F g 5 1 525 HE E To RS 422 525 power supply 2 cg and operation switches Total ion di 11 5m 37 9 or s 3 otal extension distance 5m 37 9 or less FX 1N 429 BD 5 Connection of two or more GOT units FX2N 422 BD Sp M oc JE ESI a FX Series PLC b Option c RS 422 cable e FXCPU direct connection 55 FXo FXos FXo 8 pin MINI DIN A F9GT HCAB OOM E B F9GT HCAB2 150 C F9GT HCAB3 150 D E FXCPU direct connection FX1S FX1N FXCPU direct connection D F9GT HCNB ons 8 pin MINI DIN FX2N 422 BD E FX 50DU CABO or 5ga FX 50DU CABO 1M En G F9GT HCAB1 OOM A F9GT HCAB OOM F FX 40DU CAB G F9GT HCAB1 OOM Make sure that the total cable extension distance A B A C or G is 11 5m 37 9 or less FXONC FXCPU direct connection 8 pin MINI DIN 1 FXCPU direct connection 25 pin D Sub Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Before attempting to connect the GOT units per b Option above 8 3 Cautions on Use of MELSEC F FX Series should be read and understood Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC a MITSUBISHI 8 3 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 8 8 2 2 Configuration for CPU Direct Connection RS 232C By attaching an option for RS 232C communication to
570. the SLC500 Series 2 6 Sx Setting the RS 232C channel 0 Parameters System Mode Driver DF1 Half Duplex Slave DF1 Half Duplex Slave Channel Configuration Set the parameters in shaded boxes Leave other parameters in default values oO Baud Rale 19200 bps 582 Q Duplicate Packet Delection Disabled Node Address 0 to 31 Align with the station number setting in the GOT o c gt 19 3 2 GOT F900 Transmission Specifications EN 1177 74 55 FE Parity bit bit Provided even Data Stop bit Stop bit bit 1 bit Control method method Not provided 59 9o The specifications such as the transmission speed are fixed on the GOT F900 side and cannot be E changed Sa Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 19 5 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley 19 19 3 3 Example of Setting Screen of RSLogix500 Software Channel Configuration General Chan 1 System Chan 0 System Chan D User Driver DFi Half Duplex Slave ede Address E decimal Baud 19200 Parity EVEN Stop Bits m Pratocal Control Control Line Handshak ine Pall Timeout 20 me pn Error Detectian BOS EOT Suppression W Duplicate Packet Detect Message Retriez E Pre Transmit Delay amp 1 mal 0 eet x w a
571. the detailed contents such as function of each device refer to the next page a Word data Address Memory inside GOT F900 Description specified by device name specified by screen creation software Lnd MEM r wwe Communication 2105H D8002 error code 2104H D8002 H 2103H D8001 L Accumulated 2102H D8001 H operating time of GOT unit 100 ms 2101H D8000 L 2100H D8000 H 1 D shown in this chapter indicates a virtual device inside the GOT F900 but does not indicate any data register of the PLC xwe S OS a MITSUBISHI 14 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Microcomputer 14 5 b Bit data aye TER Memory inside GOT F900 20 g m output forbid Sxe mop P Vecas 2201H M8015 M8014 M8013 M8012 M8011 M8010 M8009 M8008 oO 2200H M8007 M8006 M8005 M8004 M8003 M8002 M8001 M8000 TN O 1 M shown in this chapter indicates a virtual device inside the GOT F900 but does not indicate 682 any bit device of the PLC c Clock data storage addresses The data on the real time clock built in the GOT is stored in these addresses Each 16 bit data is stored in the order of upper side and lower side Te Address specified Memory inside GOT F900 device name Description dn by microcomputer specified by screen creation software Connection of SYSMACC Series PLC o
572. the metal fixture for wall hanging provided on the rear face of the Handy GOT Handy GOT Handy GOT RH model Metal hook for mounting on wall Metal hook for mounting on wall Wall face Flat head screw M3 0 12 x 6 Flat head screw M3 0 12 x 6 On the wall face the weight of the main unit approximately 0 79 kg 1 74 Ibs RH model 0 87 kg 1 91 Ibs and a load of approximately 1 3 kg 2 20 6 61 Ibs which varies depending on the communication cable length are applied While taking this into consideration attach a suitable metal fixture on the wall Aa MITSUBISHI 5 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 5 3 3 Flat Surface Mounting When using the Handy GOT on a flat surface such as a desk or shelf keep the Handy GOT parallel to the surface so that it does not drop and fix the communication cable to the desk Introduction Outline Specifications 1221 It is recommended to fix the cable jum to o cr cO 5 3 4 Installation of Strap for Drop Prevention RH model only A strap to help prevent accidental drops or for shoulder hand carry prepared by the user can be attached to the loops Handy GOT installation and Wiring of Dimension of the loop 5 0 2 14 0 55 y Dimensions mm inches Connection of Peripheral Equipment Strap prepared
573. ting 1 GOT F900 connection 5 GOT F900 can be connected to RS 232C or RS 422 port on the serial communication unit Sof Connection of two or more GOT units can be performed and 2 port interface function Program FE transfer and monitor using GX Developer is available Sx 2 Serial communication unit compatible with the Q multiple PLC system Version B or later a Setting in the screen creation software Sa Select MELSEC Q Multi in the GOT PLC Type dialog box 55 Specify RS 422 or RS 232C for Port CPU for Type and 0 for Station No in the Project Auxiliary SEE Setting dialog box DU WIN The setting is not available c LI b PLC numbers when appointing device SE o If PLC number 0 is specified monitoring of control PLC number 2 in the example below can be XE executed osa If one of the PLC numbers 1 through 4 is specified the unit with the corresponding PLC number can be monitored Serial communication unit Function version B or later sog 123 4 Each CPU can be monitored by ER f 8 28 specifying PLC number 0 4 cn 28 EB 26 2 S gt 5 MEME Set as control PLC for example E zga 3 Serial communication unit not compatible with the Q multiple PLC system Earlier than ME Version B SLA Version B or later is required for connecting the GOT F900 to the serial communication unit attached to the Q multiple PLC system Version B 4 Control PLC 58 Control
574. ting Click No Control line Confirm the next offline setting mame eez Control procedure Station number H Comms timeout i x 10ms Click the Clear button to clear the setting above hen programming software transfer the program to the communication boards click the Clear button and clear th special resistor D8120 in the PLC to O Click Clear and confirm the next offline setting 2 Online direct writing to D8120 of the FX Series PLC On the menu select PLC Serial setting D8120 The setting dialog box is displayed Protocol Data bits Cancel Stop bits Transfer speed bps Clear Terminater Control line None Hardware Click Clear Control mode Then 0 is written to the D8120 special data register Sum check Control procedure After changing the setting transfer the program and turn off the PLC power The parameters are written into the special data register when the PLC is turned on a MITSUBISHI 8 8 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 8 8 3 4 Restrictions in connecting two or more F920GOT K units to FX Series PLC E This section expla
575. tion switches lt NI LO 5 Use the RS 232C ES port on the rear To RS 232C face power supply and operation switches Total extension distance 6m 19 8 or less FP2SH 5 pin MINI DIN B Prepared by the user tool port 3 wire type F9GT HCAB 3M COM port may not be built in some models FP2SH FP2 CCU Prepared by the user COM port 9 pin D Sub C F9GT HCAB1 3M Applicable FP Series products in the column a are control units CPU units and computer communication units equipped with built in RS 232C interface Make sure that the total cable extension distance A B or C is 6m 19 8 or less a MITSUBISHI 18 4 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FP Series PLC Manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works 18 o 18 3 FP Selection 599 DN yy cog When connecting the control unit or the CPU unit the following setting should be executed using the Sus peripheral equipment for the FP Series FPWIN GR software When connecting the computer communication unit the following setting should be executed using the DIP switches 18 3 1 Communication Setting Specifications E 9oE This section explains the setting in the FP Series FE c o 1 Setting the transmission specifications Ska Set the transmission specifications as shown in the table below in the FPO Series control unit and the FP2SH Series CPU unit using the peripheral equipm
576. tion d Free from corrosive gas and much dusts atmosphere FEED In conformance with intermittent 10 57Hz 0 075mm 10 times in each to 5 E3502 Rud 0 075 aX Y and 2 Vibration vibration and IEC 57 150Hz 98m S directions 61131 2 With continuous 10 57Hz END 0 035mm for 80 min du Za MEL a MN resistance In conformance to JIS B3502 and IEC 61131 2 147 m s2 3 times in each of X Y and Z directions By noise simulator of 1 000 Vp p in noise voltage 1 us in noise width and 30 to 100 Hz in frequency 500V AC for 1 min between all power terminals and ground terminal Dn 5 or more by 500V DC megger between all power terminals and ground terminal resistance Grounding Class D grounding If grounding is impossible it can be omitted Equivalent to 1 651 6 7 Equivalent to IP65f 67 Equivalent to IP651 67 Equivalent to IP65f 6 7 structure NM Approx 50 000 hours or more working temperature 25 C NM Guarantee period is 1 year Cold cathode fluorescent tube backlight working temperature 25 Guarantee period is 1 year Life 50 000 hours 40 000 hours 50 000 hours 50 000 hours or more or more or more or more Backlight a MITSUBISHI 3 24 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 5 5 ON FOGOK dl dd E iles F920GOT BBD5 K E F94LIGOT SBD R H E F94LIGOT LBD R H E 5V DC 24V DC 10 15 service power supply of PLC
577. tion 15 2 5 Series PLC proper cables 3 F 2 Setting T 533 oEa Description Host Link Unit Communication TM 5 Setting The communication specifications between M the host link host and the GOT unit 50 Specifications oS Setting S gt S The contents and position of setting in each Examples in st link unit Host Link Units ina i o Setting in CS1 5zo Communication The communication specifications between Setting the serial communication unit and the GOT Specifications unit Setting The contents and position of setting in each Examples serial communication unit HO oc co Caution on Use of You can learn the restrictions in connecting the GOT to the SYSMAC C 155 T SYSMAC C Series PLC Series PLC FE oe ee Set the PLC type using the GOT or the screen creation software 15 6 Equipment for GOT yP 9 3 Others 59 Item name Description Reference 32 Cable Diagram Cable diagrams for SYSMAC C Series PLC GOT connection 0 Troubleshooting Description of errors and how to fix them 5 9 oon OJo SHO ges Eo ONA a MITSUBISHI 15 1 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Manufactured by Omron 15 15 1 15 1 1 System Condition When connecting the SYSMAC C Series PLC check the COM port designation the OS version of the GOT F900 and applicable versions of the screen creation software Com
578. tion mode was automatically changed over TzS then the device range was checked 225 This error occurs when the device range set on the head screen is beyond the range for the A Series The head screen is the screen No 1 in the GT 5 Designer and the screen No 0 in the DU WIN Countermeasures DSE Connect the PLC E 25 There is not data because the unit is new or the linis memory clear has been executed Cause 5 There is no screen data 2242 Countermeasures o gt Write the screen data using the screen creation 389 software le Earlier Earlier Earlier TO PLC MEMORY x Aet This error is not displayed than than than is displayed on the 1 10 6 10 410 640 GOT F900 screen qus CAN NOT WRITE cas Aus 1 10 O20 is displayed on the _ This error is not displayed alet GOT F900 screen CAN NOT USE THE 5 FUNCTION WHILE From From 540 PROTECTED is This error is not displayed first first displayed on the product product product product TE GOT F900 screen SEH PLC IS RUNNING From From is displayed on the This error is not displayed first first GOT F900 screen product product product product Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC a MITSUBISHI 10 25 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 2 Software Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC 10 Ci Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures In the personal computer connected to the GOT F900 sequence program
579. tion software CAN NOT WRITE TO ee ore Vere This error is not displayed rae pos po displayed on the GOT paye F900 screen 1 10 6 10 4 10 CAN NOT WRITE 4 10 is displayed on the This error is not displayed Or Or Or GOT F900 screen later later later CAN NOT USE THE FUNCTION WHILE PROTECTED is This error is not displayed displayed on the GOT product product product F900 screen PLC IS RUNNING is displayed on the This error is not displayed GOT F900 screen product product product a MITSUBISHI 19 20 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC Manufactured by Allen Bradley 19 2 Software 599 o IE Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures 20 g LI A SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC bar code reader or printer S20 is connected Causes The RS 232C connector to which the personal computer is 5 of connected is set to be used for another piece of equipment FE In the personal computer connected Countermeasures Em to the GOT F900 screen data cannot In the GOT F900 select by hand SELECT MODE OTHER ona be transferred MODE DATA TRANSFER Communication with the screen Or set a bar code reader to invalid and a printer to DON T creation software is disabled An USE a i i O l error message is displayed Something is wrong with the cable between the GOT F900 SOL and the personal computer eg 5 SEE Causes The wrong cable is used or the connect
580. to the GOT F900 is set to the dedicated MC protocol format 5 2 Setting the transmission specifications setting switches Set the transmission specifications setting switches of the computer link unit to realize the transmission specifications shown in the table below For the switch setting method refer to the manual of each computer link unit em Transmission Transmission speed 19 200 85 bit The setting is different from A computer link 7 bits Data Data Parva EE T bit Provided odd The setting is different from A computer link provided even LE The specifications such as the transmission speed are fixed on the GOT F900 side and cannot be changed 3 Setting the station number setting switches Match the switches to OH both in the GOT F900 and in the computer link unit MITSUBISHI 10 9 Introduction Outline Specifications installation installation and Wiring of and Wiring of Handy GOT F940GOT Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More GOT Units Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 529 oon DH eo oll o O20 Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION 10 3 2 Setting Examples 1 RS 422 connection a When the AJ71QC24 N R4 is connected nak 2820232 S25 oo 2 6600060666600066 8 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO F RM TUUS MORS 959
581. to the GOT through a computer link connection RS 422 or RS 232C or directly via RS 422 This section explains the cables and options required in such a system In CPU direct connection two or more GOT units can be connected Applicable model AnN CPU AnA CPU AnS CPU AnSJ CPU AnSH CPU A1SJH CPU A2C CPU A2CJ CPU The connector shape is 25 pin D 2 CPU Sub ACPU direct AnU CPU AnUS CPU A2USH CPU connection A1FX CPU A171SCPU S3 A171SHCPU The connector shape is 25 pin D A172SHCPU Sub A272UHCPU A1J71UC24 A1SJ71C24 R4 Computer link unit A1SJ71UC24 R4 The connector shape varies A computer link excluding the A1SJ71C24 R2 depending on the product F920GOT K A1SJ71UC24 R2 Refer to section 9 3 A1SCPUC24 R2 AJ71UC24 A2CCPUC24 Motion controller excluding the F920GOT K a MITSUBISHI 9 2 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 9 2 1 Configuration for Direct Connection RS 422 E Connect the GOT F900 to the programming port of the A Series PLC Program transfer and monitoring are available in the GOT F900 Series using the built in two port interface function through connection of a personal computer to the RS 232C port excluding the F920GOT K When using the GX Developer however pay attention to the GOT F900 OS version 1 F920GOT K F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT F940WGOT 2 GOT F900 a A Series PLC ACPU direct connection b RS 422 cable o
582. toring are disabled Phy RSHiCumH BONTUSE _ v omened equipment PLC generarpurpose equipment 7 froe enneren 7 Sereendatawanstermede _ 1 This function is valid only CPU direct connection in the Series This function is valid also in serial communication connection in the QnA Q Series When all communications should be valid set PRINTER to DON T USE However when the alarm history should be printed in real time at occurrence of alarms PRINTER should be set to USE Screen data transfer 21 4 2 Concurrent use of microcomputer and printer When the microcomputer and the printer are used at the same time the transmission specifications such as the communication speed the parity and the data length are shared Accordingly the transmission specifications should be equivalent between the microcomputer and the printer a MITSUBISHI 21 4 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Printer 21 5 21 5 Setting of Connected Equipment for GOT 5 o The printer be set using the GOT F900 Series or the screen creation software GT Designer and DU 5 WIN 1 GOT F900 Series 5 When the main menu screen change operation is disabled 22 z DOG a While pressing and holding the upper left corner of the screen The LANGUAGE screen appears turn the power Keep holding the upper left corner for about 25 seconds more Th
583. touch panel is disabled Aa MITSUBISHI 5 34 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 i ON Grip switch OFF f Touch switch ON operation OFF Oo To Loo gf Do Touch switch ON ON operation OFF operation OFF operation The ON OFF operation is disabled ON OFF operation timing When SWITCH OFF ACTION is set to TOUCH KEY OFF While the grip switch is ON the touch key ON operation is executed when the touch key turns ON 3 Grip switch OFF E o Touch switch ON operation OFF This is important Touch switch ON ON operation OFF operation OFF operation ON operation OFF operation ON OFF operation is disabled jum to o cr cO Important point The momentary touch key operation is not related to the grip switch ON OFF status When the touch key turns OFF from ON the control target bit device is set to OFF When SWITCH OFF ACTION is set to GRIP SWITCH OFF s o5 While the grip switch is ON the touch key ON operation is executed when the touch key turns SET ON Sus EGI Grip switch OFF 5 Touch switch ON 5 p operation OFF Sp This is important 32 Touch switch ON ON operation pe OFF operation OFF operation OA ul ON operation OFF operation The ON OFF operation is disabled Important point 5 The momentary touch key operation i
584. turn on the power Keep holding the upper left corner for about 25 seconds more Then press END at the upper right corner The SET UP MODE screen appears b Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears Set the following PLC TYPE FREQROL CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 422 DST STATION STATION 00 GOT STATION D When the main menu screen change operation is enabled a Press the upper left corner of the screen The position to be The SELECT MODE screen appears pressed can be changed in the GOT and the screen creation software Press OTHER MODE on the menu The OTHER MODE screen appears c Press SET UP MODE on the menu The SET UP MODE screen appears d Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears e Set the following PLC TYPE FREQROL CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 422 DST STATION STATION 00 GOT STATION D When the screen data is transferred to the GOT F900 the old data including the PLC type connection type and station number are overwritten a MITSUBISHI 13 26 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 2 GT Designer 599 Creation a Open GT Designer The Select Project SEH dialog box appears b Click the New button The GOT PLC Type box appears 9 o B25 GOT type FoaxGOTG20K240 ok Ess PLC type Cancel One Set the following
585. u select Common GOT PLC Type The GOT PLC Type dialog box appears SHO ooo MITSUBISHI 13 27 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of FREQROL S500 E500 A500 Inverter 13 3 DU WIN Creation a Open DU WIN b On the menu select File New The Project settings dialog box appears Terminal FAROS PLO System Cancel DU System Language mm E Character Set Japanese Set the following Terminal F940GOT LWD F940GOT SWD F930GOT BWD PLC System FREQROL Select Terminal in accordance with the LC display color Temna Model name black and white Handy GOT black and white 940 color F940GOT SWD Handy GOT color F930GOT K blue F930GOT BWD F930GOT blue In the case of d Set RS 422 of the GOT F900 The Setup Data dialog RS 422 On the menu select View Project System Settings Setup Data box appears connection Setup Data x Opening Screen Time sX E Backlight Off Time min 10 Cancel Connection Port R5422 v Type Y Buzzer PLG Station No On GOT Station No C Off When touch mout detected dase e Set the Peen Port RS 422 Type CPU DST Station No Station No 00 GOT Station No D Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows a Open DU WIN b On the menu select File Open The Open dialog box Select
586. ubl Check points and t OS version ontents of trouble eck points and countermeasures The display screen contains an error DISPLAY SCREEN e Causes IS NOT AVAILABLE i 6 00 4 00 s A device that does not exist in the connected PLC is NO is or or referenced on the screen No or one of the screen displayed on the GOT later later objects is placed outside the available screen area Countermeasures Check the devices used and placement of screen objects F900 screen There is not data because the unit is new or the memory clear has been executed Cause There is no screen data e Countermeasures Write the screen data using the screen creation software A device that does not exist in the SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC was referenced Example While an SLC500 is Earlier Earlier connected a device exists only in the MicroLogix is specified than than for numeric input 6 00 4 00 DATA IS NOT FOUND is displayed Cause on the GOT F900 On the head screen a nonexistent device in the connected screen SLC500 MicroLogix Series PLC is specified The head screen is the screen No 1 in the GT Designer and the screen No 0 in the DU WIN Countermeasures Check the devices used on the head screen There is not data because the unit is new or the memory clear has been executed 6 00 4 00 e Cause or or There is no screen data later later Countermeasures Write the screen data using the screen crea
587. uch a connection is not practical The Handy GOT can be connected as the final unit in a string of two or more Connection Configuration The bar code reader can be connected to the RS 232C port of the GOT F900 This section explains the cable and the option required for connection Configuration for Bar Code Reader Connection GOT F900 a Bar code reader F930GOT F940GOT b RS 232C cable Bar code reader E gt a gt LBS 3 To RS 232C pi G connector of GOT a Bar code reader b RS 232C cable Check the shape at end of cable of bar code reader used Prepared by the user a MITSUBISHI 22 2 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Bar Code Reader 22 22 3 Code Reader Communication Setting The GOT can be connected to a bar code reader which satisfies the transmission specifications and the communication format shown below m o O Printer 22 3 1 Transmission Specifications and Communication Format Set the transmission specifications and the communication format of the bar code reader as shown in So the table below For the setting method refer to the manual of the bar code reader 295 1 Transmission Specifications Sac Seve Appendix The transmission specifications and the commun
588. umerical value 32 bit F940WGOT Ver 1 40 or later GD12 Numerical value Ascii input F940GOT Ver 6 40 or later F930GOT Ver 4 40 or later Not to be used F930GOT K Ver 4 60 or later From first product GD100 to GD1023 F920GOT K Ver 1 00 or later From first product Handy GOT Ver 6 40 or later a MITSUBISHI 3 10 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 n 3 3 2 PLC by Mitsubishi gt 1 MELSEC F FX Series Setting range Device number Device name GT Designer DU WIN representation Input relay X X000 X377 X000 X377 cta Output relay x Y000 Y377 X000 X377 5 Special auxiliary relay M vie Sas t internal bit register GB 1 Decimal TO T255 TO T255 Timer T Word device c E Q o 16 bits CO0 C199 32 bits C200 C255 Data register D Including file register 2 00 07999 DO D7999 File register D D1000 D7999 D1000 D7999 data register D D8000 D8255 D8000 D8255 Counter C installation and Wiring of F940GOT installation and Wiring of Handy GOT GOT internal data register M GD100 GD1023 GD100 GD1023 n specifying word devices of a bar code reader C200 to C255 are not available 1 GB132 to GB255 and GD100 to GD127 in the F920GOT K 2 Note the following when changing data 1 Data cannot be changed if the PLC is equipped with an ERROM memory cassette 2 Data cannot be changed if an entry code is regis
589. unit confirm the specifications of the main INSTALLATION To learn the name of each part of the main unit MANUAL tisi t is included with the To learn how to install the main unit and wire the F920GOT BBD5 K E power supply To look at the external dimensions diagram of the main unit e F930GOT INSTALLATION MANUAL No JY992D95701 To learn the features of the main unit confirm the specifications of the main unit To learn the name of each part of the main unit TE NN To learn how to install the main unit and wire the F93EIGOT BWD E power supply To look at the external dimensions diagram of the main unit A INSTALLATION MANUAL e F930GOT BBD K E INSTALLATION MANUAL No JY997D02501 To learn the features of the main unit confirm the specifications of the main unit INSTALLATION To learn the name of each part of the unit MANUAL learn how to install the main unit and wire the F930GOT BBD K E power supply To look at the external dimensions diagram of the main unit VA a MITSUBISHI 1 2 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Introduction 1 e F940GOT INSTALLATION MANUAL No JY992D94201 E To learn the features of the main unit 3 confirm the specifications of the main unit E INSTALLATION To learn th
590. unit in a string of two or more GOTs ELLEN 2 Pp F930GOT K a MITSUBISHI 21 1 Connection of Connection of Bar Code Reader Appendix GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Printer 21 21 2 21 2 1 21 2 2 21 3 21 3 1 System Configuration The printer can be connected to the RS 232C port of the GOT F900 This section explains the cable required to connect the printer Configuration for Printer Connection Connect the GOT F900 to the printer GOT F900 a Printer F930GOT F940GOT F943GOT b RS 232C cable E ke Equipped with RS 232C I F a Printer b RS 232C cable 25 pin D Sub male Prepared by the user RS 232C port on printer side 9 pin D Sub male Prepared by the user Applicable port on GOT F900 The printer can be connected to a RS 232C port on the GOT F900 if it is not occupied with the setting for other equipment such as a PLC bar code reader or printer F940WGOT is equipped with the two RS 232C ports Either port is applicable for connecting a printer Printer Communication Setting When connecting the printer the transmission specifications and the communication format described below should be satisfied in the printer Transmission Specifications and Communication Format oet the transmission specifications and the communi
591. ures Create the screen Earlier Earlier than than 6 00 4 00 Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC DISPLAY SCREEN A nonexistent screen was tried to be displayed IS NOT AVAILABLE From NO is Cause first 6 00 or 4 00 or The screen No has not been created yet later later displayed on the e Countermeasures product GOT F900 screen Create the screen Connection of FLEX PC N Series PLC Connection of Machine Con troller Connection of FP Series PLC Connection of SLC500 Series PLC Connection of SIMATIC S7 Series PLC MITSUBISHI 11 25 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC 11 OS version Contents of trouble Check points and countermeasures EE aiu Coments Check points and countermeasures F940W F940 F930 F920 A device that does not exist in the Q Series PLC was referenced e Cause On the changeover destination screen excluding the head screen a nonexistent device in the connected Q Series PLC is specified e Countermeasures Check the devices used on the head screen When a PLC is not connected the GOT defaults to the A mode DISPLAY SCREEN Cause IS NOT AVAILABLE Check for the A or Q Series was executed the is displayed on the connection mode was automatically changed over GOT F900 screen then the device range was checked This error occurs when the device range set on the changeover destination screen exc
592. urns ON or OFF Example When Write device in System Information is set to D20 D24 b4 Grip switch ON which turns ON when the grip switch is pressed M8000 024 2 20 M24 Grip switch ON C Output to confirm the ON OFF status b In the case of screen creation software DU WIN When the grip switch turns ON or OFF the 8th control bit device turns ON or OFF Example When Bit Device head device number in Interface Devices is set to MO M7 Grip switch ON which turns ON when the grip switch is pressed M7 Grip switch I C gt Output to confirm the ON OFF status When the OS version is earlier than 6 00 While the grip switch is valid communication with the PLC is enabled a MITSUBISHI 5 36 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 5 12 Handling of grip switch RH model only z The grip switch is provided on the side of the Handy GOT and wired to the input of the PLC or other E device The ON OFF status of the grip switch can be monitored by the PLC The grip switch is a 3 positioned operation switch The ON OFF status is shown below o Grip switch seen from the side E Released Pressed halfway X Pressed all the way eo Grip switch NE EN switch o rS P 8 LZ OFF ON OFF 5 12 1 Wiring of Grip Switch The grip switch is a twin contact type which performs 3 positioned
593. ut Zzo o 45 soa co g Su OSH 580 cN g TE OSH MITSUBISHI 5 31 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 Handy GOT RH model 1 Connection example Handy GOT RH model Handy GOT RH model 1s T Hh DN ES1 95 20 22 21 23 20 I J e COM COM XO X1 As control signal to turn on off power of external equipment As input signal of PLC When turning on and off the power of external equipment make sure that the load is 24V DC 1 A contact specifications or less Make sure to construct the emergency stop circuit outside the PLC 2 Pin assignment External cable F9GT RHCAB LIM In the wire colors of the F9GT HCAB1 OM the indication Color 1 Color 2 indicates striped two colors 3 Used switch model name AH165 VRO02 manufactured by Fuji Electric Specifications 2b contact 1 A 24V DC individual wiring 4 Caution on use The emergency stop switch is the contact type If the Handy GOT is attached and removed using a connector when it is removed from the machine the switches turn OFF from ON This is the status in which the emergency stop switch is pressed This fact should be taken into consideration in the design a MITSUBISHI 5 32 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5
594. ut signal of PLC When turn on and off the control signal of external equipment make sure that the load is 24V DC 1A contact specification or less jum to o cr Te 2 Pin assignment External cable F9GT RHCAB LIM Signal name KSW C Handy GOT installation and Wiring of SUR swa Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC MITSUBISHI 5 39 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of Handy GOT 5 5 14 Setting of Connected Equipment for GOT The setting in the screen creation software is required to turn on and off the LED of the operation switches and the grip switch from connected equipment This section describes the setting method 1 GOT F900 Series When the main menu screen change operation is disabled Operation Display screen name a While pressing and holding the upper left corner of the screen The LANGUAGE screen appears turn on the power Keep holding the upper left corner for about The SET UP MODE screen appears 25 seconds more Then press END at the upper right corner b Press GRIP SWITCH The GRIP SWITCH screen appears lt When the OS version is 6 00 or later gt Press HANDY GOT SETTING Set the following USE valid or
595. uter 14 z In the case of SW4D5C GOTR PACKE earlier than version EO 8 perform the setting in the GOT F900 833 Set the connection in CONNECTION in the GOT F900 For the setting method refer to 1 GOT F900 Series on the previous page e Set the following 5 8 Port RS 422 926 RS 232C 2 CPU One DST Station No Station No 00 01 to 31 when two or more GOTs are connected GOT Station No D 5 Change method Change the connection type of the already created data as follows The Select Project 29 H a Open GT Designer dialog box appears TF b Click the New button SE c Open read the screen data to be changed d On the menu select Common GOT PLC Type The GOT PLC Type dialog box appears 2 QE Set the transmission specifications consecutively 823 oetting the transmission specifications for microcomputer connection Display sereen name e oro Creation a On the menu select Common Auxiliary Setting Project The Project Auxiliary og o Serial Port Settings dialog box S gt 5 appears Basic Serial Port Setup Language Menu Key Handy GOT settings OK ie Speed 92006 S zo Handshakine DSR DTR v Parity Even gt 9 Data Bit bts D Stop Bit 1 bits b Set the transmission specifications set in the microcomputer E Set Speed Parity Data Bit and Stop Bit 2 oc Handsha
596. uter communication unit FP2 CCU 1 GOT F900 Series When the main menu screen change operation is disabled Operation Display screen name a While pressing and holding the upper left corner of the screen The LANGUAGE screen appears turn on the power Keep holding the upper left corner for about 25 seconds more Then press END at the upper right corner The SET UP MODE screen appears b Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears Set the following PLC TYPE MEW FP SERIES CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 232C DST STATION STATION 00 to 31 00 is treated as 01 GOT STATION pe When the main menu screen change operation is enabled a Press the upper left corner of the screen The position to be The SELECT MODE screen appears pressed can be changed in the GOT and the screen creation software Press OTHER MODE on the menu The OTHER MODE screen appears c Press SET UP MODE on the menu The SET UP MODE screen appears d Press PLC TYPE The PLC TYPE screen appears e Set the following PLC TYPE MEW FP SERIES CONNECTION CPU PORT RS 232C DST STATION STATION 00 to 31 00 is treated as 01 GOT STATION D When the screen data is transferred to the GOT F900 the old data including the PLC type connection type and station number are overwritten MITSUBISHI 18 9 Connection of MELSEC Q Series PLC Connection of FX Series Positioning Co
597. uter connection F943 Handy GOT RS 232C Not provided Not provided One channel is built in one RS 232C channel for personal computer connection 7 3 3 Connection Concept in Each Model Name 1 F940WGOT When the RS 422 COMO port is used to connect the PLC connect the next GOT F900 to the RS 232C either COM1 or COMO2 port When the RS 232C COM1 port is used to connect the PLC connect the next GOT F900 to the RS 422 COMO RS 232C COM2 T SF PLC connection side To next GOT S59 e RS 232C COM1 RS 422 COMO RS 232C COM1 RS 232C COM2 2 F930GOT F930GOT K F940GOT When the RS 422 COMO port is used to connect the PLC connect the next GOT F900 to the RS 232C COM 1 port When the RS 232C COM 1 port is used to connect the PLC connect the next GOT F900 to the RS 422 COMO RS 422 COMO RS 232C either COM1 or COM2 COM oO installation and Wiring of Handy GOT OG 5 232 _____ 842 es AS2ZCCON ___ 9 20 3 Handy GOT o Only one Handy GOT unit can be connected at the end of two or more GOT units After the Handy 5 aa GOT no GOT F900 can be connected 955 c PLC connection side To next GOT Remaks 520 RS 422 COMO In the case of F940 Handy GOT RS 232C COMO D In the case of F943 Handy GOT M e 1 The RS 232C port for the Handy type GOT is provided inside the rear cover As a result environmental Sd protect
598. vailable to connect a PLC Use this port to connect a printer or bar code reader Another GOT can be connected here only when the PLC is connected to 3 RS 232C port The two port interface function is available A personal computer which has started up the PLC software can be connected here e When connecting a PLC through a computer link unit use the port 1 2 or In the F9240WGOT when connecting a personal computer and transferring the screen data use the port 4 e F940WGOT has two serial ports besides one port for PLC In connecting two or more GOT units however only one of the ports can be used to configure a system The other port can be used for a printer or a personal computer Not possible PLC GOT A system 1 X GOT B GOT C system 2 Possible PLC GOT A GOT B 4GOT O e Only one PLC can be connected to one GOT Not connectable PLC GOT PLC a MITSUBISHI 4 6 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring of F920GOT K F930GOT K F940 W GOT 4 4 3 Processing of Panel Face 3 This section explains the panel cut dimension in processing the panel face on which the GOT F900 is to E be installed 4 3 1 Panel Cut Dimension On the panel face drill an installation hole of the dimension shown be
599. w No special function 5 7 block can be used 285 DLE Example EB F920GOT K F920GOT K A or or FX 10DM FX 10DM 5 010101610 9 5 288 ge SSS ee FX2n 422 BD FX2N PLC Special function block cor Seo NE pos E MRS Zee DEBE GEN MISUBSH 2252252 ee 32 ut bob b ooob b LL EET T 17 ZN COCR SHALE LES aw Sa s S at B 0000 NO Suo 502 LE Capacity of 5V g 5V current consumption power supply Usable capacity Not to be 220mA 60mA 290mA gt For special function block counted Do not count F920GOT K connected to A special function block 540 the inbuilt programming of the PLC cannot be used because ou when calculating 5V current 5V power capacity usable capacity is less E consumption of PLC main unit than 10mA gus 54 EGO SOn 2 OSH MITSUBISHI 8 9 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC F FX Series PLC 8 8 4 Setting of Connected Equipment for GOT The FX Series PLC connection parameters can be set using the GOT F900 Series or the screen creation software GT Designer and DU WIN 1 GOT F900 Series When the main menu screen change operation is disabled Operation Display screen name
600. w 1 Le 26 gt DSW 2 27 lt gt DSW 2 28 gt KSW C 29 lt gt KSW 1 30 lt gt KSW 2 36 DC24V F9GT RHCAB LILIM Q Series REOS Drain ya Class D connection grounding 3 F9GT RHCAB 2 i gt gt 1 o 5 1 13 3 i 5 1 5 E 2 O d 6 C6 14 25 4 lt gt 2 37 pin D Sub female 10 MINI DIN male F9GT RHCAB5 150 18 gt DC24VG The d 19 gt DC24VG e diagram on the right gt shows the wiring of the 12 b E d RS 422 signals For 13 wiring of the operation 14 lt gt SW2 switches and the power 15 SW3 supply refer to chapter 5 16 gt SWA A _ ire the power 20 lt 4 gt ES1 1 supply the 21 4 gt ES1 1 operation 22 lt gt ES1 2 switches and 23 lt gt ES1 2 the emergency 24 lt DSW 1 25 lt DSw We 26 DSW 2 27 DSW 2 28 KSW C 29 lt gt KSW 1 30 lt KSW 2 36 lt DC24V s MITSUBISHI 5 49 Introduction Outline Specifications jum to o cr cO G 0 installation and Wiring of Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Installation and Wiring o
601. w is not practical for the Handy GOT Printer Connection of printer RS 232C When a printer is connected to the GOT F900 the alarms and contents of screens as hard copy can be printed RS 232C Printer GOT F900 1 Excluding the F920GOT K and Handy Bar code reader Connection of bar code reader When bar code reader is connected to the GOT F900 bar codes can be read SA RS 232C Bar code reader GOT F900 1 1 Excluding the F920GOT K and Handy GOT a MITSUBISHI 2 9 c 2 5 he D d Specifications installation and Wiring of F940GOT installation and Wiring of Handy GOT Connection of Peripheral Equipment Connection of Two or More Connection of MELSEC F FX GOT Units Series PLC Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC Connection of MELSEC QnA Series PLC GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Outline 2 MEMO a MITSUBISHI 2 10 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 3 3 1 3 1 1 Specifications This chapter describes the specifications in accordance with the version and the electrical hardware specifications related to connection of the GOT F900 In this chapter you can confirm the specifications of equipment to be connected or devices to be monitored by the software OS Version and Correspondence to Connected Equipment of GOT F900 Some equipment PLC manufactured by Mitsubishi or other companies microcomputer board bar code reader printer et
602. witch RH model only 5 39 5 14 Setting of Connected Equipment for 5 40 5 15 Connection Diagram of Handy GOT Operation Switches and Power Supply 5 44 5 16 Cable Specification 5 46 6 Connection of Peripheral Equipment Screen data transfer Sequence program transfer and monitor 6 1 6t Quiline or GOnneellOllucsusise 6 1 6 2 Gonnection to Personal COMPUTER ot TEE Dei um Finn mei 6 3 6 2 Screen Dala d Eo ee a eee etuer Ea o eee Du D EUN 6 3 6 2 2 Sequence Program Transfer two port interface function built 6 4 6 2 3 Cable CONNECCION Proce dU G bt n lect eiie o eoe b s ave ids 6 4 6 3 Connection of F943 Handy GOT for PLC and Personal Computer 6 7 6 3 1 When Screen Data is transferred through PLC Connector 6 7 6 3 2 Changeover of Connection between PLC and Personal Computer 6 8 6 4 Caution on Use of Peripheral 6 9 6 4 1 Caution when connecting the GOT and PLC via RS 232C port Only in case of the F920GOT K F930GOT F930GOT K or F940GOT 6 9 6 4 2 Caution when transferring screen data to the 92060
603. written Sx 8 RD Read enabled WR Write enabled RD WR Read and write enabled c nemi uon Contents of data 50 5 code to HFF Operation command operation b7 bO 00000010 In the case of example 1 5 The examples below show cases the A500 Series 2 Example 1 H02 During forward rotation Example 2 H80 Stop due to alarm 838 Inverter b0 Inverter running RUN status monitor b1 Forward rotation STF RD b2 Reverse rotation STR b3 Up to frequency SU Overload OL Momentary stop IPF Frequency detection FU Alarm occurrence As to the signals marked with the output signal varies depending on the setting of Pr 190 to Pr 195 output terminal Connection of SYSMAC C Series PLC Control status function selection Ezo S HOO to HFF Operation command operation 525 615 b7 SHS In the case of example 1 The examples below show cases in the A500 Series 5 Example 1 2 Forward rotation 5 Example 2 H80 Output stop 00 Current input selection AU FE b1 Forward rotation STF 8S2 Reverse rotation STR Low speed RL Middle speed RM 59 High speed RH Second acceleration deceleration RT 92 Output stop MRS EO As to the s
604. y Handy GOT settings Stop 1 bits Y To Speed Hand shaking etc set proper contents within the transmission specifications range for communication with the printer After setting click the OK button For the available transmission specifications refer to section 21 3 a MITSUBISHI 21 5 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of Printer 21 21 6 3 DU WIN Creation a Open DU WIN b Read the file of the screen data for which printer connection is to be set For selection of c Set the transmission specifications The DU Printer Settings RS 232C RS Select View Project System Settings DU Printer on the dialog box appears 422 refer to e in menu Creation above sees Cancel XON XOFF r Databits DTR DSR C8 Handshake L Par ity None Stopbits Even e 1 Odd Set properly Speed Handshake etc within the transmission specifications range for communication with the printer After setting click the OK button For the available transmission specifications refer to section 21 3 Cable Diagram This section explains a cable diagrams to connect the GOT F900 and the printer equipped with the RS 232C interface 1 Cable for the GOT and the printer C 2 Female type Male type The connector figure shows the engagement face Model name Application Connection diagram Application RS 232C conn
605. y GOT 5 m 5 10 Wiring and Handling of Emergency Stop Switch ES1 3 The emergency stop switch is assigned as shown below E Handy GOT Excluding RH model 1 Connection example Handy GOT Handy GOT ES1 S1 21 22 21 O E V X As control signal to turn on off 2 8 power of external equipment As input signal of PLC When turning on and off the power of external equipment make sure that the load is 24V DC 1 A contact specifications or less Make sure to construct the emergency stop circuit outside the PLC jum o o cr cO G 0 2 Pin assignment Signal name 5 20 F9GT HCAB OM F9GT HCAB1 OM F9GT HCNB ZEO In the wire colors of the F9GT HCAB1 OM the indication Color 1 Color 2 indicates striped two colors E OGe Q 3 Used switch model name eee AH165 VRO01 manufactured by Fuji Electric Specifications contact 1 A 24V DC individual wiring 2 4 Caution use 255 co The emergency stop switch is the contact type 826 If the Handy GOT is attached and removed using a connector when it is removed from the machine the switches turn OFF from ON This is the status in which the emergency stop switch is pressed This fact should be taken into consideration in the design ex SLO Sos eo S
606. ype selection item display varies depending on the OS version as follows PLC TYPE selection item display in GOT GOT F900 A SERES F940WGOT 1 00 or later s NN Handy GOT 1 00 or later 3 00 or later 4 10 or later OS F930GOT 1 00 or later 2 00 or later 2 20 or later Connection setting availability Available Available Available Select SERIES 1 Note that the selection item display is changed from A QnA SERIRES to A SERIES and QnA SERIES version a MITSUBISHI 9 16 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Connection of MELSEC A Series PLC 9 2 GT Designer E Display screen name Creation a Open the GT Designer The Select Project dialog box appears b Click the New button The GOT PLC Type GOT type Fe4 GOTG20x240 OK type 5 6 Set the following GOT type F9240WGOT 480 x 234 WIDE F94 GOT 320 x 240 5 9 240 80 F920GOT 128 x 64 y PLC type MELSEC A Selection of GOT type F940WGOT 480x234 lt WIDE gt F940WGOT installation and Wiring of F940GOT F940GOT F94 GOT 320x240 Handy GOT F930GOT K F93 GOT 240x80 F930GOT 5 ok F920GOT 128x64 F920GOT K SEQ a gt Click OK 8E csr d Set CPU direct connection RS 422 link connection RS 422 RS The Project Auxiliary S 232C of the GOT F900 Settings dialog box This setting i
607. ys R9000 to R910F and special data registers DT9000 to DT9255 are included also However access is disabled in special data registers from D90000 in the FP Series 5 Access is enabled only in the bank 6 Bit device number 3 digit decimal number Bit position 1 digit hexadecimal number a MITSUBISHI 3 18 GOT F900 SERIES CONNECTION Specifications 3 6 SLC500 MicroLogix Series manufactured by Allen Bradley a SLC500 Series i GT Designer earlier than Version 5 05F and DU WIN earlier than Version 2 50 Setting range Device Device name number GT Designer DU WIN representation Bit B B0030000 B003255F B0030000 B003255F B0100000 B255255F B0100000 B255255F Timer T TT0040000 TT0042550 timing bit TT0100000 TT2552550 Timer T TN0040000 TN0042550 0040000 70042550 completion bit TN0100000 TN2552550 0100000 72552550 M Counter C CU0050000 CU0052550 up counter CU0100000 CU2552550 Decimal Counter C CD0050000 CD0052550 down counter CD0100000 CD2552550 Counter C CN0050000 CN0052550 C0050000 C0052550 completion bit CN0100000 CN2552550 C0100000 C2552550 GOT internal bit register GB GB132 GB1023 S Timer T 1 TP004000 TP004255 set value TP010000 TP255255 T004000 T004255 Timer 1 TA004000 TA004255 1010000 1255255 current value TA010000 TA255255 Counter T CP005000 CP005255 d e set value CP010000 CP255255 C004000 C005255 Decimal Counter T CA005000 CA005255 C010000 C2552

"user manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;user manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"user manual"